JP2022045391A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can realize an interesting game.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that: the game machine can be controlled to an AT state in which a push order navigation can be executed; a navigation image can be displayed on a performance display device in a game in which the push order navigation is executed; a navigation voice can be output from a speaker; and in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, when an electric power interruption occurs after the navigation image is displayed on the performance display device and the navigation voice is output from the speaker, the navigation image on the performance display device can be displayed again after an electric power restoration, whilst the navigation voice is not output from the speaker.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 173

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reel) in multiple rows and stopping the rotating cylinders by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special gaming state in which the player is in a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the normal game state). ) Is generally the type that shifts to. Here, in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine, when an image or the like for directing to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel. When operating the reel stop device, etc., it is configured to predict and enjoy the result of the game while comparing the design displayed on the reel with the image for production displayed on the display. There are many things that are done. In addition, many of them are configured so that if some abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur in which the progress of the gaming is stopped. Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit ( The mainstream is a pachinko machine that can shift to a special game) state and open the large prize opening provided on the game board to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of probability fluctuation gaming states that increase the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and symbol fluctuations for notifying the lottery results in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous to the player according to these gaming states.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-17932 JP-A-2019-84241

It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
With a speaker that can output sound,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound regarding the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be output from the speaker. ,
It is a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed from the speaker. In the game in which is output, when the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the information display means may display information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, while the speaker relates to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a predetermined sound is not output.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus appearance rate in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of an unrecoverable error process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reel in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub-side power supply cutoff process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an effect-related determination process at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution enablement determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during AT on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the revival possibility effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the process during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor processing at the time of starting lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the BB, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the third cylinder stop on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 56 is an image diagram showing an effect mode by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 57 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 1 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 2 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 3 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 60 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 4 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 61 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 5 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 6 by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 63 is an image diagram showing a light emitting mode of a button image and a light emitting mode of a sub-input button SB in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is an image showing a display mode of a button image and a light emission mode of a sub-input button SB in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 65 is an image diagram showing the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device S40 when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 66 is an image diagram showing an effect display device S40 when a game progress status display is performed and a button operation promotion effect is performed in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 67A is an image diagram showing an image erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 67B is an image diagram showing the first embodiment. FIG. 67 (C) is an image diagram showing an image erasing time when the start lever D50 is operated in the spinning machine according to the embodiment, and FIG. 67 (C) is a push in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the erasing time of a forward navigation. FIG. 68 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB is operated during one game in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 68 (B) is an image diagram showing the first embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the sub-input button SB is operated when 1 is not in the game in the spinning machine of the above-mentioned. FIG. 69A is an image diagram showing a case where the bet button D220 is operated during one game in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 69B is an image diagram showing the first embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the bet button D220 is operated when 1 game is not in the said spinning machine. FIG. 70 (A) is an image diagram showing a light emitting mode of the LED of the sub-input button SB when the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 70B shows the LED light emission of the sub-input button SB when the sub-input button SB can be operated when the sub-input button SB is not in the game of the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the aspect. FIG. 71 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 71 (B) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the sub-input button SB3 can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine which concerns on 1 Embodiment. 72 (A) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated during one game in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 72 (B) is an image diagram showing a case where the sub-input button SB can be operated. It is an image diagram which shows the case where the sub-input button SB3 can be operated during one game in the rotating body type gaming machine which concerns on 1 Embodiment. FIG. 73 is an image diagram showing an effect mode of the first continuous effect and a display mode of a continuous image in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 74 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 75 is an image diagram showing another end timing of the continuous effect BGM in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram showing an effect mode of the second continuous effect in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram showing a display priority of a continuous image and a game progress display in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram showing a display priority of a continuous image and a game progress display in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram showing a display mode of a continuous image after the third stop operation in the spinning machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram showing the display timing of the telop display and the continuous image displayed at the time of the third stop operation in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 81 (A) is an image diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment when a continuous image is displayed after displaying a moving image, and FIG. 81 (B) is an image diagram of the first embodiment. It is an image diagram in the case where the continuous image is displayed after the pre-change image is displayed in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to FIG. 81 (C), and FIG. 81 (C) shows the pushing order in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows the display area of a navigation system and the display area of an image before a change. FIG. 82 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 84 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a main gaming state controlled by a main control board in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 86 is a list of reel arrangements in the revolving gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a part of the condition device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 90 is an image diagram for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment. FIG. 91 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 92 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 93 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 94 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 95 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 96 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 97 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 98 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 99 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 100 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 101 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 102 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 103 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 105 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 106 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 107 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 108 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 109 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the push slash combination 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 111 is an image diagram illustrating an instruction mode of the push order display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is an image diagram for explaining an effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement list and a push slash combination 2 in the spinning machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram for explaining an effect mode of the effect display device S40 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the push slash combination 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining a push slash role as a rare role in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is an image diagram illustrating an effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the number of positions for each set value of the slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 119 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 120 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 121 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 122 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 123 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 124 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 125 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 126 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a list of symbol combinations in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 130 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 131 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 132 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 133 is a list of condition devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 136 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 137 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is internal lottery data in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining a push order slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating reel stop control for each state at the time of winning the push order slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating reel stop control for each state at the time of winning a slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 147 is a subroutine showing a reel stop control process called and executed in the process of step S4000 of FIG. 146. FIG. 148 is a subroutine showing an AT lottery execution process called and executed in step S4200 of FIG. 146. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing an mode of push order notification by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a lottery regarding AT for each state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 151 is a table relating to a lottery inside the Type 1 BB-C and in the normal section in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the sixth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 152 is a table relating to the number of lottery slots in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram of an effect related to the operation of the sub-input button SB in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an RT transition in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an AT first hit lottery according to an operating conditional device in the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a lottery for determining the number of ceiling games at the time of transition to an advantageous section according to the operating condition device in the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a lottery for adding the number of AT games according to the operating conditional device in the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the ball ejection rate inside the type 1 BB1 to the inside of the type 1 BB6 in the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing the ball ejection rates of settings 1 to 6 in the spinning machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the number of winnings of the first-class BB1 to the first-class BB6 according to the set value in the winning combination lottery of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a diagram relating to control at the time of winning a slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a diagram relating to control at the time of winning a slash combination for each state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a table relating to the configuration of the slash combination in the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a transition diagram of a state related to AT in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 165 is an image diagram showing a navigation mode when a slash combination is won in the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a table relating to the JAC combination and the winning-H1 winning right reel in the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a table relating to the configuration of the slash combination in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 168 is an image diagram relating to the effect performed in the game in which the slash combination is won in the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 169 is an image diagram relating to a stage change effect in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 170 is a timing chart relating to the display period of the UI image in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 171 is a table relating to the volume output from the speaker S20 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 172 is a table relating to the volume output from the speaker S20 in the spinning machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a navigation image display image FIG. 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a navigation image display image FIG. 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a navigation image display image FIG. 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a navigation image display image FIG. 4 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a navigation image display image FIG. 5 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a navigation image display image FIG. 6 of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a navigation image display image FIG. 7 of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a navigation image display image FIG. 8 of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a navigation image display image FIG. 9 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, which may also be called a lottery) for determining some kind of game content in a spinning-type game machine, and is a random number in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, re-game roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power cutoff" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the game machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power failure. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied to physically hold information (for example, "1" for conduction. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the industry and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is given, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored. It is "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured to supply backup power to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (a so-called big hit game, during bonus operation, type 1 BB operation, type 1 BB operation, type 2 BB). During operation, it may be referred to as when Type 2 BB is operating), internal medium state (sometimes referred to as Type 1 BB internal, Type 2 BB internal, etc.) carrying over the winning of the bonus, replay role Re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the re-game combination is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the winning rate is a predetermined value, and the reel for winning the winning combination. Stop order, AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop position (sometimes referred to as stop operation mode), ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and AT state are combined, and processing related to AT. Examples include an advantageous section in which the above can be executed and a normal section in which the processing related to AT is not executed. Further, even in the normal gaming state, it may be referred to as an RT state or an AT state (“AT game state”, “AT state”, “notification state”, or simply “AT”. A state that is not a state may be referred to as a "non-AT gaming state", a "non-AT state", a "non-notifying state", or simply a "non-AT"), or a stop operation in the AT state. Notifying the mode may be referred to as "execution of AT", "execution of navigation", "execution of instruction", "execution of push order navigation", "execution of notification game", etc. .. Transition to the ART in-probability state The lottery probability is different, high-probability normal game state, low-probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as a lottery state). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state is referred to as "normal gaming state". The state related to ART may be collectively referred to as a "normal gaming state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is a type (or condition device number) of a conditional device that has been won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as "the number of games that can be executed for notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of inputs) obtained based on the winning of small wins (mainly the push order bell role) and the number of pushes The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". The "predetermined gaming state" may be any one or a combination of all the states such as the gaming state and the notification state described in this example. Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It operates when the game is played and can be continued until the result of the game is not more than 12 times, and is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "first-class special bonus continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special bonus, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Type 2 special bonus" is a bonus that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning combination, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. In that case, the operation is terminated, and it may be called CB (challenge bonus). The "type 2 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the meantime, and it may be called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is a specific symbol. It operates when the combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination is won, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. Further, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is performed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the nearest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position in which the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that the following embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. , Not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification for one embodiment is a modification from another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of one modification and the other modification is also described.

<<< First Embodiment >>>
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the spinning machine P according to the first embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the first embodiment will be described. The revolving gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet or a base), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of the game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for enabling the withdrawal of the inserted game medium are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The spinning machine according to the first embodiment is equipped with a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes toward the person. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary for starting one game) are lit. It is configured as. Specifically, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In that case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and if there are two game medals bet, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 : Lights up, 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are 3 game medals bet, 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, 2-bet lamp D212: lights up, and 3-bet lamp D213: lights up (re-game). This is not the case in the next game where is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of LEDs and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game when the re-game is stopped and displayed is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 is lit (may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game status display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the game machine as medals held by the player. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a push order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed as stopped is different. Is generally configured so that the profit margin (number of payouts, RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different}, which is the reel that is most advantageous to the player in the game. It is configured to notify the stop order (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 is displayed in the push order navigation display (which may also be referred to as a first information display unit) in the push order display device D270 (which may also be referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). In addition, the push order display device D270 notifies the player of the advantageous operation mode (stop operation mode) of the stop button by "executing the push order navigation", "executing the AT", and "navigating". A state relating to an AT that is advantageous to the player (in this example, it is guaranteed) when the game is advanced according to "execute", "execute an instruction", and "execute a notification game"). It is configured to be able to display the number of games that can stay in the push order navigation state, which may also be referred to as a notification game (details will be described later). It should be noted that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the player may be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games whose state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when it is an "advantageous section" and turned off when it is not an "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the revolving gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional revolving gaming machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal, which is an advantageous special gaming state for the player (so-called big hit game, bonus game). , 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "waiting section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, but one of the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections", for example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section display YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player depending on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to convey to the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition to the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress the significant increase in gambling due to the "game state" such as the AT state or the ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example is that the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained among the small winning combination that constitutes the "pushing order combination (combination with pushing order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are 7 cards, 3 cards, and 1 small game as the small game that constitutes the push order game, the 7 cards with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination that can acquire 7 or 1 cards depending on the push order and a push order role that can acquire 3 cards depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can acquire 3 cards is referred to here. "Not applicable to push order navigation)" or "Winning any of BB, RB, MB" and "Arbitrary end condition (Not winning (AT) in 40G 1 set loop lottery, fixed 32G" The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification that does not have a push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination with a different number of payouts depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the first embodiment, as the small winning combination constituting the push order combination, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card combination and the small combination including the small combination corresponding to the single-card combination are configured, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "Execution of push order navigation once that can acquire many small roles" means to notify the push order in which 11 medals can be obtained (11 medals can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine under the condition that medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Fig.), Door substrate D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , Upper panel D130, lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the fluoroscopic region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. The unit D150 is provided, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door board D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the proper medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB2 attached to the above-mentioned operation console D190 are an operation on the menu screen described later and a button continuous striking effect on the sub-control board S side (continuous striking operation of the sub-input button SB). It is a member used for the progress of a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the "AT in progress") or the like (for example, an effect relating to whether or not a bonus has been won). The front door DU of the spinning machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240, and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the first embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. ing. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is lit (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided in each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player indicates that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on the presence / absence (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. Since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the effective stop button D40 is configured to light in the lighting color corresponding to the effective stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be different from each other. Further, by differentiating the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting / blinking or low-speed blinking / high-speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present. For example, all reels are rotating, and the pressing order of "left → middle → right" is correct (the correct answer). When the push order bell that is the maximum number of payouts is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is turned on in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is supported. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized via the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that the outer periphery of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if it were lit by the light transmitted through the reel. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored, which controls various effects performed by using the above. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. The button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions such as on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, on the front surface of the power supply board E (which may also be referred to as a power supply unit E), a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is also provided. The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating drum type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 near the door board D, and a game medal ejection port D240 is provided below the insertion reception sensor D10s. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the user. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that this function does not conform. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been awarded are configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when the game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standards and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s And, it is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to the medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses) and is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine an error (as a result, the blocker D100 may be turned off) even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer. ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This throw-in sensor (first throw-in sensor D20s and second throw-in sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when the game medal exit H60 is normally passed, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = on → 1st payout Since the sensor state transition is sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified to configure it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. The effective line for determining the frame and winning is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time. , The symbol combination that becomes the re-game role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be retracted (the position within 4 frames to the stop position where the prize is won), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to pull in. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to one line, left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small combination with a large number of payouts when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to pull in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the first embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames (0th to 19th), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, the "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including the "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased / decreased / changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as aligning in a horizontal straight line). Further, in the first embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a type 1 BB combination (a so-called type 1 special accessory continuous operation device, which may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is combined. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and finished with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" and Type 1 BB-C (RB-B is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 132 cards) "White Seven / White Seven"・ It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In the first embodiment, when the first type BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), during the execution of the BB, 1 in all the games in the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to one lottery table (the table to be referred to at the time of the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). It is a method, and may be referred to as an all-JACIN type below). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the table referred to at the time of the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replays 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and the number 18 is displayed. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding re-game 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are 21st to 27th. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations corresponding to the 39th to 56th "winning 08" to "winning 11" are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to the first embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the first embodiment, the re-game combination is provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that the reels to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the reels. Here, in the first embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus" which is the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is configured so that multiple types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together in the third column from the right, "condition device (name)". Is shown in the item. Specifically, for example, in the "re-game-A" which is a conditional device corresponding to the winning number 1, "re-game" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. The "conditional device (name)" may be simply referred to as a conditional device. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device such as "winning 01" in which a game medal is paid out may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB is started by displaying a stop such as "Type 1 BB-A" may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. If the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" and the "1st class BB". Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And, regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11 or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In that case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, the role of the "conditional device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless of the RT state, it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination that does not shift to the RT state is stopped and displayed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination whose state does not change is stopped and displayed, but the right reel M53 is pushed backward (the reels are stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51). The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are stopped at the operation timing located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower row from the player's point of view. There is. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to the replay in which the replay combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to the re-game 01, the re-game 02, or the re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-game 01 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", the reels are stopped in the order of pushing "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning-A1" (winning number 7), if you stop in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answer in the order of pressing), the maximum number of winnings is 11 The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" from which one game medal can be obtained will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one piece is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different, that is, the push order is not navigated to the states related to AT such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is awarded. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that allows three bells to be aligned on the effective line, and the details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. It is a condition device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing so. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the first embodiment, the winning number not including the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number including the bonus (BB combination) is the winning number (19) including the type 1 BB-A. ) Bonus winning information 1, Bonus winning information of winning number (20-23) including 1st class BB-B 2, Bonus winning information of winning number (24-27) including 1st class BB-C It is set to 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the first embodiment, the winning number (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that does not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination is 0 for the winning / re-gaming winning information. The winning numbers including the re-game combination or the small combination are distributed from 1 to 18 winning / re-game winning information for each condition device. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination has been won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, it is configured so that the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be executed, and in such a configuration, the payout group number may be changed. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the first embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing the probability (also called the winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning numbers is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the first embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "replaying combination" (all the replaying combination) is totaled. The appearance rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, a fall effect (for example, an effect display device S40) which is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen. (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. It can enhance the sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ") may be configured to be different from the output sound effect due to the stop display, and by such a configuration, the player recognizes that" replay 04 "is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT where push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and may be referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT gaming state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, the "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (the re-game role that can notify that the AT addition lottery has been won when the stop is displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying role will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the first embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. There is. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the first embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role is invalid, and only the winning of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "missing" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are played. If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB winning combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small winning combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation where the player is "RT2" and has won (carried over) the 1st class BB-A, he / she won the "1st class BB-B + winning-C" winning number 21. In that case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the replaying combination of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying combination in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have changed the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the first embodiment, while the BB is in operation, the winning number 13 "common bell", the winning number 17 "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)", and the winning number 18 "BB medium strong rare small" It is configured so that three small roles with "role (V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" "Or" BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured to execute an AT addition lottery (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the small winning combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 steps in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is. Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won to relate to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as a lottery related to AT).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small winning combination, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, it is expected. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Total number of placements (small combination appearance rate) (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 pieces) in small combination (11-card combination) / total number of all placements (65536) ) ”. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of medals paid out per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, the expected increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game of "RT1" is relatively large. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or a case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is smaller than 1 under the condition that the push order navigation does not occur, and the medal. Will decrease. In the first embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1. The expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation in "RT0" or "RT2" may be smaller than 1. When the symbol combination that serves as the re-game is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected medal increase / decrease value in the first embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease is calculated. The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

Further, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 1.223790487, and when there is push order navigation, the RT state of "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small winning combination and the re-gaming combination are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" in which BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of medal increase / decrease) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, when push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and if the push order navigation occurs and if it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), the bonus can be arranged intentionally in the game. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses. Specifically, it is preferable to design so that the probability of losing in "RT2" is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (winning-A1 to winning-I) won in "RT2". It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-gaming role so that it is designed so as to be. It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much). In "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small wins is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, the appearance rate of the first type BB-A is assigned to 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of the first type BB-C is assigned to 160, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the appearance rate of the first type BB-B, 160 is assigned to the setting 1, 180 is assigned to the setting 2, 200 is assigned to the setting 3, and the setting 4 is assigned. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the first type BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C may be referred to as a setting difference BB and a setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference and a bonus with a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rate of all of the 1st type BB-A, the 1st type BB-B and the 1st type BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state (in "RT0" and "RT1"). The appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the set value. The total appearance rate as the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine P according to the first embodiment will be described. First, in the revolving gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is centered, and the sub control board S, the door board D, the revolving board K, the power supply board E, and the relay board IN. , Setting key switch M20, setting / reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100 (also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected to the main control chip C so that data can be exchanged with each other by a bus. It is installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) toward the sub-control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted on the sub-control board M as well as the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced. In the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example, the player covers nine ranges of the left reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, middle reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, and right reel upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the reel back light S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player indicates that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30. It is configured to be feasible to perform the backlight effect (sometimes referred to as the backlight effect) suggested in.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 {not shown, but described above. The input number display lamp D210, start lamp D180, replay lamp D290, inputtable lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 are credit number display device D200, advantageous section. A collection of display devices such as the display YH}, a door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing a set value, a game medal (or a game medal) judged to be incompatible after being inserted. , Other foreign matter) is connected to the blocker D100 or the like for refunding to the discharge port D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The reel M50 can be stopped at a determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the reel sensor K20. There is. Further, in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine of the first embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the rotating cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation to put out. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

The various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which electric power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the figure, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and the various boards (door board D, cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process (to change the setting) described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error, etc. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state relating to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the first embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine (which is not normally used), and prevents processing related to an unused subroutine, which is not normally executed, from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the spinning machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type gaming machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data), and the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games-> bonus ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous bonus ratio-> cumulative bonus ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts / total payouts when the RB is operating", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of the program process). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure it so that only the information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like). To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed by 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information may be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 all lights up "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, which is not possible for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt time processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the conditional device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). The process of setting the data) in the RAM is also included. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (step 1420 in FIG. 21, step 1429 in FIG. 22, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Set the state related to AT determined in step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3 in FIG. 23, and step 1444-4). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416 and step 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is determined by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set /. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying combination), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the stored number (credit) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the input number display lamp D210). The value is displayed (shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the transition to step 1221 is performed on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and the setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executing a process to send a command indicating that the command is to be terminated. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is on (in the first embodiment, the medal is thrown in). It has two throwing sensors for detecting, and when the first throwing sensor D20s or the second throwing sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). If it is determined to be Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (to detect the payout of medals in the first embodiment). When the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation in which it was determined that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are "AT in progress state", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state". (2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, it is a state to be executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal middle game". (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired), and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state where it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". As will be described later, when the game newly shifts to the "high probability state", it is configured not to shift to the "low probability state" until the number of high-securing obstacle games has elapsed. (5) "AT in progress state" "" Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuous lottery described later is won, the predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" continues (6) "Specialization precursor state". Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where no prize has been won. (9) "Standby BB internal middle game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .. (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". It is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) The "state for effect of resurrection" is a state related to the AT that shifts when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the "resurrection possibility production state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If you win, you will be in a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and shifts to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to determine the stop position of the pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53, and the stop order. It is determined whether or not there is a request as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels. In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reeling game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even when the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing incorrect answers), the reel stop control (hereinafter referred to as "reel stop control") is also referred to. Or, it may be simply referred to as "stop control".) It is configured so that a combination of 11 symbols to be paid out wins a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win a prize, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (a prize determined by an internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, it is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag to be turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area is updated with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off) and steps. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with a acquired random number, etc. are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It is possible to generate winning / replay winning information from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small winning combination are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replaying combination are won in duplicate, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number of placements for comparison with the acquired random numbers, and is previously stored in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 which are push order replaying roles is the same. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which is the push order bell role, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 3610 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game as an additional AT game (winning number that can add the remaining AT game number in the "AT in progress state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, re-game-C, and winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB ("" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the remaining AT game number in the specialized middle addition role (in the "additional specialization state"), the payout group number related to the game can be added. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table, and determines the number of AT added games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT addition games is also referred to as executing an AT addition lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in the first embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example,). If the additional winning combination is won in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), it is based on the payout group number related to the game. As for the number of AT additional games, "0" to "300" are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT addition lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of placements (600) x number of AT addition games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as the number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number (600) x It can be calculated as follows: number of AT additional games (30) + number of placements (124) × number of AT additional games (50)} / total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (game).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (game).

In the first embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values of are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but as in the first embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number. When the same processing as the AT addition lottery is executed in 8 and 8, the processing related to any AT addition lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is also executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the replay-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by the reverse push instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct to align the white sevens), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a forward push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by the replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black seven to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the first embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands. It is configured so that the sub-control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but it is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games are added. When the command (for example, the command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub control board S side and the sub control board S side receives the command, the push order is performed on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the navigation. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and a predetermined condition thereafter (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is performed. In a game in which (game-B or C) has been won), an effect of instructing a push order in which 7 lines can be aligned on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the effect (displayed by the effect display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, "+ 30G" may be displayed). In this example, the effect display device S40 also displays the number of remaining AT games. It is configured to be able to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In addition, the replay- In a game in which B is a winning game and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games, which is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. The difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game. Therefore, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). ) May be selected and executed. In addition, as the information that the sub control board S side judges that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number is used. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In the first embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal middle game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state" and the AT counter shows the number of AT games. The initial value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", it shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and then does not shift to the "AT in progress state". It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination in which there is no setting difference BB combination). It is determined whether or not it is species BB-C). In the first embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 19, 24) of the BB without setting difference and the winning numbers (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) in which the small winning combination overlaps with the BB without setting difference. All of them are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1410. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the first embodiment, when the AT-related states are different, the AT winning rate (whether or not the AT can be won) related to the AT lottery is different, but the AT-related states are the same. Even if the set value is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (when the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = after that. Transition to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a small state device in which the condition device related to the game can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 1 for the high securement failure counter KHc (the final game with high securement failure, and the 10th game since the "high probability state" is reached. ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the first embodiment, when the state related to AT is "high probability state", the game section is "advantageous section", and when the game section is "advantageous section", it is pushed. It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the forward navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. , Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation is not executed more than once, the "high-probability state" is configured so that it does not end. Yes). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit margin of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426 or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. As described above, in the first embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is performed, 10 games, which are high-securing obstacle games, are set in the high-securing obstacle counter KHc, and the counter value becomes 0. It is configured not to shift to the "low probability state" until. It should be noted that such a lottery method is only an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), The lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the lapse of the 10 games. It should be noted that the AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the first embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 games or more, the watermelon When the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is acquired with a 1/2 chance of winning B and the transition to the "specialization precursor state" is possible, while the state related to AT is the "AT in progress state". In the case where the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 3 games or less, a lottery (special) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if the watermelon B is won. It is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state" without executing the conversion state transition lottery). The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After executing a predetermined number of games, it may be configured so that it can (or shift to) a “specialization precursor state” or an “additional specialization state”. In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can acquire the transition right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "specialization precursor state", and shifts to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is reached). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirements. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the first embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to the initial value of 50 games again. That is, if the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the final AT game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of AT (the first game newly in the "AT in progress" state or the AT counter M60). The first game) may be configured to perform a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it has already been determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the "AT in progress state". , The effect during AT can be different depending on whether the continuous lottery is won or not. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (song is played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (during the execution of AT), or to execute an effect in which it is definite that the continuous lottery has been won.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state for effecting resurrection. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is revived (in the next game by winning in the "recoverable / non-recoverable state"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the "AT in progress state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the first embodiment, the resurrection combination includes any one of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus combination (only the BB combination without setting difference and not the BB combination with setting difference). When the condition device related to the game becomes a revival role, it is said that the revival lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transitionable condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and shifts to step 1445. Even if No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the first embodiment, even if the game is the final AT game and the continuous lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" and the "revival / non-recoverable production state" is used. If the revival lottery can be won, it is configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for effect of revival possibility" is an "advantageous section", the lottery related to AT in the "AT in progress state" (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. It is configured, and the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, "specialization". If the number of precursor games is exhausted in "precursor state", it is decided to be "additional specialization state"). Even if No in step 1445 or 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M guarantees a high secured fault counter value command (in this example, it is a command to the sub side, and the current high secured fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command related to the remaining number of games that has been played) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB internal middle game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In the first embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination (BB combination with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is performed. If you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "high probability state" on the other hand, you will win the AT transition lottery (then "AT in progress state"). However, it is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery, and the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous section", are "high probability state A" and "high probability state A". When configured to have "probability state B", if the condition device A is won in "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition is in "high probability state B". If the device A is won, the AT transition lottery may be won at 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the AT transition state is changed to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See Figure 34 for an image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the first embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed as "= 1" on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display "= 1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered to be a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order)} for the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the first embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is suitable, for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. Multiple winning / replay winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination that serves as a replaying role is set as one production group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number can be used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. In a game that does not notify the operation information, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example,). It is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In the first embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall re-game combination is included → the fall re-game combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 piece combination / 11 piece combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, and so on. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is sent to the sub-control board S side. While it is configured to be able to transmit (a number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), when the game section is a "normal section", the sub-control board It is configured so that the effect group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-gaming winning information related to the game, including the winning / re-gaming winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit the effect group number concealing the information related to the push order to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information related to the winning role (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then send it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to the minimum time (sometimes referred to as the minimum game time, and in this example, 4.1. Set seconds) and start. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initially has 1500, which is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (the decrement counter, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Even if No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the first embodiment, when the state related to the AT that the push order navigation can display is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state", In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that the transition (transition) can be performed in the order of "state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , "Α" in a specific game after the game (a game that meets certain conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) without notifying the game. You may notify). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of AT remaining games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to encourage whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball ejection group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the first embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning of the BB. It is configured to be satisfied at the start and end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (See the figure), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the first embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and RT is satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. The state will shift. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Further, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A, B, C operates. ) And the RT state shifts to "RT2". In addition, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C operates), it shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C". Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, when the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1" which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the game 04, the replay 04 will be stopped and displayed, and the game will shift from "RT1" to "RT0". In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the correct push order that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The conditions for shifting to the AT state are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) the revival lottery is won. Satisfy if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, and "AT in progress" The number of games in which subtraction is started after shifting to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to step 1756. Even if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning the BB, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of "AT in progress" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game (the state related to AT is "AT in progress") after the end of BB. (The subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization" There are 10 AT-related states, "State", "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", and "Resurrection possibility production state". State will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery in which the watermelon B is won in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As for the game section, the states related to the three ATs of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "AT in progress". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" have become "advantageous sections". Set. That is, even if the state related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" is transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. It is set to "normal section". In addition, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the "AT in progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, when the AT counter M60 is in the "AT in progress state" and the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the "revival possibility effect state" is set. If you win the revival lottery in the "Resurrection possibility production state", you can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "resurrection possibility production state", the process shifts to the "low probability state" and the "advantageous section" changes to the "normal section".

When the BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the BB without setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" To move to. Also, when the "AT in progress state" is won with no setting difference BB (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C), the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, " It shifts to "AT in progress". In addition, when the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A or 1st class BB-C) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB without setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Also shifts to "AT in progress" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB with a setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with a setting difference becomes independent. If it is the winning number (winning number 20) related to the BB role, it will be in a "low probability state" after the end of BB (because there is a setting difference and the BB role will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with setting difference is rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB (because the rare role will be the trigger to win the revival lottery).

In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the case of the "advantageous section" and the "high probability state", the BB with the setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to AT that shifts after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is after the end of the winning BB during AT ("AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state") (setting difference). (Both with BB and BB without setting difference) shifts to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and is in non-AT ( After the end of the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, there is a setting difference in winning during non-AT (“high probability state”), and after the end of BB, the state shifts to the “high probability state”.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the first embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT is concerned. By winning the lottery, it may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" and to shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. If you win the AT lottery, the AT lottery will be executed, and if you do not win the AT lottery, you will move to the "Gase precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games have passed, you will be in the "low probability state" or "high probability state". It may be configured to migrate. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", the BB If you win the "BB + Cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + Cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT. In the case where the lottery is won and the period until the symbol combinations of BB are complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is off, so the AT lottery is won. It is possible to instigate the player whether or not it is. Further, if the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Executes an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "addition specialization state" (for example, wins the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state". It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). Further, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in the first embodiment, the game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively low profit for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section", which is a highly profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialization precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, and for example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to the above, etc.) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, these information will be cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , While clearing information related to "number of stored sheets", etc., depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be maintained. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to delete the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and the information on how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed. Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes a "low probability state", and (2) if the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "low probability state" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current AT-related state is "advantageous BB state", the AT-related state will be "normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the AT-related state of is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the AT-related state is "low probability" in the next game. It is configured to be "state" (because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous section" is completed and set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is limited to the timing of the first embodiment. Instead, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when the game medal related to the game in which the "advantageous section" ends and becomes the "normal section" is inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an "advantageous section", and shifts to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it was decided that the CPUC100 of the main control board M was newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it was decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section display YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the first embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is used. The lighting timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the new "advantageous section" game (newly). If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). You may.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the first embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking an input port for a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power cutoff detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on for multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to drive control of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details thereof. Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of AT remaining games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has all the error flags turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of sheets error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, and the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, the door switch flag, etc. are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example,). (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the relevant command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of the error changes, such as the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set. Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (sending the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Command related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (only during advantageous section)), command related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels are stopped and when the next game is started), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels stop and the next game start), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to result in an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, the error number is set in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the first embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and shifts to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, after the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116), the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (corresponds to the process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. In the case of Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally set to the constant speed by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is a constant speed. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one turn) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state. However, when the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process require interrupt processing for each combination of the exciting phase of the stepping motor and the combination of the exciting phases. The number of executions of may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop process according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the first embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is set by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reels have been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, among Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stop state" is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel drive state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is done, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed”. It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". The combination of exciting phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When the reel rotation abnormality does not occur). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "number of interrupt executions" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupts the interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" It is configured to execute interrupt processing once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed by the combination of the exciting phases of 1 is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates the state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slips corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the reel sensor indexes the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. If it is not detected, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the reel acceleration process. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel reacceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel re-acceleration process. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated) to occur. Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the reel rotation can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the spinning machine according to this example is executing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. Will be.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process execution ends → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel reacceleration processing is executed. It is configured to be able to operate as described above.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), and the reel is accelerated due to step-out. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even when the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration processing execution ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible. Further, as described above, even if a reel acceleration process occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed and an interrupt similar to the case where the reel acceleration process does not occur is interrupted. When the reel acceleration processing is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing is terminated. With this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel reacceleration process. can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power off processing is executed during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power off → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed (not yet) Execution of reel acceleration processing for processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execution of unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive The state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power cutoff process is executed during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index within that time, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the power cutoff process is executed during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state, and then the reel is reeled within a predetermined time. When the sensor detects the index, it is configured not to execute the reel reacceleration process, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game by the reel reacceleration process (the stop button cannot be operated). Can be made less likely to occur. The power off processing may be referred to as a power off processing.

<< Action after operating the final stop button >>
In the spinning machine according to this example, the final reel (a reel that rotates to the end and is also referred to as a third reel) is stopped after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), and the winning combination is obtained. Although it is configured so that the payout of the game medal can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payout of the game medal may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power cut occurs → The third reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed → Power recovery → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to operate as described above by displaying the stop display → executing the process related to the payout of the game medal. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the common bell mentioned above, in which a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button if won is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The reel wins a prize from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning combination, is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal processing) → The processing related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out, and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the process related to the payout of the game medal, and as a result, the first reel rotation failure occurs. 3 It is applicable when the reel corresponding to the stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position (it can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure illustrated below). In the above action 2, the action in the game in which the winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (if the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions, the same action is obtained. May be good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. Regardless, it may be a winning combination that can be won (for example, a common bell), or a winning combination that may or may not be won depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, etc.). It may be a cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed as the effect (sometimes referred to as the back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is changed to the predetermined game state. Even if the reel rotation failure occurs in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to a reel rotation failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a reel rotation failure (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs and the stable supply of power to the game machine stops → No. Operate the 3rd stop button as the 3 reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is a game Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the perspective of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the perspective of the player, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is the case when it is determined that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally. The symbol combination to be played was not stopped and displayed, but when the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → → Execution of processing related to payout of game medals It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of detecting the power failure, the timing of stopping the supply of power to the gaming machine due to the power failure, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing of returning the power are , Not limited to the above timing, the timing to detect the power outage and the power to the gaming machine when the power outage occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medal. It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply of the above is stopped, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. Is applicable to all cases where the machine cannot be stopped at the planned stop position (the same applies to the action including the power failure illustrated below). With this configuration, the power was cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the 3rd stop button was accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination could not be stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. Even in this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal is paid out after the power is restored (the hopper is driven to pay out the game medal). It is possible to execute not only the payout from the reeling port but also the display (the number of credits) of the credit number display device), and it is configured so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be done. The timing at which the power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power supply is cut off. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, the reel backlight (reel backlight) is displayed when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed without the reel rotation failure or power failure occurring. When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is configured to be executed as the effect (sometimes referred to as the back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is changed to the predetermined game state. Even when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform the effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is at the scheduled stop position due to the power failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped due to the power failure, or it may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position (the same applies to other actions). Is). In this example, "the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" and "the stable supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but the power supply. The electric power supplied to the gaming machine may be less than the electric power supplied when the gaming machine is operating due to the occurrence of a disconnection, or the supply of electric power to the gaming machine may be cut off.

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Reel wins from the player's point of view Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example. , In the game that was lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol corresponding to the loss is handled by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the combination as a stop is normally executed) → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to the loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replaying role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but in the determination process of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined (stopped) that the symbol combination is normal. This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which a loss occurs, the player does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss on the reel. , When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Power return → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game that has been lost as a result of the winning combination lottery, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 5 is not limited to the loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replaying role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but in the determination process of step 1269. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Bonus role to the reel from the player's point of view For example, the symbol combination corresponding to (BB combination) is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bonus role has not been won and the game has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the player's stop button is displayed. When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the bonus winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus will be given even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, it can be a fair gaming machine, and it can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of the bonus (type of the bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the player has determined that. As you can see, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally performed. (When executed)-> Power recovery-> The bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game is played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured so that the medal bonus does not start, and it can be a fair gaming machine and can be a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the playing field. The above action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, if the power cutoff does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable if the rotation failure and the power cutoff do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off in the game in which the bonus role is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of the bonus (type of the bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus role is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, Moreover, it may be configured to act as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel rotation failure occurs. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. It is also significant for players who can be configured to start a bonus and also perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, where the reel rotation failure prevents the bonus from starting in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. Become.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB role) is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view However, in the determination process of step 1269, it may be configured so that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Even so, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that runs at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to a power outage in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, the player can proceed with the game without discomfort. Become.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Re-playing role on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed as stopped, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game that has been lost, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the loss is dealt with by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination is normally executed) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up newly. It may be configured. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a replaying role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. The automatic bet is not made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop is normally executed, the RT state will not be changed (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the replay combination will be changed is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, in a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the action is such that the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew.
The automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) because the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) bet in the game in which the re-game combination is won is displayed as stopped by the re-game combination. It is supposed to bet automatically even if there is no operation of or inserting a game medal from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the re-game combination is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( It is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the reel based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed. However, when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → stop display of the re-game combination The corresponding automatic bet is not made and the reeling lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed by the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine and at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the reeling combination is stopped and displayed. However, automatic betting is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop is normally executed, the RT state will not be changed (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the replay combination will be changed is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 11 is not limited to the loss, and is applied, for example, in a game in which the replaying combination is not won, when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. It is supplemented that you can do it. That is, if the power cutoff does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable if the rotation failure and the power cutoff do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the action is such that the re-game lamp D290 does not light up anew. On the other hand, if the power is not cut off in the game in which the replaying role is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the reeling combination is performed, and the reeling lamp D290 is set. It may be configured to act as described above when it is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel has a replaying combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, automatic betting is performed and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the situation of the game by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 12, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3rd reel is the player Cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from → Power recovery → Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination may be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may be newly lit to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel is replayed from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is used. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, automatic betting is performed and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the situation of the game by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 13, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button is accepted Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts as described above. It may be configured to work. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. The RT state will shift even if is not displayed as stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. The RT transition role is a role of shifting to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying the symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and the RT transition role depending on the staying RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination, but in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be the RT transition combination, and in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button is accepted Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs Then, the supply of power to the game machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the power failure is detected. → Execute power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is not stopped, but step 1269 In the judgment process of, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored).
It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if the combination is not displayed as stopped, the RT state will shift. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel is the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) to → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state does not transition. It may be configured to act like this. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when the push order navigation for preventing the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Power off → Stops the supply of power to the game machine → Operates the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off → Executes power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is stopped and displayed. In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state does not shift. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the point of view of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel from the viewpoint of the person (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the 1st reel and the 2nd reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is stopped first. And stopped at the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop at the stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position of this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Action 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Reel → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the first The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel) → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmed tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols constituting the bonus symbol. If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Bonus confirmation Tempai sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and a bonus symbol is configured. The combination of symbols did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbol will be tempted. If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will experience reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what you are doing. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → Power cut occurs and power supply to the game machine stops → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel has an abnormality due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be done. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second stop. Even if the bonus symbol did not stop, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power failure, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption due to the output from the speaker. can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power outage → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view Symbol combination is stopped display → Bonus confirmation Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker The tempai sound may be output so as to act as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the point of view of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel from the viewpoint of the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmed tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Will not output the bonus confirmation tempai sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power outage, the player will have an abnormality in the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, the power cutoff process occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The constituent symbol combinations did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol tempais if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example. If it was planned, a bonus confirmed tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player will be abnormal on the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected as soon as possible. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (execution of the first stop operation). It may be the case that the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination may be configured to stop display → the max bet lamp lights up as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed again. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game occurs when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to do so. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined re-game combination → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. In addition, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is not effective because the max bet lamp does not light, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, the power off-time process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 25>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends, The freeze at the end of the bonus may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the 3rd stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In such a case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player can promptly indicate that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power off → Executes power off processing → Moves the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen by the player ( (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied as a game of Lille. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, the power cutoff process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if there is no such thing, the player will be notified that the bonus has ended normally by executing the freeze at the end of the bonus as well as the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration processing in the spinning machine according to this example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure of the reel occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of reel acceleration processing until the rotation failure of the reel occurs when the rotation failure of the reel occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of rotation failure when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing = C
If so,
A = B + C
It is configured to be.
again,
Number of interrupt processing executions of reel acceleration processing when no reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
If a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
When a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing after the spinning reel rotation failure occurs = F
If so,
D = E + F
It is configured to be.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power cutoff process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, which is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S in this example). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, it is shown that the instruction number when notifying "middle-> right-> left" as the push order is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of the paid out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, the display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section", the advantageous section display YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the condition devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order is different, the combination with the push order (the condition device accompanied by the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the replay combination with the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the conditional devices having different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. In addition, the advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check if there are any medals left. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section indicator is provided). It may be configured (with two), and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, it is on the right side. When the section display lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section". Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to be changed according to "AT during BB internal game", "AT during BB state", "AT precursor state", "AT during state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current gaming section can be recognized as a "waiting section" by distinguishing it from a "normal section" and an "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. It may be configured (not notifying the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the section is in the "advantageous section". At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section display is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts in step 2012, and executes the command when a power failure occurs. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that the checksum values of both do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or if No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits interrupts. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing the sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power cut-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power cutoff process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation time process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls the subroutine of the third reel stop production related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third body stop acceptance processing described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, in the case of the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown) in step 2268, and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the number of high secured failure games remaining at the present time (high probability state) based on the high secured failure counter value command received from the main control board M side. Check how many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle effect execution enable / disable determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-securing obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage transition lottery (lottery for whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Refer to), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect determination process during AT, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the resurrection possibility effect determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is mainly a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that any stay stage is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect, notice effect, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution possibility determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) of winning the battle effect execution possibility lottery (whether or not to execute the battle effect (win)). Lottery) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the battle effect executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, and the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that the winning is definite. The configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and even if the AT lottery is not won, if the BB role is won (after the end of the BB, the state shifts to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". ) May be configured to perform a battle effect (victory).

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A), and prize-E (watermelon B), and the role can be won in duplicate with the BB role. It has become. That is, in the case of Yes in step 3064, where the player has the expectation that the rare role is stopped and displayed at the same time as the BB role, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , A lottery for whether or not to execute the Gase Battle effect (a lottery for whether or not to execute the battle effect (defeat)) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the gasse battle effect executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-securing obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, continuous production such as a battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-securing obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect, so that the "low probability state" is entered even though the continuous effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off due to the transition of ("normal section" is set), and the battle effect is performed only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit until the end of the battle effect. By executing this, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

In addition, when the role of rare is won, it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat), so it is possible to guarantee the execution frequency of battle production and always proceed with the game with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. It consists of three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the corresponding number is It is stipulated. In the case of "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stages are the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal medium game", and a "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. Also, if the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 ~. 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of places when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the number of placements is defined. Has been done. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the city stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of places. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of positions. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the number of positions when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as the number of placements.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the skeleton game are displayed. , The relationship with the number is specified. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of places when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 19. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 29 is assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of units when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and you want to move to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 0 to 29 is the number of places to move from the cave stage to the desert stage in that game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 100 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

Thus, in the "low probability state", two stages, a desert stage or a city stage, may be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the "high probability state", four stages, a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and can be selected in the "normal section". The stay stage of 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where you cannot expect to win the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", you will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when the "advantageous section" becomes the "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the stage of the "advantageous section". By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to determine the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation.

A part of the production stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the production stage selected in the "advantageous section" (a production stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but is not selected in the "advantageous section". You may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high-securing obstacle games is increased. When the number of games decreases (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with high expectations, which is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with low expectations (difficult to select in "advantageous section"), which are "advantageous sections".

In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is won in the expectation degree which is an "advantageous section", the expectation degree which has won the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in the game in which the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role. The expectations of winning the AT lottery will differ depending on the stage of stay that has been transferred. You can also configure it so that the expectation of winning the BB role differs depending on the transitioned stay stage, and configure it in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing the effect determination process during AT, which is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continuously incites the effect related to the game (success) (AT continues to set the initial value in the AT counter M60, in other words. Then, it is definite that the AT continues to set the initial value to the AT counter M60 (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game becomes the "AT in progress state") or the AT continuation fanning effect (failure). Instead, the state related to the AT of the next game is determined to be the "AT in progress state" or the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect effect state"), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) and the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) are determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in the first embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the first game of the next set In the corresponding next game, the resurrection effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he / she has won the resurrection lottery (actually, he / she has won the continuous lottery and the main control board. The control on the M side is the same as when the AT continuous fanning effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "state for revival possibility production", but {win the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, and win the continuous production. By configuring the game so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even if the resurrection effect is executed, the ratio of the resurrection effect (success) being executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT continuation fanning effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT final stage effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "state for effect of resurrection"). In this process, it is determined that the “AT in progress” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, even if No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an effect of adding an effect related to the game (an effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" or the like. ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as "AT in progress"), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection possibility effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (the effect is the same as the effect executed in step 3116 described above. It is a production to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the "recovery availability production state", and in the next game, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) of the effect related to the game. It is an effect to notify the fact, and it is decided that the game will shift to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the game will move to the next process (process of step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "recoverable / non-recoverable state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT in progress") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it does not exist, the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is configured to extend the "advantageous section" even in the next game "state for effect of resurrection". It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival production is successful, and the result of the revival production will be paid attention to. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state". That is, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the next game in which the AT in-progress state is completed, the game shifts to the "revival possibility production state" of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "revival possibility production state". By configuring, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, the effect is produced. Although it was prevented that it could be determined whether or not the AT was terminated without confirming the result of, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured not to execute the revival lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT in progress state" ends depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the running set, etc.). With such a configuration, the revival effect (success) and the revival effect (failure) can be executed as the effect on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, "Game before the final AT game: AT continuation fanning production (success) → AT final game: Production to the effect that the next set of AT will start", "Game before the AT final game: AT continuation fanning" Direction (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (success) "," Game before AT final game: AT continuation fanning production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT It may be configured to execute the game before the final game: AT continuation fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure). That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and the effect on the sub control board S side is It may be configured to execute the AT continuous fanning effect or the revival effect.
(3) In a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the effect is that the resurrection effect (success) is performed from the predetermined timing. That is, it may be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuous lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) Timing at which the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) Timing at which the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on),
(6) Timing when the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the second stop is turned on → off),
(7) Timing at which the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing when the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
Etc.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
And so on. In addition, when it is configured to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) to be used by lottery, after the timing when the stop button, which is the first stop, is pressed, is used. Since the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the revival lottery is won, the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. You can play the game with the expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when you release the game or the start lever operation timing related to the next game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process during start lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-time process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the specialization precursor processing at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the “additional specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to “inside the advantageous BB”. It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal middle game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation (push order navigation is the state related to AT). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2312 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the first embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". If you win the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven Is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, the game shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". In the game in which the push order bell is won, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game in which the push order replay is won, the push order navigation may not occur.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the effect image and the background image. (Processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, when the effect display device S40 executes the push order navigation, it is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order re-game is one of the re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of step 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

In the case of No in step 2376, or when the process of step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2380 or the process of step 2382 is executed, the CPU SC shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in the display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B). Here, if there are four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

In step 2386, if No, or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the order of pressing is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2390, or if the process of step 2392 is executed, the CPU SC shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to have a small number of AT remaining games. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is continued. , Battle effect) is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, by configuring in this way, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that "AT in progress" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is enclosed in a star. Display in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, the push order replay is one of the replay-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the addition specialization process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of the replay-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, if No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the forward push instruction command in step 2466. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The image of the arrow pointing toward can suggest the push order.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-mentioned processes of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or when No in 2474, the background image during AT is displayed in step 2480. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal processing of the advantageous BB at the time of starting lever operation, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed, the main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), the command related to the instruction number is not sent. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition The device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4, which is the push order bell, the numbers that suggest the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts are surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the push order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, if No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of the replay-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since there are three push orders, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received a command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. It is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. At, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the 1st body stop>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a general term for forward-push black 7-match replays and reverse-push white 7-match replays. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the second body stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<3rd production-related decision processing when the body is stopped>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third effect-related determination process at the time of body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the BB winning combination during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table and AT of the game. Based on the state related to and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role that was won during AT (“AT in progress”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recoverable / non-recoverable production state”). If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT-related state and the BB combination of the game, and next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the effect based on the effect executed in the game. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states related to AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are three types of BB start production: normal production, high-expectation production, and premier production. It should be noted that, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB is configured to differ, and the one with the lowest degree of expectation is configured to be "normal effect". → High expectation production → Premier production ”.

When the BB combination is a BB (type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal middle game, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming 157/256 is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), the premiere production Is not selected, and it is stipulated that the possibility that a normal effect is selected is higher than that of a high-expectation effect.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference, the premier production will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the normal production will be selected rather than the high expectation production. It is set to be high.

If it is an "advantageous section" and the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, the premier production may be selected. With this configuration, by selecting the premier production, it is confirmed that by winning the setting difference BB, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" after the setting difference BB ends. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when the BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference is won because it is an "advantageous section", there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect is selected rather than a normal effect. (It is less likely that a normal production will be selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the setting differenceless BB that won the prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" ( The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect according to the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C). In addition, it is not limited to this, and the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won a prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the "normal BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in this way, the BB start related to the BB with setting difference It can be configured so that the distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB without a setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown on the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects, one that can be added and the other that cannot be added. The add-on possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT addition lottery is executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, even in the BB where there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed during the AT, the BB to be executed is the AT addition lottery due to the fact that the game medal can be obtained and the AT is in favor of the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 /. It is 256, and the effect that can be added is not executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the probability that the BB start effect cannot be added is 256 /. It is 256, and the effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and the non-addable effect is not executed.

<Processing at the time of receiving the 3rd body stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is produced as a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing a game (continuous effect), the bet button D220 operation of the game in which the number of remaining games of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the next game of the game in which "0" is set, and the operation of the start lever D50. ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "addition specialization state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is performed in the common bell). do not have).

With the above configuration, according to the spinning machine according to the first embodiment, it is advantageous for the player in the gaming machine configured to light the advantageous section indicator YH in the "advantageous section". The period can be appropriately notified. In addition, if the continuation effect is won by providing the "state for effect of resurrection" and the resurrection effect (success) is executed after that, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT in progress state", while the revival effect (failure) is executed even when the revival effect (failure) is executed after the continuous effect is not won. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state" and the state related to the AT as the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section display YH in the game that executes the revival effect, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect succeeds or fails. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player.

In this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the game can be changed to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to is not limited to that of this example, for example, if the AT lottery can be won by a rare role such as cherry (it can be won even if it is not the BB role) and the AT lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the "AT precursor state" as the state related to AT, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

<< Various production modes by the production display device S40 >>
Next, various production modes by the effect display device S40 will be described.

<Direction mode 1>
First, the effect mode 1 will be described. FIG. 56 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 1 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. This effect mode 1 is an effect mode of the effect display device S40 in the so-called chance zone (CZ), which is more likely to shift to an advantageous state such as AT than other states. As shown in FIG. 56, the effect image EG in the chance zone is displayed in the substantially center of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the second predetermined area SR2 in the lower right of the display unit of the effect display device S40. Displays the number of points accumulated in the non-AT state (denoted as "777/1000" in the figure), and the number of staying games in the normal state (in the figure, the number of staying games in the third predetermined area SR3 in the lower left) is displayed. "250G") is displayed. Further, in the effect display device S40, on the left side of the virtual line CS1 passing through the center in the left-right direction, a strip-shaped left specific display TH1 extending vertically is displayed in the vicinity of the left side S40L of the display unit of the effect display device S40. On the right side of the virtual line CS1, a band-shaped right specific display TH2 extending vertically is also displayed in the vicinity of the right side S40R of the display unit of the effect display device S40. In other words, the display unit of the effect display device S40 has a divided area divided into two left and right with the virtual line CS1 as the center, and of these divided areas, the left side on the left side of the virtual line CS1. The left specific display TH1 is displayed in the divided area, and the right specific display TH2 is displayed in the right divided area on the right side.

On the left specific display TH1, the characters of "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone are displayed, and the characters of this "chance zone" move from the bottom to the top (scroll up). It has become. Further, the character of "chance zone" similar to that of the left specific display TH2 is also displayed on the right specific display TH2, and the character of this "chance zone" is the character of "chance zone" of the left specific display TH2. The display mode is such that the characters move from the upper side to the lower side in the opposite direction (scroll down). It should be noted that the characters of the "chance zone" of these left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 are not the display mode of scrolling as described above, but a fixed display mode in which the characters do not move in any of the left, right, up and down directions. Is also good. The same applies to other production modes described later.

The upper end of the left specific display TH1 is located at a distance from the upper side S40U of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the left end of the left specific display TH1 is located at a distance from the left side S40L. Further, the lower end of the left specific display TH1 is located at a distance from the third predetermined area SR3 so as not to overlap the third predetermined area SR3 displaying the number of staying games. In this way, the left specific display TH1 is displayed at a position retracted from the third predetermined area SR3 displaying game information such as the number of staying games (a position that does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game information such as the number of staying games in the third predetermined area SR3 from being hindered.

On the other hand, the upper end of the right specific display TH2 is located adjacent to the upper side S40U, and the right end of the right specific display TH2 is located at a distance from the right side S40R of the display unit of the effect display device S40. Further, the lower end of the right specific display TH2 is located at a distance from the second predetermined area SR2 so as not to overlap the second predetermined area SR2 displaying the number of points. In this way, the right specific display TH2 is also displayed at a position retracted from the second predetermined area SR2 displaying game information such as the number of points (a position that does not overlap with the second predetermined area SR2). , It is possible to prevent the visibility of the game information such as the number of points of the second predetermined area SR2 from being hindered.

In this chance zone, for example, when a rare role or the like is won, in the effect display device S40, as shown in FIG. 57, a character display CT accompanied by a dialogue display (comment display) SF of "chance !!" Is displayed. In the first embodiment, the character display CT is displayed (on the left side) on the left side S40L side in the left division area, overlaps with the left specific display TH1, and is displayed with priority over the left specific display TH1. There is. That is, the character display CT is displayed so as to be in front of the screen of the left specific display TH1. For example, when displaying various images on the effect display device S40 by superimposing a plurality of graphic layers, the character display CT is displayed on the graphic layer on the front side, and the left specific display TH1 is the graphic of the character display CT. It can be configured to be displayed on the graphic layer on the back side of the layer.

On the other hand, the serif display SF overlaps with the effect image EG in the chance zone at a position straddling the virtual line CS1 and is displayed with priority over the effect image EG. Similar to the character display CT, this serif display SF is also displayed with priority by displaying it on the graphic layer on the front side of the effect image EG. By doing so, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF will be displayed on the front side facing the player, and will be displayed without being disturbed by the screen of the left specific display TH1 and the character display CT. And the dialogue display SF can be visually recognized by the player.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the character display CT is displayed at a position that overlaps with the left specific display TH1 but does not overlap with the right specific display TH2. Therefore, although some of the characters in the "chance zone" of the left specific display TH1 are obscured by the character display CT and difficult to read, the right display TH2 is not shielded by the character display CT at all. Become. By doing so, the player can easily confirm the current game situation with the characters of "chance zone" on the right specific display TH2. Further, in the first embodiment, the left specific display TH1 and the right specific display TH2 are displayed, and information such as the game state such as the same "chance zone" is displayed on the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2. Therefore, even if one of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 is shielded by the character display CT or the dialogue display SF, the visibility of the other is not impaired. Therefore, as the display area of the character display CT and the dialogue display SF, it is possible to use a display area other than one of the left and right specific display TH1 and TH2 among all the display areas in the display unit of the effect display device S40. Therefore, the sizes of the character display CT and the dialogue display SF can be freely set within this range. As a result, while it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the size of the character display CT and the dialogue SF, it is possible to prevent the character display CT and / or the dialogue SF from impairing the visibility of the game information such as the "chance zone". can do.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF as shown in FIG. 57 are performed at the timing such as after the start lever is pressed. The character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF are erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of these displays in a situation where the first stop button is not pressed after the start lever is pressed, and the state shown in FIG. 56 is shown. It is supposed to be. In this way, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is erased after a predetermined time, so that the left specific display TH1 and the effect image EG shielded by the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF are erased. Since the visibility is not hindered, it is possible to easily confirm both the information by the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF and the information of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 in the game in which the rare role or the like is won. can. Further, by erasing the character display CT and the dialogue display SF with the lapse of time, even if these shield both the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2, only waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time is required. Information such as the "chance zone" of the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 can be easily confirmed.

The erasure timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, the timing at which one of the first to last stop buttons is pressed after the start lever is pressed, and the medal insertion. After that, it may be erased after pressing the bet button, or it may be erased after a predetermined time has passed since any of the first and last stop buttons was pressed. If the player can easily recognize both the character display CT and the dialogue display SF and the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the deletion timing thereof is Can be set as appropriate. Further, as the erasing timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF, for example, the erasing is not performed in the game in which the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is started, but at any timing of the game executed thereafter. It is also possible to do. In other words, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF may be displayed over a plurality of games. Further, the display start timing of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the timing after pressing the above-mentioned start lever, and for example, the timing at which any of the first to last stop buttons is pressed, and the medal is inserted. After that, after pressing the bet button, or at the timing when the above-mentioned freeze effect is started or ended, the point is that the game is either started or in progress when the rare role or the like is won. It is possible to adopt an appropriate timing such as the timing of, the timing of the start or in progress of the next game of the game, the start or end of a specific effect such as a freeze effect. This also applies to other production modes described later.

<Direction mode 2>
Next, the effect mode 2 will be described. FIG. 58 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 2 by the effect display device S40 in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 58, the upper end, the left end, and the lower end of the left specific display TH1A according to the effect mode 2 are adjacent to the upper side S40U, the left side S40L, and the lower side S40D in the display unit of the effect display device S40, respectively, and relate to the effect mode 2. The upper end, the right end, and the lower end of the right specific display TH2A are adjacent to the upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D in the display unit of the effect display device S40, respectively. In other words, the upper end, left end, and lower end of the left specific display TH1A are visually aligned with the upper side S40U, left side S40L, and lower side S40D, respectively, and the upper end, right end, and lower end of the right specific display TH2A are respectively. It is designed to visually match the upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D. Therefore, it can be said that the left specific display TH1A is displayed at a position where the upper end, the left end, and the lower end coincide with the upper side S40U, the left side S40L, and the lower side S40D, respectively, and the right specific display TH2A has its upper end, right end, and so on. It can be said that the lower ends are displayed at positions corresponding to the upper side S40U, the right side S40R, and the lower side S40D, respectively.

Further, the left specific display TH1A is displayed between the left side S40L and the third predetermined area SR3, and the lower right end of the left specific display TH1A is positioned at a distance from the third predetermined area SR3. As a result, the lower part of the left specific display TH1A does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3. On the other hand, the lower end of the right specific display TH2B overlaps the second predetermined area SR2, but the point number display of the second predetermined area SR3 is preferentially displayed over the right specific display TH2B. (For example, the right specific display TH2 is displayed on the graphic layer on the back side of the graphic layer for displaying the number of points).

Further, in the effect mode 2, the character display CT is displayed (on the right side) on the right side S40R side, overlaps with the right specific display TH2A, and is displayed with priority over the right specific display TH2A. There is. Even in such an effect mode 2, the same action and effect as in the above-mentioned effect mode 1 can be obtained.

<Direction mode 3>
FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 3 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59, the effect mode 3 is different from the first embodiment in that the strip-shaped upper specific display TH1B and the lower specific display TH2B extending to the left and right are displayed. That is, in the effect mode 3, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, the upper specific display TH1B is in the upper upper division area of the virtual line CS2 passing through the center in the vertical direction thereof, and the lower specific display TH2B is in the lower lower division area. Is displayed. The upper end and the left and right ends of the upper specific display TH1B are adjacent to the upper side S40U and the left and right sides S40L and S40R, respectively. Further, the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals with respect to the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, respectively, and the lower ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals with respect to the lower side S40U. As a result, the lower specific display TH2B does not overlap with the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3.

In the production mode 3, the characters of the "chance zone" of the upper specific display TH1B are displayed in a display mode in which the characters move from the left to the right (scroll to the right). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59, the display unit of the effect display device S40 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, so that it is on the left and right sides of the strip-shaped specific display TH1 extending vertically in the first embodiment described above. The display area of the extending strip-shaped upper specific display TH1B is larger. Therefore, in the production mode 3, the characters of the two "chance zones" are scrolled to the right, and in this case, as shown in FIG. 59, the left portion of the upper specific display TH1B, although it depends on the scroll position. And, there will be a situation where the characters "chance zone" are displayed in the right part.

Further, the character display CT is displayed on the left side S40L side. This character display CT is displayed between the upper and lower specific displays TH1B and TH2B and at a position not overlapping the specific displays TH1B and TH2B. Further, the serif display SF does not overlap with the effect image EG as in the effect mode 1, but overlaps with the upper specific display TH1B, and the serif display SF is preferentially displayed. Further, although the dialogue display SF overlaps with the upper specific display TH1B, it overlaps with the left part of the upper specific display TH1B and shields this part, but overlaps with the right part of the upper specific display TH1B. do not have. Therefore, even if the serif display SF overlaps the upper specific display TH1B, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the characters of the "chance zone" from being obstructed on the right side of the upper specific display TH1B.

<Direction mode 4>
FIG. 60 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 4 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, in the effect mode 4, the strip-shaped upper specific display TH1C extending diagonally downward to the right in the upper upper division area of the virtual line CS2 and the lower specific display TH2C in the lower lower division area of the virtual line CS2. Is displayed. That is, in the effect mode 4, the left end of the upper specific display TH1C is adjacent to the upper left corner of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and the right end of the upper specific display TH1C is the upper side S40U and the virtual line CS2 on the right side S40R. Adjacent to each other.

Further, the left end of the lower specific display TH2C is located on the left side S40L so as to be in contact with the third predetermined area SR3 and the virtual line CS2 and not to overlap with the third predetermined area SR3. The right end is in contact with the lower right corner of the effect display device S40. The right end portion of the lower specific display TH2C overlaps with the second predetermined area SR2, and the point display of the second predetermined area SR2 is preferentially displayed.

<Direction mode 5>
FIG. 61 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 5 by an effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, in the effect mode 5, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, the bow-shaped upper specific display TH1D swelling upward is displayed in the upper division region on the upper side of the virtual line CS2, and the virtual line CS2 is displayed. In the lower lower division area on the lower side, a bow-shaped plate-shaped lower specific display TH2D that swells downward is displayed.

The upper ends of the upper specific display TH1D are located at intervals with respect to the upper side S40U, and the left and right ends of the upper specific display TH1D are located apart from the left side S40L and the right side S40R, respectively. The character of the "chance zone" of the upper specific display TH1D is a display mode that moves clockwise (clockwise scroll). Further, the lower ends of the lower specific display TH2D are located at intervals with respect to the lower side 40UD, and the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2D are located apart from the left side S40L and the right side S40R, respectively. The left portion of the lower specific display TH2D is also separated from the third predetermined area SR3 so that the lower specific display TH2D does not overlap with the third predetermined area SR3. Although a part of the right part of the lower specific display TH2D overlaps with the second predetermined area SR2, the second predetermined area SR2 is preferentially displayed to ensure the visibility of the second predetermined area SR2. There is. The characters of the "chance zone" in the lower specific display TH2D are displayed in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise scroll).

In the effect mode 5, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed on the left side S40L side. The character display CT does not overlap with the effect image ED and the lower specific display TH2D, but overlaps with the upper specific display TH1D and is displayed with priority over the upper specific display TH1D. Similarly, the dialogue display SF does not overlap with the effect image ED and the lower specific display TH2D, but overlaps with the upper specific display TH1D and is displayed with priority over the upper specific display TH1D.

<Direction mode 6>
FIG. 62 is an image diagram showing an effect mode 6 by the effect display device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect mode 6, in the display unit of the effect display device S40, a bow-shaped plate-shaped left specific display TH1E swelling to the left is displayed on the left side of the virtual line CS1 and on the right side of the virtual line CS1. , A bow-shaped plate-shaped right specific display TH2E that swells to the right is displayed.

The upper and lower ends of the left specific display TH1E are located away from the upper side S40U and the lower side S40D, and the left end of the left specific display TH1E is also located away from the left side S40L. The character of "chance zone" of the left specific display TH1E is a display mode that moves clockwise (clockwise scroll). Further, the upper end and the lower end of the right specific display TH2E are located apart from the upper side S40U and the lower side S40UD, respectively, and the right end of the right specific display TH2D is also located away from the right side S40R. The characters of the "chance zone" of the right specific display TH2E are displayed in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise scroll).

In the effect mode 6, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed on the right side S40R side. The character display CT and the dialogue display SF overlap with the right specific display TH2E and are displayed with priority over the right specific display TH2E.

<Other production modes>
Next, other production modes will be described. In addition, in the following other production modes, the production modes 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as "this example", and the specific displays TH1, TH2, TH1A, TH2A, TH1B, TH2B, TH1C, respectively of this example. TH2C, TH1D, TH2D, TH1E, and TH2E may be collectively referred to as "specific display".

In this example, in the effect display device S40, two areas, a left division area and a right division area, of the virtual line CS1 are provided, but the left and right division areas of this type are not limited to two, but three. It may be a divided area such as four. Specifically, for example, between the virtual line CS1 and the left side S40L, the left and right regions (areas having a shape extending in a strip shape in the vertical direction) of the virtual line (not shown) passing through the center in the left-right direction are respectively. From the left side, the first left division area and the second left division area are used, and the left and right areas (not shown) of the virtual line (not shown) passing through the center in the left-right direction between the virtual line CS1 and the right side S40R are striped in the vertical direction. Areas having a shape extending from the left side to each other) may be divided into four divided areas at equal intervals from each other, with the first right divided area and the second right divided area in order from the left side. In this case, one of the four divided areas, such as displaying a specific display in each of the leftmost first left divided area and the rightmost second right divided area, A specific display may be displayed in each of the other divided areas. Further, these four divided areas are not limited to being evenly spaced from each other, and the width in the left-right direction of the other divided areas is wider than the width in the left-right direction of one divided area. As such, it does not have to be evenly spaced. For example, the width of the leftmost first left division area and the rightmost second right division area in the left-right direction, and the width of the second left division area and the first right division area intervening between them in the left-right direction. In this case, the display range of the second left division area and the first right division area (in other words, the central area in the left-right direction of the display unit of the effect display device S40) is widened. Therefore, the range of the effect display by the effect display device S40 can be widened, and the degree of freedom of the effect expression can be improved.

Further, in the effect display device S40, the upper division area and the lower division area with the virtual line CS2 as Sakai are similarly divided into two at equal intervals, and the first upper division area is sequentially divided from the top. And the second upper division area, and the lower division area is further divided into two at equal intervals to form four division areas, the first lower division area and the second lower division area, in order from the top. Specific display may be performed on each of the 1-division area and the 2nd lower division area at the bottom. In this case as well, these plurality of divided regions may be evenly spaced or not evenly spaced, and the width of the top first divided region and the bottom second lower divided region in the vertical direction. May be narrower than the vertical width of the second upper division region and the first lower division region interposed between them. Also in this case, since the display range of the central region in the vertical direction of the display unit of the effect display device S40 can be widened, the range of the effect display by the effect display device S40 can be widened. , The degree of freedom of effect display can be improved.

Further, the display unit of the effect display device S40 is divided into four divided areas by the virtual line CS1 and the virtual line CS2: the upper left divided area, the lower left divided area, the upper right divided area, and the lower right divided area. , Of these, the specific display may be displayed in one divided area and the other divided area, respectively. The point is that the display unit of the effect display device S40 is divided into a plurality of divided areas, and a specific display is displayed in each of one of these divided areas and the other divided areas. The width and size of each divided area are not particularly limited, and the divided area in which the specific display is displayed can be appropriately set as the divided area.

In the above-mentioned effect mode 1, the characters of the chance zone of the left specific display TH1 and the characters of the "chance zone" of the right specific display TH1 are scrolled in opposite directions, but instead of this, the characters of the left specific display TH1 The characters in the chance zone and the characters in the "chance zone" on the right specific display TH1 scroll in the same direction (both the characters in the "chance zone" on the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 scroll up or down. ) May be used, and the scroll direction is not particularly limited. The same applies to the scroll direction of the characters in the "chance zone" of the production modes 2 to 6.

In this example, the characters of the "chance zone" in the specific display have been explained by taking the pattern of scrolling as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the characters of the "chance zone" may rotate on the spot. , It may swing in any direction of up, down, left and right, reciprocate in a specific display, etc., and the dynamic mode of the character of "chance zone" is not particularly limited.

In this example, a single gaming state is displayed as "chance zone" in the specific display, but instead of this, in addition to the "chance zone" in the specific display, for example, a plurality of "high accuracy". The game status of the game may be displayed. In short, it suffices if one or a plurality of pieces of information can be displayed by characters, symbols, images, or the like shown on the specific display so that the player can recognize the information.

Further, in the specific display, for example, in the case of the "chance zone", as described in this example, one specific display is covered with at least one of the chance display CT, the dialogue display SF, and the effect image EG. However, while ensuring the visibility of the "chance zone" by preventing these from covering other specific displays, in the case of "high accuracy", one specific display is used. In addition to the other specific display, a state in which at least one of the chance display CT, the dialogue display SF, and the effect image EG may be covered may be allowed. The point is that if the information displayed on the specific display is important information that the player wants to be recognized, visibility is guaranteed as described above, and if the information is less important than this, the visibility is guaranteed. , Information that is targeted for ensuring visibility according to the importance of information such as "chance zone" and "high accuracy" displayed on a specific display, such as not guaranteeing visibility. It may be divided into information that is not so, and in the former case, visibility may be guaranteed, and in the latter case, visibility may not be guaranteed. Of course, in either case, visibility may be ensured.

In this example, the display of the "chance zone" was continued unchanged in the specific display, but instead of this, the characters of the "chance zone" are changed to other characters or symbols according to changes in the gaming state, etc. Or images may be changed. Specifically, taking FIG. 56 as an example, the characters "chance zone" are displayed on the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2. In this situation, for example, by pressing the start lever, the above-mentioned description is performed. In the situation where a predetermined role such as "Replay with 7 reverse push whites" is won, the display of "Chance zone" is replaced with the display of a left-pointing arrow image such as "←" that encourages the player to push backward. After that, when the last stop button is pressed and "White 7" is aligned, the image of the arrow pointing to the left is switched to the display that informs the game result such as "AT confirmed" and "Bonus confirmed", and then. , If CZ continues, the display of information by specific display will be returned to the display of "chance zone" again at the timing of pressing the bet button of the next game of the game in which this predetermined combination is won. , It is possible to change at any time according to the change of the gaming state, and the mode of the change is not particularly limited.

It goes without saying that the shape of the specific display is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and various shapes can be applied. For example, in the effect modes 5 and 6, the bow-shaped plate-shaped specific display is applied, but instead of this, a ring-shaped specific display that is displayed straddling the virtual lines CS1 and CS2 may be used. .. In this case, as the display mode of the character of the "chance zone" of the specific display, the display mode 1 and the upper side of the virtual line CS2 are simultaneously displayed in both the left split area on the left side and the right split area on the right side of the virtual line CS1. The display mode 2 or the display unit of the effect display device S40, which is simultaneously displayed in both the upper divided area and the lower lower divided area, is displayed in the upper left divided area, the upper right divided area, and the lower right by the virtual lines CS1 and CS2. When the four divided areas of the divided area and the lower left divided area are set, the display mode 3 displayed at the same time in each divided area, and the display displayed simultaneously in at least two divided areas among the divided areas of each of the divided areas 3. Aspect 4 and the like can be mentioned.

In the effect mode 3, the left and right ends of the lower specific display TH2B are located at intervals from the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, respectively, and the lower end of the lower specific display TH2B is spaced from the lower side S40U. Although it was located vacantly, instead of this, a part of the lower specific display TH2B may overlap with the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3. In this case, the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 are displayed with priority over the lower specific display TH2B, as in the positional relationship between the right specific display TH2A and the second predetermined area SR2 shown in FIG. I just need to be there. Further, at least one end of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, the end of the lower specific display TH2B (in the example shown in FIG. 58, the right end of the second predetermined area SR2 and the left end of the lower specific display TH2B, the third 3 The left end of the predetermined area SR3 and the right end of the lower specific display TH2B) may be adjacent to each other. In short, the specific display may not overlap with the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 (at least one end of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 and the end of the specific display). The specific display may be displayed so as to overlap at least one of the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3, and the specific display and at least the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 may be displayed. In the case of overlapping on one side, the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 may be displayed with priority over the specific display.

In this example, the effect image EG is exemplified as the effect performed by the effect display device S40, but it is needless to say that the effect is not limited to this and may be the effect exemplified in each of the above-described embodiments. For example, as shown in FIG. 67, which will be described later, there is an example in which the effect image of the push order navigation such as “1, 2, 3” is displayed, and the effect image of the push order navigation and the specific display are displayed at the same time. In this case, the effect image of the push order navigation and the specific display may not overlap, or the specific display may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the effect image of the push order navigation. When this specific display is displayed so as to overlap the effect image of the push order navigation, the effect image of the push order navigation overlaps with one specific display among the plurality of specific displays, and the push order is overlapped with the other specific display. While preventing the navigation effect images from overlapping, the push order navigation effect image may be displayed with priority over the specific display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67, which will be described later, in the effect image of the push order navigation of "1, 2, 3", the display area of "1" corresponding to the stop button to be pressed first is another "2". Or, it may be enlarged and displayed so that it is larger than "3". In this case, the enlarged display area of "1" may be a range that does not overlap with the specific display, or may be a range that overlaps with the specific display. Here, if the above "1" is enlarged and displayed in a situation where the effect image of this push order navigation does not overlap the specific display, even if the enlarged displayed "1" overlaps the specific display. It is good (displaying with priority given to the enlarged "1" over the specific display), or it may not overlap (in other words, set the enlarged range of "1" to the extent that it does not overlap with the specific display. You can do it). In this case, it goes without saying that the other "2" and "3" that are not enlarged are not overlapped with the specific display.

In this example, the effect image EG is displayed at a position that does not overlap the specific display, but the effect image EG may be displayed so as to overlap the specific display. In this case, the specific display may be displayed with priority over the effect image EG, or the effect image EG may be displayed with priority over the specific display. Further, when the effect image EG is displayed with priority over the specific display, for example, the effect image EG has priority over the left specific display TH1 of the first embodiment and overlaps with the left specific display TH1 while overlapping with the left specific display TH1. The left and right specific displays are displayed by preventing the effect image EG from overlapping the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 so that the effect image EG does not overlap with the right specific display TH2. On the other side of TH1 and TH2, the visibility may not be hindered.

In this example, only an image such as an effect image EG is displayed on the effect display device S40, but in addition to this, in the effect display device S40, a retracted position retracted from the front side of the display unit and the retracted position. An effect display device S40 having a movable accessory capable of advancing and retreating from the retracted position to the advancing position so as to cover the front side of the display unit may be used. In this case, the movable range of the movable accessory may be a range that does not cover the specific display, or a range that covers one of the plurality of specific displays and does not cover the other specific displays. It has the same effect as the example. Further, in the movable accessory, the movable accessory swings up, down, left, right, etc. from the retracted position to the advanced position, or moves while vibrating so as to reciprocate between the retracted position and the advanced position. Display of the effect display device S40 when moving with a predetermined operation, or when performing an operation from the retracted position which is the home position (initial position) to the advanced position which is the maximum position in the movable accessory. In the section, an effect image that emphasizes or makes the movement of the movable accessory stand out may be displayed, such as displaying an image of a flame or a moving image around the movable accessory. In this case, the effect image may be displayed with priority over the specific display, or may be displayed in an area that does not overlap the specific display. Further, the movable accessory is stately located on the front side of the display unit of the effect display device S40, and may rotate at this position or reciprocate from this position in a predetermined direction such as up, down, left, or right. The same applies to the above specifications even in the case of such specifications.

In this example, the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are displayed when the role is rare, but the character display CT is not limited to this, and for example, the character display CT may be displayed normally even from the normal time. It may be displayed normally in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of types of the character display CT may be provided, and the player may be able to select a favorite character display from among these by operating the sub input button SB or the like. Further, a plurality of types of character display CT and dialogue display SF are provided. For example, when a bell or replay is established, character display CT and / or dialogue display SF corresponding to the bell or replay is performed, and a rare combination is established. If so, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF corresponding to the rare combination may be performed. Furthermore, if there is a weak rare role with a low probability of a transition lottery to an advantageous state such as AT due to the winning, and a strong rare role with a higher probability of the above transition lottery than this weak rare role as a rare role. , Character display CT and / or dialogue display SF corresponding to each of these weak rare roles and strong rare roles may be performed. The point is that the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF corresponding to the winning combination may be performed, and the mode thereof is not particularly limited. Specifically, the content of the dialogue display SF is different, the color of the telop of the dialogue is different, or the display area of the dialogue display SF is configured depending on whether the bell is established or the rare role is established. The color of the frame and / or the color of the telop may be different. The same applies to the relationship between the weak rare role and the strong rare role. Further, the above-mentioned weak rare role and strong rare role are examples in the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, but if this is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine, for example, the jackpot expectation is relatively high for the weak rare role. A low effect, a variable display mode, etc. correspond, and for a strong rare role, an effect having a relatively high expectation of a big hit, a variable display mode, etc. correspond.

Further, when the positional relationship between the specific display and the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF (hereinafter referred to as effect display, etc.), for example, the specific display and the effect display have the first positional relationship, the first The internal state of the above is suggested (notified), and if it is in the second positional relationship, the second internal situation is suggested (notified), and the internal state is suggested (notified) by these positional relationships. You may try to do it. For example, taking the effect mode 5 as an example, in FIG. 61, the positional relationship between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D and the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D. , The character display CT and the dialogue display SF are intervened, and the character display CT and the dialogue display SF are partially covered by the upper specific display TH1D. / Or a positional relationship 2 is provided in which the dialogue display SF does not cover the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D and is interposed between the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D. 2. In the case of a strong rare role, it is possible to suggest an internal state such as whether it is a weak rare role or a strong rare role by setting the positional relationship 1.

In the above-mentioned production mode 1, the character display CT is superimposed on the left specific display TH1 at the time of the rare role, but instead of this, for example, the state 1 in which the transition to the advantageous state such as AT or bonus is decided. (Specifically, the game in which the AT or bonus is won, the state during the activation period after the AT is won until the AT is activated, the state during the incubation period of the above-mentioned AT or bonus, and the bonus are carried over. When there is a state 2 in which the transition to an advantageous state such as AT or bonus is not decided, the character display CT is set to the left specific display TH1 in the state 1 than in the state 2. The overlap frequency may be increased to suggest to the player the possibility of transition to an advantageous state depending on whether or not the character display CT overlaps with the left specific display TH1. In short, the internal state or the like may be suggested depending on whether or not the character display CT overlaps with the specific display TH1. The same applies to the dialogue display SF and the production modes 2 to 6. In addition to the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is decided, the above-mentioned state 1 is, for example, the precursor state in which the transition to the AT is decided as a precursory state that fuels the transition to the AT before the transition to the AT or the like. The state may be set to a state that is a precursor to a gaze in which the transition to AT is not made. The point is that the state 1 is advantageous to the player, and the state 2 is more disadvantageous to the player than this state 1. For example, the game that has won the above-mentioned CZ. Alternatively, the state during the activation period from the winning of the CZ to the activation of the CZ may be set to the state 1, and the state of not winning the CZ may be set to the state 2.

In this example, the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is displayed with priority over the specific display, and the second and third predetermined areas SR2 and SR3 are displayed with priority over the specific display. However, for example, the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> character display CT> specific display> dialogue display SF> effect image EG (for the inequality sign, the display priority is shown, and the priority is indicated by ">". The specific display is displayed with priority over the dialogue display SF, or the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> dialogue display SF> specific display> character display CT> effect image EG. As a result, the specific display is displayed with priority over the character display CT, or as the second and third predetermined areas SR2, SR3> character display CT> specific display> effect image> character display CT. The image may be prioritized over the character display CT. In short, the priority of these displays can be appropriately set within the range in which the visibility of the specific display can be guaranteed. Further, it is of course possible to suggest or notify the internal situation by changing the priority of these displays according to the internal situation.

Further, regarding the mode of each specific display, there are the effect mode 1 shown in FIG. 56 and the effect modes 2 to 6 shown in FIGS. 58 to 62. For example, the right specific display TH2 shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. The specific display of this example may be a combination with the lower specific display TH2B shown in 59, or a combination of the left and right specific displays TH1A and TH2B shown in FIG. 58 and the upper and lower specific displays TH1D and TH2D shown in FIG. The combination of can be set as appropriate. Further, any one of FIGS. 56 to 62 may be executed depending on the gaming state. For example, in the case of the game state A, the game state may be notified to the player in the mode of FIG. 58, and in the case of the game state B, the game state may be notified to the player in the mode of FIG. That is, among the specific displays shown in FIGS. 56 to 62, one specific display is associated with one gaming state, and the other specific display is associated with another gaming state. , By associating any specific display with the specific display, the player may be notified of the game state by displaying the specific display. In this case, one game state may be associated with one game state in a one-to-one relationship such as one specific display, or one game state may be associated with a plurality of specific displays in a one-to-many relationship. You may be.

In this example, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is deleted when the time elapses or the end of the game (after the final stop (third) operation of the stop switch), etc. For example, when the advantageous state such as AT or bonus is not determined 1, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is erased over time, while when it is confirmed 2, the character display is displayed. And / or the dialogue display SF is prevented from being erased over time, or the time until the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is erased differs between case 1 and case 2 above (for example, case 2). If the time is longer than 1 etc.), it may be set. Similarly, regarding the pattern at the end of the game, for example, in the above case 1, the character display and / or the dialogue display SF is erased at the end of the game, while in the above case 2, the character display and / or is erased. The dialogue display SF may not be erased at the end of the game. The point is that the internal situation may be suggested by the time lapse of the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF, the presence or absence of erasure at the end of the game, the length of the display time, etc., and the character display according to the internal state. Whether or not the CT and / or the dialogue display SF is erased and the display time can be appropriately set. The timing of erasing the character display CT and / or the dialogue display SF is not limited to the display time or the end of the game, and is arbitrary, such as when a plurality of games are completed or when the game state changes. It can be set to the timing.

In this example, the character "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone is displayed on the specific display, but instead of this, for example, the above-mentioned indicating that the winning probability of AT or CZ is high. The characters "high accuracy middle" may be displayed, or a symbol or an image such as a character may be displayed instead of the characters. The information used in the specific display includes characters and symbols. And the type of image is not particularly limited. In addition to the above, the characters and images displayed on the specific display, such as "demo" indicating that the demo is in progress, and "additional high accuracy" indicating that the addition of AT is highly probable. Characters and images such as, characters and images such as "specialized zone" indicating that the AT is in the specialized state, characters and images such as "in the bonus" indicating that the bonus is in progress, and for multiple productions in the normal state. If there is a stage, characters and images such as "○○ stage" that informs the stay stage, characters and images such as "precursor" that informs that it is in a precursor state, etc. Characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying the internal state of the game machine are listed, and other characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying information about the game machine such as the model name and specifications of the game machine, today's bonus Characters and images corresponding to the display for notifying information about the game history such as the number of times the game was won or the number of times the AT was won, and "Thank you for visiting us today" during or after the game in an advantageous game state (AT, BB). Displaying a message for the player and displaying characters, images, and symbols corresponding to the anti-slip display to prevent the above-mentioned squeeze such as "Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately" can also be mentioned.

In this example, the number of games is displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 and the number of points is displayed in the third predetermined area SR3, but the ones displayed in the second predetermined area SR2 and the third predetermined area SR3 are displayed. , Not limited to these. Specific examples of what is displayed include icons such as figures and combinations of figures and characters, the number of game medals acquired in advantageous states such as AT and bonuses, the number of games staying at ATs and bonuses, and the number of additional ATs (additional numbers). It may be game-related information such as the number of sets, the number of additional games, the number of additional games), the number of consecutive villas in an advantageous state of AT and bonus, etc. It may be non-game-related information (production-related information) such as information related to adjustment, or game operation information (game operation information) such as display of the number of credits, display of the number of bets, display of the number of payouts by small winning combination, etc. It may be present, and information about the game and other information can be displayed. Further, although these information are displayed in the second predetermined area and the third predetermined area, the information is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the first area on the upper right of the effect display device S40. In short, it is sufficient that the display is displayed in a part of the entire display area of the effect display device S40, and the arrangement location is not particularly limited.

In this example, the effect display device S40 of the rotating drum type gaming machine has been described as an example, but as described above, it may be applied to the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine, and even in this case, it may be applied. It has the same effect as the above-mentioned effect modes 1 to 6.

Specifically, when applied to the effect display device of a pachinko gaming machine, the left and right specific displays TH1 and TH2 of the effect mode 1 indicate, for example, a "chance zone" that suggests that the time is shortened or the probability is changed. , Characters and images such as "chance time", "time reduction" to indicate that the time is being shortened, "probability change" to indicate that the probability is changing, and "high accuracy" characters and images are being reached. This state is suggested when the characters and images of "reach" indicating that the jackpot is being hit, the characters and images of "big hitting" indicating that the jackpot is being hit, and the look-ahead effect with high expectation of the jackpot is selected by the hold look-ahead. Characters and images such as "○○ zone", characters such as "during demonstration" and "○○ stage" similar to the above-mentioned rotating pachinko machine, and images corresponding to this, for notifying the internal state, etc. In addition to the display, characters and images corresponding to the display of the error status, and the display of the distinction (for example, the situation where the right-handed stroke should be made and the situation where the left-handed stroke should be made are displayed. In this case, as described above. In addition, there are display modes such as displaying left-pointing arrows and right-pointing arrows.) Characters and images corresponding to), or gaming machines such as "Ama-Digi", "Middle", and "1/99". Characters and images showing specifications, characters and images corresponding to the model name of the pachinko machine, display of messages for players such as "Thank you for visiting us today", and "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Examples thereof include characters and images for preventing the above-mentioned denting and for preventing the digging. The same applies to each specific display according to the effect modes 2 to 6.

Further, as the display contents related to the second predetermined area SR2 and the third predetermined area SR3 in the effect display device S40 of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the big hit). Error status, number of reserved balls for normal symbol display (current number of reserved balls for auxiliary game displayed on auxiliary game symbol display device H20) and number of reserved balls for special symbol display (first main game symbol display device A20) Alternatively, characters and images corresponding to the current number of main game hold balls displayed on the second main game symbol display device B20) can be mentioned, and other game histories such as today's jackpot and the number of continuations of probability changes can be mentioned. Characters and images corresponding to the information, characters and images such as "3 consecutive villas" displaying the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot, and characters and images corresponding to the number of game balls acquired after the end of the jackpot can be mentioned.

<< Button operation promotion effect to sub input button SB >>
Next, a button operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the sub input button SB will be described. It should be noted that this button operation promotion effect can be appropriately applied to other embodiments described later. In addition, although the example is given with a rotating drum type gaming machine, it should be added that it can be appropriately implemented with a pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 63 is an image diagram showing an example in a production (1 game story production) in which a story progresses each time the reels are stopped in one game.

First, by operating the start lever D50, one game story production is started, and the characters "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" are displayed in the center of the production display device S40.

Next, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 for stopping the left reel M51 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the left stop button D41), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Jan!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 for stopping the middle reel M52 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the middle stop button D42), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Ken!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 for stopping the right reel M53 is operated (the gaming machine accepts the pressing of the right stop button D43), so that one game story production progresses by one step. Then, the characters "Pon!" Are displayed in the center of the effect display device S40.

After the characters "Pon!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, a button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the sub-input button SB is performed in order to notify the result of the one-game story effect. Even if the bet processing (bet processing by the operation of the bet button D220, the bet processing by the operation of the bet button, and the bet processing by the automatic bet) is performed while the button operation promotion effect is displayed, the button operation is performed. I try to maintain the display of the promotion effect. Further, if the start lever D50 is operated while the button operation promotion effect is displayed and the next game is started, the display of the button operation promotion effect is stopped and a new operation based on the operation of the start lever D50 is performed. The production is feasible.

The button operation promotion effect is a "sub-input button light emission" in which the LED provided on the sub-input button SB emits light, and a "button image display (button image) that displays a button image imitating the sub-input button SB on the effect display device S40. The light emitting mode of the display may be a lighting mode / blinking mode. Further, an effect may be displayed around the button image display to be a lighting mode / blinking mode.) ”, The sub-input button SB is operated on the effect display device S40. It is provided with a "button operation character display" that directly suggests what should be done by characters or the like (indicated as "press a button!" In FIG. 63).

The light emitting mode of the button image display is a mode for making the button image imitating the sub input button SB look shining, and the lighting mode is, for example, displaying the button image so as to shine (relatively displaying the button image). It indicates that the image is displayed brightly or displayed based on white, and the blinking mode is, for example, displayed so that the button image shines (the button image is displayed relatively bright or white is displayed). It is displayed as the keynote (such as) and the button image is displayed so that it is not shining (the button image is displayed relatively dark, gray is displayed as the keynote, etc.). Indicates that it repeats alternately.

Here, as the button operation promotion effect, both the sub-input button light emission, the button image display, and the button operation character display are performed. The button image display is in a lighting mode.

As shown in FIG. 63, the size of the button image (display area) is configured to be larger than the size of the sub input button SB (area of the player operation surface). Here, the player operation surface of the sub input button SB is a surface that the player touches when operating (pressing) the sub input button SB. The player operation surface may be the upper surface of the sub input button SB, or may be the surface having the largest area of the sub input button SB.

Next, when the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the lighting mode of the button image display continues (does not change), but the sub-input button light emission is in the blinking mode. That is, the light emitting mode of the button image display (lighting mode, blinking mode, etc.) and the light emitting mode of the sub input button light emission (lighting mode, blinking mode, etc.) until the sub-input button SB is operated by the player are different. When the button operation promotion effect is displayed, the introduction sound is output before the sub-input button SB is enabled, and after the introduction sound ends (the sub-input button SB is disabled as the output time of the introduction sound). The player is made aware of the operation of the sub-input button SB by making the sound silent from the time when the sub-input button SB is enabled from the time when the sub-input button SB is activated at the end of the operation. It is configured as follows.

Next, when the sub-input button SB is operated by the player, the result of one game story production is displayed. Here, since the result of the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) was a hit, the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 immediately after accepting the operation of the sub input button SB is displayed without any effect. After erasing, the characters "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 63, the light emitting mode of the sub input button SB when the character "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40 is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the characters "victory!" And the image of the peace sign are displayed on the effect display device S40, it is conceivable that the sub-input button SB is lit in a rainbow mode. Further, if the lottery result is out of order, an effect for erasing the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 is displayed immediately after the operation of the sub input button SB is accepted, and the effect display device S40 is displayed as " It is conceivable to display the characters "Defeat?" And set the light emission mode of the sub input button SB to the extinguishing mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the success effect stand out by immediately erasing the button image display at the time of success, and by erasing the button image display with the failure effect at the time of failure, the sub input button SB It is possible to make the player understand that the result of operating the is out of alignment. Further, when the sub input button SB is repeatedly hit, it is conceivable that the effect mode is the same as the state in which the sub input button SB is automatically repeatedly hit while being continuously pressed (so-called automatic continuous hit). In this case, the sub-input button light emission while the sub-input button SB is continuously pressed may be turned off, or may be blinked in accordance with the continuous striking effect.

Next, the effect generated by the above-mentioned configuration will be described.
1. 1. The size of the button image (display area) is larger than the size of the sub input button SB (area of the player operation surface). With this configuration, the effect display device S40 operates the sub input button SB for the player. It is possible to clearly inform what should be done. The size of the button image in the effect display device S40 may be the size of the entire image of the sub-input button SB including the effect image or the like, or the size of the display area of the button image related to the player operation surface. ..
2. 2. The light emitting mode of the button image display and the light emitting mode of the sub input button light emission until the sub input button SB is operated by the player are different. With this configuration, the player is looking at either the effect display device S40 or the sub input button SB. Even if this is the case, it is possible to recognize that the sub input button SB should be operated. Further, by clarifying the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 mainly visually recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the display suggesting the operation from being overlooked and forgetting to operate the sub input button SB. Can be done. Further, in general, the sub-input button SB emits light by the LED inside the sub-input button SB, and the surroundings of the sub-input button SB do not emit light, while the button image display is an effect display that constantly emits light. It is displayed on a part of the display unit of the device S40, and the button image display itself is emitting light, and the screen around the button image display is also emitting light. Due to this difference in environment, the button image display is brighter than the sub-input button SB (the sub-input button SB is relatively darker than the button image display). Here, by blinking the relatively dark sub-input button SB, the sub-input button SB is made to stand out and catches the player's eyes, and the relatively bright button image display is kept lit for the game. By making the sub-input button SB and the button image display blink and light in a manner suitable for each of the above environments, such as to attract the attention of the person, an effect suitable for each environment can be obtained. It can be created, and the distinction between the sub-input button SB and the button image display can be clarified. Further, when the environment around the sub input button SB is emitting light, the light emitting mode of the LED of the sub input button SB and the LED around the sub input button SB are different (for example, the light emitting color is different). Therefore, the player can be differentiated so that he / she can visually recognize that the sub-input button SB should be operated, and it can be shown that the sub-input button SB is effective. As described above, even when the surroundings of the sub-input button SB are relatively bright, it can be shown that the sub-input button SB is effective by appropriately changing the light emitting mode of the LED of the sub-input button SB. ..

<Supplement / change example>
It is preferable that the display position of the button image display on the effect display device S40 has the same relationship as the installation position of the sub input button SB. For example, if the sub input button SB is provided in the center of the gaming machine main body (center in the left-right direction), the button image display is also displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device S40 (center in the left-right direction). If the sub-input button SB is provided on the right side of the center of the gaming machine main body, the button image display is also displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the effect display device S40. With this configuration, it is possible to intuitively easily recognize the position where the sub input button SB is provided, and even in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operating members, the player can make no mistake. The sub input button SB can be operated. In the above, the relationship between the position where the sub input button SB is provided and the display position of the button image display in the left-right direction has been described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device S40 is also used in the up-down direction. The display position of the button image display in the above and the installation position of the sub input button SB may be configured to have the same relationship.

The difference between the lighting mode (blinking mode) of the button image display and the lighting mode (blinking mode) of the sub-input button light emission may be the difference in blinking speed (blinking cycle), lighting / blinking brightness, and the like. For example, the blinking speed of the button image display is faster or slower than the blinking speed of the LED of the sub-input button SB (the blinking cycle of the button image display is shorter or longer than the blinking cycle of the LED of the sub-input button SB). The button image display is relatively bright, but the LED of the sub input button SB is relatively dark. With this configuration, it is possible to make the button image display displayed on the effect display device S40 stand out.

The first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are not limited to the illustrated order, and even if the stop operations are performed in different orders, one game story production is performed each time the reel stop operation is performed. To proceed.

The sub-input button SB is independent of other buttons and does not need to be provided separately. A button controlled by the main control board M is used as a sub-input button (a sub-input button is used as a button controlled by the main control board M). It is also possible to have a similar role). For example, the bet button D220 functions as a bet button at the time of betting operation before the start of the game, but functions as a sub input button at the time of button operation after the start of the game (when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the above example). do. In order for the player to easily recognize which function is currently used, the light emitting mode of the LED provided on the bet button D220 is set when the bet button is functioning and when the sub input button is functioning. It may be different or the emission color may be different. For example, it may be lit at all times when it functions as a bet button, blinking when it functions as a sub-input button, lit in red when it functions as a bet button, and lit in green when it functions as a sub-input button. .. The bet button and the sub input button are not limited to the same, and the stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may also have the function of the sub input button.

The size of the button image may be, for example, the same size as the sub input button SB, or may be smaller than the sub input button SB. Further, the button operation character display only needs to be able to recognize that the sub input button SB should be operated together with the button image display, and the character "button" in "press the button!" Shown in FIG. 63. It may be only the characters and symbols of "press!" Further, an image imitating a finger may be displayed together with the display of the button image so that the player can recognize that the button is operated.

<End timing of button operation promotion effect>
In FIG. 63, as soon as the player operates the sub-input button SB, the button operation promotion effect (sub-input button light emission, button image display, button operation character display) is terminated, and the result display of one game story effect is performed. There is.

The button operation promotion effect (for example, a button image display imitating the sub input button SB) is a display that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB, and since the player is interested in the subsequent effect, the sub input button SB By ending the button operation promotion effect as soon as possible after operating, the subsequent effect can be made conspicuous.

When the player performs a button operation (stop button D40), such as when deleting the navigation image when the correct answer is given later (see FIG. 67), an effect or the like is generated and the navigation image is deleted immediately. It may not be done. Compared to such a case, it can be said that the erasing time of the button image display prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is shorter than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is correct.

Further, when the push order is incorrect, the effect or the like may not be generated and the navigation image may be deleted immediately. As in the case of the correct push order, the effect or the like may be generated and the navigation image may not be deleted immediately. It may be configured. In other words, the erase time of the button image display and the erase time of the navigation image at the time of incorrect answer can be the same (almost the same), or the erase time of the button image display can be pressed in any order. It is also possible to make the configuration shorter than the deletion time of the navigation image at the time of the correct answer.

Since the image displayed on the effect display device S40 is configured to be erased when the operation members such as the bet button D220 and the start lever D50 are operated to start the next game, these operation members are used. It will be erased as soon as it is operated. That is, it can be said that the erasing time when the sub input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are the same (substantially the same). ..

Note that the erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are substantially the same, for example, the main control. It includes a deviation of one or several cycles (for example, one cycle) of the timer interrupt processing of the board M. Specifically, when the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-control board S determines that the sub-input button SB has been operated and erases the button image, so that processing can be performed in a short time. On the other hand, when the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M determines that the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 has been operated, and issues a command to that effect to the sub control board S. Since the sub-control board S erases the button image after receiving the command, it takes some time to erase the button image. The erasing time when the sub-input button SB is operated to erase the button image display and the erasing time when the operating member is operated to erase the displayed image are substantially the same because of the difference in these processes. Includes differences.

Here, if the result of the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) is a hit, when the sub input button SB is operated, the button effect image is immediately deleted, while the lottery (role lottery, AT lottery, etc.) ) If the result is lost, for example, when the sub input button SB is operated, characters such as "defeat !?" are displayed on the effect display device S40, and the button image is erased with an effect. There are times. In the latter case, since the button image is erased together with the effect, the display time of the button image display may be longer than in the former case. In the latter case, the erasing time of the button image display should be shorter than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is correct, and should be the same as the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is incorrect. You can also. Further, in the latter case, the erasing time of the button image display can be configured to be longer than the erasing time of the navigation image when the pressing order is incorrect. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player understand that the display indicating the loss is displayed as a result of operating the sub input button SB.

<Mode of button operation promotion effect to promote button operation>
Next, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing another aspect for promoting the operation of the sub-input button SB by the button operation promotion effect described with reference to FIG. 63.

Since it is the same as in FIG. 63 until the third stop operation is performed, it is omitted.

When the third stop operation (here, the operation of the right stop button D43) is performed, the button operation promotion effect is performed. Here, as the sub-input button light emission, the light emission mode of the LED provided on the sub-input button SB is the lighting mode, and as the button image display, an image imitating the sub-input button SB is raised upward ( The character "Press the button!" Is displayed as the button operation character display on which the button image when not pressed) is displayed.

Next, when the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button image display displays an image in which an image imitating the sub-input button SB is lowered downward (pressed button image). In this way, the button image display is the display and sub-input of an image (button image when not pressed) in which an image imitating the sub-input button SB is raised upward until the player operates the sub-input button SB. The display of the image in which the image imitating the button SB is lowered downward (the button image when not pressed) is displayed alternately. That is, the display imitating the pressing operation (pressing mode) of the sub input button SB is repeatedly displayed.

Until the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-input button light emission continues to be lit, and the button operation character display continues to display the character "press the button!".

It should be noted that the sub-input button SB does not execute the same mode of suggesting an up / down operation as in the button image display. In other words, the sub-input button SB does not suggest an operation by repeatedly moving up and down. However, the vibration driven by the solenoid may be configured to be feasible by the vibration effect of the sub input button SB. In this case, when the pressing operation by displaying the button image is repeatedly displayed and the sub input button SB has not been operated yet, the sub input button SB does not vibrate, but the pressing operation by displaying the button image. Is displayed repeatedly, and when the sub-input button SB is operated, the sub-input button SB operates so as to vibrate up and down for a certain period of time.

By repeatedly displaying the pressing operation by displaying the button image, it is possible to clearly prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB without using a large display area of the effect display device S40. Further, since it is not necessary to use a large display area of the effect display device S40, the operation of pressing the sub input button SB is performed for another effect display other than the button image display such as the character display of "press the button!". It is possible to prevent the imitated display from being covered, and it is possible to prevent the display imitating the pressing operation of the sub-input button SB from interfering with other effect displays.

<Visibility of background image>
Next, FIG. 65 is another diagram showing the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device S40 when the button operation promotion effect described with reference to FIG. 63 is performed.

In FIG. 63, when the button operation promotion effect is performed, the button image display and the button operation character display displayed on the effect display device S40 are displayed on the front side of the background image “Pon!”. The visibility of the button image display and the button operation character display is higher than the visibility of the background image "Pon!", But the brightness of the button image display and the button operation character display and the brightness of the background image are They are about the same, or each is simply displayed with a preset brightness.

In order to improve the visibility of the button image display and the button operation character display, when the button image display and the button operation character display are performed on the effect display device S40, the background image is darkened to reduce the visibility of the background image. The button image display and the button operation character display may be configured to have high visibility.

For example, as a method of darkening the background image, there is a method of displaying a semi-transparent texture on the front side of the background image "Pon!" And on the back side of the button image display and the button operation character display. The background image may be unrecognizable due to the opaque black texture (background blackout).

Further, by whitening the background (whiteout of the background), the background image may be regarded as unrecognizable and the button image display and the button operation character display may be configured to be highly visible.

With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the sub-input button SB should be operated in the effect display device S40.

The sub-input button light emission may be in a blinking mode or a lighting mode as in FIG. 63.

(Visibility of background image and game progress display)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a case where the game progress status display is performed.

The game progress display is also referred to as a UI (user interface) display, and is a display of the number of acquired cards that displays bonuses and the number of payouts in AT, the number of bonus games, the number of AT games, the number of points used for games, and the normal game state game. Number, mini character display, etc. are included.

As can be seen from the figure showing the first stop operation to the third stop operation, the game progress display (here, the acquired number display and the number of AT games are displayed) is in front of the background image in the effect display device S40. Since it is displayed on the side layer, the game progress display is configured to be more visible than the background image. That is, when the game progress status display and the background image are displayed in duplicate, the game progress status display is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it.

Further, even after the third stop operation, the button operation promotion effect (button image display and button operation character display) is performed and the visibility of the background image is lowered (a translucent texture is displayed). Even in this case, the visibility of the game progress display is displayed without deterioration. That is, the game progress display is displayed on the frontmost layer. It is needless to say that the game progress display may be displayed at least on the layer on the front side of the button image display and the button operation display, and the layer on which the game progress is displayed is not particularly limited.

In other words, the button image display and the button operation character display have higher visibility than a part of the image (for example, the background image) of the image displayed on the effect display device S40, while being displayed on the effect display device S40. It is configured to be less visible than some other images (eg, game progress display).

In this way, the button image display and the button operation character display should be displayed so as to be as visible to the player as possible, and should be displayed with priority in order to encourage the player to operate the sub input button SB. .. However, since the display showing the progress of the game (game progress display) is related to the interests of the player, it is displayed with higher priority than the button image display and the button operation character display.

<Erase timing of displayed image>
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an erasing time of an image displayed on the effect display device S40. Since a part of FIG. 67 has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a case where the player operates the sub-input button SB after the button operation promotion effect is performed. When the player operates the sub input button SB, the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the sub input button SB is the button image display, the button operation character display, the acquired number of sheets display, the number of AT games, and the background. Images, opaque textures, etc. are erased immediately. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the UI (user interface) display may not be erased when the sub-input button SB is operated after the button operation promotion effect is executed.

When the image displayed on the effect display device S40 is deleted before the operation of the sub input button SB, an image showing the lottery result (win / fail lottery result, AT lottery result, etc.) is immediately displayed.

FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a case where the player operates the start lever D50 after the button operation promotion effect is performed. When the player operates the start lever D50 and the next game is started, the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the start lever D50, such as button image display, button operation character display, and acquisition number display, The number of AT games, background image, opaque texture, etc. are deleted immediately.

When the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the operation of the start lever D50 is erased, an image showing the lottery result (win / fail lottery result, AT lottery result, etc.) is immediately displayed.

FIG. 67 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the push order navigation is displayed and the corresponding stop button is operated. Here, first, the game is started by operating the start lever D50, and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40.

The push order navigation is displayed as "1", "2", and "3" in order from the left on the effect display device S40, and the stop button 40 (left stop button D41) is displayed in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53. , Middle stop button D42, right stop button D42) should be operated. The display of "1", "2", and "3" may be referred to as a navigation image, and only the area in which the numbers "1", "2", and "3" are displayed is referred to as a navigation image. Alternatively, the number "1" and the surrounding icon image (circular image in the figure) may be collectively referred to as a navigation image. The navigation image of "1" corresponding to the left reel M51, which is the reel to be stopped next, has a larger display area than the navigation images of "2" and "3".

Next, when the player operates the left stop button D41, the effect at the time of the correct answer in the push order is generated around "1" in the push order navigation.

Next, the effect of "1" in the push order navigation and the correct answer in the push order becomes smaller with the passage of time, and the color becomes lighter. After a while, the display of "1" and the effect is completely erased (faded out), and the display of "2" and "3" in the push order navigation remains.

When the display of "1" and the effect is completely erased, the display of "2" is displayed large to indicate that the middle stop button D42 should be operated next.

In this way, when the push order is correct, the navigation image is not immediately erased and fades out. When the push order is incorrect, the navigation image may be deleted immediately, or the navigation image may be faded out and erased in a shorter time than when the push order is correct. In addition, the time from the stop operation when the navigation image fades out to the time when all the navigation images are erased, rather than the time from the stop operation when the navigation image is erased immediately to the time when all the navigation images are erased. Is longer.

<Difference in displayed contents depending on the operation timing of the sub input button SB>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing that the content displayed on the effect display device S40 differs depending on the operation timing of the sub input button SB. It should be noted that the operation timing of the sub input button SB is different, for example, the game situation is different (when one game is not in progress and one game is not in progress), and the elapsed time from a predetermined trigger (from the operation of the third stop button). Elapsed time) is different, etc.

FIG. 68A shows a sub-input button at the operation timing of the sub-input button SB (a situation in which “press the button!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40) in one game after operating the start lever D50. It is a figure which shows the display content of the effect display device S40 when SB is operated. In FIG. 68A, the button image is displayed after all the stop buttons are operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before all the stop buttons are operated (after the start lever D50 is operated). , After the first stop operation, after the second stop operation, etc.), the button image may be displayed.

The game 1 is started by operating the start lever D50, and the image of "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed, and the button image display and the button operation character display are performed as the button operation promotion effect. Here, while the button operation promotion effect is being executed after the third stop operation is performed, it is described as being in one game (inside one game).

Next, the sub input button SB is operated to display the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.).

FIG. 68B is a diagram showing the display contents of the effect display device S40 when the sub-input button SB is operated when the third stop operation is performed and the game 1 is completed. Here, the case where one game is completed is described as after all the stop buttons are operated and the game end processing such as the payout process is executed. At the end of the game 1, the effect (excluding the button operation promotion effect) executed in the game 1 may be displayed.

The game of 1 has been completed, and the background of the normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At this time, the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed. Next, the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB.

A button image may be used to indicate that the menu screen is displayed by the button operation, but in this case, the operation of the sub input button SB is effective during the game of 1 as shown in FIG. 68 (A). It is preferable to display a button image of the same size or smaller than the button image display indicating that there is. Further, as described above, it is preferable not to display the display in the center of the screen of the effect display device S40 (because it is not important information such as hit notification or information related to the progress of the game).

As described above, the sub-input button SB has a function of being able to display different contents (images having different meanings) according to the operation timing. That is, here, when the sub input button SB is operated during the execution of one game, an image showing the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.) is displayed, and the one game is not executed. When the sub-input button SB is sometimes operated, a menu screen for customizing the effect of the gaming machine is displayed.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide different sub-input buttons for each operation timing and function, so that the cost can be reduced.

Next, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a case where the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub input button SB.

In FIG. 69 (A), the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub input button SB of FIG. 69 (A).

Specifically, as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display and a button operation character display are performed on the effect display device S40. At this time, a button image imitating the bet button D220 is displayed in the button image display. ing.

Next, by operating the bet button D220, a display showing the lottery result (for example, the winning / failing lottery result, the AT lottery result, etc.) is displayed.

In FIG. 69 (B), the bet button D220 is used instead of the sub input button SB of FIG. 68 (B).

Here, one game is completed, and the background of the normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device S40. At this time, the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed. Next, the menu screen is displayed by operating the bet button D220.

As described above, the bet button D220 may have a function capable of displaying different contents depending on the timing of operation.

The sub-input button SB and the bet button D220 may be used at times other than those described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. For example, as a so-called "hidden command", a lamp pattern suggesting a lottery result may be executed by operating the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220 when the button operation promotion effect is not performed. If the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB and the operation of the sub input button SB is enabled as a hidden command, the menu screen can be displayed even if the sub input button SB is operated. May be configured to enable the operation of the sub-input button SB as a hidden command during the period when is not displayed (the period during which the transition to the menu screen is invalid due to the operation of the sub-input button).

As described above, when one game is completed and the bet button D220 is operated while the background of the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device S40, the menu screen is displayed. , When the bet button D220 is operated, the menu screen is displayed when the number of credits is 0. The reason is that if the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is 1 or more and 1 is not in the game, it should function as a bet button, so it is not appropriate to display the menu screen. Because there is no such thing. Further, when the bet button D220 is operated, the menu screen may be displayed when the number of credits is less than the specified number set for each gaming state. In this case, in the game state where the game can be played only with 3 bets, the menu screen is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is less than 3, and in the game state where the game can be played only with 2 bets. When the bet button D220 is operated when the number of credits is less than 2, the menu screen will be displayed. Further, the menu screen may be displayed when the bet button D220 is operated in the state of automatic betting or in the state where a predetermined number of bets have already been placed. In this case, since the bet button D220 is in a bet state, the demo screen does not shift to the demo screen even if the time when the bet button D220 is not operated elapses, and the menu screen is displayed after the bet button D220 is operated for a predetermined time. It is possible that the demo screen will not be displayed even after the lapse of time.

When the sub input button SB or the bet button D220 is operated when displaying the menu screen, an operation sound indicating that the operation has been performed may be output, or an operation may be performed when displaying the menu screen. You may not output the sound.

<Difference in LED light emission mode of sub input button SB>
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing that the light emitting mode of the LED of the sub-input button SB differs depending on the timing at which the sub-input button SB can be operated (a situation in which the operation of the sub-input button SB is effective).

FIG. 70A is a diagram showing a button operation promotion effect when the sub input button SB can be operated in one game after operating the start lever D50.

First, the game 1 is started by operating the start lever D50, and the image of "Win the rock-paper-scissors !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed, and as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display, a button operation character display, and a sub input button light emission are performed.

The button operation promotion effect continues to be executed until the player operates the sub-input button SB. In detail, the button image display and the button operation character display continue to be displayed, and the sub-input button emission continues with all lights lit.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB can be operated in one game, the LED of the sub-input button SB is fully lit as a button operation promotion effect.

FIG. 70B is a diagram showing a button operation promotion effect when the sub input button SB can be operated when the third stop operation is performed and one game is completed.

The game of 1 has been completed, and the background of the normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device S40. When the sub-input button SB can be operated, as a button operation promotion effect, a light emitting mode (predetermined light-emitting pattern) different from the case where the sub-input button SB can be operated in the game where the LED of the sub-input button SB is 1. It emits light at. Here, first, the left half of the LED of the sub input button SB is lit. As in FIG. 68B, the characters "The menu screen is displayed by button operation" are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40, but the button image is not displayed.

Next, since the sub-input button SB has not yet been operated by the player, the button operation promotion effect is continued, and the right half of the LED of the sub-input button SB is lit.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB can be operated after the end of one game, the LED of the sub-input button SB is blinking so that the left half and the right half are alternately lit as a button operation promotion effect. It emits light in an embodiment.

Other differences in light emission modes include different light emission colors, different blinking (blinking) speeds, and different brightness.

As described above, the LED of the sub-input button SB may emit light in a different emission pattern depending on the operable situation. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what kind of function can be executed by operating the sub input button SB. Further, since it is easier to recognize that the LED of the sub-input button SB is emitting light in the full lighting mode than in the blinking mode, the player considers that the full lighting mode is a situation in which the sub-input button SB should be operated. It is possible to intuitively distinguish the situation where the sub input button SB may be operated.

It should be noted that the functions indicated by the full lighting and blinking modes may be opposite to the above description. That is, all lighting may indicate that the sub-input button SB may be operated, and the blinking mode may indicate that the sub-input button SB should be operated.

<Difference in button operation promotion effect when there are two sub input buttons>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a difference between the execution mode and the execution timing of the button operation promotion effect when the sub input button SB and the sub input button SB3 are provided. In FIG. 71, for the sake of simplification of the figure, the sub input button SB3 is schematically shown to be attached to the same member as the start lever D50 and the stop button D42, but in reality, the sub input button is shown. The SB3 is preferably attached to the lower panel D140 or the like. Further, by configuring the lower panel unit including the lower panel D140 and the structure such as the support supporting the lower panel D140 to be pressable, the lower panel unit may be used as the sub input button SB3.

FIG. 71A is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the effect display device S40 when the sub input button SB becomes operable in one game after operating the start lever D50.

When the third stop operation (here, the right stop button D43) is performed by the player, as a button operation promotion effect, a button image display that displays a button image imitating the sub input button SB and "press the button!" Button operation to display characters Characters are displayed.

Next, the sub-input button SB is operated by the player, so that the result display showing the lottery result is performed.

FIG. 71B is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the effect display device S40 when the sub input button SB3 becomes operable in one game after operating the start lever D50.

When the third stop operation (here, the right stop button D43) is performed by the player, a button image imitating the sub input button SB3 is performed as a button operation promotion effect. At this time, after the third stop operation is performed, the third stop operation shown in FIG. 71A is performed at the timing when the button image imitating the sub input button SB3, which is the button operation promotion effect, is displayed. After that, the button image imitating the sub input button SB is displayed at a later timing than the display timing. In addition, in FIG. 71, each figure of FIGS. 71A and 71B is described in chronological order from the left, and the interval in the left-right direction of each figure indicates a time interval. Therefore, in the third figure from the left in FIG. 71 (A) and the third figure from the left in FIG. 71 (B), the latter is described so as to be positioned so as to be offset to the right. It indicates that the timing is delayed. Further, the leftmost figure of FIG. 71 (A) and the leftmost figure of FIG. 71 (B) are located at the same position when viewed in the left-right direction, and the above display timings are simultaneous. Shows. The same applies to other figures. As other display timings, for example, in the third figure from the left in FIG. 71 (A) and the third figure from the left in FIG. 71 (B), the timing at which the button image is displayed on the effect display device S40 is different. There is. In the former, the button image (an image imitating the sub input button SB) and the button operation character display are displayed when the first time elapses from the operation of the third stop button, while the latter is the third stop button. A button image (an image imitating the sub input button SB3) is displayed when the second time has elapsed from the operation. In other words, in the former, the valid period of the operation of the effect button (sub input button SB) starts when the first time elapses from the operation of the third stop button, but in the latter, the operation of the third stop button is the third. When 2 hours have passed, the valid period of the operation of the effect button (sub input button SB3) starts. The first hour is shorter than the second hour.

When the operation of the sub input button SB3 is valid, the time difference between the first time and the second time is used to display a display that enlarges the button arrangement location from the pull image (full display) of the housing. Or by using the lamp of the housing, the lamps arranged from the effect display device S40 to the position of the sub-input button SB3 are lit in order to guide the player's line of sight. Since the operation of the SB3 is effective, the configuration may be such that it is easy to recognize that the sub input button SB3 should be operated.

When the sub input button SB3 can be operated, the button operation characters may not be displayed and the button image may be displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device S40. Here, the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device S40, which is larger than when the button image imitating the sub-input button SB is displayed. Further, when the operation of the sub-input button SB3 is valid (when FIG. 71 (B)), the voice which is not generated when the operation of the sub-input button SB is valid (when FIG. 71 (A)) is generated. It may be configured to be output. For example, when the operation of the sub input button SB becomes effective, the characters displayed on the effect display device S40 are output by voice (here, "press the button"), but the operation of the sub input button SB3 becomes effective. Occasionally, a voice saying "press" may be output, which is different from when the operation of the sub input button SB is enabled.

Next, the sub-input button SB3 is operated by the player, so that the result display showing the lottery result is performed.

When the sub input button SB can be operated in one game as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the sub input button SB3 can be operated in one game as shown in FIG. 71 (B). The winning expectation (winning expectation, AT winning expectation) is relatively low (relatively low, the average winning expectation is low).

In this way, when the sub-input button SB3 with a relatively high expectation of hitting can be operated, the timing at which the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is displayed and the sub-input button SB with a relatively low expectation of winning are displayed. When the operation of is possible, the timing at which the button image imitating the sub input button SB is displayed is configured to be displayed at a different timing, in other words, the sub after the third stop operation is performed. Make the time A until the button image imitating the input button SB is displayed different from the time B until the button image imitating the sub input button SB3 is displayed after the third stop operation is performed (time). By configuring A <time B or time A> time B), the player has a sense of expectation for the display timing of the button image.

The time until the sub-input button SB is operated and the result is displayed and the time until the sub-input button SB3 is operated and the result is displayed may be the same or different.

<Display position of sub-input button SB and button image / Display position of sub-input button SB3 and button image>
As shown in FIG. 71 (B), when the sub input button SB3 can be operated, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display a large button image imitating the sub input button SB3. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing another example of the display mode of the button image display displayed when each button is operable in the configuration including the sub input button SB and the sub input button SB3.

FIG. 72 (A) is a case where the sub input button SB can be operated, and is the same as FIG. 71 (A), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (B) shows a case where the sub input button SB3 can be operated, but FIG. 71 (B) shows a display mode and a display position of a button image imitating the sub input button SB3 which is a button image display. It's different.

Specifically, in FIG. 72 (B), the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 is smaller than the button image imitating the sub-input button SB3 described in FIG. 71 (B). Further, in FIG. 71 (B), a button image imitating the sub input button SB3 was displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device S40, but in FIG. 72 (B), the button image imitating the sub input button SB3 is displayed. It is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

In this way, when the sub-input button SB3 is provided to the right of the center of the gaming machine main body, the button image display (button image imitating the sub-input button SB3) displayed on the effect display device S40 is also larger than the center. It may be configured to be displayed on the right side.

It is also assumed that the sub input button SB is not provided in the center. When the sub input button SB is provided on the right side of the center, the button image display (button image imitating the sub input button SB) displayed on the effect display device S40 may also be displayed on the right side of the center. Often, when the sub input button SB is provided on the left side of the center, the button image display (button image imitating the sub input button SB) displayed on the effect display device S40 is also displayed on the left side of the center. May be.

In this way, by associating the display position of the button image with the position of the sub-input button to be operated, the player should operate the sub-input button SB or the sub-input button SB3. You can intuitively grasp whether it is a situation.

<< Display mode of continuous image >>
Next, the display mode of the continuation screen will be described. The display mode of the continuation screen described here can be appropriately applied to other embodiments described later.

Here, in a continuous production that is continued over a plurality of games, a display mode of a display (hereinafter, referred to as “continuation image”) indicating that the continuous production is continued or may be continued in the next game will be described. do.

<Display method of continuous image>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous image method. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result is started. Here, the characters "Repel the shark!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, and the continuous effect is started.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark is swimming from right to left is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark is swimming from left to right is performed.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display in which the shark continues to swim is performed.

Here, since the continuous effect is continued in the next game, the character "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect is continued in the next game is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40. Here, the characters "NEXT" displayed faintly from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 are displayed so as to move, and are displayed in an easily visible state (also referred to as a materialized state) in the lower right. ing. When moving from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the characters in the continuous image because the characters are thinner, translucent, and effects are generated than when they are displayed in the lower right. It is sometimes called a temporary display image. The continuous image may be displayed in the upper part of the effect display device S40 instead of the lower part, and may be displayed in a part (partial area) of the image display device S40.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the second game of continuous production is started. Here, a production display is performed in which a human is riding a boat and chasing a shark.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and since the human and the shark have encountered each other, an effect display showing that the shark is surprised is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display in which a human is trying to defeat a shark by throwing a spear is performed.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display is performed in which the thrown spear does not hit the shark. At this time, when continuing to the next game (third game), the characters "NEXT" (temporary display image) displayed faintly from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 are the same as in the first game. Is displayed as if moving, and is displayed in a materialized state at the lower right.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the third game of continuous production is started.

In the third game, when the start lever D50 is operated, the first stop operation is performed, and the second stop operation is performed, the effect display is performed in the same manner as in the second game, and the lottery result is displayed during the third stop operation (hereinafter,). (Also called continuous production result display) is performed.

Here, at the time of the third stop operation, the characters "Repel!" Indicates that the shark has been repelled, indicating that the shark has been elected. On the other hand, if it is not won, the characters such as "Failure !?" are displayed to indicate that it was not won. It is preferable that the characters "Repel!" Are displayed at different positions from the display positions such as "Failure !?". As a result, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the display indicating that the player has won (“repel!”) And the display indicating that the player has not won (“failure !?”).

Although an example of continuing until the third game has been described here, it is not always necessary to continue until the third game, and the lottery result is obtained by repelling the shark in the production display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game. (Winning / non-winning) may be displayed, or in the production display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game, the production display in which the thrown spear did not hit the shark is performed, and the next game is started. It may be shown that the lottery result was not won by returning to the background screen of the normal game state by operating the lever D50.

Further, in order to show the possibility that the continuous effect is continued to the next game, a plurality of patterns of continuous images may be provided. For example, in order to incite whether or not to continue until the third game in the second game, in the production display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game, the continuation image is not "NEXT" but "NEXT?" "NEXT! It may be displayed as "?". In such a configuration, the degree of expectation to continue to the third game is NEXT? <NEXT! ?? <may be NEXT.

Although the case where the third game is the effect display by the same progress as the second game is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second game and the third game may be different effect displays. For example, if the expectation of repelling a shark in the third game is higher than that of repelling the shark in the second game, the effect display of the third game can be set to the effect display with a high expectation, and the start lever D50. The distance to the shark during the operation may be short, the shark displayed during the first stop operation may be small, the spear displayed during the second stop operation may be large, and the like.

In this way, when the continuous image is displayed on the effect display device S40, the direction of the operation (start lever D50 → left stop button D41 → middle stop button D42 → right stop button D43) in which the player mainly advances the game. By displaying in the same direction as (left → right), the player can recognize the continuous image without discomfort.

<Supplement>
After the third stop operation is performed in the first game and the second game, the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is continuously displayed until the start lever D50 for starting the next game is operated. To. That is, even if the bet button D220 is operated, the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is not erased, and when an appropriate start lever D50 operation (bet operation → start lever operation) is performed, the third stop lever operation is performed. The effect display displayed by the stop operation is deleted. Therefore, the continuous image is also erased when the appropriate start lever D50 is operated.

On the other hand, the display such as "Repel!" Showing the lottery result may be deleted when the bet button D220 is operated after the third stop operation is performed, and is appropriate as in the continuous image. It may be configured to erase when the start lever D50 is operated.

Further, as the display timing of the continuous image, the characters "NEXT" are difficult to see from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button for the third stop is turned on to off. It may be configured to start the display in which the moving display device S40 is moved, or it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display device S40 from the lower left to the lower right after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button for the third stop is turned on. May be configured to start the display in which the character "NEXT" moves. Further, the display timing (display trigger) of the continuous image may be different depending on the type of continuous effect.

<Change example>
An example of displaying a continuous image (“NEXT”) so as to move from the lower left to the lower right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fade is displayed from the outside of the screen on the right side of the effect display device S40 to the lower right. It may be displayed to be in. That is, it may be displayed so as to move to the left. Further, it may be displayed so as to move to another place after fading in so that it is displayed from the outside of the screen below the effect display device S40 to the center of the lower part. In this case, since the continuous image is moved in a direction different from the direction of the movement in which the player mainly advances the game, the player can easily pay attention to the continuous image by the movement of the continuous image.

<First end timing of BGM during continuous production>
Next, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM when the demo screen (demo effect, demo display) / menu screen is displayed during the continuous effect.

Since the progress of the effect display in the first game is the same as in FIG. 73, the progress is omitted. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, the continuous effect is started, and when the continuous effect is started, the continuous effect BGM is started. Output starts.

After that, the first stop operation (here, the left stop button D41), the second stop operation (here, the left stop button D42), and the third stop operation (here, the left stop button D43) are performed, but the continuous effect is performed. BGM is continuously output.

If the start lever D50, which triggers the start of the next game, is not operated after the third stop operation is performed, the display of the effect display displayed by the third stop operation is continued, and the output of the continuous effect BGM is also continued. The liver.

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop operation is performed, the demo screen is displayed. When the demo screen is displayed, the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped, the output of the BGM is started during the demo, or the BGM is not output and there is no sound.

On the other hand, if the sub input button SB or the like is operated before the predetermined time elapses after the third stop operation is performed, the menu screen is displayed. When the menu screen is displayed, the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped, the output of the BGM in the menu is started, or the BGM is not output and there is no sound, as in the case where the demo screen is displayed.

The demo screen or menu screen is displayed on the layer on the front side of the continuous effect display. That is, only the demo screen or the menu screen can be visually recognized by the player, and the effect screen of the continuous effect cannot be visually recognized, but the effect display of the continuous effect is actually performed.

When the demo screen or the menu screen is displayed, the effect display of the continuous effect may be deleted.

When the display of the demo screen or the menu screen is finished, the effect display of the continuous effect that was displayed before the demo screen or the menu screen is displayed is performed. However, the output of the continuous effect BGM is not restarted at this timing, and is restarted when the start lever D50, which is the start of the next game, is operated.

In this way, by continuously outputting the BGM until the screen is switched to another display screen without stopping the BGM immediately during the continuous production, the continuous production may be advantageous to the player. It can be suggested that it is better to continue the game without leaving the seat on the way.

<Second end timing of BGM during continuous production>
Next, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the end timing of the continuous effect BGM when the result of the continuous effect is displayed.

Since the progress of the effect display is the same as in FIG. 73, it will be omitted. As described with reference to FIG. 74, when the player operates the start lever D50, the continuous effect is started, and when the continuous effect is started, the output of the continuous effect BGM is started.

After that, since the continuous production is continued, the output of the continuous production BGM is also continued. When the third stop operation (here, the operation of the right stop button D43) of the third game is performed, the continuous effect result display (here, the character display of "repel!", The victory pose of the character) is performed.

When the third stop operation is performed, the continuous effect result display is performed and the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped. That is, when the continuous effect result display is performed, the BGM is not output, and only the SE (sound effect) is output.

As a supplement, BGM (buckwound music) is music that plays as the background of the main body. For example, a normal game BGM played from the start of one game, a BGM in a big bonus played during a big bonus, a BGM in AT played during AT, and the like are included. These BGMs are often played in a loop, and after playing to the end of the music, some of them are played from the beginning again. SE is also called a sound effect, and is a sound used to explain a sound or a state added as a part of a production. SE includes not only short sounds but also long sounds to some extent. For example, even if the SE indicating the end of the big hit, the SE indicating the end of the consecutive villa, the SE indicating the end of the AT, and the like are composed of sounds that are somewhat long, they may be included. Further, although the SE may include a melody, loop reproduction is not performed.

In addition, the continuous production result display is performed and the SE indicating the lottery result is output, but when the lottery result is won, the SE indicating that the lottery result is won (for example, the SE with the impression of being lively, bright, or flashy) is displayed. When the lottery result is not won, an SE indicating that the lottery result is not won (for example, an SE with an impression of loneliness, darkness, or soberness) is output. SEs with a lively, bright, and flashy impression are generally characterized by a major melody, clear sounds, many high notes, a large number of sounds used, and a fast tempo. On the other hand, SEs with the impression of loneliness, darkness, and soberness are generally characterized by minor melody, unclear sounds, many basses, few sounds used, slow tempo, and so on.

In this way, by stopping the output of the continuous effect BGM when the continuous effect result display is performed (during the third stop operation of the third game), the effect display (in the middle of the continuous effect) up to this point is different. , It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the continuous effect result display is displayed.

When the continuous effect result display is performed, the lottery result can be further recognized by the lamp (for example, LED) of the gaming machine. For example, when the lottery result is won, the lamp of the gaming machine is in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, and when the lottery result is not won, the lamp of the gaming machine is turned off as a whole. That is, when the lottery result is won and the lottery result is not won, it is configured to be relatively bright when the lottery result is won, and relatively dark when the lottery result is not won.

<Display position of continuous image and display position of continuous effect result display>
Similarly, with reference to FIG. 75, the display position of the continuous image and the display position of the continuous effect result display will be described. As described above, the progress of the effect display is the same as that in FIG. 73, and thus is omitted.

At the time of the third stop operation of the first game and the third stop operation of the second game, the continuous image "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

On the other hand, at the time of the third stop operation of the third game, the characters "Repel!", Which is the continuous effect result display, are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40.

In this way, the display position of the continuous image and the display position of the continuous effect result display may be different from each other. It is easier for the player to recognize the display that shows the same meaning to the player even if they are different games, such as "NEXT" in the first game and the second game, in the same position. Since it is the final game, by displaying "Repel!" At a display position different from "NEXT", the player can easily recognize that the meanings of "NEXT" and "Repel!" Are different.

<Display mode of continuous image and continuous production result display>
Next, the display mode of the continuous image and the continuous effect result display in each continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuous effect (second continuous effect: flower continuous effect) different from the continuous effect (first continuous effect: shark continuous effect) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. First, when the player operates the start lever D50, a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result is started. Here, the characters "Bloom flowers!" Are displayed on the effect display device S40, and continuous effect is started.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display with seeds under the ground is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated to display the germination effect.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and an effect display is performed in which the flowers do not bloom and the buds remain.

Here, since the continuous effect is continued in the next game, the character "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect is continued in the next game is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the second game of continuous production is started. Here, an effect display in which rain clouds are generated is performed.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the first stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the first stop operation, the left stop button D41 is operated, and an effect display in which it rains is performed.

Next, when the second stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the second stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the second stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is operated, and an effect display in which it is raining and thunder is being performed is performed.

Next, when the third stop operation is performed, the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game is performed. Here, as the third stop operation, the right stop button D43 is operated, and as the continuous effect result display, the effect display in which flowers have bloomed and the display of "flowering!" Are performed.

Although not shown, when an appropriate start lever D50 is operated next and the game progresses to the next game, if it is notified by the continuous production result display of the previous game that the game is won, then the game is won. An effect display (for example, "BONUS confirmed" or "Congratulations" is displayed, the lamp of the gaming machine is in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, etc.) is displayed to clearly indicate that the game is not won in the continuous effect result display of the previous game. After being notified that the game is in the normal game state, a transition display (for example, a blackout display, a motif character display, and a gaming machine lamp is turned off) indicating that the continuous production has ended is performed. The background image is displayed.

Comparing the display modes of the continuous images of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, the continuous image displayed in the first continuous effect (“NEXT”) and the continuous image displayed in the second continuous effect (“NEXT”) are compared. It has the same display as "NEXT").

On the other hand, when comparing the display modes of the continuous effect result display of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, the continuous effect result display (“repel!”) Displayed in the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are displayed. The display is different from the continuous production result display (“flowering!”) Displayed.

In this way, since the continuous production has a relatively high expectation of winning compared to other productions, the player can grasp the rules of the gaming machine by using a common mode even for different continuous productions. It becomes easier to pay attention to the displayed effect. Since the effect result display is the final result display in the continuous effect, it becomes easier for the player to grasp whether the player has won or not by performing the display according to the continuous effect.

<Number of continuous productions and expectation of winning>
In the first continuous effect (shark continuous effect) described with reference to FIG. 75 and the like, a continuous image can be displayed up to two times. On the other hand, in the second continuous effect (flower continuous effect) described with reference to FIG. 76, a continuous image can be displayed up to once.

The winning expectation is configured so that the first continuous production is higher than the second continuous production.

Further, in the first continuous effect, the winning expectation when the continuous image is displayed twice is configured to be higher than the winning expectation when the continuous image is displayed once.

In this way, the higher the number of continuous images, the higher the expectation of winning.

By providing a continuous effect in which the maximum number of continuous images is different, the player will expect not only which continuous effect is displayed but also how many times the continuous image is displayed.

<Display priority of continuous image and game progress display>
Next, the display priority of the continuous image and the game progress display will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as in FIG. 73, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 77, the game progress status display, which was not displayed in FIG. 73, is performed. Here, the acquired number of sheets is displayed in the lower left of the effect display device S40, and the number of AT games is displayed in the lower right of the effect display device S40. ing.

The game progress display is set to have a higher display priority than other displays (for example, effect display, continuous image, continuous effect result display, etc.). Specifically, the display position of the continuous image "NEXT" and the display position of the AT game number display of the game progress status overlap, but the game progress status display is displayed with priority over the continuous image. (Displayed on the layer on the front side), the display of the number of AT games is completely visible to the player, but a part of "NEXT" is not visible to the player.

In this way, when displaying the profit (for example, the number of acquired sheets) and the information about the profit (for example, the number of AT games) acquired by the player, by displaying the information in preference to the other displays, the other display can be performed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the profit cannot be recognized because it is hidden behind the display.

When the game progress display and the continuous image are displayed in duplicate, the display priority of the continuous image may be set high and the continuous image may be displayed with priority. This makes it possible to clearly recognize the continuous image indicating that the next game is continued.

Here, the configuration in which the game progress status display and the continuation image overlap has been described, but the game progress status display and the continuation image may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap so as not to reduce the visibility of any of the displays. For example, a continuous image may be displayed above the game progress display. In this case, the continuous image can be displayed at an arbitrary position away from the game progress display regardless of the distance from the game progress display.

<Display area of telop display and continuous image>
Next, the telop display and the display area of the continuous image will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as in FIG. 73, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 78, a telop display relating to a continuous effect that was not displayed in FIG. 73 or the like is performed. The telop display is displayed according to which stop operation (first stop operation to third stop operation) of which game of the continuous effect is performed.

The telop display is displayed at the lower part of the effect display device S40, and the size of the display area varies depending on the number of displayed characters.

It is preferable to configure the telop display and the continuous image so that they do not overlap. Specifically, since the continuous image is not displayed during the first stop operation and the second stop operation, it is possible to display a longer number of characters than during the third stop operation. On the other hand, since the continuous image is displayed during the third stop operation, it is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than during the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and is configured so as not to overlap with the continuous image.

In a gaming machine having a large number of characters in the telop display displayed during the third stop operation, it is preferable that the telop display is first performed after the third stop operation, the telop display is erased, and then the continuous image is displayed. That is, the period from the start to the end of the telop display and the period from the start to the end of the display of the continuous image are made different from each other (the timing of the telop display and the timing of the display of the continuous image are different from each other). Is preferable. With this configuration, the player can clearly see each display without deteriorating the visibility of both the telop display and the continuous image.

In addition, the telop display and the continuous image may be overlapped, and the continuous image may be preferentially displayed. As described above, in general, the more the continuous production is continued, the higher the expectation of winning is. Therefore, the continuous image showing that the next game is continued is of high importance as the production display. Therefore, it is preferable to set the display priority so that the player can clearly recognize it.

<Display mode of continuous image>
Next, the display mode of the continuous image after the third stop operation will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Since the progress of the effect display is the same as in FIG. 78, it will be omitted.

In FIG. 79, after the third stop operation of the first game (here, the right stop button D43) is performed (see the rightmost figure in the upper row in FIG. 79), the start for starting the second game. The lever D50 has not been operated (see each figure in the middle row in FIG. 79).

In the effect display device S40, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation of the first game, is performed, the telop display and the continuous image corresponding to the third stop operation are displayed. In the background, there is an effect display in which a shark is swimming.

After that, since the start lever D50 for starting the second game has not been operated, the display of the shark swimming left and right and the effect display emphasizing the continuous image "NEXT" change with the passage of time. ing.

The effect display that emphasizes "NEXT" is a display in which the light rotates clockwise around the characters of "NEXT".

Since the telop display does not change with the passage of time from the third stop operation, the "Can you do it !?" displayed during the third stop operation continues to be displayed.

For the production display (display that the shark is swimming left and right, continuous image (“NEXT”) and effect display that emphasizes the continuous image, telop display, etc.), the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game. It will continue to be displayed until the demo screen or the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when the demo screen is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time after the third stop (when the stop button that becomes the third stop is turned on → off, after the payout of the game medal is completed, and after the automatic bet related to the replay is completed). However, it may be configured to have a case where the demo screen is displayed and a case where the demo screen is not displayed depending on the lapse of time from the third stop depending on the game state.

In this way, when the start operation to the next game is not performed, the player is expected to win by emphasizing the continuation image indicating that the next game is continued or may be continued by an effect or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being quit during the high continuous production.

The display that emphasizes the continuous image is not limited to this, and the continuous image lights up / blinks due to the effect, the surroundings of the continuous image light / blink due to the effect, the continuous image moves (for example, moves left and right), and the continuous image moves. May change (for example, change to large or small).

<Display timing of telop display and continuous image during continuous production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the display timing of the telop display and the continuous image displayed at the time of the third stop operation will be specifically described. Since the process from the start of the continuous effect to the second stop operation of the first game is the same as in FIG. 78, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third stop operation of the first game is performed, the telop display is first performed. Here, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation, is operated, the telop display of "Can you do it !?" is performed prior to the display of the continuous image, and "NEXT" shown in FIG. 78 or the like. Is not yet displayed.

Next, with the passage of time, a continuous image is displayed. Here, after the telop display is performed, "NEXT" indicating that the next game is continued with the passage of time is displayed. At this time, the telop display is continuously displayed.

Similarly, in the second game, when the third stop operation is performed, the telop display is first performed. Here, when the right stop button D43, which is the third stop operation, is performed, the telop display of "No ..." is performed prior to the continuous image, and "NEXT" is not displayed yet.

Next, with the passage of time, a continuous image is displayed. Here, after the telop display is performed, "NEXT" indicating that the next game is continued with the passage of time is displayed. At this time, the telop display is continuously displayed.

In this way, by configuring the configuration in which the telop is first displayed and then the continuous image is displayed at the time of the third stop operation, the player pays attention to the continuous image showing the possibility of continuing to the next game. ..

The effect display (background image, telop display, continuous image) displayed on the effect display device S40 is until the start lever D50 for starting the next game is operated, until the demo screen is displayed, or the menu screen. It will continue to be displayed until. For example, even if a specific period (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the third stop operation, the demo screen will not be displayed if the predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has not elapsed, so that the effect display is displayed. Is continuously displayed, and the effect display is not invisible.

<Display mode until the continuous image is displayed>
FIG. 81A produces a moving image in which only the movement of something can be visually recognized without visually displaying characters or the like so as to move from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40. It is a figure which displays so that it moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display device S40, and shows how a continuous image is displayed when the lower right is reached.

When the time t1 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image (here, it cannot be recognized as the character "NEXT" in the lower left of the effect display device S40, what is it? An image) that the player can recognize only the movement of the lever is displayed.

Next, when the time t2 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is displayed near the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t3 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t4 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the moving image is erased and the continuous image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, FIG. 81B moves an image different from the continuous image (“pre-change image” in which the player can recognize what is moving) from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40. It is a figure which shows how the continuation image is displayed when it reaches the lower right.

When the time t1 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image (here, the baseball ball image) is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t2 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is displayed near the center of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t3 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is displayed in the lower right of the effect display device S40.

Next, when the time t4 elapses after the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the pre-change image is erased and the continuous image is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device S40.

With this configuration, the player's attention is directed to the moving moving image and the pre-change image, so that the player can easily recognize the continuous image displayed thereafter.

The display start position of the moving image or the pre-change image described with reference to FIGS. 81 (A) and 81 (B) is not limited to the above-mentioned position, and fades in from outside the display area of the effect display device S40 to the lower left. The display of the image at the time of moving or the image before the change may be started. Further, the display of the moving image and the pre-change image may be started so as to fade in from the lower center of the effect display device S40 toward the lower right. That is, the start position of the moving image or the pre-change image may be any location within or outside the region of the effect display device S40.

The display mode of the moving image or the pre-change image described with reference to FIGS. 81 (A) and 81 (B) can be appropriately used in the present specification as long as there is no contradiction. For example, when "NEXT" is displayed in FIGS. 73 to 80, a moving image or a pre-change image can be used.

Next, the display position of the pre-change image (or the moving image) and the push order navigation will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (C).

First, the display area of the pre-change image at the display start position of the pre-change image overlaps at least a part of the display area of the left stop navigation which is the push order navigation corresponding to the left stop button D41.

Next, when the first predetermined time (for example, time t2) has elapsed since the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 is performed, the display area of the pre-change image is the pressing order corresponding to the middle stop button D42. At least a part of the display area of the middle stop navigation that is the navigation overlaps.

Next, when the second predetermined time (for example, time t3) has elapsed since the third stop operation or the operation of the start lever D50 was performed, the display area of the pre-change image is the pressing order corresponding to the right stop button D43. At least a part of the display area of the right stop navigation, which is the navigation, overlaps.

The display area of the continuous display and the display area of the right stop navigation, which is the push order navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, may be configured so that at least a part thereof overlaps.

However, since the display of the moving image or the pre-change image is started after the push order navigation is deleted after the third stop operation, between after the third stop operation and before the operation of the game start lever D50, The push order navigation (left stop navigation, middle stop navigation, right stop navigation) and the moving image, pre-change image, or continuous display will not be displayed in duplicate.

In this way, the display area of the moving image or the pre-change image and the display area of the push order navigation may overlap, but by starting the display of the moving image or the pre-change image after the third stop operation, the push order navigation It is possible to configure the structure so that neither the visibility of the moving image nor the visibility of the moving image or the image before the change is deteriorated.

When the telop display described with reference to FIG. 78 is performed, the telop display continues to be displayed even after the third stop operation, so that the telop display may be displayed overlapping with the moving image or the pre-change image. When the telop display and the moving image or the pre-change image are displayed in an overlapping manner, the telop display may be displayed with priority, or the moving image or the pre-change image may be displayed with priority.

<< Change example 1 from the first embodiment >>
Next, a modified example 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a transition diagram of the main gaming state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the first embodiment, and FIGS. 83 and 84 show the rotating cylinder according to the change example 1 from the first embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect performed by the effect display device in the type gaming machine. Note that FIG. 82 shows a simple sub-transition state as well as a main game state.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the modified example 1, the main gaming state generally has <normal section> and <advantageous section>, and in the <advantageous section>, the normal state (non-AT in progress state) ( It is a general term for the normal state even in the sub state) and the AT state (in other words, the game state in which AT can be executed, and this may be simply referred to as "AT" or "AT state" hereafter. The first AT, which is an AT, and the second AT, which is in an AT-in-progress state which is more advantageous to the player than the first AT, and whether to shift to the first AT or to shift to the second AT after the end of the first first AT. The first CZ that draws whether or not to move, and the second CZ that shifts after the end of the second and subsequent first ATs or after the end of the second AT and draws whether to return to the first AT or move to the second AT. Have.

<Normal state of advantageous section>
By winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the <normal section>, the AT is executed in the normal state of the <advantageous section> (in this modification example 1, the normal state of this <advantageous section> is the advantageous section. It is a state in which the transition to the first AT and the second AT is lower than the decrease section described later, and the state related to the AT is a normal state). When the normal state of this <advantageous section> is entered, the counting of the advantageous section clear counter (counting the number of games) is started. In this normal state, it is a specification to perform a so-called periodic lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first AT every predetermined number of periodic games (for example, 50G or the like). Specifically, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first AT is performed for each game between the number of predetermined cycle games, and if the game is won, the transition to the first AT is performed in the last game of the predetermined cycle number of games. It is designed to notify whether or not to do so. In addition, if you win the transition lottery for the 1st AT of each game, a freeze lottery will be held to determine whether or not to generate a freeze. If you do not win this freeze lottery, you will be transferred to the 1st AT while winning the freeze lottery. If this is the case, a freeze will occur in the winning game, and the effect display device S40 or the like will perform an effect corresponding to the freeze to notify that the game will shift to the second AT, which is more advantageous than the first AT. After shifting to the second AT, the second AT is started from the next game of the game. Further, when shifting from the normal section to a new advantageous section, it may be configured to shift to the first CZ or the second CZ. The normal state may be referred to as a non-AT state or a normal gaming state.

As for the periodic lottery, as described above, the transition lottery was performed in each game, but instead of this, for example, a lottery for whether or not to shift to AT in the first game is performed, and the AT is won. If so, it will be notified in the last game (Specification 1), or in the first half of the number of games with a predetermined cycle, a transition lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to AT, and in the second half. , After performing an effect to incite whether or not to shift to the first AT, notify whether or not to shift to the first AT (Specification 2), or to notify each game during a predetermined cycle number of games, a predetermined point. When the predetermined number of points reaches the predetermined number of points, a lottery method is used, such as notifying that the game will shift to the first AT at an appropriate timing and shifting to the first AT (Specification 3). It is possible. Further, in the case of the above-mentioned specifications 1 and 2, when the AT is won in the first game or the first half part, and in the case of the above-mentioned specification 3, when the predetermined number of points is reached, the same freeze lottery as described above is performed. If you win this freeze lottery, the freeze will be suspended and the freeze will occur when you notify that the AT has won, such as the timing of the last game or the second half. You can let it do. In short, it suffices to be notified by freeze before shifting to AT, and if the freeze lottery is won, it may be notified immediately, or it may be held once and then the freeze effect may be executed in a later game.

In this modification example 1, when the number of predetermined cycle games is one cycle and this cycle is the tenth cycle (the cycle from the 450th game to the 500th game after shifting to the advantageous section), this tenth cycle is the ceiling. As a cycle, the first AT is always won. In other words, the 1st to 9th cycles are in the normal cycle state, the 10th cycle is in the ceiling cycle state, and when the predetermined number of games in the 10th cycle has elapsed, either the 1st or 2nd AT is used. It is designed to move to. Further, in the present modification 1, the specification is such that the above-mentioned freeze is more likely to occur in the ceiling cycle state than in the normal cycle state. Specifically, when a freeze lottery is executed in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won in a normal cycle state, if the winning probability is, for example, 1/10, the ceiling cycle. When the freeze lottery is executed in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won in the state, the winning probability is set to 1/3, so that the ceiling cycle state is better than the normal cycle state. , It can be realized by increasing the winning probability in the freeze lottery.

The number of games in one cycle does not have to be fixed. For example, the number of games in one cycle may be determined by lottery so that the number of games in any of 10 to 50 games is one cycle. good. Further, the number of games remaining until the end of the cycle may be subtracted depending on the winning combination during the cycle.

As described above, the ceiling cycle state has a higher probability of winning the freeze lottery than the normal cycle state. Instead, for example, in the AT lottery, the AT has a lottery probability according to the winning combination. It is a specification to draw lots for winning or failing, and rare roles such as prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A) and prize-E (watermelon B) win the AT lottery rather than small roles and replay roles. If the specification has a high probability, in the normal cycle state, it freezes only when the AT is won in a small role or replay role (in other words, only when the AT is won with a probability lower than the winning probability in the rare role). On the other hand, in the ceiling cycle state, freeze occurs only when the AT is won in the rare role (in other words, only when the AT is won with a higher probability than the winning probability in the small role or the replay role). It is also possible to increase the probability of freezing by making it. The rare role may be a replay role instead of a winning role for paying out game medals. As a specific example, the rare role may be configured to have a cherry replay role, a watermelon A replay role, and a watermelon B replay role. Also, in the normal cycle state, the freeze occurs only when the AT is won in the prize-E (watermelon B) among the rare roles, while in the ceiling cycle state, the prize-C (cherry) and the prize-E It is also possible to make the freeze more likely to occur by causing the freeze when (Watermelon B) is won (by increasing the number of rare roles that are the targets of the freeze). Further, in the normal cycle state, the freeze may or may not occur by executing the freeze lottery, while in the ceiling cycle state, the freeze may always occur (100% freeze occurs). In short, it suffices if the ceiling cycle state is more likely to freeze than the normal cycle state, and the specifications for that purpose are not particularly limited. In addition, when the freeze is generated, the freeze is generated at a predetermined timing before the reel rotation of the game won in the freeze lottery starts, and at the predetermined timing before the reel rotation of the next game of the game won in the freeze lottery starts. It may be configured to have a case of causing a freeze. With such a configuration, the player is expected to win the freeze lottery in the game that won the rare role even if the rare role is stopped in the game in which the freeze did not occur. Can be embraced. Further, the freeze may be generated at the time of the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, or the like.

In this way, even if the ceiling cycle state reaches the ceiling cycle state by causing a freeze and shifting to the second AT, which is more advantageous than the first AT, than in the normal cycle state, the ceiling cycle state is higher than the normal cycle state. Since the possibility of shifting to the second AT, which leads to a large number of balls, is increased, the ceiling cycle state can not be a mere digestion game, but rather a game that enhances the motivation to play, and in the ceiling cycle state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this modified example 1, the specification is such that the ceiling state is such that the AT is always won in a predetermined number of cycles (10th cycle in the above example). Therefore, when the predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) is reached, the ceiling state may be set, and the conditions for setting the ceiling state are not particularly limited.

In the condition of this ceiling state, only the upper limit of the difference number of balls, which is one of the end conditions of the advantageous section (also referred to as the maximum difference number, specifically, 2400 (MY2400), etc.). , It is preferable to set it so that it can be put out within the advantageous section. Specifically, when setting the number of ceiling games, if the average net increase in the number of games per game in the 1st AT is, for example, 10, a minimum of 240 games are required to output the above 2400 games. In order to secure the above, it is preferable to set any number of games less than 1260 games obtained by subtracting 240 games from 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, as the number of ceiling games. Further, in the specification for performing the periodic lottery as in the first modification, it is preferable to set the ceiling cycle to end less than the above 1260 games. In short, before satisfying the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games), it is sufficient to satisfy the upper limit of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section (2400), and the ceiling condition is set within the range satisfying this condition. You just have to do it. Even when the ceiling condition is set in this way, for example, on the premise of a game with three bets, the number of games up to the ceiling is counted (subtraction of the number of games) with three bets. If the specification is such that this is not performed with a two-card bet, and an irregular situation occurs in which the player mistakenly plays a two-card bet game for a predetermined number of games, the above-mentioned also occurs between the predetermined number of games. Since the advantageous section is counted as in the above, it is assumed that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section will be less than the number of games required to obtain the above difference number upper limit when the ceiling state is reached. Gambling. In such a case, the above 2400 game medals cannot be obtained, but when the number of games to the ceiling is low, the player intentionally plays a game with two bets on the ceiling. It is possible to prevent capture such as reaching.

By doing so, even if the ceiling condition is reached, it is possible to avoid the situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small and it is not possible to obtain the maximum number of difference in the advantageous section. As in Example 1, when a freeze occurs and the player shifts to the second AT, which is expected to generate more balls than the first AT, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second AT, which has been shifted, ends in the middle. In particular, in a spinning-type gaming machine equipped with an ending state (AT that continues until the end of the advantageous section) that can obtain a large number of balls, the maximum number of balls that can be played in the advantageous section is surely increased. It is possible to meet the player's expectation that he can get a lot of balls.

<1st AT>
The first AT is an increasing section in which the game medals are increased by shifting to the AT lottery or the like in the normal state of the <advantageous section> and executing the navigation effect. The first AT continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games), and ends when the predetermined number of games is reached. In this first AT, when the first AT is completed, the process shifts to the first CZ, and when the second and subsequent first ATs are completed, the process shifts to the second CZ. The end condition of the first AT is that the number of games reaches a predetermined number as described above, but instead of this, for example, the end condition may be that the number of navigations reaches a predetermined number. Alternatively, it is possible to perform a fall lottery to end the first AT with a predetermined probability and win the fall lottery as an end condition, and it goes without saying that the end condition is not particularly limited.

<2nd AT>
The second AT can be mainly migrated from the first CZ, and by continuing a specific number of games (for example, 100 games) longer than that of the first AT, it is possible to obtain more game medals than the first AT. .. In this second AT, after the end, the process shifts to the second CZ. In the second AT, the number of specific games is longer than that of the first AT, which is more advantageous to the player than the first AT. However, for example, the number of continuous games is the same as that of the first AT. However, in addition to this, it is possible to win the BB state (a so-called pseudo-bonus that is actually in the AT state but looks like a big bonus in the production), which is more advantageous to the player, or Every time the predetermined number of games is reached, a loop lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the second AT from the beginning again, which may be more advantageous to the player. In short, the second AT may be more advantageous than the first AT. It suffices if it is advantageous to the player.

<1st CZ>
As described above, the first CZ is a state of transitioning after the first AT is completed, stays for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games), and returns to the first AT during the predetermined number of games. It is a chance zone to draw lots for whether or not to move to the second AT. Further, in this first CZ, the navigation effect (push order navigation) is not executed, and the number of balls is reduced. Here, the decrease section is a state in which the expected value of the number of OUTs per game is less than 3 while the number of INs per game is 3 in the case of betting 3 cards, and 1 game. The expected value of the number of OUTs around is less than the number of INs. Regarding the expected value of the number of OUTs, when the push order navigation occurs, the push order small winning combination is won, and for the winning combination where watermelon or the like may be missed, the winning combination is given without missing. Needless to say, it is an expected value. That is, if the game is continued in the decreasing section, the medals held will decrease.

In the 1st CZ, the 1st point acquisition lottery (point addition lottery) according to the winning combination is performed in each game, and when the 1st point is acquired (granted), the 1st point is not shown as a 1st point counter (secondary). It may be a counter on the control board S side, or it may be configured to transmit the counter value information to the sub control board S side as a counter on the main control board M side), as shown in FIG. The first point acquired in the first point display area PR1 located in the upper left portion of the effect display device S40 is displayed (in the figure, the state in which "5" points are acquired is shown).

In this 1st point acquisition lottery (1st point granting lottery), for example, in the case of a winning combination such as a small combination or a replay combination, one of 0 to 2 points is selected, and 0 to 1 point is awarded. While using a low-probability lottery table with a high selection probability, in the case of a rare role, etc., a high-probability lottery table with a high selection probability for 1 to 2 points is used while being selected from any of 1 to 3 points. The first point is more likely to be given to the rare role than to the small role or the replay role. Regarding the first point acquisition lottery, for example, regardless of the winning combination, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability and any point may be given, and the lottery method is not particularly limited.

Further, after the first point acquisition lottery is performed, an icon acquisition lottery for determining the icon to be displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5, which will be described later, is performed according to the acquired first point. It has become like. Specifically, for example, if the number of points is 0 (when points cannot be obtained), there is no icon or an icon with a low expectation of obtaining the first point (for example, "crying lion" described later). Use the icon acquisition low lottery table where it is relatively easy to select, etc.), and if you can acquire 1 or more points (if you can acquire points), the icon with high expectation of acquiring the first point (for example, The icon acquisition height table, which is relatively easy to select for "Laughing Lion"), which will be described later, is used. Needless to say, the relationship between the number of points earned (including 0) and the selected icon (including no icon) can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the spinning machine. ..

As a production state of the first CZ, as shown in FIG. 82, the player indicates that the production of an introductory movie or the like that is continuously performed for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is performed and the first CZ is started. Based on the introduction part to notify to, the point accumulation part that is executed after the end of the introduction part and accumulates the first point, and the predetermined number of points (for example, 10 points) accumulated in this point accumulation part. It has a judge part that notifies whether or not to shift to the first AT or the second AT in one game.

That is, in the 1st CZ, after the introduction part, when the 1st point is accumulated in the point accumulation part, a transfer lottery to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT is performed, and if the transfer lottery is won, the judge part In the case of a shift to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT, and if the lottery is missed, the judge part will perform a performance to the effect that neither the 1st AT nor the 2nd AT will be transferred. In this change example 1, when the transition lottery is won and the transition to the 1st AT or the 2nd AT is decided, for example, in the judge part, a battle effect in which the ally character and the opponent character battle is performed, and the 1st AT is set. In the case of transition, in response to this, for example, a production such as victory 1 such as winning the opponent character normally is performed. Further, in the case of shifting to the second AT, in response to this, for example, the production of victory 2 such as overwhelming the opponent character is performed. Further, when neither the 1st AT nor the 2nd AT is entered, the defeat effect such that the ally character loses to the opponent character is performed. The judge part may be configured to be continuous between a plurality of games, and if such a configuration is made, each game is based on the game result of the point accumulation part and / or the lottery result of the game executed in the judge part. At the same time, a lottery for whether or not to shift to the first AT or the second AT may be executed.

When the predetermined number of games of the first CZ remains after the defeat is produced in this judge part (for example, when the judge part is performed in the 20th game from the start of the first CZ and the remaining 20 games remain. Etc.), the process of returning to the point accumulation part, accumulating the first point again, and shifting to the judge part when the predetermined number of points is accumulated is repeated until the predetermined number of games is reached. In addition, even if the number of points is less than the predetermined number of points in the point accumulation part, when the predetermined number of games is reached, a lottery for shifting to the first AT or the second AT according to the first point is performed, and the game is transferred to the judge part. If the above-mentioned victory 1 or 2, the player shifts to the first AT or the second AT, and if the player loses, the player shifts to the normal state of the <advantageous section>. As shown in FIG. 82, when the conditions for shifting to the normal section are satisfied in the advantageous section, the game shifts to the normal section after the end of the game. For example, if the player is defeated in the judge part and is configured to satisfy the transition condition of the normal section, the game shifts to the normal state of the <normal section> after the end of the game.

In this way, the point accumulation part and the judge part are repeated, but since the judge part returns to the point accumulation part and the first point is accumulated again from the beginning, the first (Nth) judge part and the second time. The degree of expectation of victory (in other words, the degree of expectation of winning the above transition lottery) is the same as that of the (N + 1th) judge part. Instead of this, the N + 1th judge part has a higher expectation of victory than the Nth judge part, and the N + 2nd judge part has a higher expectation of victory than the N + 1th judge part. As such, the higher the number of times the judge part is repeated, the higher the expectation of victory. Specifically, in the point accumulation part corresponding to the Nth time, the first point starts from 0 point, whereas in the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 1th time, the first point starts from 10 points. In the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 2nd time, it can be realized by adding the initial points every time there is a repetition, such as starting from the state where the first point is 20 points. In addition, the point accumulation part corresponding to the N + 1th judge part uses the lottery table with a higher probability of acquiring the first point than the point accumulation part corresponding to the Nth judge-part, and so on. It can also be realized by using a lottery table with a higher probability of acquiring the first point each time. Furthermore, when the first point is accumulated in the point accumulation part and exceeds a predetermined value, it is configured to shift to a judge part that continues for multiple games (it is possible to stay in the judge part for multiple games), and this judge is configured. In the part, the transition lottery is performed based on various parameters including the number of repetitions of the judge part as described above (one parameter is how many times the judge part is) in each game. May be. In this case, since the number of times the judge part is repeated is one of the parameters that affect the transition lottery, the more the judge part is repeated, the higher the overall winning percentage of the judge part can be (compared to the Nth judge part). The winning percentage is higher for the N + 1th judge part). Further, in the case of this specification, in the judge part that continues for a plurality of games, if the transition lottery is won, the judge part may be terminated and the transition to the first AT or the second AT (shift to the gaming state according to the transition lottery result) may be performed. However, even if the transition lottery is won, a plurality of first ATs or second ATs can be won by stocking the winning result (for example, stocking this if the first AT is won) so as not to end the judge part. It may be configured as follows. The point is that every time the judge part is repeated (the point accumulation part is repeated), the winning expectation of the above transition lottery (winning expectation in the judge part) should be higher, and the specific method is Is not particularly limited.

In the above, even if the number of points is less than the predetermined number, when the predetermined number of games is reached, the game is forcibly shifted to the judge part. If the game is played over (), even if the first point obtained is less than the predetermined number of points, the game is forcibly transferred to the judge part at the stage before the N game of the predetermined number of games. However, the point is, if the first CZ ends with a predetermined number of games, at what timing does the judge part shift to just before the end of the first CZ (in the number of games near the predetermined number of games)? Can be set as appropriate.

In the introduction part, as described above, a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) are continuously produced by the introduction movie or the like (in other words, the current display unit SA1 and each hold display unit Sa1 to be described later shown in FIG. 83). The icon of Sa5 and the like are not displayed and the points are not displayed in the point acquisition area PR1.) On the other hand, even during this predetermined number of games, the first point acquisition lottery according to the winning combination is performed for each game. It has become. The first points acquired here are not notified in the introduction part, but are notified in the point accumulation part after the end of the introduction part.

In the point acquisition part, as shown in FIG. 83, in the area on the right side of the effect display device S40, the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5 arranged so as to be arranged vertically and the current hold display units Sa1 arranged above the hold display unit Sa1. The effect of displaying the display unit SA1 is executed. An icon or the like indicating an expected value of the first point that can be acquired in the current game can be displayed on the current display unit SA1, and a predetermined game from the next game of the current game is displayed on each of the reserved display units Sa1 to Sa5. It is possible to display an icon or the like indicating an expected value of points that can be obtained in up to a number of games (after 5 games, the predetermined number of games may be described as 5 games). Specifically, in the introduction part, as described above, the first point acquisition lottery is performed in each of the first to fifth games, and the first point acquisition in the first to fifth games of the introduction part is performed. The lottery results are displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa4, respectively.

That is, in the present modification 1, generally, the hold display corresponding to the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed in the past game is displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5, and these current display units are displayed. The display of SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 is moved so as to shift one by one from the bottom to the top as seen in FIG. 83 for each game, and the past lottery results (or the current) are also used in the production of the game. It is an effect mode corresponding to the display (display of the display unit SA1) (when a predetermined point has been obtained in the past first point acquisition lottery, an effect to the effect that the predetermined point has been obtained is executed in the game, etc.). .. Specifically, it is as follows.

In the current game, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before the current game is reflected, and the current display unit SA1 corresponds to the result of the 1st point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before. Icons, etc. may be displayed (in other words, icons, etc. may not be displayed). For the game one game after the current game (next game), the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed four games before the current game is reflected, and the hold display unit Sa1 is displayed four games before. An icon or the like corresponding to the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed may be displayed, and for the game two games after the current game, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed three games before the current game. May be reflected on the hold display unit Sa2, such as an icon corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed before the 3 games, and the game after 3 games of the current game is currently displayed. The result of the first point acquisition lottery two games before the game is reflected, and the hold display unit Sa3 may display an icon or the like corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed two games before. , After 4 games of the current game, the 1st point acquisition lottery 1 game before (previous game) from the current game is reflected, and the 1st point acquisition lottery performed 1 game before the hold display unit Sa4 is reflected. An icon or the like corresponding to the result may be displayed.

In addition, the result of the 1st point acquisition lottery performed in the current game is reflected in the game 5 games after the current game, and the 1st point acquisition lottery result performed in the current game is displayed on the hold display unit Sa5. Corresponding icons, etc. may be displayed. In other words, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed in the current game is, in principle, points to be acquired in the game after the predetermined game (after N games) from the current game.

Then, the display of the icon or the like (including no display) displayed on the current display unit SA1 is erased when the game ends and the next game starts, and is displayed on the hold display unit Sa1. The display of the icon etc. is moved to SA1, the display of the icon etc. displayed on the hold display unit Sa2 is moved to Sa1, and the display of the icon etc. is sequentially moved up and displayed. ing. In this case, the display of the icon or the like of the hold display unit Sa5 is moved to the hold display unit Sa4, and the icon or the like corresponding to the first point acquisition lottery performed in the previous game is newly added to the hold display unit Sa5. It will be displayed.

Regarding the display of the icons of the current display unit SA1 and the icons of the reserved display units Sa1 to Sa5, they are displayed so as to be sequentially advanced as described above at the timing when the game ends and the next game starts. (Although the display of the current display unit SA1 and the display units Sa1 to Sa5 of each hold display unit has been updated), instead of this, the timing when the game ends (for example, the timing when the last stop button D40 is released, or the game medal When the payout is completed, the predetermined timing after the payout is completed), or the timing when the bet button D220 of the next game of the game is pressed, the timing when the bet button D220 is released, the start lever D50 is pressed. It may be an appropriate timing such as timing, and the point is that icons and the like can be displayed to the player before the reel of the next game of the game rotates (before the stop operation becomes possible). If this is the case (if the expectation of acquiring the first point is notified), the timing is not particularly limited.

Here, in FIG. 83, assuming that the state of the effect display device S40 in the next game (the first game of the point accumulation part) of the game in which the introduction part is completed is shown, the first game of the introduction part (from the current game) is shown. The current display unit SA1 corresponding to the game 5 games before) displays a "laughing lion" icon indicating that the expectation for acquiring the first point is high. We are informing you that there is a high possibility that you will be able to earn points.

In addition, the same "laughing lion" icon as SA1 is displayed on the hold display units Sa1 and Sa4, and points can be earned in the next game of the current game and four games after the current game. Notify that there is a high possibility. Further, no display is made on the hold display units Sa2 and Sa3, indicating an unknown state regarding the degree of expectation of point acquisition. In addition, the icon of "crying lion" is displayed on the hold display unit Sa5, and the player is notified that the expectation of acquiring the first point is lower than that of the icon of "laughing lion". is doing.

The icons and the like displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the reserved display units Sa1 to Sa5 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 83, and are, for example, direct displays such as "high expectation" and "low expectation". Etc., and various display forms can be applied. In short, it goes without saying that the aspect is not particularly limited as long as it is displayed in such a manner that the player can grasp the degree of expectation of acquiring the first point. Further, in notifying the degree of expectation of acquiring the first point, in addition to the visual notification shown in FIG. 83, for example, auditory notification by sound such as a production sound from the speaker S20 and vibration of the sub input button SB. It may be a tactile notification by such a thing.

When a predetermined number of points are acquired in the point accumulation part, the process shifts to the judge part as described above. In other words, in the point accumulation part, the next game (after one game) of the game in which a predetermined number of points have been accumulated (hereinafter referred to as "reaching game") becomes the judge part, and in the case of defeat in this judge part (AT). (If you do not win in the lottery to move to), the next game of the reached game (after 2 games) will return to the point accumulation part, but in this change example 1, this judge part also The specifications are such that the first point acquisition lottery is held. Further, in this judge part, an effect (not shown) different from that of FIG. 83 is executed, and the point number display unit RPR1 shown in FIG. 83, the current display unit SA1, and each hold display unit Sa1 to Sa5 and the like are not displayed.

In this case, assuming that the state at the time of the reaching game is FIG. 83, in the next game, the judge part, while performing an effect different from that of FIG. 83, the first point acquisition lottery and the icon are internally performed. In addition to conducting the acquisition lottery, the results of the point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before this judge part are not reflected. If the judge part is defeated, the player returns to the first point acquisition part and the production is performed as shown in FIG. 83. In addition, the result of the first point acquisition lottery performed 5 games before the above-mentioned judge part will be reflected in the point acquisition part returned from the judge part, that is, in the next game of the judge part (games one after another of the reached games). It has become.

Therefore, in the next game of the judge part, the result of the first point acquisition lottery 6 games (the value obtained by adding 1 game of the number of staying games of the judge part to the predetermined number of games) is reflected. The Rukoto. Therefore, here, an icon or the like reflecting the first point acquisition lottery result in the judge part is displayed on Sa5, and an icon or the like reflecting the first point acquisition lottery result in the reached game is displayed on Sa4. Then, the lottery result of 6 games before is reflected in the current display unit SA1. In other words, when going through the judge part, the current display unit SA1 reflects the result of the first point acquisition lottery before the number of games obtained by adding the number of staying games in the judge part to the predetermined number of games, and displays the hold. The result of the first point acquisition lottery in the final game of the judge part is reflected in the part Sa5.

In this change example 1, if the judge part is defeated, the point accumulation part is shifted to, but instead, if the judge part is defeated, the introduction part may be returned. In this case, the icons displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 up to that point are deleted (the past first point acquisition lottery result is deleted), and the predetermined number of games of the introduction part is deleted from the beginning. The first point acquisition lottery may be performed. That is, after the end of the judge part, the result of the first point acquisition lottery up to that point may be reset and the introduction part may be restarted. In other words, every time the judge part ends, the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to 5 are all hidden, and a period for accumulating the hold called the introduction part may be provided. Further, in this modification example 1, in the judge part, the result of the transition lottery to the first AT and the second AT is notified, and the first point acquisition lottery is also performed. However, in this judge part, the first Instead of performing the point acquisition lottery, a transfer lottery to the first AT or the second AT according to the first point accumulated in the point accumulation part may be performed, and the lottery result may be notified.

As described above, in the present modification example 1, in the point accumulation part of the first CZ, in the current game currently being played, the first point acquisition lottery is performed in advance before the current game, and the result is transferred to the current game. In addition to reflecting the results, the results of the first point acquisition lottery performed in advance are displayed on the current display unit SA1 and the hold display units Sa1 to Sa5, and the first point over the current game and the subsequent five games. The player is informed of the degree of expectation of acquisition. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game while having a sense of expectation for the result of the game to be executed in the future.

In addition, in the 1st CZ, the 1st point acquisition lottery is also performed in the introduction part and the judge part other than the point accumulation part, and it is reflected in the subsequent game, so that the 1st point acquisition lottery is performed in the 1st CZ. Can be done at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the introduction part and the judge part from becoming a useless digestion game in acquiring the first point, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Moreover, since the introductory part and the judge part do not become a useless digestion game (because the first point acquisition lottery is performed), the useless digestion game is possible within the limited number of games of the first CZ, which has an upper limit on the number of games. It is not necessary to reduce the number of games to be executed in the introduction part and the judge part, and the number of games to be executed in the introduction part and the judge part can be freely set, and the degree of freedom in the production composition etc. can be improved. Can be done.

<2nd CZ>
The second CZ is a state in which the transition is made after the second and subsequent first ATs are completed or after the second AT is completed, and the player stays for a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) and becomes the first AT during the predetermined number of games. It is a chance zone for drawing lots on whether to return or move to the second AT. Further, this second CZ is set as a reduction section in which the number of balls to be ejected is reduced without the navigation effect being executed. In this modified example 1, the predetermined number of games of the first CZ and the predetermined number of games of the second CZ are both the same number of games (40 games), but the number is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of games of the first CZ and the first Needless to say, the number of games may be different from the predetermined number of games of 2CZ. Further, the predetermined number of games of the second CZ may be changed instead of fixed. Specifically, in the game that has entered the second CZ, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery, or if the fall lottery is won by a predetermined probability instead of the predetermined number of games. The predetermined number of games may be changed by the end of the second CZ.

In the second CZ, a second point acquisition lottery (point addition lottery) is performed every game, and when the second point is acquired (granted), the second point is added to a second point counter (not shown), and the figure shows. As shown in 84, the second point acquired in the second point display area PR2 or the like located at the lower right of the effect display device S40 is displayed.

In this second CZ, as shown in FIG. 84, an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character battle is executed from the start to the end of the second CZ. Further, the patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 arranged side by side are provided at the lower part of the effect display device S40, and the second point display area PR2 for displaying the accumulated second points is provided on the right side of the patrol hold display unit Sb5. (In FIG. 84, it is displayed that the accumulated second point is 30 points).

Similar to the above-mentioned hold display units Sa1 to Sa5 in FIG. 83, the patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 are adapted to display an icon or the like indicating the degree of expectation of acquisition of the second point. In the 2CZ, in the game that has entered the second CZ, the icons and the like to be displayed on each of the patrol hold display units Sb1 to Sb5 are determined according to the winning combination in the game. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the patrol display unit Sb1 displays the character 1 as an icon or the like, the patrol display unit Sb3 displays the character 2 as an icon or the like, and the patrol display unit Sb4 displays the character 3 as an icon or the like. At the same time, in the patrol display units Sb2 and Sb5, there is no character as an icon or the like. In this modification 1, the character 2, the character 1, and the character 3 are set so that the expectation that the second point can be obtained is high in this order.

The icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 84, and are, for example, direct displays such as "high expectation" and "low expectation" as described above. Etc., and various display forms can be applied. In short, it goes without saying that the aspect is not particularly limited as long as it is displayed in such a manner that the player can grasp the degree of expectation of acquiring the second point. Further, in notifying the degree of expectation of acquiring the second point, in addition to the visual notification shown in FIG. 84, the auditory and tactile notification may be performed.

The patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5 reflect the display (character 1) of the leftmost patrol display unit Sb1 in the game that has entered the second CZ, and in the next game, the display on the right side of the patrol display unit Sb1. The display of the patrol display unit Sb2 (without characters) is reflected, and in the next game, the display of the patrol display unit Sb3 (character 2) is reflected. It is designed to reflect the display on the right patrol display. Then, in the next game that reflects the display of the rightmost patrol display unit Sb5, the display of the leftmost patrol display unit Sb1 is reflected again, and so on, in the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, for each game. It is designed to patrol each patrol display unit while sequentially shifting to the adjacent patrol display unit. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 84, by making the currently reflected patrol display unit Sb3 larger than the other patrol display units, the player is shown which of the currently reflected patrol display units is. ing.

For the icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, a lottery is performed to determine the icons to be displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5 in the rush game that has entered the second CZ, and the icons based on the lottery results are performed. Etc. are displayed. In the lottery for determining this icon, the lottery may be performed with a certain probability, or the lottery may be performed with a probability according to the winning combination of the above-mentioned rush game.

Further, regarding the icons and the like displayed on the patrol display units Sb1 to Sb5, in the second CZ, a lottery for displaying the icons and the like is performed for each game. Specifically, a character acquisition lottery for displaying a new character on the patrol display unit without a character and a character change lottery for changing to a better character are performed on the patrol display unit where the character is already displayed. There is. By winning these lottery, a new character is added to the patrol display unit without an icon or the like, or a better character is displayed on the patrol display unit where the character already exists. In the above example, a lottery is performed to add a character as an icon or the like, but conversely, a lottery without a character may be performed, and an icon or the like is added to each patrol display unit. And deletion can be set as appropriate. On the other hand, the same state as that at the time of the rush game may be maintained until the second CZ is completed without changing the icon or the like determined in the rush game.

In this 2nd CZ, the 2nd point acquisition lottery (2nd point grant lottery) is performed for each game, and in this 2nd point acquisition lottery, the display of the patrol display part currently reflected and the winning at that time are performed. It is designed to be performed according to the role. That is, the second point acquisition lottery is based on the lottery table (not shown) according to the combination of the icons such as characters 1 to 3 and no character in the patrol display unit currently reflected and the winning combination at that time. I try to do. For example, if character 2 has the highest expectation, even if the winning combination is a small role or a replay role, a predetermined number of second points (for example, 5 points) can always be obtained, and character 2 and rare. If it is a combination with a combination, the second point can always be obtained, and more points (for example, 20 points, etc.) than the predetermined number of second points can be obtained. In addition, in the case of a combination of no character and a small role or a replay role, the ratio that the second point becomes 0 is high, and in the case of a combination of no character and a rare role, the ratio that the second point can be obtained is high. , It is higher than the case of a small role or a replay role, but it is also possible to reduce the number of points that can be obtained. The point is that it may be appropriately set so that an appropriate second point can be given step by step according to the reliability of the icon or the like and the strength of the winning combination.

In the second CZ, for example, when 10 points are obtained as the second point as a result of the above-mentioned second point acquisition lottery, for example, the ally character shown in FIG. 84 attacks the enemy character and the enemy. The character takes 10 points of damage, and these 10 points are cumulatively added to the 2nd point display area PR2 to inform the player that the 2nd point has been obtained and the current cumulative number of points. It is designed to do.

Here, in the second CZ, the threshold value of the accumulated second points has a breakthrough value and a maximum value, and when the second point acquired as described above reaches the breakthrough value, the first AT is reached. While the return is confirmed, the specification is such that when the maximum value is reached, the transition to the second AT is confirmed. When the return to the 1st AT is confirmed, the effect of defeating the enemy character shown in FIG. 84 is executed, after that, a new enemy character appears, and when the return to the 2nd AT is confirmed, the new one is executed. The effect display device S40, such as executing an effect of defeating an enemy, notifies the player of the transition to the first AT or the second AT. Needless to say, the effect of shifting to the first AT or the second AT is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to notify the effect.

Further, in the second CZ, in the rush game shifted to the second CZ, the above-mentioned breakthrough value is determined according to the winning combination in this rush game, and the breakthrough value of the second CZ is the second CZ. It is a variable value determined by lottery every time the game shifts to (in other words, it can be said to be an initial determination value determined at the time of entering the second CZ). In this rush game, the specifications may be such that the predetermined number of games is determined together with the breakthrough value as described above. Further, the maximum value of the second CZ is a predetermined fixed value (for example, 100 points or the like). In this second CZ, since the breakthrough value is a variable value, the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is large (for example, when the breakthrough value is 30 and the difference is 70) and when it is small (for example, when the difference is 70). , When the breakthrough value is 70 and the difference is 30 etc.).

In such a case, in situation A where the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is large, the number of points up to the breakthrough value is small (for example, the number of second points reaches 30), and the number of points from the breakthrough value to the maximum value is high. Since it becomes large (for example, if the breakthrough value is 30, 70 is required as the number of second points after that), it is easy to shift to the first AT, but it is difficult to shift to the second AT. On the other hand, in situation B where the difference between the maximum value and the breakthrough value is small, the number of points up to the breakthrough value is large (for example, the second point reaches 70), and the number of points from the breakthrough value to the maximum value is small. Therefore (for example, if the breakthrough value is 70, the number of second points is 30 after that), so it is difficult to move to the first AT, but after the transfer to the first AT is confirmed, it is easy to move to the second AT. Become.

In this way, by setting the breakthrough value to a variable value, the above-mentioned situation A and situation B will occur. In such a case, for example, in situation A, it is easy to shift to the first AT. You can produce in a production mode (for example, give strength to an enemy character and give a relatively weak enemy character (in other words, a highly reliable production for the transition to the 1st AT)), or in situation B. , Until the 1st AT is confirmed, normal production is performed, and after the 1st is confirmed, the production is in a production mode indicating that it is easy to shift to the 2nd AT (as described above, a relatively weak enemy character is put out, etc.). ) Is possible. In the above example, it was shown that the reliability is high by putting out a weak enemy character, but instead of this, for example, the frequency of so-called cut-in production etc. increases as the reliability increases. As described above, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode such as notifying the player by switching the effect frequency. In short, it is sufficient as long as it is an effect mode according to the reliability of the transition of the first AT and the second AT according to the breakthrough value which can be said to be the initial determination value, and the effect mode is not particularly limited.

In this modification 1, the breakthrough value is a variable value and the maximum value is a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the breakthrough value is a fixed value and the maximum value is a variable value, or the breakthrough value and the maximum value. Both values may be fixed values or variable values determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when determining the fluctuation value, it is not the game that has transitioned to the second CZ as described above, but it is determined between several games after the transition to the second CZ, or at any timing after the transition to the second CZ. Is also good. Furthermore, when determining the fluctuation value, it is not a lottery according to the winning combination of the game in which the determination is made as described above, but a separate lottery regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination (for example, by a lottery with a certain probability). It may be decided by (decision, etc.).

That is, in the second CZ, when the accumulated second points reach the breakthrough value (when the breakthrough value is exceeded) during the predetermined number of games which is the maximum number of staying games in the second CZ, the return to the first AT is performed. Although it is confirmed, even in this state, the second CZ does not end, and the second point is accumulated even after that. In this modification example 1, in a situation where the second point after reaching the breakthrough value is accumulated, the player is directed to the effect that the breakthrough value has been reached (the effect that the transition to the first AT has been confirmed). ) Is not performed, and the player is provided with a tense game until the end of the second CZ. When the accumulated second point reaches the maximum value (exceeds the maximum value), the effect that the maximum value is immediately reached (the transition to the second AT is confirmed) even before the predetermined number of games is produced. The second CZ is terminated and the game shifts to the second AT. On the other hand, if the accumulated second points do not reach the maximum value even after reaching the predetermined number of games, the second CZ is performed. Is finished, and it shifts to the first AT.

In this change example 1, in the situation where the second point after reaching the breakthrough value is accumulated, the effect of reaching the breakthrough value is not performed, but when the maximum value is reached. Although the notification is made immediately, instead of this, an effect indicating that the breakthrough value has been reached may be executed at any timing under the above circumstances, or after the maximum value is reached. It may be possible to notify that the maximum value has been reached at a predetermined timing such as in the next game, and it goes without saying that the presence / absence and timing of notification that the breakthrough value or the maximum value has been reached can be appropriately set. .. Further, in this modification example 1, the second CZ is terminated when the maximum value is reached, but instead, if the predetermined number of games of the second CZ remains at the time when the maximum value is reached, the second CZ is terminated as it is. You may try to continue. In this case, a lottery related to the subsequent AT, such as a lottery for adding the number of AT games to be performed after that, is performed so that the rare role won in the remaining games after reaching the maximum value is not a so-called loss. It is desirable to do.

If the accumulated second points are less than the maximum value even after reaching the predetermined number of games, the second point is increased according to the number of excess second points obtained by subtracting the breakthrough value from the second points at that time. A lottery for shifting to 2AT is performed, and if the player wins, the game moves to the second AT, and if the player does not win, the game moves to the first AT. Regarding the lottery for shifting to the second AT according to the number of second points for the excess, in this modification example 1, the larger the second point, the larger the value (the value obtained by adding the second point for the excess to the breakthrough value). , The closer it is to the maximum value), the probability of winning the 2nd AT is set to be high, but it is not limited to this, and a lottery may be performed with a certain probability regardless of the number of excess 2 points. , Lottery according to the winning combination in the game that has reached the predetermined number of games in the 2nd CZ (final game of the 2nd CZ) (for example, the rare role has a higher probability of winning the 2nd AT than the small role or the replay role, etc. ) May be performed.

In addition, in the second CZ, when the accumulated second points are less than the breakthrough value and the predetermined number of games is reached, a transfer lottery to the first AT is performed according to the number of the second points, and the game is won. On the other hand, if the player does not win the first AT transition lottery, the first CZ ends and the player shifts to the normal state of the <advantageous section>. Regarding the lottery for shifting to the first AT according to the above-mentioned second point, in this modification example 1, the closer the second point is to the breakthrough value, the higher the winning probability of the first AT is set. However, the lottery is not limited to this, and a lottery is performed with a certain probability regardless of the number of second points, or a lottery according to a winning combination in a game that has reached a predetermined number of games in the second CZ (final game of the second CZ). (For example, a rare role has a higher probability of winning the first AT than a small role or a replay role).

In this way, in the second CZ, which is the decreasing section, even if the cumulative value of the second point reaches the breakthrough value and the first AT is determined, the number of balls to be ejected in the first AT is reduced by continuing to perform the second CZ. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suppress the ball ejection so as not to cause an excessive ball ejection with high gambling. Further, in the second CZ after the first AT is confirmed, since it has a game property of accumulating the second point up to the maximum value in order to shift to the second AT which is more advantageous than the first AT, the breakthrough value has been reached. Even after that, the game can be played with a purpose, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second CZ after the first AT is confirmed from becoming a mere digestion game, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Moreover, when the accumulated second point reaches the maximum value, even before the predetermined number of games, the second CZ, which is a decreasing section, ends and the game shifts to the second AT, so that the maximum value is quickly reached. The more the game is reached, the more the player can be given a substantial privilege of suppressing the decrease in the number of balls to be played, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

In the second CZ of this modification example 1, in the rush game, the breakthrough value is a variable value determined according to the winning combination in the game, but the breakthrough value determined here is the maximum value. It is also possible to select less than or equal to, or to select a value including the maximum value. In the latter case, the determined breakthrough value may be the same as the maximum value (breakthrough value = maximum value), but in this case, the second point reaches the breakthrough value (= maximum value). It is also possible to terminate 2CZ and shift to the first AT (in other words, do not shift to the second AT). In this way, if a value including the maximum value can be selected for the breakthrough value, and if a value less than the maximum value is selected as the breakthrough value, the second AT can be transferred, while the breakthrough value can be selected. It is possible to provide a revolving gaming machine with specifications that the benefits at the maximum value differ depending on the value of the breakthrough value, such that if the maximum value is selected, it is impossible to shift to the second AT.

Further, regarding the benefit at this maximum value, in this change example 1, the transition to the second AT is performed, but the benefit is not limited to this, and for example, the benefit is changed according to the difference between the breakthrough value and the maximum value. You may do so. Specifically, if the difference between the breakthrough value and the maximum value is the first value (for example, 30), it is a transition to the second AT, but if the difference is the second value (for example, 50), it is a transition to the second AT. In addition to the transition to the second AT, for example, if a pseudo bonus is given and the difference is the third value (for example, 30), various benefits can be given, for example, the transition to the ending state. .. In this case, since the benefit at the maximum value changes depending on the value of the breakthrough value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 1, the second CZ is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined number of games is reached when the second point is less than the breakthrough value, but instead of this, the predetermined game is terminated in the state of less than the breakthrough value. After reaching the number, a fall lottery to end the second CZ with a certain probability or a probability according to the winning combination is performed, and the second CZ is continued until the fall lottery is won. good. In this case, even if the second point is less than the breakthrough value at the stage when the predetermined number of games is reached, it is possible to create the playability of reaching the second point and the breakthrough value before winning the fall lottery. , It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<< Change example 2 from the first embodiment >>
Next, a modification 2 from the first embodiment will be described, but in the description thereof, the description is omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments. And. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a main gaming state controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 86 is a modification from the first embodiment. It is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to No. 2, and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a part of the condition device in the spinning machine according to the change example 2 from the first embodiment. 88 to 90 are image diagrams for explaining the effect performed by the effect display device in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second modification from the first embodiment.

In this modification 2, the bonus-related specifications are mainly different from the modification 1 from the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 85, the modified example 2 has one type BB, and the RT transition controlled by the main control board M is as follows. That is, in the normal gaming state (non-RT), when the type 1 BB is won (when the type 1 BB condition device is activated), the probability of at least one replay is different from that of the non-RT RT1 (in other words, the type 1 BB). (RT state in the inside), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st class BB is displayed in this RT1 (when the 1st class BB wins), the 1st class BB operating state (in the 1st class BB) is set. When the type 1 BB operation is completed, it shifts to non-RT. Further, in the present modification 2, the game is played with a predetermined number (for example, 3 cards) in any of the above-mentioned states (non-RT, RT1, type 1 BB operating (when RB is operating)). There is.

As shown in FIG. 86, the reel arrangement of the spinning machine in the second modification is a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 1 to No. 20. In FIG. 86, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder means the right reel M53 (in FIG. 86, the above description). Reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). In this modification 2, as the symbol combination constituting the first type BB, the first combination consisting of "blue seven, red seven, red seven" in the order of the first cylinder, the second cylinder, and the third cylinder, The second combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven", the third combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Blue Seven / Red Seven", the fourth combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Blue Seven / Blue Seven", and "Gold". The 5th combination consisting of "Bar / Red Seven / Red Seven", the 6th combination consisting of "Gold Bar / Red Seven / Blue Seven", the 7th combination consisting of "Gold Bar / Blue Seven / Red Seven", "Gold Bar / It has an 8th combination consisting of "Blue Seven / Blue Seven" (8 types in total).

That is, in the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB, the blue seven that exists only once in the first cylinder (with the first cylinder at the beginning), the red seven that exists one in each of the second cylinder, and the red seven that exist in each of the second cylinder. The 1st to 4th combinations consisting of the combination of Blue Seven and the combination of Red Seven and Blue Seven, each of which is present in the 3rd cylinder, and the gold bar, which is present only in the 1st cylinder, are the first. It is the 5th to 8th combination consisting of the combination of the red seven and blue seven of the second body and the red seven and blue seven of the third body. In addition, this type 1 BB ends on the condition that the predetermined number of payouts (for example, 125 sheets) is exceeded, and the RBs that end when two winnings or two games are performed are continuously operated. It is a specification to do. It is needless to say that the bonus is not limited to this type 1 BB, and the bonuses (BB) of various specifications described in the above-described embodiments can be appropriately applied.

Further, in this modification example 2, AT can be activated only in the state of RT1 in the inside of the type 1 BB, and the first game in which the inside of the type 1 BB is intentionally maintained and the AT is performed and the type 1 BB are performed. It is possible to realize both the second game in which the winning and winning of the prize are repeated. That is, the player who wants to play the first game by the former AT wants to play the game while removing the symbol combination of the type 1 BB in the state inside the type 1 BB, and wants to play the second game by the latter type 1 BB. When the player detects the winning of the 1st class BB by the reach or the like, he / she immediately wins the 1st class BB and operates the 1st class BB.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the winning combination of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification is the pushing order bell group 123, the pushing order bell group 132, the pushing order bell group 213, and the pushing order bell group 213. It has a forward bell group 231 and a push order bell group 312, and a push order bell group 321 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to simply as a "push order bell group"). Here, in FIG. 87, the push order bell group in the state where the type 1 BB is won and carried over (the state inside the inside of the type 1 BB) is shown. The push order bell group 123 corresponds to the "role" in FIG. 10, and is a plurality of aggregates of conditional devices (names) such as winning-A1 which is the role of the push order bell 123 in FIG. In order to distinguish it from the bell 123, the push order bell group 123 is used. Therefore, as an example of the condition device (name) constituting the push order bell group 123, the above-mentioned prize-A1 can be mentioned, but in the present modification 2, the detailed condition device and the like of the push order bell group 123 are omitted. .. The same applies to the other push order bell group 132 and the like.

Further, in the spinning machine of the second modification example 2, the effective line for which the winning is determined is one of "left reel M51 lower stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". In addition to the push order bell group shown in FIG. 87, the winning combination of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second modification is, for example, the re-gaming combination shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (re-game-A, Replay-B, etc.) and rare roles such as cherry, watermelon A, etc., but these illustrations and symbol combinations are omitted. Needless to say, the number and positions of effective lines can also be appropriately set according to the reel arrangement, the combination configuration, or the specifications of the gaming machine.

These push order bell groups have a single combination of PB = 1 (also referred to as "PB = 1") with a pull-in probability of 100% (also referred to as "PB = 1") and a stop button, which are always aligned regardless of the pressing timing of the stop button D40. If D40 is pressed at an appropriate timing (timing within the pull-in range of the corresponding symbol), it will be aligned, but at other timings it will not be aligned. It is in a state of being elected in duplicate with the one-card role) of 1 ”). As for the push order bell group, the above-mentioned 1-card combination with PB = 1 and other multiple types of 1-card combination similar to the 1-card combination with PB ≠ 1 have been won in duplicate, and each push order bell has been won. In the group, the types of one-card combinations that overlap each other are set to be different, but the description of these other single-card combinations will be omitted. Further, in this modification example 2, the push order bell group is a one-card combination with one payout less than the specified number (for example, three), but it may be a two-card combination, in short. Any role may be used as long as the number of payouts is less than the specified number.

Here, among the push order bell groups, the push order bell group 123 will be described. This push order bell group 123 is a non-battle corresponding to the battle 1st role related to the battle 1st symbol combination of "Replay Blank Watermelon" and the non-battle 1st symbol combination of "Replay Cherry / Watermelon / Watermelon". There are two types of PB = 1 for the first role, and the first spilled pattern combination of "Cherry / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Bar / Gold Bar". The components are a combination and a single combination of multiple types of PB ≠ 1 including the second spilled role corresponding to the second spilled symbol combination of "Blue Seven / Red Seven / Blue Seven / Gold Bar / Bar". These are the winning areas (winning areas) where duplicate winnings are won. It should be noted that, in the single combination of PB ≠ 1 of the push order bell group 123, there are a plurality of types other than the first and second spilled symbol combinations, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "replay blank watermelon" related to the first battle symbol combination, the "replay" which is the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 (first body) is as shown in FIG. By arranging 4 frames at equal intervals (with 4 symbols intervening between each "replay") every 5 frames (maximum pull-in range is 4 frames) (No. 4 in Fig. 86). , 9th, 14th, and 19th), and the pull-in probability is 100%. In addition, the "blank", which is the design corresponding to the middle reel M52 (second cylinder), and the "watermelon", which is the design corresponding to the right reel M53 (third cylinder), are also the same as the "replay". By arranging four of them at equal intervals every five frames (in FIG. 86, the "blank" of the middle reel M52 is No. 1, 6, 11, 16 and the right reel M53 "blank". "Watermelon" is located at Nos. 4, 9, 14, and 19), and the pull-in probability is 100%.

When this first battle symbol combination is aligned on the effective line, that is, any "replay" of the left reel M51 is in the lower row of the left reel M51, and any "blank" of the middle reel M52 is in the middle reel M52. When any "watermelon" on the right reel M53 stops at the bottom of the right reel M53, a "blank" or "bar" placed directly above each "replay" of the left reel M51 in the middle of the left reel M51. (Refer to the symbols No. 5, 10, 15, and 20 of the 1st reel in FIG. 86, respectively), and any of the "blanks" stops in the middle of the middle reel M52. At the middle of the right reel M53, one of the "blanks" placed directly above each "watermelon" on the right reel stops (in FIG. 86, the 5th, 10th, and 15th of the 3rd reel). See each of the 20th symbols). As a result, the symbol combination of "blank / bar / blank / blank" is apparently aligned with the straight line of the middle stage such as the left reel M51 middle stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 middle stage (appearance and middle stage alignment). blank).

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "replay cherry / watermelon watermelon" related to the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination, the above-mentioned non-battle in the "replay" of the left reel M51 and the "watermelon" of the right reel M53. Same as the 1st symbol combination, but for the "cherry / watermelon" on the middle reel M52, "cherry" and "watermelon" are alternately arranged at equal intervals every 5 frames on the middle reel M52. Either "cherry" or "watermelon" can be pulled in without fail, but since either "cherry" or "watermelon" stops at the middle stage of the middle reel M52, it looks like "blank" left and right. The tempai is in a collapsed state and it does not become a blank with the middle reel.

In the push order bell group 123, regarding the "cherry / red seven / blue seven / red seven / blue seven / bar / gold bar" related to the first spilled symbol combination, the "red seven / blue seven / bar" of the right reel M53 Since each symbol of "/ Gold Bar" is arranged at equal intervals of 5 frames from each other, it is possible to always draw any of "Red Seven / Blue Seven / Bar / Gold Bar" on the effective line. On the other hand, there is only one "cherry" on the left reel M51 on the left reel M51, and there is only one "red seven / blue seven" on the middle reel M52 on the middle reel M52, so pull these out. If the stop button D40 is not pressed at the timing when it can be inserted, these symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line and will be dropped. The same applies to the second spilled symbol combination, so the description thereof will be omitted here.

Here, regarding the numbers such as "123" attached after the batting order bell group, "1" indicates the first reel, "2" indicates the second reel, and "3" indicates the third reel. For example, the push order bell group 123 is in the order of "1st cylinder (left reel M51)", "2nd cylinder (middle reel M52)", and "3rd cylinder (right reel M53)". When the reels are stopped by (the order of pressing the stop button D40 in the order of so-called left, middle, and right), the battle eye 1 symbol combination has priority over the above-mentioned number among the 1-card combination of PB = 1. It shows the push order (hereinafter referred to as "first correct batting order") in which one card combination related to the symbol combination of the first battle is aligned on the effective line by being drawn in preferentially by control. This is the same for other push order bell groups, "132" is in the order of left middle right (so-called pinching order), and "213" is in the middle left and right order (middle order push order). "231" indicates the order of middle right and left (middle reverse pinch order), "312" indicates right middle left (reverse push order), and "321" indicates (reverse pinch order). The combination of the batting order of "123" and "132" is the combination of the batting order of "left 1st" and "213" and "231" as the batting order combination of first pressing the stop button D40 corresponding to the left reel M51. , The batting order combination of "middle 1st", "321" and "312" is used as the batting order combination for first pressing the stop button D40 corresponding to the middle reel M52, and the stop button D40 corresponding to the right reel M53 is pressed first. It may be called "right 1st" as a batting order combination.

Further, in the push order bell group 123, when the batting order of "132" is performed, the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is aligned by the above-mentioned number priority control (hereinafter, this non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is aligned). The batting order is called the "second correct batting order"). In other words, in the case of the left 1st batting order (first and second correct batting order), the push order bell group 123 draws in one piece in either batting order, but in the first correct batting order "123", The battle eye 1 symbol combination is drawn in, and in the second correct batting order "132", the non-battle eye 1 symbol combination is drawn in.

Further, in the push order bell group 123, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st or the right 1st (hereinafter, the batting order that is not the correct batting order like these may be referred to as the "incorrect batting order"), the number priority control is used. , In order to preferentially pull in the first and second spilled symbol combinations corresponding to the first or second spilled role, when the stop button D40 is pressed at an appropriate timing that can stop these symbol combinations, If the 1st or 2nd spilled role (1 piece combination) wins, but the combination of these symbols cannot be stopped at an inappropriate timing, the 1st or 2nd spilled role will be dropped. Here, as described above, in FIG. 87, the type 1 BB is inside, and when the type 1 BB is pressed at this inappropriate timing, the first and second spilled symbol combinations are not aligned, so the type 1 BB If it is possible to pull in, the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is pulled in. That is, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st or the right 1st, it is either missed (no winning), one-card combination, or one-class BB winning.

The push order bell group 123 has been described above, but for the other push order bell groups 132 and the like, the first and second correct batting orders are different, and the apparent display line of the battle eye 1 is different (FIG. 87). In the battle eye 2, the lines are aligned on the upward-sloping line in appearance, etc. After that, the battle eye 1 and the battle eye 2 may be collectively referred to as the "battle eye"), and the overlapping single role is different. Except for the above, the same as the push order bell group 123, and as shown in FIG. 87, the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, although the push order bell group in which the 1st class BB can win is explained here, in addition to such a push order bell group, if the batting order is incorrect, only 1 card role or omission is performed, and the 1st class BB does not win the prize. In the possible push order bell group and the non-internal state of the 1st class BB, the above-mentioned 1st class BB is the same as the non-winning push order bell group, and when the 1st class BB is inside the 1st class BB, 1 in any batting order. It is also possible to provide a push order bell group or the like in which the card combination wins (one piece combination wins regardless of the batting order).

Here, when the first game by AT is performed as described above, it is necessary to prevent the type 1 BB from winning in order to maintain the state inside the type 1 BB. Further, in the present modification 2, the possibility of winning the 1st class BB in the 1st class BB is only when the push order bell group shown in FIG. 87 is won (in other words, these). It can be said that the push order bell group is the winning area where one type BB can win (it can be said that it is a winning area of a part of all the winning areas). In such a specification, if any of the push order bell groups is won, for example, if the push order bell group 123 described above is won, the effect display device S40 is provided with a push order navigation that displays the push order of the left 1st. conduct. At this time, the player who wants to play the first game can win the 1-card combination without winning the 1st class BB by following the push order navigation, and maintain the internal state of the 1st class BB. Can be done.

In this modification example 2, for example, when the push order bell group 123 is won, a battle eye display lottery is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the first correct batting order that displays the battle eye 1 with a predetermined probability, and this is won. If this is the case, the push order navigation in the first correct batting order is performed, and if the winner is not won, the push order navigation in the second correct batting order is performed (in other words, the push order navigation in the first correct batting order is not performed). In addition, the battle eye 1 is not displayed). Specifically, when the battle eye display lottery is won, for example, as shown on the left side of FIG. 37, in the push order display device, a display indicating that the push order is left, middle, or right. This is done, and the effect display device S40 also displays that the pressing order is left, middle, and right. On the other hand, if the battle eye display lottery is not won, the push order display device displays the push order of left, right, and middle, and the effect display device S40 also displays left, right, and middle. It is displayed that it is the pressing order of. That is, in the present modification 2, the push order navigation by the push order display device controlled by the main control board M and the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is notified or notified depending on whether or not the battle eye display lottery is successful. The suggested push order will be different. Here, in the present modification example 2, when the word "push order navigation" is used, the push order is displayed by at least one of the push order display device and the effect display device S40 described above, except when there is a disclaimer. Say that you are.

If the battle eye display lottery is won, the effect display device S40 displays that the push order is left, middle, and right, while the push order display device displays the left 1st (the first stop is the left). It is a reel, and the operation mode after that is not instructed) (since the middle and right push order is not displayed, it is practically a two-choice navigation), and the battle eye display lottery is won. If not, the effect display device S40 displays that the push order is left, right, and middle, while the push order display device displays the left 1st as in the case of winning the battle eye display lottery. In the production control device S40, the push order instruction differs depending on whether the battle eye display lottery is successful or not, while in the push order display device, one card is used regardless of whether the battle eye display lottery is successful or not. It is also possible to display only the fact that the left 1st, which is the minimum push order instruction that can win a prize. On the contrary, in the effect display device S40, regardless of whether the battle eye display lottery is successful or not, the left 1st is displayed, while in the push order display device, the battle eye display lottery is won. In that case, it is displayed that the push order is left, middle, and right, and if the battle eye display lottery is not won, the push order of left, right, and middle is displayed. In short, at least one of the push order display device and the effect display device S40 may display an accurate push order according to the success or failure of the battle eye display lottery.

Here, the push order of the second correct batting order is the order of left and right, and the result displayed in this case is "blank replay blank". That is, in the process of performing the stop operation in the order of left and right middle, at the time of performing the left middle and stop operation, the blanks that make up the battle eye are tempted to the left and right, such as "blank, rotating, blank". It is in a state. Therefore, the player can maintain the expectation that the battle eyes will be displayed until the stop button D40 corresponding to the last middle reel M52 is pressed.

In addition, if the battle eye display lottery is won, the AT lottery is performed based on this winning. In addition to this AT lottery, the lottery performed when the battle eye display lottery is won is, for example, if a so-called chance zone that is easier to shift to AT than usual is installed, the lottery shifts to this chance zone. A lottery may be held, or in an AT lottery held at the time of winning a rare role or the like, a so-called high-accuracy state transition lottery with a relatively high winning probability may be performed. If a score such as an advantageous lottery is given, the mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in this modification example 2, the battle eyes are displayed in the first correct batting order, and the non-battle eyes (specifically, the blanks constituting the battle eyes are listened to on the left and right reels) in the second correct batting order. (The result of the mode in which the symbols other than the blanks are stopped) is displayed on the middle reel. Or, prepare a single-card combination that gives a disjointed result of 0 (for example, "any symbol / blank / arbitrary symbol" in the case of one, and no blank in the symbol combination in the case of 0). By performing the push order navigation of this one-card role, it is possible to display disparate rolls. In short, any combination of symbols may be used as the non-battle item as long as it is not a combination of symbols constituting the battle eye, and this may be used as the result of the second correct batting order.

Here, the winning probability of the total of the push order bell groups in the non-AT state (the winning probability of the entire push order bell group) is set to A (for example, 1/8), and the winning probability by the battle eye display lottery in the non-AT state is set. B (for example, 1/20) (in other words, the probability C that the battle eye is displayed is A × B, for example, 1/8 × 1/20 is 1/160), and in the non-AT state. Assuming that the winning probability of the cherry, which is a rare role, is D (for example, 1/60) and the winning probability of the watermelon, which is a rare role, is E (for example, 1/100), the examples in parentheses are summarized below. The relationship between (1) and (2) is established.
(1) Probability that the battle eye is displayed (appearance rate) C <Cherry winning probability (appearance rate) D
(2) Probability that the battle eye is displayed C <Watermelon winning probability (appearance rate) E
That is, the probabilities D and E in which various rare roles (cherries and watermelons) are displayed are higher than the probabilities C in which the battle eyes are displayed. It goes without saying that the numerical values in parentheses are examples and appropriate numerical values can be set.

In this way, even when navigating the push order of the first correct batting order (1) with less payout of game medals than the specified number (3) at which the game can be started, the player such as AT lottery Since we are trying to give advantageous benefits, whether to let the player win the 1st class BB and play the 2nd game with the 1st class BB, the first correct answer that the number of game medals paid out is less than the specified number. It is possible to select whether to receive the AT lottery according to the batting order push order navigation (if the AT lottery is not performed, the merit of selecting the game 1 is reduced because the payout is less than the specified number). Further, even when the first correct batting order with less medals is selected, there is an advantage that the AT lottery can be received, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, by setting the appearance rate of the battle eyes lower than that of various rare roles, it is a great deal to receive the AT lottery by the battle eyes in the meantime while focusing on the AT lottery by the rare role from the player's point of view. Can be obtained, and the motivation for playing can be improved.

Also, in the push order navigation when the push order bell group is won, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the battle eye is displayed while performing the stop operation according to this navigation (stop operation according to the navigation). Since the movement is not just the digestion of the game), it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Moreover, by simply adjusting the winning probability B by the above battle eye display lottery, the probability that the battle eye will be displayed will be higher than the probability that various rare roles will be displayed, or the battle eye will be displayed. The probability can be the same as any of the various rare roles. As a result, for example, if the probability that the battle eyes are displayed is higher than the probability that various rare roles are displayed, the AT lottery by the battle eyes is the main axis, but in the meantime, It is possible to provide various playability only by adjusting the winning probability B by the battle eye display lottery, such as being able to provide the playability of being able to receive the AT lottery by the rare role.

<Specifications during AT>
Next, the effect during AT in this modification 2 will be described. In this change example 2, the AT lottery is performed based on the fact that the rare role is won and the battle eye is displayed as described above, and when the AT lottery is won, the game shifts to AT. During this AT, the number of balls to be played is increased by executing the push order navigation of the push order small winning combination (for example, 10 cards) that is larger than the specified number by winning a prize. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order bell group is won, the push order navigation of the correct batting order of each push order bell group (for example, in the case of the push order bell group 123, one of the left 1st push orders) is performed. conduct.

In this AT, a battle that shifts and performs a battle production by winning a battle production execution lottery based on the normal state during AT, winning a rare role during AT, and displaying the battle eye. It has an effect state, and ends with the end condition that the count of the number of games in the normal state during AT reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games). Further, in the AT of this modification example 2, by winning the last judge lottery (winning the battle production) described later in the battle production state performed during the normal state during the AT (during the predetermined game), the above Whether or not AT is repeated depending on whether or not the predetermined number of games is reset between the predetermined number of games, such that the predetermined number of games is reset and the AT is repeated (whether or not the AT continues). ) Is the so-called ST specification. Further, in this battle production state, the normal state during AT is not counted.

Specifically, after the start of AT, the normal state during AT is shifted to the battle production state after, for example, 10 games have been digested, and this battle production state is returned to the normal state during AT by defeat, for example, after executing 10 games. In that case, the count in the normal state during AT is set to 11 games next to 10 games. It should be noted that the specification may be such that the predetermined number of games is counted even in the battle production state, and whether or not the predetermined number of games are counted in the battle production state can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

Further, in this modification example 2, based on winning the last judge lottery in the battle production state, a so-called pseudo bonus (a form of AT, which increases the number of balls to be output by push order navigation, is a production display device. In S40, it is not an AT, but an effect that makes it look as if it is in a bonus) is confirmed, and after this pseudo bonus is exhausted, the predetermined number of games is reset to the normal state during the AT. It has become. In addition, a loop lottery that continues AT with a high probability (for example, 98%) based on reaching the predetermined number of games in a part of the last judge lottery result (with a big victory of a part of the victory of the battle production). Is performed, and by winning the loop lottery, the predetermined number of games is reset and the AT is continued. It is easy for AT to continue, but it goes without saying that the completion of the advantageous section is not confirmed.) There is also a shift to (these will be described later). Regarding the specifications of the special AT, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the completion of the advantageous section is not confirmed, but the specifications may have a higher probability of addition than other ATs, and the point is that they are higher than other ATs. Any AT that is advantageous to the player may be used. For other ATs, when the end condition of the AT is that the number of games has reached the predetermined number (AT for managing the number of games), in the special AT, the end of the AT is that the net increase number or the like reaches the predetermined number. The specification may be switched to a condition (AT for managing the number of sheets), and the effect display device S40 may also have a specification for switching from the display of the number of remaining games to the display of the number of remaining games. Further, in this modification example 2, when the AT continues for 1000 games or when the net increase number (MY) during the AT exceeds 2000, the above-mentioned ending state is reached and the AT continues until the advantageous section ends. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, in the normal state during AT, in addition to the AT lottery based on the rare role and the battle eye (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "rare role etc."), the winning probability of the battle production execution lottery is determined. A variable state determination lottery is performed, and depending on the lottery result of this state determination lottery, the winning probability of the battle production execution lottery is low, or the battle production execution lottery is won more than this low probability state. It is possible to shift to one of the high-probability high-accuracy states. Further, in the effect display device S40, in the normal state during AT, if the above-mentioned low-accuracy state is used, for example, an effect indicating a daytime state can be easily performed, and if the above-mentioned high-accuracy state is used, for example, in the evening or at night. It is made easy to perform the effect indicating the state of (at night, the high accuracy state is confirmed), and suggests the ease of transition to the battle effect in the normal state during AT.

Next, the battle production state will be described. This battle effect state is such that the end lottery for ending this battle effect state is performed every game, and the game ends based on the winning of this end lottery. In this battle production state, in each game, in addition to the end lottery, a battle point lottery to acquire specific points is performed, and the AT is continued by the last judge lottery performed based on these specific points and the like. It is designed to determine whether or not the predetermined number of games will be reset (this will be described later). Similar to the above-mentioned point acquisition lottery, the battle point lottery is performed according to the winning combination during the battle production state, and it is easier for rare roles to acquire specific points than for small roles and replay roles, or relative. It is easy to get a lot of specific points. It should be noted that this specific point is an internal parameter used to determine the result of the battle effect, and the numerical value is not displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like, while in the battle effect, the ally character or the enemy character By displaying the degree of damage, etc., it is suggested how many specific points there are.

Further, in the battle point lottery, in addition to the above-mentioned point acquisition lottery, a lottery using the battle eyes is also performed, and this will be described next with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. In the battle production state, in the game of the Nth game (including the first game that has transitioned to the battle production state), among the production display devices S40, as shown in FIG. 88, depending on the winning combination in that game. A display selection lottery is performed to determine the display target to be displayed in each of the first to third regions PR5 to 7 provided directly above each of the reels M51 to 53.

This display target is "enemy first", which suggests that the expectation of acquiring specific points is low, "ally first", which suggests that the expectation of acquiring specific points is higher than "enemy first", and points acquisition. There is an "antagonism" between "enemy first" and "ally first". Hereinafter, the combination of display targets such as "enemy first," "ally," and "antagonism" arranged in the first to third regions PR5 to 7, respectively, will be referred to as a "display arrangement." It should be noted that the display target is not the characters such as "enemy first", "ally first" and "antagonism", but the icon by the figure shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, or the combination of the character and the icon. Well, the display mode and type are not particularly limited.

In the second modification, a display arrangement lottery for determining the display arrangement corresponding to the winning combination of the Nth game is performed based on the last stop operation in the Nth game. Specifically, in the case of a small role or a replay role, a display arrangement in which "enemy first," "ally first," and "antagonism" are randomly arranged one by one in the first to third regions PR5 to 7, respectively. In the case of a rare role, for example, a display array that is all "ally first" or a combination of two "ally first" and the remaining one "enemy first" or "antagonism" is performed. Is an advantageous display arrangement that tends to be a display arrangement randomly arranged in the 1st to 3rd regions PR5 to 7. A display arrangement in which a rare role is more advantageous to a player than a small role or a replay role. It is designed to perform a display arrangement lottery that is easy to become. Further, in the second modification, as the display arrangement lottery, in addition to the above-mentioned normal display arrangement lottery and advantageous arrangement lottery, for example, a display arrangement that is all "enemy first" or "antagonism", and two are "enemy first". The remaining one has a disadvantageous sequence lottery in which a combination of "allied first" or "antagonism" is easily selected.

When the display arrangement is determined by this display arrangement lottery, the display arrangement is stored in a storage means (not shown), and the first stop operation after pressing the start lever D50 in the N + 1 game, which is the next game of the N game. The display arrangement stored in the storage means, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, is "enemy first" in the first display area PR5 corresponding to the left reel M51 at a predetermined timing before the operation. A display sequence such as "allied first" is displayed in the second display area PR6 corresponding to the reel M52, and "antagonism" is displayed in the third display area PR7 corresponding to the right reel M53. In this change example 2, among the display targets, the display target corresponding to the reel to be stopped first in the push order navigation of the push order small winning combination is reflected in the battle point lottery. The predetermined timing may be any timing after all reels are stopped in the Nth game and before the start lever D50 is pressed, and all reels are stopped in the Nth game. It may be any timing from after that to before the first stop operation is performed in the N + 1 game.

That is, if the winning combination by pressing the start lever D50 in the N + 1 game is the above-mentioned push order small combination, the correct batting order of this push order small combination (the combination of symbols for which 10 cards are paid out is displayed) is displayed. The push order navigation of (order) is performed, and the display target corresponding to the reel that stops first in this push order is reflected in the battle point lottery. In other words, in the Nth game, the display arrangement (candidate for the target reflected in the battle point acquisition lottery and can be said to be the candidate (provisional content) for the content related to AT continuation (transition to AT)) is determined, and N + 1 By performing the stop operation according to the push order navigation of the game eye, it is determined which display target is reflected from the display arrangement determined in the N game eye (determine which of the above-mentioned candidates is selected). Alternatively, among the candidates for the above contents, it can be said that the provisional contents corresponding to the stop operation according to the push order navigation of the N + 1 game are determined as the contents related to AT continuation). In other words, after all the reels have stopped in the Nth game, the content candidates are determined and displayed on the main control board M, and the content is based on the winning combination when the start lever D50 in the N + 1th game is pressed. The content to be selected from the candidates is decided, and the battle point acquisition lottery is performed based on the content.

Specifically, on the main control board M, when the start lever D50 of the N + 1 game is pressed and the push order small winning combination is won, the left reel "enemy first strike" which is a candidate of the content decided in the N game. , "Allies first" on the middle reel, and "Competition" on the right reel, a battle point lottery will be held for the reel that stops first in the winning push order small winning combination (the reel corresponding to the correct push order). Further, when the push order small winning combination is won in the N + 1 game, the main control board M transmits a command for displaying an effect such as "enemy preemption" on the effect display device S40 on the sub control board S. , A command related to the battle point lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40 or the like to execute an effect corresponding to these various commands.

For example, after pressing the start lever D50 of the N + 1 game, the display arrangements arranged in the first to third regions PR5 to 7 of the effect display device S40 by the sub-control means S are as shown in FIG. 88. , "Enemy first", "Friend first", "Competition", and the correct batting order of the push order small role is in the order of middle left and right (213) (in other words, "enemy first" as a candidate for the above content , "Friend first", "Competition" is selected), the "Friend first" corresponding to the middle reel M52 that is stopped first will be used for the battle point lottery (in other words, the candidate of the above content). It can be said that the "ally first system" is determined from the above, or the provisional content "ally first system" is determined as the content related to AT continuation among the above provisional contents). In this case, as shown in FIG. 89, when the middle reel M52 is stopped, the left and right (first and third display areas PR5, 7) display of "enemy preemption" and "antagonism" on the effect display device S40. Disappears and only the "ally first" in the middle reel M52 (second display area PR6) remains, and the ally character attacks the enemy character, and the "ally first" is reflected in the battle point lottery. Notify the player that it will be done.

Further, in the state of FIG. 88, when the correct batting order of the push order small winning combination is the order of left middle right (123), the "enemy first" corresponding to the left reel M51 to be stopped first is selected for the battle point lottery. As shown in FIG. 90, only the left (first display area PR5) "enemy preemption" corresponding to the left reel remains, and the ally character is attacked by the enemy character in the battle. Notify the player that the "enemy first" will be reflected in the point lottery.

In this way, the display arrangement lottery is performed in the N game to determine and display the candidate content, and the final content is determined from the candidate content according to the correct hit order of the push order small winning combination in the N + 1 game. However, while the battle production state continues, in the N + 1 game that determines the final content, the display arrangement lottery of the next game will be performed at the same time (in other words, the N + 1 game is , It corresponds to the Nth game from the next game). That is, in the game at the time of entering the battle production state (the first game in the battle production state and the Nth game), the introduction effect for notifying the entry into the battle production state is performed, while the next second game is performed. Display arrangement lottery for (N + 1 game) is performed. In the next second game, the display target to be reflected is determined from the display arrangement determined by the display arrangement lottery performed in the first game described above, but at the same time, for the next third game. Display arrangement lottery (N + 1 game when viewed from the first game, N game when viewed from the third game). Then, in this third game, the display target to be reflected is determined from the display arrangement in the display arrangement lottery performed in the second game, and the display arrangement lottery for the next fourth game is controlled. It is designed to repeat until the final game in the battle production state.

In this modification example 2, in the game in which the "ally first strike" is reflected as described above, the attack of the ally character is confirmed, and a predetermined number of specific points can be obtained. At this time, as described above, the display arrangement lottery for the next game is performed, and in the display arrangement lottery at this time, the above-mentioned advantageous display arrangement lottery is performed. In other words, when the "ally first" is reflected, it is easy to display an advantageous arrangement in the next game. In this way, when the "ally first" is reflected, it is easy to display an advantageous arrangement in the next game, so after the "ally first" is reflected, the "ally first" is continuously displayed. It becomes easier to be reflected, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Also, in a game that reflects "enemy first", specific points cannot be earned and the enemy character's attack is confirmed. Further, in this game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the attack of this enemy character hits an ally, and if this lottery is won, the above-mentioned disadvantageous arrangement lottery is performed. In other words, when the "enemy preemption" is reflected, it is easy to display a disadvantageous arrangement in the next game, and this lottery can be said to be a lottery for determining the arrangement of the next game. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, by performing an effect in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, it is notified that the arrangement display tends to be disadvantageous in the next game. On the other hand, if the enemy character's attack does not win the lottery to see if it hits an ally, the above-mentioned normal arrangement lottery is performed. In this case, in the effect display device S40, the ally character performs an effect of avoiding the attack of the enemy character, thereby notifying that it is difficult to display an unfavorable arrangement in the next game. In this way, when the "enemy first" is reflected, it is easy to display a disadvantageous arrangement in the next game, so after the "enemy first" is reflected, what is the above-mentioned "ally first"? On the contrary, the "enemy first-come-first-served" can be easily reflected continuously, and a sharp game can be performed in combination with the above-mentioned "ally-first-come-first-served".

In addition, in a game that reflects "antagonism", a lottery is made so that "friend first" or "enemy first" is selected separately, for example, at a rate of 50% for each (note that this lottery probability). , Needless to say, it can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine, etc.), and processing is performed according to the lottery result (similar to the game in which the above-mentioned "friend first" or "enemy first" is reflected. Perform processing).

In this modification example 2, the final content is determined from the candidates for the content such as "friend first", "enemy first", and "antagonism" as described above, and the determined final content is the next game. Although it had an influence on the arrangement display lottery, it goes without saying that the specification may be such that the arrangement display lottery in the game is independently performed regardless of the final contents reflected. In other words, when executing the array display lottery, it may be configured to execute without referring to the past lottery results.

Further, in this modification example 2, during AT, the payout is more than the specified number (for example, 3 cards), and the push order small winning combination (for example, 10-card winning combination. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as 10-card combination navigation). The probability of occurrence of push order navigation (for example, about 1/2) is less than the specified number of payouts including the above-mentioned push order bell group. It is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of push order navigation (for example, about 1/8). In addition, when performing a push order navigation effect, it does not notify whether the payout is a push order for a push order small combination that is larger than the specified number or a push order role that is payout less than the specified number. It informs which push order the stop operation should be performed. By doing so, when a push order navigation occurs, there is a high probability that this push order navigation is a 10-card role navigation that increases the game medals, rather than a 1-card role navigation that reduces the game medals. The occurrence of navigation itself is a nice event for the player. As a result, the player can perform the stop operation with the expectation that the number of game medals will increase, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Here, if the N + 1th game is a rare role (first-come-first-served), a specific point is obtained and the display arrangement determined by the display arrangement lottery performed in the Nth game and stored in the storage means. (The display arrangement is not displayed in the 1st to 3rd display areas PR5 to 7), and the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of a rare role or the like, the acquisition of more specific points may be confirmed than in the case of the above-mentioned "friend first", and in this case, the above-mentioned "friend first" It is also possible to notify the player that more specific points have been confirmed than in the case, for example, by making a stronger attack than in the case where the ally character is "allied first".

In addition, when the N + 1 game is a push order bell group and the push order navigation of the second correct batting order of the non-battle is performed, the same processing as when the above-mentioned push order combination is won is performed. .. On the other hand, when the push order navigation of the first correct batting order of the battle eye is performed, even if the display target determined in this N + 1 game is "enemy first" or "antagonism", "ally first" is forcibly performed. , And when the determined display target is the "ally first", the same processing as when the above rare combination is won is performed. If the above rare role is won or if the battle eye is displayed, a lottery to confirm the victory may be separately performed, and by winning this, the AT continuation may be confirmed.

Here, when the push order navigation of the first correct batting order of this battle eye is performed, the battle eye is displayed even when the push order different from the first correct batting order is performed due to the player's push mistake. Assuming that it has been done, the same processing as when the battle eye is displayed (such as the above-mentioned AT lottery) is performed. In this way, we are trying to rescue the player who made a mistake in pushing in the situation where he won the battle eye display lottery. On the other hand, if the player performs the first correct batting order and the battle eye is displayed when the player performs the push order navigation of the second correct batting order of the non-battle eye, it is treated as a non-battle eye. Therefore, the same processing as in the non-battle time (as described above, the treatment that the batting order small role is won) is performed. In this way, even if the battle eye is displayed by ignoring the operation error or intentionally pushing order navigation in the situation where the battle eye display lottery has not been won, this is treated as a non-battle eye display. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed. From the same point of view, for example, the left reel is "enemy first", the middle reel is "ally first", the push order bell that is the left 1st is won, and the first stop reel of the push order navigation is the left reel. Yes, even if the player intentionally presses the middle reel in the situation where the production corresponding to "enemy first" is executed, the lottery result corresponding to "enemy first" is reflected (about the production). However, the production corresponding to the "enemy preemption" is executed) to ensure the fairness of the game.

In the battle production state, as described above, the end lottery is performed in each game, the last judge lottery is performed based on the winning of the end lottery, and the predetermined game of AT is performed according to the result of this last judge lottery. It is designed to decide whether or not to reset the number (whether or not to continue AT). This last judge lottery is based on the specific points earned so far and the number of continuous games in the battle production state. In this modification example 2, the higher the value obtained by adding the continuous points according to the number of continuous games in the battle production state to the acquired specific points, the easier it is to win the last judge lottery. In other words, the higher the specific point, and the longer the number of continuous games in the battle production state, the easier it is to win the last judge lottery, and the easier it is for AT to continue.

For example, if the added value obtained by adding specific points and continuous points is the first value (for example, 100) or more, the special AT is confirmed, and as a corresponding effect, the ally character overwhelms the enemy character. Perform a production such as a big victory to notify the transition to a special AT. If the added value is a second value (for example, 70) or more, which is less than the first value, the continuation of the AT is confirmed, and then a special AT transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability. If it wins, it will be notified to the special AT, and if it is not, the continuation of AT will be confirmed, and the effect that the ally character will win the enemy character will be executed to notify that the AT will continue. If it is less than the second value, a lottery is performed with a probability according to the value (for example, if it is 0 to 10, the AT continuation rate is 10%, if it is 11 to 20, the AT continuation rate is 20%, etc.). And, depending on the result of this lottery, it is decided whether or not to shift to the special AT or to continue the AT. In addition, instead of the above-mentioned AT continuation, a privilege such as winning a pseudo bonus or continuing AT after winning the pseudo bonus may be given.

As described above, in the second modification, the display arrangement lottery is performed in the Nth game, and the display target is determined according to the correct batting order (display mode of the push order navigation) of the push order small winning combination in the N + 1 game. Since the battle point lottery is performed based on the display target, it is possible to prevent the batting order navigation from becoming a mere digestion game. In addition, the display mode of the push order navigation is reflected in the battle point lottery, and the so-called discard game can be eliminated during AT. In addition, from the player's point of view, the display mode of the push order navigation drawn by himself / herself is reflected in the battle point lottery, so that he / she can concentrate on the game during AT while having a sense of self-reliance. Furthermore, in the last judge lottery of whether to continue AT, the longer the number of continuous games in the battle production state, the easier it is to transfer the special AT and continue the AT, so the battle production state during AT In the above, the so-called abandoned game can be eliminated, and the expectation of the continuation of the AT can be increased even in a state where a specific point has not been acquired so much.

The lottery method for the last judge lottery is not limited to the above example, and it goes without saying that an appropriate lottery method such as drawing with a certain probability based on the winning of the end lottery can be applied. As an example of this, instead of performing a battle point lottery, in the case of the above-mentioned "allied first-come-first-served basis", a state-up (chance-up) lottery that increases the probability of winning the last judge lottery is performed, and the number of times this lottery is won. The lottery may be performed based on the added value obtained by adding the value corresponding to (number) and the continuation points corresponding to the number of staying games in the above-mentioned battle production state.

As another example, for example, a plurality of lottery tables with a stepwise increase in winning probability are prepared from the lowest low probability table, and a rank-up lottery is performed to decide which lottery table to use, and this rank is obtained. If the lottery is performed by the lottery table determined by the up lottery, or if the above-mentioned continuation point is the first value based on the lottery table determined by this rank up lottery, it is one step higher than the table that became this standard. If the 2nd value is larger than the 1st value in the lottery table, the lottery table is decided by the rank-up lottery. On the other hand, there is a lottery table that takes into account the value of continuation points. Also, if the number of games is a predetermined number, such as the 7th game and the 17th game after the game that performs the last judge lottery enters the battle production state, the continuation of AT is confirmed, or The lottery may be performed according to the number of staying games, such that it will be confirmed if the last judge lottery is executed within 10 games or after 50 games.

Further, in this modification example 2, the specification is such that the winning of the first type BB is avoided depending on the pushing order, but instead of this, the specification is such that the game can be played only with one specified number (the game can be played only with a so-called three-card bet). (Possible max bet only specifications, etc.), out of all winning areas (all winning areas), the area where one type BB wins alone is extremely narrowed (probability is extremely low), and the other winning areas are It is also possible to adopt a specification that fills with a small role of a single role with a pull-in probability of 100% or a replay. In this case, as the probability that the first type BB is won independently, for example, 1/65536 to 4/65536 and the like can be mentioned. By doing so, since there is almost no single winning of the 1st class BB in which the 1st class BB can win, there is almost no need to avoid the winning of the 1st class BB depending on the pushing order. Regarding this, as a combination of winning symbols of type 1 BB, there is only one for each reel, and by making the symbols difficult to press, it becomes more difficult for type 1 BB to win. Suitable. In addition to the above specifications, the 1st class BB always overlaps with other winning areas, for example, the winning area of "1st class BB + winning combination A + winning combination B" and the winning area of "1st class BB + winning combination C + winning combination D". For example, the lottery result is the winning area of "Type 1 BB + winning combination A + winning combination B", and the stop operation is performed in a predetermined pushing order and a predetermined pushing position. Only in this case, it is possible to avoid winning the type 1 BB by performing a stop operation other than the above-mentioned push order and stop position by performing the reel stop control for pulling in the type 1 BB. Further, RB may be used instead of Type 1 BB.

<Processing when shifting to an advantageous section>
Next, the processing when shifting to the advantageous section will be described. The process described here can be applied to other embodiments, and is particularly preferably applied to a gaming machine having a "normal section" and an "advantageous section".

In the second modification, predetermined information about the game is stored in one of the RAM areas of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M at a specific timing after the transition to the advantageous section is determined (hereinafter, simply "in the RAM". It is called "memory".) It is designed to perform processing. Then, at a predetermined timing after the predetermined information is stored, the content related to the advantageous state such as AT is determined based on the stored predetermined information (referring to the stored predetermined information). There is. In other words, the content related to the advantageous state determined according to the stored predetermined information is different depending on whether the stored predetermined information is A or B, respectively. It is different (in other words, which mode is to be switched to is different among the plurality of modes having different contents regarding the advantageous state from each other). When A is stored as predetermined information in the RAM, it is more disadvantageous than when B is stored as predetermined information in determining the content related to an advantageous state such as AT (for example). , Set so that the ball output rate is low, etc.) The content is decided. When the RAM is configured to store the RT state as predetermined information, the information stored in the RAM may be configured so that the information corresponding to the non-RT and the information after the RAM is cleared are the same.

By doing so, if the RAM or the like of the main control board M is removed or replaced with an illegal one due to an illegal act, and the predetermined information stored in the memory is erased, then the RAM is not stored. The value corresponding to RT will be stored, and even if it shifts to the advantageous section in this state, it will be in a disadvantageous state as compared with the case where the value corresponding to the RT state other than non-RT is stored in the RAM. It is possible to dilute fraudulent activities. In the above description, the predetermined information is stored in any of the RAM areas of the CPUC100 of the main control board M, but the storage area of the predetermined information is not limited to this, and the predetermined information can be stored. Needless to say, an appropriate storage area can be used as long as it is a suitable area.

Next, various aspects that concretely describe the above-mentioned predetermined information, contents related to AT, specific and predetermined timing, and the like will be described.
<Aspect 1>
In this aspect 1, the determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined with the "RT state" as the predetermined information regarding the game, the "AT winning probability" as the content regarding the advantageous state, and the specific timing as the specific timing (hereinafter, "advantageous section"). The "decision game in which the transition is determined" is simply referred to as the "decision game"), and the first stop button (for example, after the reel reaches steady rotation (constant speed rotation), after the first stop operation, or at the last stop button). The start game of the advantageous section (the next game of the decision game, and thereafter, " The "starting game of the advantageous section" is simply referred to as "starting game") either after the pressing of the start lever D50 and before the reel enters the steady rotation state or before the first stop operation. (Timing, etc.) is applied.

In this aspect 1, every game (may be every game for all games, for example, if the specification does not refer to non-RT, the situation is staying in a predetermined gaming state such as an RT state other than non-RT. It may be every game below.) The RT state is stored in the RAM. Specifically, when the start lever D50 of the game is pressed, the RAM maintains the state in which the RT state of the previous game of the game is stored, and at the first timing in the determination game. , The RT state of the game is stored in the RAM (the RT state stored in the RAM is updated). Then, at the second timing in the start game, the winning probability of AT according to the RT state stored at this time (RT state stored in the determination game which is the previous game of this start game) (related to AT). AT lottery will be held in the content).

For example, if the RT state stored at that time is non-RT, an AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/3, and if the RT state stored at that time is RT1, the winning is 1/2. AT lottery will be held with a probability. Then, from the next game of this start game, the game based on the AT lottery result, that is, the AT state in the advantageous section if the AT is won, and the normal state in the advantageous section if the AT is not won. .. The AT winning probability according to the RT state is not limited to the above-mentioned probability, and an appropriate winning probability can be applied. In the above example, the non-RT has a winning probability of AT rather than RT1. Although it is set high, it goes without saying that it is possible to make appropriate settings such as lowering the winning probability of AT for non-RT than for RT1.

As for the content regarding the advantageous state, instead of the above AT lottery, for example, as a specification regarding the game state, the AT lottery probabilities at the AT lottery opportunity such as the rare combination winning are different from each other in modes 1 and 2 (modes higher than mode 1). 2 has a higher AT lottery probability), set mode 1 if the RT state stored in the RAM is non-RT, and set mode 2 if the RT state stored in the RAM is RT1. The specifications may be different, such as setting, in which the gaming state in the advantageous section is different. Regarding modes 1 and 2, in addition to the AT lottery probability at the AT lottery opportunity, for example, the number of ceiling games in mode 1 is 1000 games, while the number of ceiling games in mode 2 is 500 games, which is smaller than that in mode 1. As such, it may be related to the number of ceiling games, and the point is not particularly limited as long as it is related to various gaming states in an advantageous section. The same applies to other aspects.

<Aspect 2>
This aspect 2 differs from the first aspect in that the RT state is not stored in the RAM for each game, but the RT state is stored in the RAM only in the determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined. That is, in the determination game, the RT state at that time is stored in the RAM at the first timing in the determination game. Then, at the first timing in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the AT according to the RT state stored at that time. In the case of this aspect 2, the RT state stored in the RAM may be deleted after being referred to in the start game, or the advantageous section is entered again after the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered. It may be updated at the time.

<Aspect 3>
In this aspect 3, the predetermined information regarding the game and the content regarding the advantageous state are the same as those in the above aspect 1, and the predetermined timing is the third timing in the determination game (for example, after storing the predetermined information in the determination game). Any timing from to before the start of the advantageous section game) is applied. That is, in the determination game in which the transition of the advantageous section is determined, after the RT information is stored in the RAM, the winning probability of the AT according to the RT information stored in the RAM is determined at the third timing in the determination game. do. Then, in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the determined AT.

<Aspect 4>
This aspect 4 differs from the above aspect 3 in that the "operating condition device" is applied as predetermined information regarding the game. That is, the following situations 1 to 3 are obtained.
(Situation 1) In a situation where the type 1 BB has not been won, the internal lottery result in the decision game in which the transition of the advantageous section is decided may be a small role, a replay role, a rare role, etc. (hereinafter, a small role, etc.). ), The operating condition device has the same "small winning combination" as the result of this internal lottery.
(Situation 2) If the internal lottery result in the decision game is lost in the situation where the 1st class BB is won (under the situation where the 1st class BB winning is carried over), the operating condition device is ". It becomes "Type 1 BB".
(Situation 3) If the internal lottery result in the decision game is a small winning combination, etc. in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is won (under the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB is carried over), the conditional device is operating. Is "Type 1 BB + small role, etc."
At the third timing in the game (decision game) of the above (situation 1) to (situation 3), the winning probability of the AT according to the "operating condition device" is determined. Then, in the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the determined AT. With this configuration, the AT winning probabilities can be different between (Situation 1), (Situation 2), and (Situation 3).

For example, if the "operating condition device" is a rare combination, the AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/3, and if the "operating condition device" is a small combination, the winning probability is 1/5. If the "operating condition device" is "type 1 BB + rare role", the AT lottery is performed with a winning probability of 1/2, and the "operating condition device" is "type 1 BB +". In the case of "small role", there is an example of performing an AT lottery with a winning probability of 1/4. In this aspect 4, when a small winning combination or the like is won in the game, there are two patterns of "operating condition device", one is "small winning combination, etc." and the other is "type 1 BB + small winning combination, etc." (That is, in addition to the number of types such as small roles, there are as many types of predetermined information as there are combinations of these and the type 1 BB). If a plurality of types of seed BBs are possessed, or if RBs or the like are possessed in addition to these, the types will be further increased), so that the contents related to AT can be varied.

<Aspect 5>
In this aspect 5, the predetermined information regarding the game and the content regarding the advantageous state are the same as those in the above aspect 1, and as a specific timing, the first timing after pressing the second timing (for example, the start lever D50) in the start game. A third timing in the start game (for example, a second timing in the above start game) is applied as a predetermined timing by applying any timing until the stop operation is performed or before the reel is in the steady rotation state. Any timing after the timing of the above and before the start game of the advantageous section ends, etc.) is applied.
That is, in the start game of the advantageous section, the RT state at that time is stored in the RAM at the second timing in this start game, and then, according to the stored RT state at the third timing in the start game. Determine the winning probability of AT. Then, in the next game of the start game of the advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed with the winning probability of the determined AT.

Although the embodiments 1 to 5 have been illustrated above, the predetermined information regarding the game includes, for example, the number of continuous games in the RT state and the normal section in addition to the above-mentioned RT state and the internal lottery result (operating conditional device). If a conditional device number is assigned to each winning combination such as the number of staying games, a small role, a replay role, and a bonus, appropriate information such as the conditional device number can be applied, and predetermined information regarding the game can be applied. Needless to say, is not particularly limited. Similarly, as for the content regarding the advantageous state, in addition to the above-mentioned AT winning probability, again, the number of so-called ceiling games (the number of ceiling games differs depending on predetermined information, etc.) and the number of games shift to AT. In the game number management specifications, the number of games for the first time to shift to AT (the number of games for the first time is shorter in mode 2 than in mode 1 etc.) and the zone where it is easy to hit for the first time (for example, the mode according to predetermined information). Mode 2 has a higher probability of allocating the number of AT winning games in the 101-200 game zone than in the 0-100 game zone than in 1), and the transition probability to the AT or chance zone. Modes of state transition (specific embodiments of modes 1 and 2 above) such that the transition probability to high accuracy is different in specifications with low accuracy and high accuracy (mode 2 is easier to transition to high accuracy than mode 1). ), Etc., and it goes without saying that the content regarding this advantageous state is not particularly limited.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned modes 1 and 2, when the mode 0 which is the initial state is provided and the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal section, the mode 0 is shifted to the advantageous section in the next game and stored in the RAM. By referring to the predetermined information provided, the mode 1 or 2 of the advantageous section may be shifted to in the next game (games one after another of the games won in the advantageous section). For example, taking the number of ceiling games as an example, in the mode 0 game of the advantageous section (the next game of the game that won the advantageous section transition lottery), by referring to the predetermined information stored in the RAM, In the next game, the number of ceiling games shifts to, for example, mode 1 of 500 games or mode 2 of 1000 games (in other words, in mode 1, the number of ceiling games of 500 games is set in the next game, and mode 2 If so, the number of ceiling games of 1000 games may be set in the next game), or in the mode 0 game of the advantageous section (the next game of the game won in the advantageous section transition lottery). By referring to the predetermined information stored in the RAM, 500 games may be set or 1000 games may be set as the number of ceiling games (the mode remains mode 0).

<<< Second Embodiment >>>
Next, the second embodiment will be described, but in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those in the above-described embodiment. It should be noted that this second embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, for example, a reel arrangement according to another embodiment, a type of winning combination (combination configuration), and a reel arrangement according to the second embodiment. It goes without saying that the reels and condition devices can be applied to other embodiments. 91 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, and FIGS. 92 to 102 are a list of symbol combinations in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, FIG. 103 and FIG. FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, FIG. 105 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a list of bonus specifications. 2 is a list of main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, and FIGS. 107 to 109 are internal lottery data in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining a push slash combination 1 in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 111 is a pushing order in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment. It is an image diagram explaining the instruction mode of the display device, and FIG. 112 is an image diagram for explaining the effect mode of the effect display device in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

The reel arrangement of the spinning machine in the second embodiment is as shown in FIG. 91, and has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 0 to No. 19. In FIG. 91, as in FIG. 86 described above, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder means the right reel M53. (Also in FIG. 91, the above-mentioned reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). Although not shown, in the second embodiment, the effective line is one diagonally downward-sloping line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage".

Further, the symbol combinations for each specified number of the rotating drum type gaming machines in the second embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 92 to 102. Here, although only one type 1 BB of the second embodiment is provided, a plurality of types such as type 1 BB-A to D may be provided. As described above, the "specified number" in FIGS. 92 to 102 is the so-called number of bets, and "3" and "2" in the "specified number and gaming state" column are bets of 3 respectively. This is the meaning of the game of 2 cards.

The condition device of the rotating cylinder type gaming machine in the second embodiment is as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104. In FIGS. 103 and 104, the “component” indicates a role that constitutes the condition device. For example, in the “winning-A1 condition device” of No. 7 of “winning / replay”, the component thereof. Is a prize of 01, a prize of 10 to 17, a prize of 26 to 27, a prize of 42 to 43, and a prize of 66 to 67, indicating that these roles are duplicated. Further, "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" in FIGS. 103 and 104 indicates a state in which the type 1 BB is not inside, and in "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating", the type 1 BB is inside. It shows the state. In addition, the descriptions in the columns of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" also indicate the pull-in priority and the pull-in rate according to the batting order. This will be described by taking the "winning-A1 condition device" of No. 7 of "winning / replay" in FIG. 103 as an example. First, "123" and the like in "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" are synonymous with "123" in the above-mentioned "pushing order bell 123" (that is, as described above, "1" is a left stop button. D41 and "2" indicate the middle stop button D42, "3" indicates the right stop button D43, and the sequence of these numbers means that the stop buttons indicated by the numbers are pressed in that order), left, and so on. It means that the reels are stopped in the order of pushing in the middle and right. Further, "2 **" indicates the 1st among the above. Similarly, "3 **" indicates the above-mentioned right 1st, and although it is described in another column, "1 **" indicates the left 1s. Further, "1/1", "1/2", and "1/8" indicate the respective winning rates. For example, "123: 1/1 prize 01" means that when the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, the symbol combination related to prize 01 wins 100% (pull-in rate 100%). , "2 **: 1/8 prize 26-271,66", when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st, the symbol combination related to any of the prizes 26-27, 66 has a prize rate of 1/8. It means to win a prize.

Among these winning rates, for example, when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st, the case where the symbol combination according to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 wins at the winning rate of 1/8 is explained as follows. be. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 99, the symbol combination related to the prize 26 is "Seven Bell B Seven", the symbol combination related to the prize 27 is "Seven Bell B Blank", and the symbol combination related to the prize 66 is. The combination is "Seven Bell B Cherry". "Bell B" which is the design of the middle reel M52 of each of these prizes 26-27, 66 (hereinafter, this kind of design is sometimes simply called "Bell B" or "Bell B" design. In some cases, the winning rate is 1/1 because the middle reels M52 are arranged on the middle reel M52 at equal intervals of 5 frames. Further, in the state where "Bell B" is stopped on the middle reel M52, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning 26 to 27, 66 on the right reel M53 are "Seven" and "Blank". , "Cherry", and since any of these symbols can be drawn in a total of 10 frames from No. 10 to No. 19, the winning rate is halved. Further, since only one "Seven" symbol constituting the symbol combination related to each of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 on the left reel M51 is arranged on the left reel M52, the winning rate is 1/4. Become. Therefore, in the symbol combination according to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66, the winning rate of the left reel M51 is 1/4, the winning rate of the middle reel M52 is 1/1, and the winning rate of the right reel M53 is 1/2. Therefore, the winning rate of the entire symbol combination pertaining to any of the winnings 26 to 27 and 66 is 1/8 (“1/4” × “1/1” × “1/2” = “1/8”). Will be.

Here, the "replay / bar alignment" of the number 2 of the "winning / replay" in FIG. 103 is the same as the "reverse push white 7 alignment replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 in FIG. In 10, it is "white 7", whereas in FIG. 103, it is "bar". That is, the "right 1st: bar alignment" in the column of "type 1 BB condition device not operating" in FIG. 103 means that the player has the right 1st batting order, and the number 3 in FIG. 91 is in the lower row of the right reel M53. The player by pressing "Bell A", the 9th "bar" of FIG. 329 in the middle of the middle reel 52, and the 7th "Bell A" of FIG. 91 in the upper part of the left reel M51 so as to stop. The "bars, bars, and bars" are aligned (displayed) in a straight line in the middle of the row (actually, on the effective line, the number 52 of FIG. 94, which is a combination of symbols related to the replay 03. "Bell A, Bar, Bell A" is displayed). In addition, "left 1st: replay" and "middle 1st: replay" in the same column mean that "replay, replay, and replay" are aligned on the valid line when the batting order of the left 1st or middle 1st is performed. is doing. Furthermore, regarding the "right 1st: bar fake" of the "replay / bar matching fake" of the number 2 of the "winning / replay" in FIG. 103, the "bar" symbol is tempted when the batting order of the right 1st is performed. It means that they are not aligned. That is, when the batting order of the right 1st is performed, any one of the symbol combinations related to the replay 01 (the symbol combination of Nos. 2 to 5 in FIG. 92) is stopped, and the above-mentioned player The 3rd "Bell A" in FIG. 91 can be stopped in the lower part of the right reel M53, and the 9th "bar" in FIG. The design is "replay", and since there is no "bar" under each "replay" of the left reel M51, the bar is removed by the left reel M51.

Further, in the second embodiment, the lottery mode regarding the AT may be different depending on the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop mode). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, slash combinations A to H (hereinafter, simply referred to as “push order and stop timing”) in which the winning symbol combinations are different are generally different depending on the push order and / or stop timing (hereinafter, simply referred to as “push order and stop timing”). Hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push slash role 1"), but this push slash role 1 (specific role) and "one type" in this push slash role 1. The description of the columns of "when the BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating" will be described later. Further, the "components" in FIGS. 103 and 104 indicate roles that constitute the conditional device. For example, in the "winning-A1 conditional device" of No. 7 of "winning / replay", the configuration thereof. The elements are winning 01, winning 10 to 17, winning 26 to 27, winning 42 to 43, and winning 66 to 67, indicating that these roles are duplicated.

In the second embodiment, the push slash combination 1 will be described as an example, but the push slash combination 2, 3 and the push slash combination (weak check) of each modification described later will be summarized. Sometimes it is simply called "pushing slash role", and sometimes it is simply called "pushing slash role" by summarizing this "pushing slash role" and the "pushing order slash role" of the modification described later. That is, the "slash combination" is a general term for a combination in which the lottery (a privilege advantageous to the player) regarding AT differs depending on the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the type 1 BB of the second embodiment is only one type of the symbol combination of "bell B, watermelon A, cherry". This type 1 BB ends, for example, when more than 33 game medals are acquired. Further, this type 1 BB is a specification in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends, for example, with two games or two winnings, or the end of the operating type 1 BB. In addition, while these types of BBs are in operation (during bonuses), only three bets can be played.

Further, in the second embodiment, the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as shown in FIG. 106. As shown in FIG. 106, in the normal time when the type 1 BB is not won (normal game state), the state inside the type 1 BB where the type 1 BB is won and carried over (the type 1 BB condition device is operating). In the state of), he is staying at non-RT. In other words, in non-RT, there are two types: non-RT (normal time), which is a normal gaming state in non-RT, and non-RT (type 1 BB condition device is operating) inside the type 1 BB in the non-RT. It can be said that it has a gaming state. Further, after the winning of the 1st class BB, when the above-mentioned symbol combination (1st class BB operating symbol) related to the 1st class BB is displayed and the 1st class BB is in operation, the process shifts to RT1. Then, when the operation of the first type BB is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. In addition, when the setting is changed in the state inside the type 1 BB, the type 1 BB of the second embodiment is designed to maintain the inside of the type 1 BB without clearing this state. On the other hand, when the setting is changed while the type 1 BB is operating (during RT1), this state (state related to bonus, etc.) is cleared and becomes non-RT. Further, in the second embodiment, the non-RT is set inside the type 1 BB, but instead, the RT state inside the type 1 BB is different from the normal time when the type 1 BB is not won. For example, it may be a specification to stay at RT2.

Regarding the number of each condition device (bonus condition device, winning / replay) in these non-RT (normal game state), non-RT (type 1 BB condition device in operation), RT1 (type 1 BB in operation), etc. , As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, and the entire number (random number denominator) thereof is 65536. In these FIGS. 107 to 109, the numbers such as "1" in the left column such as "non-RT (normal time)" indicating the RT state are merely numbers for identification, and "1" is a bet of three cards. Non-RT at the time, "2" corresponds to the type 1 BB condition device operating at the time of betting three cards, and "3" corresponds to the operation of the BB betting three cards. Further, "○" and "×" in the respective columns of "lottery" and "advantageous section transition" indicate whether or not they are subject to the processing. "○" in the "lottery" column is a bonus condition device or a condition device such as "replay-A" listed in "winning / replay" (sometimes simply called "role"). It indicates that it is a lottery target, and "x" indicates that it is not a lottery target. Further, "R1" to "R6" indicate setting values, indicating that they are setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and the values described in these columns are fractions (random numbers) corresponding to the respective combinations. The denominator is the above 65536 random number numerator). Further, "○" in the "advantageous section" column indicates that the winning combination can be transferred to the advantageous section (in the second embodiment, 100% is transferred), and "x" indicates that the combination is advantageous. It shows that it does not trigger the transition to the section (the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is not performed).

<Pushing slash role 1>
Next, the above-mentioned push slash combination 1 will be described. For the slash combinations A to H, components that can be won according to a predetermined push order and a predetermined stop timing (each winning that constitutes the conditional device). Since the same is true except that the combination) is different, only the slash combination A will be described, and the description of the other slash combinations B to H will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the slash combination A, the stop control by the reel stop control means is different between "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating" and "when the type 1 BB condition device is operating". In the slash combination A, in "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating", as described in this column, in the batting order of the left 1st, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied to all reels, and the prize 10 is won. A combination of symbols according to any of 11 to 11 wins at a winning rate of 1/8, and one piece is paid out, which is less than the specified number. As shown in FIG. 104, this is the same in the batting order of the middle 1st and in the batting order of the right 1st.

Specifically, the symbol combination related to the winning 10 is "Replay Seven Blank" as shown by No. 105 in FIG. 96, and the symbol combination related to the winning 11 is "Replay Seven Blank" as shown by No. 105 in FIG. "Replay Seven Seven". Of the respective symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbols corresponding to the left reel M51 are all "replays", and as shown in FIG. 91, the "replays" are evenly spaced every 5 frames. The winning rate (the probability that the symbol combinations related to the winning combination will be aligned when the all stop button is randomly pressed (the above-mentioned "appropriate pressing")) is 100% (1/1). ). Of the respective symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 is "Seven", and this "Seven" is arranged in the middle reel M51 only by one of No. 14. , 1/4 is the winning rate. Of the respective symbol combinations of the winning 10 and the winning 11, the symbol corresponding to the left reel M51 has the winning 10 as "seven" and the winning 11 as "blank".

Here, when the "replay" and "seven" constituting the symbol combination related to the winning 10 or the winning 11 are stopped on the effective line on the left reel M51 and the middle reel M52, respectively, the right reel M53 can be stopped by "seven". Or "blank". As shown in FIG. 91, "Seven" is placed at No. 14, and "Blank" is placed at No. 19 five frames above "Seven". Therefore, considering the maximum pull-in range of four frames, No. 10 Since "Seven" or "Blank" can be drawn in a total of 10 frames from No. 19 to No. 19, the winning rate of "Seven" and "Blank" in this state is halved. That is, for the winning 10 and the winning 11, the winning rate of the left reel M51 is 1/1, the winning rate of the middle reel M52 is 1/4, and the winning rate of the right reel is 1/2, so that the winning rate as a whole is Is 1/8 (1/1 × 1/4 × 1/2). Therefore, in the batting order of the left 1st, winning 10 or 11 will be won at a winning rate of 1/8. In the same way, the batting order of the middle 1st is the same, and the winning 26 or 27 with one payout is won at the 1/8 winning rate, and the same is true for the right 1st batting order, and one is paid out at the 1/8 winning rate. A prize 46 or 47 accompanied by a prize is won.

In the second embodiment, if the timing at which the stop button D40 is pressed is the first "blank" shown in FIG. 91, the reference for the four frames of the maximum pull-in is (specifically, the effective line). With the position of the center (center of one frame) as the reference position, after the timing of pressing, if the symbol that first passes through the reference position is the center of the first "blank"), then this blank is used as the reference. The maximum pull-in range is the range from No. 2 to No. 5 "Cherry" (No. 1 to No. 5), which is equivalent to No. 2 to No. 4, and the frame at the timing when the stop button D40 is pressed is used as the reference. However, instead of this, the following may be used. That is, when the timing at which the stop button D40 is pressed is the first "blank", the next frame is the second "bell A" reference (based on the frame that is +1 to the actually pressed frame). The range from No. 3 to No. 6 "bar", which is equivalent to 4 frames, may be set as the maximum pull-in range. The same applies to the other embodiments described above.

In the slash combination A, in "when the type 1 BB condition device is activated", as shown in this column, the winnings 10, 11, 26, 27 (respectively, one card combination with one payout less than the specified number). (See Nos. 105 and 106 in Fig. 96, Nos. 121 and 122 in Fig. 97), and this one-card role is missed, and the prize is a 15-card role with a payout of 15 cards, which is more than these and more than the specified number. Any of 09 (see No. 104 in FIG. 96) can win a prize by the number priority control or the number priority control depending on the push order and the stop timing. After that, the above-mentioned 1-card winning prize and 1-card winning (with 0 payout) will be referred to as "cheap prize (may be referred to as low prize)", and the 15-card winning prize will be "higher prize". The combination of symbols related to this low prize (one combination of symbols, the combination of lost symbols that are missed in this one role) is called "combination of cheap symbols", and the combination of symbols related to high prize is "high". It is also called "design combination". In the second embodiment, the low prize is a 1-card role and the high prize is a 15-card role, but a low prize of 2 cards, a high prize of 7 cards, a 10-card role, etc. may be applied. In short, it is sufficient that the number of game medals paid out for high prizes is larger than the number of game medals paid out for low prizes. In addition, it is preferable to set a small winning combination that involves paying out less than the specified number of game medals as a low prize, and a small winning combination that pays out more than the specified number of game medals as a high winning prize.

First, in the batting order on the right 1st, the number priority control is applied, the symbol combination is "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" with PB = 1 (see No. 104 in Fig. 96), and the number of payouts at the time of winning. However, the winning 09 (which is the role of 15), which is more than one of the other winnings 10, 11, 26, and 27, is won.

In the batting order of the left 1st, in FIG. 91, when the stop timing of the left reel M51 is in the range of 5 frames from the 13th to the 17th, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied and the above-mentioned 15 Winning 09, which is a reel, wins. On the other hand, in the batting order of the left 1st, when the stop timing of the left reel M51 is in the range of 15 frames from 0 to 12 and 18 to 19 other than the above 13 to 17, the slash role is used. In A, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied as in the case of the left 1st batting order of "when the type 1 BB condition device is not operating", and the symbol combination according to any of the winning 10 to 11 is 1/8. Win a prize at the winning rate and receive one payout (in other words, drop out on 7/8 and get 0). Also, in the case of the batting order of the middle 1st, as in the batting order of the left 1st, if the stop timing of the middle reel M52 is in the range of 5 frames from 13th to 17th, the number of sheets is prioritized and the prize is won. If it is in the range of frames, the number priority control will give a low prize at 1/8, and 7/8 will result in 0 missing sheets.

Summarizing the stop control of the slash combination A, as shown in FIG. 110, in the batting order of the left 1st, if the stop timing of the left reel M51 is 15 frames other than the 13th to the 17th, all the low base frames. The number priority control is applied to the reels, and 1/8 wins the winning combination, and 7/8 results in 0 missed reels (cheap prize), and the stop timing of the left reel M51 is 5 from 13th to 17th. If it is a high base frame for a frame, the number priority control is applied to all reels and a 15-card combination wins (high prize). In the batting order of the middle 1st, if it is the above-mentioned low base piece, a low prize is given by the number priority control, and if it is the above-mentioned high base piece, it is a high prize. That is, the low base frame, which is the above-mentioned 15 frames, means that when the target is aimed at the 15 frames (the stop operation is accepted within the range where the 15 frames are located on the effective line), the number of payouts is smaller than that of the high base frame 1. The above-mentioned base is lower than when the piece combination wins and keeps aiming at the high base piece (hence the name "low base piece"), and the above-mentioned 5 pieces of high base piece are these 5 pieces. When aiming for a frame (accepting a stop operation within the range where 5 frames are located on the effective line), the 15-card combination with a large number of payouts wins against the low base frame, compared to the case where the low base frame is continuously aimed. Therefore, the above-mentioned base becomes higher (for this reason, it is referred to as a "high base coma"). In addition, in the batting order of the 1st right, regardless of the stop timing, the winning combination is a high prize (this is indicated as "○" in FIG. 110). Further, the other slash combinations B to H are the same as those of the slash combination A as described above.

That is, in the second embodiment, the push slash combination 1 corresponds to a low prize according to the operation mode such as the push order and stop timing for the stop button D40 (press timing of the stop button D40 (reel stop position)). The symbol combination (the symbol combination related to the winning 10, 11, 26, 27 and the symbol combination not shown when these are missed) and the symbol combination corresponding to the higher prize (the symbol combination related to the winning 09) are It is possible to win a prize. Specifically, when the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52 is first stopped at (at any of the positions 13 to 17 in FIG. 91 in the left reel M51 and the middle reel M52, respectively), a low prize is won (1). It is possible to play a reel or 0 of this missed reel).

In the second embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won in the advantageous section and in the non-AT situation (this will be described later), but in the push slash role 1 The lottery table referred to in the AT lottery differs depending on whether the prize is high or low. If the prize is high, the low probability table with a relatively low probability of winning the AT is used. A high-probability table having a higher AT winning probability than a low-probability table is used (see FIG. 110). That is, in the push slash role 1, if a high prize is won, many game medals are paid out, but the probability of winning the AT is low. While the number is small, the probability of winning an AT is high. As a result, for the player, the payout of the game medal is more advantageous than the cheap prize (there are many payouts of the game medal), but the AT lottery is more disadvantageous than the cheap prize (the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment). The AT lottery is more advantageous than the prize (AT lottery is given preferential treatment), instead of aiming for a higher prize (it is difficult for AT to win) or the payout of game medals is higher and more disadvantageous than the prize (less payout of game medals). (It is easy for AT to win) You will be able to choose whether to aim for a cheap prize. For example, if a player has few game medals and wants a game medal first rather than preferential treatment of AT lottery, he / she chooses a high prize, has enough game medals, and has more than many game medals. If you are a player who wants to receive preferential treatment in the AT lottery, you may choose a cheaper prize.

In other words, in the push slash role 1, from the viewpoint of the number of payouts, the right 1st is the correct answer in the push order (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "the correct answer in the push order regarding the number of payouts"), and the other than the right 1st is the wrong push order (the correct answer in the push order). Hereafter, it may be referred to as "the correct answer in the push order regarding the number of payouts"), and from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the AT lottery, the left 1st and the middle 1st are the correct answers in the push order (hereinafter, "the correct answer in the push order regarding the AT lottery"). It can be said that the 1st on the right is an incorrect answer in the push order (hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "correct answer in the push order regarding the AT lottery"). That is, in any of the operation modes, there is an advantage that it is advantageous in terms of the number of payouts or the AT lottery. ) Can be selected.

Therefore, in a game in which the push slash combination 1 is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation, the push order display device (instruction monitor) shown in FIG. 37 is operated with a stop button D40 capable of winning a higher prize. Both the mode and the operation mode of the stop button D40 capable of winning a prize are instructed (notified). Various display examples of the instruction mode by this push order display device will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

<Instruction mode of push slash combination 1 during non-AT: push order display device>
As shown in FIG. 111, in the push order display device which is a two-digit 7-segment display method, when instructing the operation mode of the high prize (high navigation is performed), the upper digit (two digits in FIG. 37) is used. Two lines indicating high prizes are displayed in the 7 segments on the left side of the 7 segments), and the number "3" indicating the 1st right in the lower digit (the right segment of the 7 segments of 2 digits in FIG. 37). (In the second embodiment, the left 1st is "1" and the middle 1st is "2") is displayed (instruction mode 1). In this instruction mode 1, as shown by the * mark in FIG. 111, the two lines mean the role of a slash. For example, as a high navigation, 1 is left middle right, 2 is left and right middle, and 3 is middle left and right. 4 is set to middle right left, 5 is right middle left, and 6 is right middle left. As a cheap navigation, for example, 7 is left 1st, 8 is middle 1st, and 9 is right 1st. As such, the numbers after 7 may be set as a cheap navigation, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the push order bell and the like.

In addition, when instructing the operation mode of the cheap prize (performing the cheap navigation), the three lines indicating the cheap prize are displayed in the upper digit, and the number "1" indicating the left 1st is displayed in the lower digit (). Instruction mode 2). Here, in the case of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, in the instruction mode 2, the result is the same regardless of whether the left 1st or the middle 1st is used. "2" indicating the middle 1st may be displayed).

In the second embodiment, the push order display device is provided with only two-digit seven segments, and the above-mentioned instruction modes 1 and 2 cannot be displayed at the same time. Therefore, the push order display device first displays the instruction mode 1, switches to the instruction mode 2 after 1 second, and then returns to the instruction mode 1 after 1 second, and so on, every predetermined time elapses. By alternately switching the modes 1 and 2, the instruction mode 1 and 2 can be displayed to the player at the same time. Instead of this, as a push order display device, two pairs of two-digit seven segments are provided so as to be arranged side by side, instruction mode 1 is provided for the left two-digit seven segment, and instruction mode 1 is provided for the left two-digit seven segment, and the right two-digit seven segment is provided. In the instruction mode 2, the instruction mode 2 may be performed (the display of the push order is displayed in 4 digits).

In addition, the upper digit is set to correspond to the higher prize and the lower digit corresponds to the lower prize, and the upper digit is operated with a higher navigation to display "3" indicating the right 1st where a higher prize is possible, and the lower digit is performed. It is also possible to perform a cheap navigation (instruction mode 3) that displays "3" indicating the left 1st that can be awarded a cheap prize (may display "2" indicating the middle 1st as described above). In addition to this, by turning on the DP (decimal point) lamps located at the lower right of each of the 7 segments (instruction mode 4), it is easy to understand that the navigation of the low prize and the high prize is being performed. You may do so. Furthermore, by lighting only the DP lamp with the higher ball ejection rate (instruction mode 5), such as a cheap prize with a high ball ejection rate (this will be described later), the ball ejection rate is higher depending on which one is followed. It may be possible to grasp whether (whether it is advantageous for the player). In the example shown in FIG. 37, since the DP of the push order display device also serves as the advantageous section display YH, when the instruction modes 4 and 5 are applied, for example, a credit configured by a 7-segment display. The DP of the display device D200, the special game state display device D250, or the like may be used as the advantageous section display device YH, or the dedicated advantageous section display device YH as shown in FIG. 1 may be provided. Further, a double line indicating that the upper digit is the slash combination 1 is displayed, and the type of the slash combination 1 is displayed in the lower digit (in FIG. 111, "A" indicating that the slash combination A is used). (Display mode 6).

As the instruction by the push order display device, in addition to the instruction of only the push order as in the above-mentioned instruction modes 1 to 6, the push order and the stop timing (the display mode is not particularly limited, but for example, the upper digit). Needless to say, a numerical value indicating the pressing order and a stop timing to be pressed (displaying a numerical value, a symbol, etc. corresponding to the stop position, etc.) may be instructed in the lower digit.

<Display mode of the push slash role 1: effect display device S40>
Further, in the second embodiment, in a game in which the push slash combination 1 is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation, in addition to the above-mentioned push order display device, a high prize and a low prize are also given by the effect control device S40. The operation mode of the above may be notified, and the instruction mode by the effect display device S40 will be described below.

First, in the second embodiment, for the entire push slash combination 1, in other words, for the slash combinations A to H (numbers 31 to 38 of "winning / replay" in FIG. 104), one of the above. As the effect group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination), for example, in a game (a game in which the instruction is not executed) in which the above mask process for assigning the effect group A is performed and the push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device. Is configured to transmit the effect group A to the sub-control board S. In the sub-control board S that received the transmission of the effect group A, although it is not known which of the slash combinations A to H was won, it can be grasped that the push slash combination 1 was won, so that the push slash combination 1 is used. It is possible to make a suggestion based on the winning. Specifically, for example, a suggestion effect (in other words, a high prize and a low prize) indicating that the push slash combination 1 has been won, such as displaying "slash !!" on the effect display device S40, is displayed. The operation mode of the above is not notified, but the effect of simply notifying that the push slash combination 1 has been won) is performed. On the other hand, in the game (game in which the instruction is executed) in which the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device in the advantageous section, which of the slash roles A to H such as the number of "winning / replay" is won is subordinate. Information that can be discriminated on the control board S side (for example, information indicating which slash combination A to H is won) is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

When one effect group A is assigned to the push slash combination 1 and the push order bell (general term for the prize-A1 condition device to the prize-A24 condition device shown in FIGS. 103 and 104), this effect group A In the sub-control board S that has received the transmission of, since it is unknown whether it is the push slash combination 1 or the push order bell, the above suggestion effect is not performed. In this case, as a feasible effect, an effect to the effect that some small combination including the slash combination has been established can be considered.

Further, in the second embodiment, both the slash combinations A to H receive a low prize in the left 1st and the middle 1st, and a high prize in the right 1st, so that the above-mentioned production group A is transmitted. In the sub-control board S, it is possible to notify that the left 1st or the right 1st is a low prize and the right 1st is a high prize. In this case, specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, in the effect display device S40 that is performing an effect such as displaying an image in which characters are fighting each other, a display area that does not interfere with this effect. At the end (in FIG. 112, in the display area of the lower left of the display area of the effect display device S40), the AT lottery preferential treatment is given for the left 1st, and a notification (display) that many game medals can be obtained for the right 1st. By doing so, the player is urged to select which push order (whether to aim for a higher prize or a lower prize) together with the push order display device.

In this way, by providing the push slash role 1 with a high prize and a low prize, it is possible to create a choice of whether to aim for a high prize or a low prize, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, even in the effect display device S40 whose display area is relatively larger than that of the push order display device, the high navigation and the low navigation are performed, so that the high navigation and the low navigation using only the push order display device are performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking, and the player can surely grasp the operation mode of the stop button D40. As a result, it is possible to surely make a selection according to the player's intention among the aim of high prize or the aim of low prize, and the unintended disadvantage due to oversight such as the operation mode of high prize even though the aim is low prize. Can be prevented.

Here, when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is performed in the effect display device S40, the instruction according to the instruction modes 1 to 6 in the push order display device is not performed, and in this situation, even if it is an advantageous section. The specifications are such that the advantageous section display device YH is not turned on (the advantageous section display device YH remains off even if the user stays in the advantageous section). In this case, the advantageous section display device YH may be turned on at the timing of transition to AT or the timing of the first instruction execution. As a result, even when the push slash combination 1 is won and the suggestion effect is performed by the effect display device S40, the player can be notified of the content of the suggestion level instead of the instruction.

On the other hand, when the effect display device S40 is used to instruct the low prize and the high prize shown in FIG. 112, the instruction modes 1 to 6 in the push order display device are executed. Below, if the user is staying in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display device YH is turned on. In the second embodiment, the non-AT means that when the push order bell is won, the push order display device does not navigate the correct batting order of the push order bell, but when the slash combination is won, the effect display device S40. In addition to announcing the operation mode of the high prize and the low prize, the operation mode related to the high prize and the low prize on the push order display device is instructed (both the effect display device S40 and the push order display device are the low prize). It may be configured to notify the operation mode according to the above). This also applies to each modification described later. Further, AT means that when the push order bell is won, the push order display device navigates the correct batting order of the push order bell, and when the slash role is won, the effect display device S40 is used to obtain a higher prize. It is a state in which the operation mode related to the high prize in the batting order display device is instructed while performing the effect of notifying.

In the second embodiment, when the replay-C condition device (commonly known as a strong cherry and a higher probability of winning the AT than the weak cherry) in FIG. 103 is won among the rare roles, the start lever is used. When D50 is pressed, the effect display device S40 may perform an effect of cutting in a character or the like to the effect that the strong cherry has been won. Further, when the push slash role 1 is won, the effect of cutting in the character or the like to the effect that the push slash role 1 is won is made to the effect display device S40 in the same manner as the above-mentioned strong cherry. If the same character as when winning is cut in (may be the same production mode), and then the symbol combination related to the cheap prize, which is given preferential treatment in the AT lottery, is won. When the effect display device S40 is produced to indicate that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, and the speaker D20 is produced to output a voice indicating that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, while the symbol combination related to the higher prize is won. In the effect display device S40, an effect that 15 sheets have been obtained is produced (in other words, an effect that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment is not performed. In particular, the effect may not be performed. ), And there may be no audio output from the speaker D20.

If a rare role in which the AT is determined (for example, a middle cherry with PB ≠ 1 at which the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51) is provided, when the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51, an effect display is displayed. For example, the apparatus S40 may produce an effect to the effect that the AT has been confirmed, and may output a voice to the effect that the AT has been confirmed (for example, a voice that is more luxurious than the above-mentioned low-priced prize). In this case, since the AT is confirmed when the middle cherry is won, even if the cherry does not stop in the middle of the left reel M51, the effect of the effect display device S40 and the output from the speaker D20 are output. The sound may be the same as when the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel M51. In addition, in the game in which the middle-tier cherry is won, the above-mentioned sound output and other effects 1 are performed, and when the middle-tier cherry is stopped, an effect 2 such as a back lamp effect is performed (in addition to the effect 1). 2), if the middle cherry does not stop, the above-mentioned effect 1 is performed but the above-mentioned effect 2 is not performed (only the effect 1 is performed), or the case is different from the case where the middle cherry stops. A part of the effect may be different depending on whether or not the middle cherry is stopped, such as performing the effect 3 such as the back lamp effect (the effect 3 is performed in addition to the effect 1).

Further, in the normal section, when a rare role such as a strong cherry is won, the effect display device S40 or the speaker D20 simply indicates that the rare role has been won. For example, "!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40), and if the push slash combination 1 is won in the normal section, the AT is not performed and the operation mode cannot be instructed. The same suggestion effect as when the role is won is performed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the privilege related to AT at the time of the cheap prize in the push slash role 1 is that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment, and in the case of the cheap prize during AT, the privilege related to AT is particularly given. It is a specification that does not. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the push slash combination 1 is won in the advantageous section and during the AT, the effect display device S40 specifically notifies the operation mode of the high prize (first). In the second embodiment, ** 1 is displayed to notify that the batting order is on the right 1st, etc.), and the push order display device also performs the above-mentioned higher navigation. By doing so, during AT, the push slash combination 1 can be handled in the same manner as the winning-A1 to 24 condition device, which is a push order bell in which push order navigation is performed during AT. It is possible to use the slash combination 1 as a push order bell. Further, since the push slash combination 1 functions as a push order bell, the probability that the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed can be substantially improved as compared with the case of non-AT.

In the second embodiment, since the player is allowed to select the cheap prize and the high prize, the player performs the operation mode related to the cheap prize in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won during the non-AT. Even in such a case, since it does not correspond to a so-called pressing error, it goes without saying that the effect display device S40, the speaker S20, the decorative lamp unit D150, or the like does not display an image such as a pressing error. On the other hand, in a game in which the push slash role 1 is won during AT, if the player performs an operation mode related to a cheap prize, he / she is already in AT and cannot benefit from the AT lottery, and is simply a game medal. Since the payout is reduced and only a loss is made, an image indicating that the push is a mistake is displayed, and for example, the display of the effect display device S40 is dimmed, or the push slash role 1 is increased during AT. In the case of a specification that navigates the prize, the image that navigated this high prize may be deleted, or the indication that the game medal such as "GET !!" has been paid out will not be displayed. You can do it. Further, as in the third embodiment described later, even in the case of the specification in which the game is played with a three-card bet inside the two-card bet BB, the operation mode related to the cheap prize is performed in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won. However, while the above-mentioned image display is not performed, when a two-card bet is placed, an image display indicating that the game is a two-card bet or a sound notification may be performed. In this way, by displaying an image indicating that the game is a two-card bet and notifying by sound, in particular, a game with a specification in which a three-card bet is played inside the above-mentioned two-card bet BB is selected. In this case, even if a game is played with a two-card bet by mistake, the player can be made aware that the two-card bet was mistakenly made.

<AT lottery at the time of winning the push slash role 1>
Next, the details of the AT lottery in the low prize and the high prize at the time of winning the push slash role 1 will be described. As described above, the push slash combination 1 has a different symbol combination that can stop at the effective line depending on the push order and the stop timing. Therefore, when the push slash combination 1 is won by pressing the start lever D50, which one It is unclear whether the symbol combination will win, and it will be known which symbol combination has won only after all reels M50 have stopped. For this reason, the AT lottery at the time of winning the push slash combination 1 is performed at any timing from the winning determination after all reels M50 are stopped to before the payout process. That is, in the second embodiment, the AT lottery is performed by looking at the stopped symbol combination (the AT lottery may or may not be executed depending on the stopped symbol combination, or the winning probability of the AT lottery may be different (). (You may adopt only one of the configurations)), and as mentioned above, the 1-card combination in the low-priced prize or the symbol combination related to 0-card is the 15-card role in the high prize (high). The AT lottery is given preferential treatment over the symbol combination related to (including the 15-card combination at the time of the base frame). In addition, in the second embodiment, the AT lottery is given preferential treatment even in the symbol combination related to 0 cards in the cheap prize, but in the case of the symbol combination related to this 0 card, AT is more than the symbol combination related to the 1-card combination. The lottery may be given preferential treatment, or the AT lottery may not be held.

For example, if FIG. 18 is taken as an example, the control flow is as follows. If the slash 1 flag described later is not set after Yes in the winning determination in step S1269 of FIG. 18 (if the slash 1 flag is OFF), the process proceeds to step S1274 as it is, and if the slash 1 flag is set (if the slash 1 flag is set). (If the slash 1 flag is ON), it is determined whether it is a symbol combination related to the low prize of the push slash role 1 or a symbol combination related to the high prize (execute the symbol judgment process), and the high prize is awarded. If it is such a symbol combination, the AT lottery is performed based on the low probability table at the timing before the execution of the payout process, and if the AT lottery is not won, the AT transition in the next game or later is not set. , If you have won the AT lottery, after setting the transition of AT in the next game or later, the production command corresponding to the AT lottery result (specifically, if you win the AT, you have won the AT. Proceed to step S1274 by generating an effect command for notifying that the user will shift to the AT, and an effect command for notifying that the AT lottery has been lost or that the AT will not be transferred if the AT has not been won. .. As for the transmission timing to the secondary control board S in this effect command, an appropriate timing such as any timing before step S1293 can be applied. On the other hand, in the case of a symbol combination related to a low prize, in the control flow in the case of the high prize described above, the step is performed after the same as the control flow in which the "low accuracy table" is read as the "high accuracy table". Proceed to S1274 (hereinafter, the control of this flow is referred to as "push slash 1 control").

In the second embodiment, the AT lottery is performed according to the actually stopped symbol combination, but in the case of 0 (missing), it is cheaper because the number of payouts is 0, not the symbol combination. It may be handled in the same manner as when it is determined that the symbol combination is related to the winning. In this case, as compared with the case where there are a plurality of types of symbol combinations related to 0 sheets (loss), only the information that the number of payout sheets is 0 is required, so that the capacity can be reduced.

Further, in the second embodiment, among the push slash combinations 1, in the slash combination A, as described above, the symbol combination related to the winning 10 which is a single combination can be won, and in FIGS. 103 and 104, the winning- Of the push order combinations (push order bells) that collectively refer to the A1 to A24 condition devices, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, even in the left middle bell A1 (winning-A1 condition device), the push order of 132 (push order bell). If the left and right middle push order is performed, the symbol combination related to the winning 10 can be won, so the same symbol combination can be won when the slash role A is won and when the left middle bell A1 is won (same result). Can be displayed). In this case, as described above, it is unclear whether the slash role A was won or the left middle bell A1 was won if only the winning judgment was made. Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the push slash combination 1 is used before the winning determination, and if the push slash combination 1 is used, in the above example of FIG. 18, the winning step S1269 is won. In the determination, the above-mentioned push slash 1 control is performed as it is after Yes, and if it is not the push slash combination 1, control is performed to proceed to step S1274 as it is after Yes in step S1269 of FIG. 18 above (winning). Control is performed based on the combination of the winning combination and the stopped symbol). For example, if FIG. 19 is taken as an example, it is determined in step S3614 in FIG. 19 whether or not the winning combination is the push slash role 1 after Yes, and if it is the push slash role 1, the push slash is used. Set a slash 1 flag to the effect that it is a role 1 (turn on the slash 1 flag), and if it is not a push slash role 1, keep the state where the slash 1 flag is not set (maintain the state where the slash 1 flag is OFF). (Hereinafter, the control of this flow is referred to as "control 2").

By providing such control 2, the types of symbol combinations can be reduced by the amount that any of the push order slash combinations 1 can be made the same as any of the push order combinations. It is possible to reduce the trouble of creating reel arrangements and symbol combinations. As a result, the amount of data for the combination of symbols can be reduced, which leads to a reduction in capacity.

In the second embodiment, since the same symbol combination occurs in the push slash combination 1 and the push order bell as described above, a process of setting the slash 1 flag is performed before the winning determination. Needless to say, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned control 2 when the symbol combination is displayed only by the low winning prize of the push slash combination 1. In this case, the capacity can be reduced by the amount that the control 2 is eliminated.

In the second embodiment, when the push slash combination 1 is won when the start lever D50 is pressed, the AT lottery is not performed, all reels are stopped, and the payout is made from the winning judgment in which the symbol combination in the game is confirmed. The AT lottery is performed until the processing, but instead of this, when the start lever D50 is pressed and the push slash combination 1 is won, all the symbol combinations that can be displayed by this push slash combination 1 are combined. An AT lottery is performed on the target, and the lottery results of each of these are stored in a RAM or the like. Of the stored lottery results, the lottery result corresponding to the symbol combination may be used as the final AT lottery result. In addition, when the start lever D50 is pressed, the AT lottery is performed when the push slash combination 1 is won, and if it is won, a flag to that effect is set, while if it is not won, a flag is set. If this flag is set after the above winning judgment, an AT lottery will be performed according to the symbol combination obtained in the winning judgment (in other words, the AT lottery before the winning judgment is the first stage lottery, and the prize will be won. The lottery after the judgment is the second stage lottery, and if you win in these two stage lottery such as the first and second lottery, it is called AT winning), if this flag is not set after the winning judgment May not hold the AT lottery. In addition, an AT lottery is performed with a predetermined probability when the push slash combination 1 is won when the start lever D50 is pressed, and then an AT lottery according to the stopped symbol combination (the AT lottery is won by the stopped symbol combination). The probabilities may be different, or it may be configured to execute a symbol combination that does not execute the AT lottery (if any AT lottery is won, then the AT is assigned. Will be migrated).

In the second embodiment, when a rare combination or the like is won, after pressing the start lever D50, if the rare combination is won, the AT lottery is performed as it is, whichever timing is before the winning determination (for example, FIG. While the AT lottery is performed at the timing shown in 18), in the case of the push slash combination 1, the AT lottery is held between the winning judgment and the payout process. For rare roles other than the winning combination 1, an AT lottery may be performed between the winning determination and the payout process according to the push slash winning combination 1. In this case, since the processing related to the AT lottery can be unified, the capacity can be reduced. In addition, even in a normal game such as in an advantageous section and during non-AT, the AT lottery is given preferential treatment (because the profit related to AT is given) by aiming for a cheap prize with the push slash role 1. A person can increase the expectation about AT by aiming for a cheap prize.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, if the player wins the push slash role 1 and wins a cheap prize, the AT lottery is performed at the high probability table, and if the prize is high, the AT lottery is performed at the low probability table. However, when a rare role or the like is won in the next game, an AT lottery is performed at a lottery table (predetermined probability) according to the winning rare role or the like. In other words, if you win the rare role in the next game where you win the push slash role 1 and win a cheap prize, and if you win the rare role etc. in the next game that wins the push slash role 1 and wins a high prize. Then, in the game in which the rare role or the like is won, the AT lottery is performed at the same lottery table (predetermined probability). That is, the AT lottery based on winning the push slash role 1 and winning a low prize and a high prize is valid only in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, and has no effect on the next game and thereafter. I try not to give it. By doing so, when the player stops the game in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the AT lottery based on the winning of the push slash role 1 is performed for the next player. It is possible to prevent the influence of. If the low-accuracy table used based on the high prize of the push slash role 1 is designed to be used after the next game of the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the push slash role 1 is assumed. If the player who is elected by the player stops playing the game, the next player will play the game in a disadvantageous state from the beginning regarding the AT lottery, etc., which is unreasonable. As in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such irrationality by not affecting the next game or later.

In addition, since it is only necessary to prevent the above-mentioned absurdity, by winning the push slash role 1, for example, the probability of winning the AT when winning a rare role or the like between predetermined games is high. When the specification such as "becomes" is adopted, this high probability state may be maintained after the next game of the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won. The point is that in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won, the situation that is considered to be disadvantageous to the player, such as the low probability table used at the time of high winning, should be completed in the game in which the push slash role 1 is won. For situations that are considered to be advantageous to the player, such as the above-mentioned high-probability state, the game may be taken over even after the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won.

<The ball output rate of the push slash role 1>
Next, the ball output rate and the like in the push slash role 1 will be described. As mentioned above, the push slash role 1 can obtain 0 or 1 game medal (in other words, it can be said that the privilege of obtaining 15 game medals is not given). Left 1st or middle 1st push. It has a low prize in order and a high prize in the right 1st push order where 15 game medals can be surely obtained. In the second embodiment, in the setting 1, in the case of non-AT, in the game in which the push slash combination 1 is won, the operation mode of pushing the low base frame in the left 1st or middle 1st push order is performed, and the like. In this game, for example, a stop operation (stop operation at a pressing position that can minimize the loss of small roles) is performed on the left reel M51 by pressing the 6th bar of each game, and in the case of AT, the stop operation is performed. In the first game method (a game method that keeps executing the cheap prize aim), which is a game method that follows the push order navigation of the push order bell and the navigation of the push slash role 1 at the time of winning, a predetermined number of games (for example, Even when playing 17500 games), the ball output rate is set to be less than 100%, and in the case of non-AT in setting 1, in the game where the push slash role 1 is won, the right. The operation mode of the push order of the 1st is performed, and in other games, for example, the stop operation of pushing the 6th bar of each game on the left reel M51 is performed, and in the case of AT, the push order navigation of the push order bell and the eyes are performed. Push slash role 1 When a predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) are played in the second game method (a game method in which the high prize aim is continuously executed), which is a game method that follows the navigation for the high prize aim at the time of winning. However, the ball output rate is set to be less than 100%.

In the second embodiment, even when the second game method (a game method in which the aim of winning a high prize is continuously executed) is performed, the first game method is provided to the player by setting the value to less than 100%. It is made to be done (a game method that keeps executing the aim of winning a cheap prize). (If the ball output rate exceeds 100% in the second game method, the second game method is performed all the time. If so, the number of game medals will increase, so there is no need to perform the first game method in the first place). Here, in the above description, setting 1 has been taken as an example, but the same applies to other setting values. Further, in the case of a so-called high setting of setting 4 or more (particularly, setting 6 which is the highest setting), the ball ejection rate may be set to 100% or more in each of the above game methods, but the aim is higher. And, in order to achieve the effect of aiming cheaply, the payout rate of each of the above game methods is the same (or is substantially the same, and no significant loss occurs regardless of which game method is used). It is desirable to do.

Further, in the second embodiment, the payout rate when a predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) is played by the above-mentioned first game method at a specific set value (for example, any of settings 1 to 6) is calculated. When A is set and the payout rate when the predetermined number of games is played by the second game method in the specific set value is B, the payout rate A is larger than the payout rate B (ball payout rate B). The rate A> the ball output rate B) is set.

That is, the first operation mode is more than the case where the profit is obtained by performing the above-mentioned predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) only for the operation mode aiming at the higher prize by the second game method and continuing to take 15 cards by the higher prize. For example, if the operation mode aiming at a cheap prize by the game method is performed only by the above-mentioned predetermined number of games (for example, 17,500 games) and the profit is obtained by AT or the like, the ball output rate when the above-mentioned predetermined number of games is played is higher. The specifications are such that there will be many. Here, if you are staying in an advantageous section, with regard to the aim of a cheaper prize, the rate of getting out of the ball is higher for the aim of a cheaper prize because it is easier to win the AT than the aim of a higher prize, and you will benefit from the AT. It is supposed to be. Further, when staying in a non-advantageous section where AT cannot be performed, the ball output rate is higher for those aiming for a higher prize because there is no AT, but in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107. Since the advantageous section is won in all the roles, the number of games staying in the non-advantageous section is about one game, and most of the predetermined number of games is occupied by the advantageous section as a whole. The payout rate is low and more people are aiming for a prize.

By doing so, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given by the AT or the like is finally increased by aiming at a low prize, and it is more advantageous than the aim at a high prize. In addition, aiming for a cheaper prize in the advantageous section and aiming for a higher prize in the non-advantageous section, depending on whether you are staying in the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section, aiming for a cheaper prize. It is also possible to create technical intervention by switching between high prize aim and high prize.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ball output rate C of the setting 1 when the predetermined number of games is performed by the first game method (aiming at a cheap prize) and the predetermined number of games by the first game supplement method. The difference α from the ball ejection rate D of the setting 6 in the case of performing the above is the ball ejection rate E of the setting 1 and the ball ejection rate E of the setting 1 when the predetermined number of games are performed by the second game method (aiming at a higher prize). 2 It is set so as to be larger than the difference β with the ball ejection rate F of the setting 6 that can be obtained when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the game supplement method. To give a specific example, the ball output rate C of setting 1 aiming for a low prize is 97%, the ball output rate D of setting 6 is 115%, and the ball output rate E of setting 1 aiming at high prize is 96%. , The ball output rate F of setting 6 is 99%, and the difference α of the ball output rate between setting 1 and setting 6 aiming for a cheap prize is 18% (115% (ball output rate D) -99% (ball output rate D). Rate C) = 18%), and the difference β between the setting 1 and the setting 6 aiming for a higher prize is 3% (99% (ball ejection rate F) -96% (ball ejection rate E)). Therefore, the difference α in the ball output rate is larger than the difference β in the ball output rate (difference in the ball output rate α> difference β in the ball output rate). By doing so, it is possible to create a playability in which the dispersion of the ball output rate becomes large (the ball output rate becomes rough) when the aim is to win a cheap prize. In the above, the ball ejection rate F (the ball ejection rate for the purpose of increasing a prize) of setting 6 is 99%, but this may be set to 100% or more, for example, the ball ejection rate F may be set. When it is set to 101%, even if the low aim by the first game method is performed a predetermined number of games (for example, 17500 games), the high aim by the second game method is set by a predetermined number of games (for example, 17500 games). Even in the case of (game), it can be expected that the number of game medals is increasing (the payout rate is 100% or more).

In addition, as described above, the push slash combination 1 can be won by 15 cards depending on the push order and stop timing, and the push order role or PB = 1 in which the 15 cards are won only by the correct answer in the push order. Since the winning rate is lower than that of the 15-card combination, the above-mentioned base can be lowered by that amount. As a result, by lowering the base, it is possible to improve the probability of winning an AT and the probability of a lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as the net increase in the number of cards per game (sometimes referred to as inclination) during AT, so-called low base. It is possible to provide a rotating body type gaming machine having a high TY (a low base and a relatively high expected number of gaming medals for one AT).

<< Change example 1 from the second embodiment >>
Next, a change example 1 from the second embodiment will be described. In this modification 1, the reel arrangement is different from that of the second embodiment described above, and as the push slash combination, instead of the above-mentioned push slash combination 1, the push slash combination 1 is a symbol combination or the like. Is different, such as applying the different push slash role 2. Here, FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement list and a push slash combination 2 in the spinning machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, and FIG. 114 is a diagram from the second embodiment. It is an image diagram for demonstrating the effect mode of the effect display device S40 in the reeling type gaming machine which concerns on modification 1. FIG.

The reel symbol arrangement according to the first modification is as shown in FIG. 113, and in the left reel M51, the “blue lamp” symbol (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “blue lamp”) is No. 12 and here. There are two "red lamp" symbols (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "red lamps"), which are number 17 and 5 frames away from the number 2, and number 2 and number 7 which is 5 frames away from here. If the stop operation timing is in the range of 10 frames from No. 8 to No. 17 on the left reel M51, it can be pulled in, so that each becomes a symbol of the winning rate of 1/2. There is. Further, in the middle reel M51 and the right reel 53, both the "blue lamp" and the "red lamp" have four PB = 1 symbols provided at equal intervals every five frames. Further, the symbol combination related to the replay of the present modification 1 is a symbol of PB = 1 provided on each reel at equal intervals of 5 frames. Further, the effective line of this modification example 1 is a straight line in the middle stage.

The push slash combination 2 according to the first modification has a plurality of conditional devices including a slash-A condition device and a slash-B condition device. Here, these slash-A condition devices and slash- The B condition device will be described, and other condition devices will be omitted. In the slash-A condition device, as one piece role in the "low base frame" referred to in FIG. 110 above, a cheap role 1 of the symbol combination of "blue lamp, red lamp, blue lamp" (high accuracy table in AT lottery). And 2 types of "blue lamp / blue lamp / blue lamp" symbol combination cheaper 2 (high accuracy table in AT lottery) are provided, and 15 pieces in the "high base frame" mentioned in FIG. 110 above. As a high-ranking role (low probability table in the AT lottery) of "red lamp, blue lamp, blue lamp" is provided, and as the 15-card role that wins in the "right 1st" referred to in FIG. 110 above, "replay / replay / An irregular heightening combination (low probability table in the AT lottery) of the symbol combination of PB = 1 of "blue lamp" is provided. Further, the high base frames in the left reel M51 in the slash-A condition device are 5 frames from No. 3 to No. 7, and the other frames are considered to be low base frames. "Is supposed to stop preferentially.

Therefore, in the slash-A condition device, in the order of hitting the left 1st, the "blue lamp" is pressed on the left reel M51 in the range of the low base frame, and the "blue lamp" is stopped on the effective line (middle stage of the left reel). Then, since the "red lamp" of the middle reel M52 and the "blue lamp" of the right reel M53 each have PB = 1, the cheaper role 1 wins, and in the order of hitting the left 1st, the left reel M51 has a high base piece. When the "red lamp" is pressed in the range to stop the "red lamp" on the effective line, the "blue lamp" of the middle reel M52 and the "blue lamp" of the right reel M53 are PB = 1, respectively. The higher role wins. Further, in the slash-A condition device, when the middle stage of the middle reel is pressed in the striking order of the middle 1st, the "blue lamp" is stopped as described above, whereby the displayable symbol combination is the cheaper role 2 "blue lamp".・ Because it will be either "blue lamp / blue lamp" or "red lamp / blue lamp / blue lamp" which is a higher role, if you press the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 and stop it, the cheaper role 2 will win. , If you press the "red lamp" on the left reel M51 to stop it, the higher role will win. The slash-B condition device differs only in that the "red lamp" and the "blue lamp" in the slash-A condition device are reversed (in the above description of the slash-A condition device, the "blue lamp" is used. Is uniformly read as "red lamp" and "red lamp" as "blue lamp"), so the explanation is omitted.

That is, in this modification example 1, in the case of the left 1st and the middle 1st, a cheaper role (1 card role) in which the AT lottery is given preferential treatment or a higher role (15 card role) in which the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment can be won. In the case of the right 1st, only the 15-card combination that is not given preferential treatment to the AT lottery is configured to win, and as in the above-mentioned left 1st and middle 1st, the push order in which the symbol combination related to the higher combination (15-card combination) can win is selected. Even if you do, you may not have this combination of symbols. In other words, as in the above-mentioned left 1st and middle 1st, even if the push order is such that the symbol combination related to the cheaper role (1 piece role) can win a prize, the symbol combination related to the higher role (15 pieces) is available. It can be said that there are also cases.

In this way, even if the symbol combinations related to the higher combination (15-card combination) are pushed in a winning order, the symbol combinations may not be aligned. Therefore, for example, the number of AT ceiling games is increased. In the set specifications, when the number of ceiling games is close and it is more advantageous to take the role of 15 cards than to receive the AT lottery, the player who originally chose to receive the AT lottery with the aim of winning a cheap prize It is possible to reduce the effectiveness of the aggressiveness of the game method, which is not originally executed (original unintended), such as switching to a higher prize aim.

In this modification 1, one of the push slash combinations 2 is one effect group for the slash-A condition device (the effect group may also be referred to as a "effect group number". For example, the effect group A). Is assigned, and another effect group (for example, effect group B) is assigned by the slash-B condition device. And slash-B condition device is established (winning) can be grasped. When the push slash combination 2 is won in the non-AT state in the advantageous section, the above-mentioned information such as the effect group A or B is transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S is this. By generating an effect command corresponding to the effect group A or B, the effect display device S40 or the like is configured to execute the effect according to the effect group A or B.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114, when the slash-A condition device is established, the effect display device S40 displays the line of the character "Stop the symbol there !!" in blue characters. By performing an effect corresponding to the effect group A such that the background is also blue, it is suggested to the player that the slash-A condition device is established. Therefore, the player aiming for a cheaper role (aiming for a cheaper prize) can stop the "blue lamp" by pressing the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st (as described above). By pressing the left stop button D41 at any timing of the 10 frames from No. 8 to No. 17, which is the range), you can receive preferential treatment of AT lottery, aiming for a higher role (aiming for a higher prize). The player can receive 15 payouts by pressing the "red lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st. In other words, the effect mode by the effect display device S40 of this change example 1 (in the case of this change example 1, the displayed color) is aimed at a cheap prize by pressing which pattern (“blue lamp”). It can be said that it suggests a stop timing corresponding to the aim of a cheap prize, as if it is possible, and the player can grasp the symbol of the cheap aim by this suggestion, and at the same time, aim for a higher prize from this symbol of the cheap prize aim. It can be said that it is possible to grasp the design (“red lamp”) of the player, and based on this grasp, it is possible to select either a low-targeted prize or a high-targeted prize at the player's will.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114, when the slash-B condition device is established, the effect display device S40 displays the line of the character "Stop the pattern there !!" in red characters, and the background is also red. By performing an effect corresponding to the effect group B such as, it is suggested to the player that the slash-B condition device is established. Therefore, a player aiming for a cheaper role (aiming for a cheaper prize) can receive preferential treatment in the AT lottery by pressing the "red lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pushing the left 1st, aiming for a higher role. The player (aiming for a higher prize) will be able to receive 15 payouts by pressing the "blue lamp" on the left reel M51 in the order of pressing the left 1st. In this way, in the production corresponding to the production groups A and B, only the color of the dialogue and the background color are different, and the others are exactly the same production, and it is established by the color of the dialogue and the background color. It is designed to suggest a conditional device.

In this modification 1, the effect groups A and B are assigned to the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device, respectively, but instead of this, the slash-A condition device and the push order bell group A (for example, the push order bell group A) are assigned. The winning sequence of FIG. 103-a group of push order bells in which A1 to A8 are grouped together) is designated as the production group A, and the slash-B condition device and the push order bell group B (for example, the winning order of FIG. 103-A9 to (A16 is grouped together as a group of push order bells, etc.) may be used as the production group B. Even in this case, in the sub-control board S, in the case of the effect groups A and B, it is suggested that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are uniformly established. You can perform the production. In this case, even if the symbol combination of the single combination of the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device is the same as the symbol combination of the single combination when the push order bell, which is the 15-sheet combination, is dropped. good.

In this modified example 1, although not shown, when the effect display device S40 is performing a suggestion effect that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are satisfied, the push order display device is used. In this case, the advantageous section display YH is not turned on even if the user is staying in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display device YH is turned on when the AT is started. It has become. In addition, when the same suggestion as the above-mentioned actual first embodiment (see each aspect of FIG. 111) is made by the push order display device in the advantageous section and during non-AT, it is the same as the above-mentioned second embodiment. Similarly, the specifications are such that the advantageous section display device YH is turned on.

Further, in the present modification 1, in principle, the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are established in the non-AT state in the advantageous section (hereinafter, simply "" It may be called "suggestion effect"), but under certain circumstances such as during the above-mentioned precursory or continuous effect, even if the push slash role 2 is won, the above-mentioned suggestion effect should not be performed. You can do it. Under this specific situation, in addition to the above-mentioned precursors and continuous production, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than the predetermined number of games (for example, less than 100 games), or, for example, AT ends as described above. A predetermined gaming situation such as a reduced section in which a designated number of games (for example, 40 games) are played later, a predetermined period, and the like can be mentioned. By doing so, the player can concentrate on the precursory effect and the continuous effect because the suggestive effect does not force the player to push the eyes when performing the precursory effect or the continuous effect. In particular, in a situation where the transition to AT has been confirmed and the aim of a cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is no longer meaningful, it is possible to prevent unnecessary suggestion production. As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate suggestion effect according to the game situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, under the above-mentioned specific circumstances such as during the precursory or continuous production, even if the push slash role 2 is won, the suggestion effect is not performed. By suggesting that he has won, it is possible to prevent the aggressiveness of intentionally aiming for a higher prize.

In addition, under the above-mentioned specific circumstances, in particular, as described above, in the situation where the transition to AT is confirmed and the aim of the cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is meaningless, the effect display device. In addition to notifying the operation mode of the high prize by S40, the push order display device may also instruct the operation mode of the high prize. In this case, the number of balls can be increased by winning the push slash role 2 before the transition to AT. In addition, the specification that the above notification by the effect display device S40 and the instruction by the push order display device are given only in the situation where the transition to AT is confirmed and the aim of the cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is no longer meaningful. In this case, the notification or instruction of a high prize can be given as a notification that the transition to AT has been confirmed during the precursory period or the continuous production. Further, in a situation where the aim of a cheap prize in the push slash role 2 is no longer meaningful, if the above notification by the effect display device S40 and the instruction by the push order display device are frequently given, it is a precursor. By notifying or instructing the operation mode of the high prize during the continuous production, the player can have a sense of expectation for the transition of AT.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific situation such as during a sign or during continuous production, if the push slash combination 2 is won, the suggestion effect may be performed by the effect display device S40. In this case, the mode of the suggestion effect is, for example, to make a small suggestion at the end (see FIG. 112 for an image) that does not interfere with the effect already performed as in the second embodiment described above. As described above, an aspect different from the usual suggestive effect shown in FIG. 114 is given as an example. As another aspect of this suggestion effect, for example, during a continuous effect, the push slash role 2 is won by an abstract display such as "!" Or an output of a sound effect such as "bashun" from the speaker. You may suggest that you are.

As described above, also in this modification example 1, it is suggested that the slash-A condition device and the slash-B condition device are established in the effect display device S40 whose display area is relatively larger than that of the push order display device. (In other words, it suggests a symbol that can win a low aim and a symbol that can win a high aim), so that the player can prevent oversight, and the player can operate the stop button D40. Can be surely grasped. As a result, it is possible to surely make a selection according to the player's intention among the aim of high prize or the aim of low prize, and the unintended disadvantage due to oversight such as the operation mode of high prize even though the aim is low prize. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present modification 1, when the middle reel M52 is stopped first in the push order of the middle 1st as described above, and when the "blue lamp" is stopped in the middle of the middle reel M52, the slash-A condition device is used. Is operating, and if you press the "blue lamp" to the left, you can win the cheaper role 2, and if the "red lamp" stops in the middle of the middle reel M52, the slash-B condition device is activated. It is possible to determine that the cheaper role 2 can be won by pressing the "red lamp" on the left (the left to win the cheaper role based on the stop symbol of the middle reel M52). The design (stop position) of the reel M51 can be specified). For this reason, even if the effect of the effect display device S40 or the like makes it impossible to perform the effect of the above suggestion (or it becomes difficult to see) due to an error or the like, a cheap prize is won by performing the pressing order of the middle 1st. Aim and high prize aim can be done without delay. Further, as described above, in the case of performing a suggestion effect suggesting that the eye-pushing slash role 2 is won by an abstract display such as "!" During the continuous effect, the player described above. Since the stop position of the left reel M51 that wins the cheap prize 2 can be grasped by the result of the middle reel, the cheap prize 2 can be won by the skill of the player (technical intervention of the player). ..

<< Change example 2 from the second embodiment >>
Next, a modified example 2 according to the second embodiment will be described. In this modification 2, instead of the push slash combination 1 according to the second embodiment and the push slash combination 2 according to the modification 1, the push slash combination 3 shown in FIG. 115 is used as the push slash combination. The applied points are different. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the push slash combination 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 115, the push slash combination 3 is generally a subdivision of the push slash combination 1 shown in FIG. 110. For the left 1st low base frame in the slash combination A1 to A4 of the slash combination 3 of the slash combination 3, the symbol combination related to 1 sheet A which is 1/8 of the slash combination 1 is similar to the slash combination 1 shown in FIG. A prize is won, and the symbol combination related to the loss (0 sheets) is won on 7/8. On the other hand, the high base frame will be described below, for example, by taking the 13th to 17th of the left reel M51 of FIG. 91, which is the high base frame of the push slash combination 1, as an example. In FIG. 91, when the stop button is pressed at the timing of replay on the 13th of the left reel M51, the 14th is 1 frame, the 15 is 2 frames, the 16 is 3 frames, and the 14 is 4 frames. For example, when the stop button is pressed in any of the three frames from No. 14 to No. 16 of 1 to 3 frames (when any of the above 3 frames is the stop timing). By applying the above-mentioned number priority control to all reels, the symbol combination related to 1 piece B, which is a 1 piece combination, is won a prize (1 piece combination in 3/4), and the number 17 bell A When it is the stop timing, the above-mentioned number priority control is applied to all reels so that the symbol combination winning the 15-card combination (higher) is awarded (15-sheet combination at 1/4). .. That is, one of the above-mentioned number priority control or number priority control is applied to all reels depending on which symbol corresponds to the stop timing among the high base frames, and one piece B or 15 pieces, which is one piece combination. The role is supposed to win a prize.

Further, in the case of the slash combination A1, in the case of the slash combination A1, the symbol combination related to the same 15-card combination as the above-mentioned higher in the high base frame wins a prize if the push order is middle right and left (in FIG. 115). Also, as in FIG. 110, it is described as "○". The same applies to the subsequent modification examples). In the slash role A1, in the other middle right left, right left middle, right middle left push order, the symbol combination related to 1 card C, which is the 1 card role of PB = 1 (the 1 card role of the push order bell spill), wins a prize. (This is referred to as "spill" in FIG. 115). Further, for the slash combinations A2 to A4, the push order of "〇" is different from that of the above-mentioned slash combination A1, and the other push orders are "spills".

In the slash combination A1, in the high base frame (high position) on the left 1st, as described above, the symbol combination related to the 15-card combination or the symbol combination related to the 1-card combination B can win a prize. As for the AT lottery which is an advantageous section and is not AT, a low probability table (AT lottery is weak) is used because it is relatively difficult to win the AT (AT lottery is not given preferential treatment) as described above. Further, in the slash combination A1, in the low base frame (cheap position) on the left 1st, the symbol combination related to 1 sheet A, which is a 1-card combination, or the symbol combination related to 0 missing sheets, but it is an advantageous section and is not. As for the AT lottery during AT, as described above, a high-accuracy table in which AT winning is relatively easy (AT lottery is given preferential treatment) is used (AT lottery is strong). In addition, in the slash role A1, in the middle right and left push order (the push order is irregular when viewed from the push order regarding the AT lottery, and the push order is correct regarding the number of payouts), the symbol combination related to the 15-card combination wins, but in the advantageous section. Therefore, for the AT lottery during non-AT, the low probability table is used as described above. Furthermore, in the push order of "spills" (the push order is irregular when viewed from the push order related to the AT lottery, and the push order is incorrect regarding the number of payouts), the symbol combination related to 1 card C, which is a 1-card combination, wins a prize, which is advantageous. A low probability table is used for AT lottery during non-AT in the section. Since this is the same for the slash combinations A2 to 4, the description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the present modification 2, in the AT lottery performed between the winning determination and the payout process as described above, each of the 15-card combination, 1-card A, 1-card B, 1-card C, and 0-card (loss) The AT lottery is performed at the lottery table according to the symbol combination, and as shown in FIG. 115, in the case of the 1 A and 0 symbol combination in the left 1st low base frame, the high accuracy table is used. The AT lottery is performed by using the other 15 sheets, 1 sheet B, and 1 sheet C, and the AT lottery is performed at the low accuracy table. In addition, in the case of 1-card B, which is a 1-card combination in a high base frame, the AT lottery itself may not be performed, or in the case of 0 cards missing in place of the 1-card combination in a high base frame. However, as described above, the AT lottery may be performed at the low probability table (the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment), or the AT lottery itself may not be performed.

Therefore, even with the same 1-card combination, the AT lottery will be performed with 1-sheet A, which is a 1-sheet combination corresponding to the low base frame, and 1-sheet B and 1-sheet C, which are 1-sheet roles corresponding to the high base frame and "spill", respectively. The advantages are different. Further, the symbol combinations corresponding to each of the 1-sheet A, 1-sheet B, and 1-sheet C are different from each other, and the player can obtain a high-accuracy table depending on the symbol combination (roll) when the 1-card combination wins. It is possible to grasp whether the AT lottery was received by the low-accuracy table or the AT lottery by the low-accuracy table.

In other words, in this modification example 2, one piece B symbol combination that wins by missing the 15-card role (it can be said that it is a lost symbol combination that misses the 15-card role) and one piece A aiming at a cheap prize. Alternatively, there is a combination of 0 symbols (it can be said that a combination of missed symbols in which 1 A is missed), but in the AT lottery during non-AT, which is an advantageous section, 1 A is more than 1 B symbol combination. It can be said that the combination of symbols and the combination of 0 symbols are given preferential treatment for the AT lottery. Further, it can be said that 1 piece A, which is a 1 piece role corresponding to a low base frame, is given preferential treatment for the AT lottery, rather than 1 piece C, which is the 1 piece role of the above-mentioned spill of the push order bell. In addition, the AT lottery is not given preferential treatment for 1 piece B, which is the 1 piece role in the above high base frame, and 1 piece C, which is the spill of the 15 piece role, and in this modification example 2, the winning probability of these ATs is It is the same. In the AT lottery, the combination of 0 symbols is given preferential treatment over the combination of 1 A, or the combination of 1 A is given preferential treatment over the combination of 0 symbols. It is possible to set how much preferential treatment is given to the AT lottery for which symbol combination for the purpose of winning a cheap prize. Further, in this modification 2, the winning probability of the AT of 1 sheet B and 1 sheet C is the same, but the winning probability of AT of 1 sheet C is higher than that of 1 sheet B. The winning probabilities may be different from each other.

As described above, in this modification example 2, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table corresponding to each of the 15-card combination, 1-card A, 1-card B, 1-card C, and 0-card (loss). In particular, with regard to the 1-card role, multiple types of 1-card A, 1-card B, and 1-card C are given, and 1-card A and 0-card are AT lottery preferential treatment, and 15-card role is payout preferential treatment. , Because the profit related to AT and the profit related to payout are clearly separated, aiming at 15 cards, aiming at 1 card A with AT preferential treatment, aiming at 1 card B or 1 card C due to other intentions, etc. , The range of games that can be selected is expanded, and it is possible to select the game characteristics that better suit the tastes of the players.

As for the setting of the above-mentioned effect group in the present modification 2, for example, the slash combination A1 to A4 may be one effect group A, or the slash combination A1 to A4 and the above-mentioned push order bell group A may be combined. One production group A may be used, or the slash combination A1 and the push order bell group A may be the production group A, and the slash combination A2 and the push order bell group B may be the production group B, respectively. It can be set as appropriate, such as pairing with different push order bell groups and making each into one production group.

<< Change example 3 from the second embodiment >>
Next, a third modification example of the second embodiment will be described. In this modification 3, instead of the above-mentioned push slash roles 1 to 3, a push slash role (weak che) or the like that functions as a rare role is used, and a slash role that functions as a rare role is used. The difference is that, in addition to the slash role by pushing, the push order slash role (weak chance) by the push order is used. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining a push slash role as a rare role in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment.

<Rare role as a push slash>
In this change example 3, as a rare role of a push slash, a weak cherry "a push slash role (weak che)", a strong cherry "a push slash role (strong che)", and a middle cherry. It has a "push slash role (middle row che)", and each of these push slash roles at the time of a low prize is a weak cherry roll (for example, on the upper or lower row of the left reel M51). "Cherry" stops, middle reel M52, right reel M53 is a symbol combination that is an arbitrary symbol (ANY symbol)), strong cherry roll (for example, "cherry" stops on the upper or lower row of the left reel M51 At the same time, the cherry stops in the middle of the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 has a symbol combination that is an arbitrary symbol. Each reel M53 is a symbol combination) which is an arbitrary symbol. In addition, the slash roles A1 to A4 as the push slash role (weak check), the slash roles B1 and B2 as the push slash role (strong check), and the slash role C1 as the push slash role (middle row check) are summarized. It is also called "cherry-type push slash role".

As shown in FIG. 116, for example, the push slash combination (weak check) is composed of slash combinations A1 to A4. In the slash combination A1, the left 1st is 1/4 in the high base frame (high position) (when the stop operation is accepted in the 1/4 frame of the high base frame), as in the case of the left 1st in FIG. 115 above. The role (higher role) wins, and the remaining 3/4 of the high base frame (when the stop operation is accepted in the 3/4 frame of the high base frame), the lost symbol combination (the disjointed pattern combination, etc.) The push order in which the one-card role "cheap" wins, and the one-card role of the above-mentioned weak cherry roll wins at 1/1 in the low base frame (cheap position) (this is referred to as "slash 1" in Fig. 116). ). In addition, it is not limited to this configuration, and in the case of the left 1st, the left symbol corresponding to the 15-card combination (higher role) and the left symbol corresponding to the lost symbol combination are made the same and stopped at the high base frame of the left reel. When the operation is accepted, the same left symbol is stopped, and then the stop control of the middle reel and / or the right reel (a stop operation range for number priority control and a stop operation range for number priority control is provided. (That), 15-card role (higher role) wins in 1/4, and "cheap", which is one of the missed symbol combinations (disjoint pattern combinations such as different reels), wins in 3/4. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the push order of the middle left and right is the same as the push order of the middle right and left of FIG. However, in FIG. 116, it is expressed as "high"). Further, the other push orders of middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left are the above-mentioned "cheap" push orders. It should be noted that the "cheap" result is not a combination of lost symbols, but a combination of symbols such as a random pattern in which different symbols are lined up on the effective line, and the above-mentioned random number on the ineffective line. Alternatively, on the valid line, the above-mentioned irregularities are displayed, but on the non-effective line, a combination of bell symbols is displayed, and the appearance of the bells seems to be aligned. It may be an eye, and the point is not particularly limited as long as it is not a combination of symbols related to a rare role such as a cherry.

Further, the allocation of "sla 1", "high", and "cheap" in the slash combinations A2 to A4 is as shown in FIG. 116. That is, in the push slash role (weak check), "sla 1" is for the left 1st (two push orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders) common to the slash roles A1 to A4. "High" is assigned to different push orders (one push order that is 1/6 of the total of 6 push orders) in the slash combinations A1 to A4, and "cheap" is assigned to the above-mentioned. It is assigned to the push orders other than "Sura 1" and "High" (three push orders that are 1/2 of the total of six push orders).

As shown in FIG. 116, for example, the push slash combination (strong check) is composed of the slash combination B1 and B2. In the slash roles B1 and B2, the left 1st of each is the same as the left 1st of FIG. 115 above. In the low base frame, PB = 1 and the winning order is that one of the above-mentioned strong cherry rolls wins (this is referred to as "sla 2" in FIG. 116). Regarding "high", the slash role B1 is the middle 1st (two push orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 push orders as in the above left 1st), and the slash role B2 is the right 1st (the same as the above left 1st). Similar to the above left 1st, it is assigned to each of the 6 push orders (2 push orders that are 1/3 of the total push order), and for "cheap", the right 1st (whole 6 push orders) in the slash role B1 It is assigned to the middle st (two push orders that are 1/3 of all 6 push orders) in the slash combination B2.

As shown in FIG. 116, for example, the push slash combination (middle stage check) is composed of the slash combination C1. In this slash combination C1, the left 1st (two pushing orders that are 1/3 of the total of 6 pushing orders) is 1 in the high base frame (high position) as in the left 1st in FIG. 110 above. "High" wins at 1/1, and 1/1 at low base frame, which is the push order in which one of the above middle cherry rolls wins (this is referred to as "Sura 2" in Fig. 116). .. In addition, for each of the middle 1st and right 1st other than the left 1st (4 push orders that are 2/3 of the total of 6 push orders), the result is different from the above middle cherry. Is assigned.

Further, in the above-mentioned cherry-type push-slash combination, as in the above-mentioned second embodiment and each of the modified examples 1 and 2, if the cherry-type push-slash combination is won in an advantageous section and in a non-AT situation. In other words, between the winning determination and the payout process, the AT lottery corresponding to the actually stopped roll is performed. In this AT lottery, the middle cherry roll has the highest AT lottery probability (for example, 100% wins the AT), the strong cherry roll (for example, the AT lottery using the above-mentioned high accuracy table), and the weak. The AT lottery probability is higher in the order of the cherry rolls (for example, the AT lottery using the medium probability table, which has a higher AT winning probability than the above-mentioned low-probability table but has a lower AT winning probability than the above-mentioned high-probability table). It is set to be low. In addition, among the cherry-type push slash roles, the winning probability of the push slash role (weak che) (for example, 1/30), the winning probability of the push slash role (strong che) (for example, 1/200), and the eyes. The winning probability (for example, 1/16384) of the push slash combination (middle stage check) is set so that the winning probability becomes lower in this order.

Therefore, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 116, in the cherry-type push slash role, the winning probability is the push slash role (weak che) described as "weak" in FIG. 116> "strong" in FIG. 354. In the notation, the push slash role (strong check)> In Fig. 116, it becomes the push slash role (middle row check) written as "middle row" (in Fig. 116, for each of "weak", "strong", and "middle row". (Indicated as "Large", "Medium", "Small"), and in the situation where the cherry-type push slash role is won by pressing the start lever D50 (indicated as "Leva ON" in Fig. 116), the AT lottery is still held. Since we have not done so, the winning probability of any of the "weak", "strong", and "middle" ATs will be "small" (in other words, the winning probability of ATs can be said to be 0), and all reels will stop. , Weak cherry rolls, strong cherry rolls, and middle cherry rolls are displayed and the AT lottery is performed (indicated as "all stopped" in Fig. 116), "middle"> "strong"> " It becomes "weak", and the above-mentioned appropriate push (in the case of this modification example 3, an appropriate push for all reels or an appropriate push for four push orders other than the slats 1 to 3 may be used, and the same result is obtained in all cases). The expected value for winning the 15-card role is "middle"> "strong"> "weak". Although not shown in FIG. 116, the expected winning value of the AT on the left 1st and the appropriate hit is also "middle"> "strong"> "weak". In the third modification, as described in the second embodiment described above, the AT lottery before the winning determination (when the start lever D50 is pressed) is the first stage lottery, and the lottery after the winning determination is the second. It is a stage lottery, and if you win in these two stage lottery such as the first and second lottery, it is a specification that you win the AT, but instead of this, as in the second embodiment described above, the winning judgment The AT lottery may be performed during the payout process, and the lottery mode is not particularly limited.

As mentioned above, in the slash role A1 of the push slash role (weak che), in the left 1st "Sura 1", in the high base frame, "high" wins 1/4 and "cheap" in 3/4. It has become. Here, in four of the six push orders, the middle 1st and the right 1st (in other words, the push order other than "sla 1", and hereafter referred to as "irregular push order"). Since there is one "high" and three "cheap", 1/4 is "high" and 3/4 is "cheap". That is, when the slash combination A1 is won, the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the aim of higher winning of "Sura 1" and the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the irregular push order are the same. (The payout rate in the game, the expected value of the number of game medals to be paid out in the game, etc., or the payout rate including the possibility of transfer to AT after that) Are the same. The same applies to the slash combinations A2 to 4.

In the slash role B1 of the push order slash role (strong che), in the left 1st "Sura 2", in the high base frame, "high" wins at 1/2 and "cheap" wins at 1/2, while In the irregular push order, of the four irregular push orders, two are "high" and two are "cheap", so in the irregular push order, "high" wins at 1/2 and "cheap" at 1/2. "Is supposed to win a prize. That is, for the push order slash role (strong che), the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the aim of higher prizes of "Sura 2" and the winning rate of the 15-card combination and the 1-card combination in the irregular push order are It becomes the same, and each ball output rate at the time of winning of the slash combination B1 becomes the same. The same applies to the slash combination B2.

In the push order slash role (middle tier), in the left 1st "Sura 3", "High" wins at 1/1 in the high base frame, while in the irregular push order, all four irregular push orders are "". Because it is "high", "high" wins at 1/1 in the irregular push order, so for the push order slash role (middle stage che), the winning rate of the 15-card role in aiming for the high prize of "Sura 3", The winning rate of the 15-card combination in the irregular pushing order is the same, and the payout rate of each ball at the time of winning the middle cherry is the same.

Here, for example, when the winning rate of the 15-card combination is higher in the higher winning aim than in the irregular pushing order, the aggressiveness of aiming for the higher winning without the irregular pushing order occurs. On the other hand, in this modification example 3, for the cherry-type push slash role, the winning rate of the 15-card combination, etc. in the aim of higher prizes and the winning rate of the 15-card combination, etc. in the irregular push order are the same. Since the ball output rate at the time of winning the cherry-type push slash role is the same, the above-mentioned aggressiveness becomes meaningless, so this kind of capture can be prevented. Fair playability can be guaranteed.

In this modified example 3, the cherry-type push-push role is applied as the push-push role as the rare role, but instead of or in addition to this, the watermelon-type push-push of the watermelon is applied. Needless to say, it is possible to provide a slash role or a chance-type push slash role. Further, as the setting of the above-mentioned effect group, for example, if it is a push slash combination (weak check), the slash combination A1 to A4 may be one production group A, or the slash combination A1 to A4 and the above-mentioned push combination may be set. The forward bell group A may be one production group A, or the slash combination A1 and the push order bell group A may be the production group A, the slash combination A2 and the push order bell group B may be the production group B, and so on. Each of the slash combinations A to H can be appropriately set, for example, by pairing different push order bell groups with each other to form one effect group.

<Pushing order slash role>
Further, in the third modification, in addition to the push slash role as the rare role, the push order slash role according to the push order that functions as the rare role is also used. As an example thereof, as shown in FIG. 116, It has a push order slash role (weak chance eye) that functions as a rare role of a weak chance eye and a push order slash role (strong chance eye) that functions as a rare role of a strong chance eye.

Of the push order slash roles (weak chances), the slash role D1 is assigned the above "high" in the left middle right, and the above "cheap" in the left and right middle and right 1st (right left middle and right middle left). .. In addition, in the 1st of the slash role D1, the push order in which one of the weak chances (for example, a combination of symbols in which "replay, replay, medal" is stopped in a straight line, etc.) wins a prize (this). Is expressed as "Sura 4" in FIG. 116), and based on the fact that the result of this weak chance is displayed, the result of the weak chance is obtained between the winning judgment and the payout process as described above. The AT lottery is performed on the lottery table corresponding to the eyes (for example, the above-mentioned medium probability table). Further, among the push order slash combinations (weak chances), the push orders in the slash combinations D2 to D12 and the "high", "cheap", and "sla 4" assigned to them are as shown in FIG. be.

Also, of the push order slash roles (chance eyes), the slash role E1 is "high" on the left 1st, "cheap" on the right 1st, and has a strong chance on the middle 1st (for example, "medal, medal, replay"). This is the push order (this is referred to as "Sura 5" in Fig. 116), and the result of this strong chance is displayed. Based on the above, the AT lottery will be performed at the lottery table (for example, the high accuracy table as described above) corresponding to the strong chance, between the winning judgment and the payout process as described above. It has become. Further, among the push order slash combinations (strong chances), the push orders in the slash combinations E2 to E6 and the "high", "cheap", and "sla 5" assigned to them are as shown in FIG. be.

In this change example 3, the above-mentioned medium-probability table and high-probability table are used as the lottery table corresponding to the weak chance and the strong chance, but each rare role of this kind is used. It goes without saying that the winning probability of the AT corresponding to the outcome can be set as appropriate, and the point is that the AT lottery should be performed with a higher probability than when it is "high" or "cheap" (AT lottery is). Preferential treatment). The same applies to the above-mentioned cherry-type push slash role. Also, instead of the role of one card with a weak chance, you may use a combination of missed symbols (0) with a weak chance, and the game medal corresponding to the weak chance. The number of payouts can be appropriately set as long as it is less than the specified number (including 0).

Here, in the slash role D1, if the push order is left middle right, the probability of acquiring the 15-card role is 100% with "high", and the push order of left middle right, right left middle, right middle left is "cheap". The probability of acquiring one card is 100%, but the above-mentioned low probability table is used for the AT lottery, and the expected value of AT winning is relatively low, while the 1st middle "Sura". Regarding "4", the above-mentioned medium probability table is used and the expected value of AT winning is relatively high. On the other hand, in the slash role D5, if the push order is middle left and right, the probability of acquiring 15 roles is 100% with "high", and the push order of middle right left, right left middle, right middle left is "cheap". Although the probability of acquiring a single card is 100%, the expected value of AT winning is relatively low, while the expected value of AT winning is relatively high for "Sura 4" on the left 1st. ing. In this way, the push order slash combination (weak chance) has different AT winning expectations and medal payout expectations depending on the operation mode for each slash combination. The same applies to the push order slash role (strong chance).

On the other hand, among the 12 slash roles of the slash roles D1 to D12 that compose the push order slash role (weak chance), there are two "high" in the left middle right push order (1/12), and "cheap". There are 6 (6/12) and 4 "Sura 4" (4/12). Further, among the 12 slash roles of the slash roles D1 to D12 constituting the push order slash combination (weak chance), in any of the push orders other than the left middle right, the same as the above-mentioned left middle right push order. There are two "high" (1/12), six "cheap" (6/12), and four "sla 4" (4/12). That is, in the entire push order slash role (weak chance), the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same regardless of the push order. The same applies to the push order slash role (strong chance).

In this way, the push order slash combination has different AT winning expectations and medal payout expectations depending on the operation mode of each slash combination constituting the push order slash combination, while the push order slash combination as a whole is AT winning. Since the expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same, it is possible to provide a game that maintains uniformity without variation.

As for the setting of the above-mentioned effect group in the present modification 3, for example, the slash combinations D1 to D12 may be set as one effect group A (the effect group setting mode 1 is used). Further, the slash roles D1 and D2 have the same push order (left middle right) to which "high" is assigned, but the push order to which "sla 4" is assigned is different from each other, and this relationship is slash. The same applies to the combination D3 and D4, the slash combination D5 and D6, the slash combination D7 and D8, the slash combination D9 and D10, and the slash combination D11 and D12. Therefore, the pair of slash roles D1 and D2 (even number of slash roles) is regarded as one production group A, the pair of slash roles D3 and D4 is regarded as one production group B, and the pair of slash roles D3 and D4 is one. The production group C, the pair of slash roles D5 and D6 is one production group D, the pair of slash roles D7 and D8 is one production group E, the slash roles D9 and D10 are one production group F, and the slash role. The pair of D11 and D12 may be one effect group G (the effect group setting mode 2 is used).

Here, in the effect group setting mode 2, for example, when the effect group A is transmitted to the sub control board S, even if the effect display device S40 can notify "high" on the left 1st, " Regarding the "sla 4", for example, as shown in FIG. 117, a square frame is provided in the entire display area which is the lower part in the display area of the effect display device S40 and extends to the left and right of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. In the frame, only ambiguous notification can be made by displaying "1" indicating that the stop button to be stopped first is the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43 in the aim of a cheap prize ("Sura 4") ("Sura 4"). To put it the other way around, if you are aiming for a higher prize, you can say that you are informing that you are on the left 1st). When the suggestion effect corresponding to such effect groups A to G is performed, the operation mode aiming at a low prize and the operation mode aiming at a high prize are different in each effect group A to G. It can be said that the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are different depending on the response.

On the other hand, in the effect setting mode 1, in the effect display device S40 or the like, only a suggestion effect that the push slash combination has been won can be performed. In this case, as described above, in the entire push order slash role (weak chance), the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same regardless of the push order. In this effect setting mode 1, it can be said that the AT winning expectation and the medal payout expectation are the same.

Here, in the present modification example 3, when the cherry-type push slash combination or the push order slash combination is won in the advantageous section and during non-AT, the effect display device S40 provides a suggestion effect to that effect. I try to do it. On the other hand, during AT, when the cherry-type push slash role or the push order slash role is won, the effect display device S40, for example, in the case of the push slash role (weak che), a weak cherry appears. Rare role appearance according to each slash role, such as notifying the operation mode in which the eyes are displayed (specifically, in the case of the slash role A1, the stop timing that is the left 1st and can win a cheap prize). Is designed to notify the operation mode in which is surely displayed. Here, when the outcome of the rare role is displayed, an additional lottery or the like is performed according to the outcome of each rare role.

It should be noted that, in the advantageous section and during non-AT, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned precursor or continuous production, for example, when the push order slash combination (weak che) or the like with a relatively low AT winning probability is won. In the effect display device S40, the symbol combination related to "high" is notified, and when the push order slash combination (strong che) or the like with a relatively high AT winning probability is won, the operation related to the cheap prize is won. The mode may be suggested (specifically, when the slash combination B1 is won, it is suggested that the left 1st is "sla 2", etc.). By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate suggestion effect according to the game situation and prevent the player from being confused, as in the case of the above-mentioned modification 2.

<< Change example 4 from the second embodiment >>
In the above-described embodiment, in FIG. 118, as shown in the prizes-A25 to A32 corresponding to the respective slash combinations A to H constituting the push slash combination 1, the number of the push slash combinations 1 is the same. The winning probabilities of the push slash combination 1 in settings 1 to 6 are the same (there is no setting difference), but instead of this, in this modification 4, the push slash combination in settings 1 to 6 is the same. The winning probabilities of 1 are different from each other (there is a setting difference). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, the number of positions of the push slash combination 1 (denoted as the slash combination in FIG. 118) in the setting 1 is 10,000, and the higher the setting value is, the more the placement is based on this. The number has increased, and in setting 6, the number is 20000 (the winning probability of the push slash combination 1 is setting 1> setting 2> setting 3> setting 4> setting 5> setting 6). In this way, by making the winning probability of the push slash combination 1 of the setting 6 higher than that of the setting 1, it is possible to create a playability of performing the setting determination. Further, since the setting 6 has a higher probability of winning the push slash role 1 in which the AT lottery can be given preferential treatment than the setting 1, it is possible to improve the game interest of the setting 6.

Further, in the present modification 4, a setting difference is also provided in the winning probability of the push order bell in the settings 1 to 6, and as shown in FIG. 118, the setting 1 is set contrary to the push slash combination 1. The number is 40,000, which is the highest among all the set values, and the higher the set value is, the smaller the number is, and in setting 1, the number is 30,000 (winning of the push order bell). The probabilities are set 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6). Further, in this change example 4, the total number of push order bells and the number of push slash combinations 1 in each set value is 50,000, and the winning probability of the push order bell and the push slash role are both. As for the winning probability, which is the sum of the winning probabilities of 1, all the set values are the same.

In such a specification, the push order bell and the push slash role 1 are regarded as one production group A, and this production information, in other words, either the push order bell or the push slash role 1 is won. When the information is transmitted to the sub control board S, for the effect command transmitted from the sub control board S to the effect display device S40, when the start lever D50 is pressed, the push order bell or the push slash combination 1 is won. It is an effect command that makes an ambiguous notification (which can be said to be a common effect of the push order bell and the push slash role 1). On the other hand, in a state where all reels are stopped and which symbol combination is stopped by the winning determination, the sub-control board S has a symbol combination corresponding to one or zero low base frames shown in FIG. 110. If all of them receive preferential treatment regarding the AT lottery, the effect display device S40 or the like will be made to perform an effect to notify the effect. Further, when the symbol combination relating to the 15 high base frames shown in FIG. 110 or the symbol combination relating to the 15 push order bells is displayed, the sub-control board S is displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like. In some cases, the same production may be performed, or different productions may be performed for each. Here, even when the push order bell and the push slash combination 1 are regarded as one production group A, as described in the second embodiment described above, in the advantageous section, the push order display device wins a cheap prize. And it is possible to instruct the operation mode of the high prize (for example, it can be executed during the AT described above), and the instruction by the push order display device enables the player to aim for a low prize or a high prize at his / her own choice. .. In addition, in the advantageous section and during non-AT, the push order display device may execute the instruction of the operation mode of the cheap prize, and in the advantageous section and during AT, the push order display device may execute the operation mode of the higher prize. The instruction may be configured to be executed, and the player can proceed with the game by the game method that is most advantageous by following the instruction. Further, as described above, in the case of the specification in which the effect display device S40 notifies the operation mode of the high prize and the push order display device only instructs the high prize aim, the game in the push order bell and the high prize. Since the number of medals paid out is the same (15), the net increase in the number of medals (inclination during AT) can be kept constant even if 15 medals are continuously taken according to these notifications and instructions during AT. ..

In this change example 4, the higher the set value of the push slash combination 1, the higher the winning probability, and the higher the set value of the push order bell, the lower the winning probability. Instead of this, the odd-numbered setting is lower than the even-numbered setting for the winning probability of the push slash role 1, and the odd-numbered setting is higher than the even-numbered setting for the winning probability of the push order bell. As described above, the winning probability (odd number) can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present modification 4, for convenience of explanation, the case where it is applied to the push slash combination 1 of the second embodiment has been described as an example, but it is also applied to the above-mentioned modification examples 1 to 3 in the same manner. Is possible.

<Summary of production group assignments>
Here, the modes of allocation of the above-mentioned effect groups described in the second embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples are summarized in the following (1) to (4). In addition, the following (1) to (4) are summarized by taking the slash combination A to H of the push slash combination 1 of the second embodiment as an example.
(1) A mode in which one effect group A is assigned to the slash combinations A to H.
(2) A mode in which one effect group is assigned to each of the slash combinations A to H, such that one effect group A is assigned to the slash combination A and another effect group B is assigned to the slash combination B. ..
(3) A mode in which one effect group is assigned to the slash combinations A to H and the above-mentioned push order bell group.
(4) One effect group A is assigned to the slash combination A and the above-mentioned push order bell group A, and another effect group B is assigned to the slash combination B and the above-mentioned push order bell group B. As described above, one effect group is assigned to each of one slash combination and the corresponding push order bell group as a set.

<< Other changes >>
In the second embodiment described above, Modifications 1 to 4, the preferential treatment of the AT lottery probability is taken as an example of the privilege in the case of a cheap prize (when the symbol combination related to the cheap prize is displayed) in the slash role. As described above, instead of this, the slash combination (as described above, the push slash combination 1 of the second embodiment, the push slash combination 2 and 3 of each of the above-mentioned modification examples, and the push slash combination (weak check). ) Etc., which is a summary of the "pushing order slash role" etc.), if you win a low prize, if you advance multiple games up to the ceiling by 1 or more and win a high prize May make it a privilege that the number of games for advancing (digesting) the number of ceiling games is large, such as the number of games for which the number of ceiling games is reduced and the number of games is smaller than the winning prize (for example, advancing one game).

In addition, as the above privilege, for example, in the specification that AT (AT is activated at the upper limit of points) when the number of points exceeds a predetermined number, when the slash role is won, if a low prize is won, a plurality of points will be given. However, in the case of a high prize, the points to be given may be given a smaller number of points (for example, 1 point) than the lower prize, or a large number of points may be given as a privilege. .. In addition to the AT activation condition, this point is used for appropriate purposes such as the above-mentioned CZ activation condition and the condition for shifting to a high probability state in which the AT winning probability is relatively high. It is possible.

Further, as the above-mentioned privilege, for example, when the slash role is won during AT, it may be a privilege that the number of additional games is larger in the case of a lower prize than in the case of a higher prize. In determining the initial number of AT games, the number of additional games may be increased when a low prize is won. In this case, the additional lottery is performed when the slash role is won during AT, and when the additional lottery is won, the effect display device S40 notifies the operation mode of the cheap prize (hereinafter, also referred to simply as "notification"). If you do not win the additional lottery, you will get a higher prize or the above-mentioned 15-card combination will win. It is also possible to notify or instruct the operation mode (pushing order) related to the possible "○" or "high".

Further, as an aspect of this addition, when the AT is won by the slash combination from the advantageous section and the non-AT, in the initial number of games predetermined in the above-mentioned AT for managing the number of games and in the above-mentioned AT for managing the number of games. It may be a mode in which the initial number of games or the initial number is added to the predetermined initial number (in other words, the addition to the initial number of games or the initial number is a privilege). In particular, in the number management AT, if one low-priced game medal for the role of slash is paid out and 15 high-priced game medals are paid out, one low-priced prize will be used for the AT. If the player wins, it can be said that 14 game medals are lost compared to the 15 high prize medals, but these 14 medals may be added to the initial number. In this case, even if the number of winnings is lost in the game in which the slash role is won, the amount will be compensated during AT, so there are cases where the prize is higher and cases where the prize is lower. The expected value considering the acquisition of medals by AT can be made the same (or the expected value is higher in the case of a lower prize than in the case of a higher prize).

In addition, as the above privilege, for example, the number of times a low prize is won during non-AT in an advantageous section is counted (no count is made in the case of a high prize), and the AT activation condition is that this count exceeds a predetermined value. As such, it may be a privilege to be used as a condition for activating AT. Also, if the number of times you have won a cheap prize is 10 times, you will win AT or CZ at 10%, if you win 20 times, you will win AT or CZ at 20%, and so on. It may be a privilege to be one of the parameters that increase the winning probability of AT or CZ, such as making the such items higher. Furthermore, the higher the number of low-priced prizes, the higher the probability of winning a higher-ranking CZ that is easier to win an AT than other CZs, or the higher-ranking AT that is more advantageous than other ATs (the number of continuous games is large). Etc.), such as increasing the probability of transition to a higher state, it may be a privilege to be one of the parameters for transitioning to a higher state.

In addition, as the above-mentioned privilege, it is easier to produce a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value, or a more reliable setting among the setting suggestion effects, in the case of a low prize, than in the case of a high prize. It is also possible to make it a privilege that the frequency and reliability of setting suggestions are high, such as making it easier for a cheaper prize to appear in the suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be displayable in the winning game of the slash role, or may be configured to be displayable on the end screen of the AT or the end screen of the bonus.

As mentioned above, various benefits can be considered as the benefits of the cheap prize when the slash role is won, and it is not limited to the points listed above, and each of the above benefits is as follows. It is also possible to combine with.

In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification example, when the slash combination is won, the effect display device S40 gives an ambiguous notification about the low prize, but instead of this, preferential treatment such as AT lottery is performed. It is also possible to give a notification clearly indicating the combination of symbols that can receive such benefits. For example, when the slash combination A shown in FIG. 110 is won, the left 1st (middle 1st) push order is used and the left reel M51 (middle reel M52) is used instead of the effect as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112. Notification to the effect that a part other than the low base frames 13 to 17 is pressed, in other words, the pressing order and the stop timing that can surely obtain the privilege to the player can be determined by the effect display device S40 or the like. It may be notified. Similarly, in the push order display device, the player may be instructed of the push order and the stop timing in which the privilege can be surely obtained. Regarding the notification by the effect display device S40, for example, in FIG. 91, in order to notify the above-mentioned "to the effect that a place other than the low base frames 13 to 17 is pressed", for example, in FIG. In addition to displaying a symbolic symbol such as No. 6 "bar", which is within this range and is relatively easy to see, on the effect display device S40, "Aim at the bar" is displayed. Notation may be used, and the mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the modification examples 1 and 3, during the precursory or continuous production, even if the slash role is won, the suggestion effect is not performed. It is also conceivable not to give instructions by the push order display device in order to manage the ratio. That is, the above-mentioned instruction-included accessory ratio is stored in a RAM or the like, and if the instruction-included accessory ratio is about to exceed a predetermined value (for example, 70%), even if the slash combination is won, it is pushed. The instruction display device S40 does not give the above-mentioned suggestion effect, or the push order display device does not give the instruction, while the effect display device S40 performs the suggestion effect. Or something like that. By doing so, it is also possible to manage the designated accessory ratio so as to be a desired value.

In addition, when the symbol related to 1 or 0 of the cheap prize of the slash role is set as the above-mentioned random item, and the AT lottery by the cheap prize is performed between the winning judgment and the payout process in the game in which the slash role is won. In the next game, a rare role such as the above-mentioned strong cherry may be displayed by a so-called pseudo game. That is, if the AT lottery by the cheap prize is performed in the game in which the slash role is won, the flag of the pseudo game is set, and if the AT lottery by the cheap prize is not performed (in other words, it is high). (If an AT lottery is held by winning a prize), do not flag the pseudo game. If the pseudo-game flag is set when the start lever D50 of the next game is pressed, the main control board M sets a freeze for a predetermined time, and all reels are set during this freeze. By performing a rotation effect (pseudo-rotation) to rotate the reel, it looks as if the reel is rotating by pressing the start lever D50 (in other words, two games are executed in one game). Make it look like). In this state, for example, when the left stop button D41 is pressed (when the main control board M receives a signal that the left stop button D41 is pressed), the main control board M has a rotation effect in which the left reel is stopped. By performing (pseudo-stop), it appears as if the left reel has stopped by pressing the left stop button D41. Further, when the left stop button D41 is pressed, according to the actual reel stop control, for example, when displaying the cherry in a pseudo game, the cherry is placed on the effective line as long as the cherry can be pulled in. Pseudo-stop and display the missing eyes of the cherry if it is out of the pull-in range. After that, by pressing the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are pseudo-stopped according to the actual reel stop control, thereby displaying the number of cherries and the number of missing cherries. After that, when a certain period of time elapses or the upper limit of the predetermined time for maintaining the freeze is reached, the reels that have been pseudo-stopped are randomly started to indicate to the player that the game is a pseudo-game, and then the above-mentioned description is performed. It becomes a constant speed rotation, and normal games can be executed. In order to show the player that the game is a pseudo game, the game indicates that the game is a pseudo game, such as displaying "FREE PLAY" on the effect display device S40 while the pseudo game is being performed. You may notify the person. Further, in the above-mentioned pseudo stop, the left stop button D41 is pressed at a timing separated by 6 frames or more at which the above-mentioned "cherry" of the left reel M51 cannot be pulled in without following the actual reel control. However, you may slip 6 or more frames and make a pseudo stop on the effective line.

Here, when the modification for performing the pseudo stop is applied to the cherry-type push slash combination or the push order slash combination of the change example 3, for example, the following may be applied. That is, the weak cherry rolls of the cherry-type push slash role, the strong cherry rolls, the middle cherry rolls, the weak chance rolls of the push order slash role, and the strong chance rolls. Instead of the above-mentioned disparity, for example, in the case where the push slash role (strong che) is won, even if a cheap prize of Sura 1 is made in this game, the result will be disparity. However, the above-mentioned pseudo-game flag is set. Then, when the start lever S50 of the next game is pressed, the above-mentioned pseudo game is started, and by pressing the reels so as to be a strong cherry, each reel is pseudo-stopped so as to be a strong cherry. do. In this way, in the cherry-type push slash role and the push order-type slash role, the outcomes corresponding to the respective cheap prizes may be displayed in a pseudo manner in the pseudo game of the next game.

In this way, in the next game in which the slash role is won, the result of the rare role is displayed in a pseudo manner in the pseudo game, and the player wins the rare role (actually, a cheap prize for the slash role). As a combination of symbols related to the cheap prize of the slash role, it is not necessary to make it a rare role (a result that can be clearly recognized as a rare role), and it is possible to make it an appropriate disparity. can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the trouble of creating a reel arrangement and creating a symbol combination for each condition device.

In the above example, in the pseudo game, the pseudo game is performed when the slash role is won and the prize is cheap, but instead of this, the slash role is won and the prize is cheap, and then the AT lottery is performed. Pseudo-games are generated only when the role is won, or the probability of executing the pseudo-games is higher for rare roles with higher expectations for AT lottery (for example, when the slash role is won and a lower prize is won, the pseudo-games are played. The execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute, but it can be realized because the probability of winning the above execution lottery is higher than that of the push slash role (weak che) and the push slash role (strong che).) You may try to do it. In this case, the AT is won when the symbol combination related to the rare role is displayed in the pseudo game rather than when the symbol combination related to the rare role is displayed in the normal game which is a non-pseudo game. You can increase the expectation that you are doing it, and the fun of the game will improve.

In addition, the pseudo game was the next game in which the slash role was won, but it is not limited to this, and it may be two games or three games later, in short, any of the following games after the slash role is won. There is no particular limitation as long as it is the timing. In this case, in particular, in the next game of the slash role, when a freeze for a pseudo game and a freeze due to a middle cherry or the like occur at the same time, such as when a winning combination with a freeze such as a middle cherry is won, AT Priority is given to the freeze of the one with higher advantage (for example, freeze of middle cherry etc.) such as high lottery probability, and the one with lower priority (for example, freeze by slash role) is extinguished, or It is also possible to execute it after the next game in which the high priority freeze is executed.

In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each of the modified examples 1 to 4, for convenience of explanation, each aspect of the slash combination is used, such as the push slash combination 1 of the second embodiment and the push slash combination 2 of the modification 1. Although described separately, for these various slash combinations, for example, the second embodiment is such that the slash combination 3 of the modification 2 and the cherry-type slash combination or the push order slash combination of the modification 3 are combined. , Items described in each of the modified examples 1 to 4 and other modified examples can be combined as appropriate.

<<< Third Embodiment >>>
Next, the third embodiment will be described, but in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those in the above-described embodiment. Further, the third embodiment is based on the above-described embodiment, and various contents described in the second embodiment can be applied to the third embodiment except for the differences from the above-mentioned embodiment. Is. It should be noted that this third embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, for example, a reel arrangement according to another embodiment, a type of winning combination (combination configuration), and a reel arrangement according to the third embodiment. It goes without saying that the reels and condition devices can be applied to other embodiments. 119 is a list of reel arrangements in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment, and FIGS. 120 to 129 are a list of symbol combinations in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment, FIGS. 130 to 129. FIG. 133 is a list of condition devices in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment, FIG. 134 is a list of bonus specifications in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 135 is a third. It is a list of the main gaming states controlled by the main control board M in the spinning machine according to the embodiment, and FIGS. 136 to 142 are internal lottery data in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. .. FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining a push order slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

The reel arrangement of the spinning machine in the third embodiment is as shown in FIG. 119, and has a specification composed of 20 frames from No. 0 to No. 19. In FIG. 119, similarly to FIGS. 86 and 91 described above, the first cylinder means the left reel M51, the second cylinder means the middle reel M52, and the third cylinder means the third cylinder. It means the right reel M53 (also in FIG. 119, the above-mentioned reference numerals M51 to 53 are omitted). Although not shown, in the third embodiment, the effective line is one straight line in the middle stage of "left reel M51 middle stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 middle stage".

Further, the symbol combinations for each specified number of the rotating drum type gaming machines in the third embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 120 to 129. Further, although the type 1 BB of the third embodiment is provided with three types BB-A to C, it may be a singular number such as only one type BB-A, or a plurality of types other than the three. Kinds may be provided. As described above, the "specified number" in FIGS. 120 to 129 is the so-called number of bets, and "3" and "2" in the "specified number and gaming state" column are bets of 3 (3), respectively. It means a game with a specified number of 3 cards) and a game with a 2-card bet (a specified number of 2 cards). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (when the type 1 BB is not activated), the game can be executed by betting two or three cards.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the third embodiment, the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B can be won when the game is played with a three-card bet, but the game is played with a two-card bet. The type 1 BB-C is configured so that it will not be won if the game is played with a 3-card bet, but it can be won if the game is played with a 2-card bet. There is.

The condition device of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the third embodiment is as shown in FIGS. 130 to 133. The "components" in FIGS. 130 to 133 are the same as the "components" shown in FIGS. 103 and the like, and the "non-internal inside" means a state in which the types BB-A to C are non-internal. (A state in which the condition devices of the first type BB-A to C are not operating) is shown, and "when the condition devices of the first type BB-A to C are operating" means that any one of the first type BB-A to C is inside. A state (a state in which any of the condition devices of Class 1 BB-A to C is operating) is shown. In addition, the descriptions in these "non-internal middle" and "type 1 BB-A to C condition device operating" columns also indicate the pull-in priority and pull-in rate according to the batting order, and are also in parentheses in each column. In this way, in the game with a 2-card bet (specified number of 2 cards) and the game with a 3-card bet (specified number of 3 cards), the pull-in priority and the pull-in rate according to the batting order and the stop operation timing are common (stop control is common). It has become).

This will be described below by taking the "winning-A1 condition device" of No. 4 of "winning / replay" in FIG. 130 as an example. First, "123" and the like of "non-internal middle" are synonymous with "123" of the above-mentioned "pushing order bell 123" (that is, as described above, "1" is the left stop button D41, "2". "" Indicates the middle stop button D42, "3" indicates the right stop button D43, and the sequence of these numbers means that the stop buttons indicated by the numbers are pressed in that order.) Left, middle, right press. It means to stop the reels in order. Further, "2---" indicates the 1st among the above. Similarly, "3---" indicates the above-mentioned right 1st, and although it is described in another column, "1---" indicates the left 1s. Further, "1/1", "1/2", and "1/4" indicate the respective winning rates. For example, "123: 1/1 prize 01" means that when the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, the symbol combination related to prize 01 wins 100% (pull-in rate 100%). , "132: 1/2 winning 78, 79, 82, 83" means that when the reels are stopped in the order of left, right, middle, the symbol combination related to any of winning 78, 79, 82, 83 is It means winning at a winning rate of 1/2. In addition, the winning rate is as described above, and in this case, the winning order is left, right, and middle, and when the stop operation is performed at a random timing, the winning is 78, 79, 82, It is shown that the symbol combination according to any of 83 is stopped and displayed. In addition, "2---: 1/4 prize 35" means that when the reel is stopped in the middle 1st, the symbol combination related to the prize 35 wins at a 1/4 prize rate, and "3-: -: "Winning 48 at 1/4" means that when the reel is stopped at the 1st right, the symbol combination related to winning 48 wins at a winning rate of 1/4. Further, in the third embodiment, "non-internal inside" at the time of betting on two cards, "non-internal inside" at the time of betting on three cards, "when the type 1 BB-A to C condition device is operating" at the time of betting on two cards, 3 The stop control for each of the "type 1 BB-A to C condition devices is operating" at the time of betting is common (the same stop control is taken regardless of whether it is inside or outside).

Further, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the lottery mode relating to the AT may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop mode), and the third embodiment has a slash function. In the embodiment, a push order slash combination (a slash combination that determines whether or not the slash effective symbol combination is stopped depending on the push order regardless of the stop operation timing) is applied as the slash combination. In addition, a slash is valid for a symbol combination that can give the player a privilege different from that of the game medium (a symbol combination that gives preferential treatment to the lottery related to AT, a symbol combination that shortens the number of games until the AT starts, etc.). It is called a design combination.

As shown in FIG. 134, the type 1 BB is a combination of the “blank B / blank B / blank A” symbol combination type BB-A and the “blank B / blank A / blank A” symbol combination. Three types of type 1 BB-B and type 1 BB-C, which is a combination of "blank B, blank B, and mango", are provided (hereinafter, type 1 BB-A to C are summarized and simply, Sometimes referred to as "Class 1 BB"). Both Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B can be won or won only by betting 3 cards, and ends when RB-A operates continuously and wins more than 22 game medals. .. In addition, Type 1 BB-C can be won or won only by betting two cards, and ends when RB-B operates continuously and, for example, obtains more than one game medal.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transition of RT controlled by the main control board M is as shown in FIG. 135. As shown in FIG. 135, none of the first-class BBs have been won (not carried over), the non-RT (sometimes referred to as non-internal), the first-class BB-A or the first-class BB-B has been won. RT1, type 1 in the state inside the type 1 BB-A or the state inside the type 1 BB-B (the state in which the type 1 BB-A condition device is operating or the type 1 BB-B condition device is operating) that has been carried over. RT2 in the state inside the type 1 BB-C (the state in which the type 1 BB-C condition device is operating) in which the BB-C is elected and carried over, and in these RT1 and RT2, it becomes one of the type 1 BB. Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, Type 1 BB-C (when Type 1 BB-A is operating, Type 1 BB-A is operating, Type 1 BB-B) that has been transferred by displaying the relevant symbol combination During operation RB-A is operating, Type 1 BB-C is operating, RB-B is operating) (Hereafter, these are collectively referred to as "Type 1 BB operating" as shown in FIG. 135. There are four states (sometimes referred to).

It should be noted that the inside of the type 1 BB and the inside of the type 1 BB-B, which are inside the type 1 BB that can be won by betting three cards, may be referred to as the inside of the type 1 BB with a three-card bet. Further, the inside of the type 1 BB-C, which is inside the type 1 BB that can be won by betting two cards, may be referred to as the inside of the type 1 BB betting. In addition, the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B, which are the times when the type 1 BB that can be won by betting three cards, may be referred to as being bet three cards. Further, the type 1 BB-C during the operation of the type 1 BB that can be won by the two-card bet may be referred to as the two-card bet BB.

That is, in the third embodiment, generally, two three-card bets BB and two-card bets (the specified number is 3), which are the first type BB-A and B, which are won and won only by the 3-card bet (the specified number is 3). It has one 2-card bet BB called 1 type BB-C that wins and wins only with 2 cards), and when the 3-card bet BB wins, it shifts from non-RT to RT1 (stays) and bets 2 cards. If the BB wins, it shifts from non-RT to RT2, and if either the 2-card bet BB or the 3-card bet BB wins, it shifts from RT2 or RT3 when the type 1 BB is activated, and either the 2-card bet BB or the 3-card bet BB When the gambling is completed, it shifts to non-RT from the time of type 1 BB operation. In the third embodiment, both the 2-card bet BB and the 3-card bet BB are limited to the 3-card bet during the bonus (when the type 1 BB is activated). However, during the bonus, the game may be configured to be playable with a one-card bet and a two-card bet.

Further, in the third embodiment, the two-card bet BB (Type 1 BB-C) is won by the two-card bet, and the two-card bet BB (Type 1 BB-C) is carried over to the inside of the two-card bet BB. You will stay in the middle (RT2), but the state where you play a game with a 3-card bet (game method) inside this 2-card bet BB is the most advantageous state (game method), and these 2 cards It is a specification that the game with three bets inside the bet BB is normal. That is, the expected medal acquisition value in the game performed by the three-card bet inside the two-card bet BB is set higher than the medal acquisition expected value in the two-card bet BB and the three-card bet BB. Further, in the third embodiment, the processing related to AT is executed only in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, and in other states (for example, the 2-card bet or 3-card bet game in RT1). ) Is a specification that does not execute the processing related to AT. In the two-card betting game, the process related to AT (AT lottery, etc.) is not executed regardless of the game state or the like. As described above, in the third embodiment, it is possible to play a game with a plurality of specified numbers such as a two-card bet and a three-card bet, and a three-card bet game inside the two-card bet BB is normal. Hereinafter, such a specification may be simply referred to as a "input number method". Further, thereafter, unless otherwise specified, the description will be made on the premise that the game is played with a three-card bet. In addition, even in a game state other than inside the two-card bet BB, the process related to AT may be executed in the three-card bet game.

Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is more advantageous to proceed with the game while winning medals by AT than to win a two-card bet BB or a three-card bet BB and obtain a medal by a bonus. 2, 2 bets It is normal to play a game with 3 bets inside the BB. As described above, this 2-card bet BB is a specification that can be won only by 2-card bet, so as long as the 3-card bet game is performed while the 2-card bet BB is inside, the 2-card bet BB wins. Nothing is done, and the inside of the two-card bet BB is maintained as it is. Further, if the setting is changed while the two-card bet BB is inside, this state is not cleared and the state inside the two-card bet BB (RT2 state) is maintained. On the other hand, during the 2-card bet BB (when the 1st class BB-C is operating, the RB-B is operating), and inside the 3-card betting BB (the 1st class BB-A condition device is operating or the 1st class BB-B condition device is operating). When the setting is changed during RT1 and 3 betting BB (when Type 1 BB is operating), this state (state related to bonus etc.) is cleared and it becomes non-RT. Note that this configuration is just an example, and it may be configured to be non-RT when the setting is changed while the two-card bet BB is inside (type 1 BB-C operation). When RB-B is operating), inside the 3-card bet BB (type 1 BB-A condition device is operating or type 1 BB-B condition device is operating) RT1, 3-card bet BB (when type 1 BB is operating) When the setting is changed in, the RT state before the setting change may be maintained. The state of the type 1 BB corresponding to the non-RT, RT1, and RT2 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be shifted to RT1 inside the 2-card bet BB, or inside the 3-card bet BB. The relationship between the state of type 1 BB and one of the RT states can be appropriately set according to the specifications, such as shifting to RT2.

In the third embodiment, the above-mentioned "insertion number method" is applied, but instead of this, only a 3-card bet BB is prepared, and the RT inside the 3-card bet BB is the most advantageous state. It is also possible to apply the "single input number method" having the specifications such as. Specifically, when the player wins the 3-card bet BB in the non-RT (normal time) and becomes inside, the RT shifts to the RT inside the 3-card bet BB. In this RT inside the 3-card bet BB, by frequently winning small wins and replays, the above-mentioned small win priority control prevents the 3-card bet BB from winning, and the RT inside the 3-card bet BB. You may continue to stay in. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the three-card bet BB may be configured to win a prize even inside the three-card bet BB. Specifically, in the RT inside the 3-card bet BB, a loss occurs with a very small probability (for example, 4/65536, etc.), and only when a specific stop operation is performed in the game in which the loss occurs. A 3-card bet BB may be allowed to win a prize, or a small role (PB ≠ 1 small role) that is missed with a very small probability (for example, 4/65536, etc.) in the RT inside the 3-card bet BB. ), And the three-card bet BB may be awarded only when a specific stop operation is performed in the game in which the small winning combination is won. Further, in the game in which the 3-card bet BB is won, the 3-card bet BB may be able to win only when the stop button is operated in such a manner that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB can be stopped.

Non-RT, RT1, RT2, 1 type BB is operating in these 3 bets (in FIG. 138 etc., 1 type BB-A is operating RB-A is operating, 1 type BB-B is operating RB-A is operating The number of placements of each condition device (bonus condition device, winning / replay) in Type 1 BB-C operation (corresponding to RB-B operation during operation) is as shown in FIGS. 136 to 141. The whole (random number denominator) is 65536. In these FIGS. 136 to 141, the numbers such as "1" in the left column such as "non-RT (normal time)" indicating the RT state are merely numbers for identification, and "1" is a number when betting three cards. Non-RT, "3" is RT1 at the time of 3-card bet (Type 1 BB-A condition device and Type 1 BB-B condition device are in operation. In other words, 3-card bet inside BB with 3-card bet (A state of playing a game), "5" is RT2 at the time of betting 3 cards (type 1 BB-C condition device is operating), and "7" and "8" are during betting 3 cards BB (type 1 BB-A and), respectively. It corresponds to each of the two-card betting BB (when the type 1 BB-C is operating and the RB-B is operating) when the type 1 BB-B is operating and the RB-A is operating. It should be noted that FIGS. 140 and 141 show the total value when the number of each condition device according to FIGS. 136 to 139 is grouped into a large frame such as type 1 BB, replay, winning (small winning combination), and loss.

Further, the number of placements of each condition device in non-RT, RT1 and RT2 in a two-card bet is as shown in FIG. 142, and the total number of placements (random number denominator) is 65536. In FIG. 142, the numbers such as "2" in the left column such as "non-RT (normal time)" indicating the RT state are also numbers for simply identifying as described above, and "2" is two sheets. Non-RT at the time of betting, "4" is RT1 at the time of betting 2 cards (Type 1 BB-A condition device is operating or Type 1 BB-B condition device is operating. In other words, 2 inside the 3-card bet BB. (A state in which a game is played with a single bet), "6" is RT2 at the time of a double bet (Type 1 BB-C condition device is operating. In other words, a two-card bet game is performed inside the two-card bet BB. It corresponds to each state).

In these FIGS. 136 to 142, "○" and "×" in the respective columns of "lottery" and "advantageous section transition" indicate whether or not they are subject to the processing. "○" in the "lottery" column is a bonus condition device or a condition device such as "replay-A" listed in "winning / replay" (sometimes simply called "role"). It indicates that it is a lottery target, and "x" indicates that it is not a lottery target. Further, "R1" to "R6" are set values, indicating that they are set 1 to set 6, respectively, and the values described in these columns are the random numbers corresponding to the respective combinations (conditional devices). (Random number numerator of the above 65536 which is a random number denominator). Furthermore, "○" in the "advantageous section" column indicates that the winning combination can be transferred to the advantageous section (the advantageous section transition lottery is executed), and "x" indicates that the winning combination is transferred to the advantageous section. It shows that it does not trigger the transition of (the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed).

This advantageous section can be shifted to the advantageous section in the game of three bets, and is not shifted to the advantageous section in the game of two bets. In other words, in the three-card betting game, the processing related to AT can be executed, while in the two-card betting game, the processing related to AT cannot be executed. However, after shifting to the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, which is the end condition of the advantageous section, may be updated, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be updated, regardless of whether the game is a three-card bet game or a two-card bet game. The difference in the number of balls to be played is updated, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is configured to end regardless of whether the game is a 3-card bet game or a 2-card bet game. ing. The state in which the AT can be executed is not limited to the above example, and the AT can be executed even with, for example, a 3-card bet inside the 3-card bet BB or a 2-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB. Needless to say, it can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the rotating body type gaming machine.

In the third embodiment, if the game is played with two bets as described above, the AT cannot be executed because the game does not shift to the advantageous section (it cannot shift to the AT state), and the game at the AT is the main axis. In the case of adopting the above-mentioned specifications, for example, when a two-card betting game is played, the effect display device S40 has an effect indicating that "two-card betting game is in progress" instead of the effect that has been performed up to that point. (For example, the message "Two-card betting game in progress" may be displayed as it is. At the same time, an effect of notifying that the two-card betting game is in progress may be performed by voice or the like.) You may want the player to confirm that you are playing the game. At this time, a lamp unit such as the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 (if a light source unit or the like for illuminating the lower panel D140 is provided, of course, this is also included, and a predetermined lighting pattern is used in the rotating cylinder type game. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a light emitting body that can be notified to the player by (light emitting pattern) or the like. It is also possible to make the lamp unit different from each other during the game, so that the player can confirm that the game is being played with a two-card bet. Further, when the type 1 BB is operating, a display such as "waiting for return" may be displayed to indicate that the AT is returning to the inside of the two-card bet BB that can be executed. ..

<Pushing order slash role>
Next, the push order slash combination in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, as a push order slash combination (conditional device) in which the symbol combination to be won differs depending on the push order, a prize-B1 condition device to a prize-B12 condition device, a prize-C1 to a prize-C12 condition device Is provided. Hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "pushing order slash combination", and the winning-B1 conditional device to the winning-B12 conditional device are referred to as slash combinations B1 to B12, respectively, and the winning-C1 conditional device to the winning-C12 conditional device are referred to. They may also be referred to as slash combinations C1 to C12, respectively. Here, FIG. 143 shows a list summarizing these push order slash combinations. The "high" in FIG. 143 is the same as the "high" described in the second embodiment, and the "cheap" is the same as the "one spill" described in the second embodiment. That is, "high" is a symbol combination that has a relatively large number of payouts, such as a symbol combination related to a 15-card combination, and is a symbol combination that does not execute AT-related processing such as an AT lottery (a symbol combination that is not a slash effective symbol combination). Yes, "cheap" is a symbol combination that has a relatively small number of payouts, such as a symbol combination related to a single combination, and is a symbol combination that does not execute AT-related processing such as AT lottery (a symbol combination that is not a slash effective symbol combination). There is (hereinafter, "cheap" may be referred to as "slash invalid symbol combination"). The number of payouts related to "cheap" may be configured to be less than the specified number of games in which "cheap" is stopped. Further, "Sura B" is a winning combination in which the symbol combinations (slash effective symbol combinations) capable of executing AT-related processing such as AT lottery are displayed among the single combination in the slash combinations B1 to B12. 17 to 18, 78 to 85 are shown, and "slash C" displays a symbol combination (slash effective symbol combination) capable of executing processing related to AT such as AT lottery among the single combination in the slash combination C1 to C12. A combination of symbols such as "Sura B" and "Sura C" that can execute processing related to AT in the slash role is "Sura B" and "Sura C". Slash effective symbol combination "). In addition, the number of payouts related to the slash effective symbol combination may be configured to be less than the specified number of games (games in which the slash combination is won) in which the slash effective symbol combination is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 143, among the push order slash combinations, the slash combination B1 is "high" in the left middle right, "slash B" which is a slash effective symbol combination in the middle 1st, and "sura B" in other than the left middle right and the middle 1st. "Cheap" is assigned. That is, in the slash combination B1, when the stop button is pressed in the operation order of the middle 1st, the slash effective symbol combination (for example, "pine A, mango, pine A" which is a symbol combination related to the winning 17 in a straight line on the middle line "" Etc. are stopped) is displayed, and the AT-related processing such as the AT lottery is executed at any timing between the winning determination and the payout processing. Further, the assignments of "high", "cheap", and "sla B" corresponding to the push order in the slash combinations B2 to B12 are as shown in FIG. 143.

Of the push order slash roles, the slash role C1 is assigned "high" in the left 1st, "slash C" which is a slash effective symbol combination in the middle 1st, and "cheap" in the right 1st, and the slash role B1. There are more "higher" push orders than B12. Also in this slash combination C1, when the stop button is pressed in the operation order of the middle 1st, a slash effective symbol combination (for example, "pine B, mango, pine A" which is a symbol combination related to the winning 18 in a straight line on the middle line, etc. Is stopped) is displayed, and processing related to AT such as AT lottery is executed at any timing between the winning determination and the payout processing. Further, the assignments of "high", "cheap", and "sla C" corresponding to the push order in the slash combination C2 to C12 are as shown in FIG. 143.

Here, in the third embodiment, the AT such as the AT lottery is triggered by the display of the slash effective symbol combination in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game of the three-card bet inside the two-card bet BB. However, instead of this, assuming that the slash effective symbol combination is PB = 1, the push order in which this slash effective symbol combination is displayed (for example, in the slash combination B1, the middle left). In the right push order, the slash valid symbol combination is displayed with PB = 1), and the process related to AT such as AT lottery may be executed. In this case, processing related to AT such as AT lottery shall be executed at any timing from the predetermined timing after releasing the last stop button that stopped the slash valid symbol combination to the end of the payout process. Will be.

The number of game medals related to "high", "sla B" / "sla C" (combination of effective slash symbols), and the number of game medals related to "cheap" are "sla B" as in the second embodiment. -If the number of game medals related to "Sura C" and "cheap" (1 in this example) is smaller than the number of game medals related to "high" (15 in this example), it can be set as appropriate. It is desirable that "Sura B", "Sura C" and "Cheap" are less than the maximum specified number (for example, 3 sheets), and "High" is more than the maximum specified number. If there is one "cheap", "sla B" and "sla C" are 0, and if there are two "cheap", "sla B" and "sla C" are one. In this way, by reducing the number of game medals related to "Sura B" and "Sura C" to the number of game medals related to "cheap", the expected value of winning only the number of game medals paid out is May make "Sura B" and "Sura C" the lowest. Also, instead of reducing the number of game medals related to "Sura B" to the number of game medals related to "Sura C", "Sura B" has a higher AT winning probability than "Sura C". , The number of game medals related to "Sura B" and "Sura C" is different from each other, and the smaller number of "Sura B" is more in the processing related to AT than the larger number of "Sura C". You may try to perform advantageous processing.

In the slash combination B1 to B12 and the slash combination C1 to C12, when the push order corresponding to "high" is performed, the acquisition probability of the 15-card combination is 1/1 (100%), and "sla B". Or, if the push order corresponding to "Sura C" is performed, or if the push order corresponding to "cheap" is performed, the acquisition probability of the 1-card combination is 1/1, but the 2-card bet BB If a symbol combination related to "high" or a symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed in an advantageous section inside and in a non-AT state (during non-AT), the AT lottery is not performed and "Sura B" is displayed. Or, when the symbol combination related to "Sura C" is displayed, the AT lottery is performed. That is, in the push order slash combination of the third embodiment, in the case of "high", the number of game medals that can be obtained is larger than that of "Sura B" and "Sura C", but the AT lottery is not performed. On the other hand, in the case of "Sura B" and "Sura C", although the number of game medals that can be obtained is smaller than that of "High", the privilege of performing AT-related processing such as AT lottery is given. There is.

In the third embodiment, when any of the push order slash combinations is won in the non-AT state in the advantageous section and in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, the effect display device S40 or FIG. 37 is used. By the push order display device D270 shown, the push order in which the slash effective symbol combination can win is always instructed (notified). As the instruction mode by the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270, the instruction modes 1 to 6 described in the above-described embodiment can be applied. It should be noted that executing an instruction on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as executing an AT, executing a navigation, executing a notification game, or the like.

As described above, the push-order slash combination of the third embodiment is valid when any of the push-order slash combinations is established in the non-AT state in the advantageous section and in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB. The push order in which the symbol combination is displayed is notified (instructed), and when the stop operation is performed according to the instruction, the slash valid symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, as long as the notified push order is followed. There is no situation where the slash valid symbol combination is not displayed (missing), and you can receive the privilege due to the fact that the slash valid symbol combination is displayed without fail. In addition, even if the player mistakenly performs a push order different from the notified push order, either the 15-card combination or the 1-card combination can always be obtained. Relief can be attempted.

Here, in the third embodiment, as described above, when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed in the game of three-card betting in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and inside the two-card betting BB, the slash valid symbol combination is displayed. While the processing related to AT is executed, the processing related to AT is not executed in the game with two bets, but in the push order slash role, even if the game is bet with two cards, three cards are executed. Even if it is a betting game, it will be won and the slash valid symbol combination can be displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, in the non-RT of the 3-card bet, in RT1 (inside the 3-card bet BB) and RT2 (inside the 2-card bet BB), the push order slash is used. A certain winning-B1 conditional device-winning-B12 conditional device (slash combination B1 to B12) and winning-C1 to winning-C12 conditional device (slash combination C1 to C12) are each assigned a number and can be won. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142, during non-RT of two-card bet, RT1 (inside three-card bet BB) and RT2 (inside two-card bet BB) also win a prize as a push order slash. -B1 conditional device-winning-B12 conditional device (slash combination B1 to B12), winning-C1 to winning-C12 conditional device (slash combination C1 to C12) are assigned a number and can be won. ing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the stop control when these push order slash combinations are won is non-RT, regardless of whether the game is a two-card bet game or a three-card bet game. When the seed BB-A to C condition devices are activated (in other words, inside the two-card bet BB and inside the three-card bet BB), the same stop control is performed. That is, as summarized in FIG. 143, for example, in any of the non-RT, RT1, and RT2 situations, when the slash combination B1 is won, the slash effective symbol combination (“slash effective symbol combination” is performed by pushing the middle 1st. B ") is displayed.

In this way, the player mistakenly makes two cards in the slotted gaming machine of the input number system, in which two bets and three bets are possible, and the game of three bets inside the two bets BB is the normal state. If you play a game with a different game method, such as playing a game with a bet, even if one of the push order slash roles is won, one of the push orders will be played with a three-card bet. It is possible to display the same slash valid symbol combination as when the slash combination is won. Also, during non-RT of 2-card bet, RT1 (inside 3-card bet BB), RT2 (inside 2-card bet BB), during non-RT of 3-card bet, RT1 (inside 3-card bet BB), RT2 (inside 3-card bet BB) In any game state (inside the two-card bet BB), the push order slash role can be won and the slash effective symbol combination can be displayed. There is no such thing, and the game can be played smoothly.

In this example, the same push order slash combination is provided in every game state, and the winning probability and stop control of this push order slash combination are the same. Different push order slash combinations are provided, or the winning probability of the push order slash combination is different from each other (specifically, RT1 has a higher winning probability of the push order slash combination than non-RT, or The two-card betting game has a lower winning probability of the push order slash role than the three-card bet game), and the stop control of the push order slash role is different from each other (specifically, the same push order). At the time of winning the slash combination, the slash effective symbol combination may be displayed in the middle 1st in the two-card bet, and the slash effective symbol combination may be displayed in the left 1st in the three-card bet). In short, it suffices if the slash effective symbol combination can be displayed in any gaming state.

In the above example, in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, if any of the push order slash combinations is won, the slash effective symbol combination can be won by the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270. The push order was always instructed (notified), but it is not limited to this, for example, when the transition to the AT state is confirmed and the state is in preparation for the transition to the AT state, or Processing related to AT even if there is little need to perform processing related to AT (a situation where there is no need), such as in a penalty state where processing related to AT cannot be performed, or even if a slash valid symbol combination is displayed. In a situation where the above cannot be performed, the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270 may not notify the push order in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. In this case, even if the push order slash combination is won, the notification itself may not be performed by the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270, or the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed. It is also possible to notify the push order in which symbol combinations other than the slash-effective symbol combination are displayed, such as notifying the push order.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section and in the AT state (during AT), since it is already in the AT state and it is not necessary to perform processing such as AT lottery by combining slash-effective symbols, the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270 can be used. "High" indicates the push order in which the prize can be won. That is, since the AT lottery is not executed, the push order in which the number of game medals to be paid out is the largest is instructed. Further, in the case of the non-advantageous section, since the instruction regarding the push order cannot be given, even if any of the push order slash combinations is won in the non-advantageous section, the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270 is used. The notification is not performed (the player may give a suggestion that the push order can be recognized in the effect display device S40). In addition, even in the advantageous section and in the AT state, when any of the push order slash combinations is won, the push order display device D270 shown in the effect display device S40 and FIG. 37 displays the slash effective symbol combination. You may always specify the order, and if the slash symbol is displayed according to this push order, for example, an AT additional lottery (sometimes referred to as an additional AT game number lottery) or an additional special zone It is also possible to perform processing related to AT, such as performing a transition lottery to (sometimes referred to as an additional specialization state of AT).

In the third embodiment, the player is given a privilege of performing AT-related processing such as an AT lottery when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. However, as this privilege, the above-mentioned implementation is performed. Needless to say, the benefits described in the form and examples of changes thereof are not particularly limited as long as the benefits are advantageous to the player in addition to the processing related to AT. As another privilege, for example, when a slash valid symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined point (a predetermined number of points or a number of points determined by lottery) is given (main control board). As the processing on the M side, the counter value of a predetermined counter may be added (or subtracted). The use of this predetermined point is, for example, to activate AT (give the player the right to shift to the AT state) when the predetermined point reaches the predetermined value, or to generate CZ. Or, the number of games until advantageous processing related to AT is performed using predetermined points, such as entering a high-accuracy state of AT, can be shortened. In addition, a counter is provided to count only the number of times the slash valid symbol combination is displayed (in other words, the counter value is updated in "Sura B" and "Sura C", but other than that, "High" and "Low". It can be said that the counter value is not updated, and it can be said that the counter value is updated.) When the value of this counter reaches a predetermined value, AT is activated. Advantageous processing related to the AT may be performed, such as the occurrence of CZ or the entry into a highly accurate state of the AT.

Further, as an example of using a predetermined point, in a game in which a predetermined slash role is won in a three-card bet game in a predetermined game state (for example, inside a two-card bet BB in an advantageous section and a non-AT state). , A predetermined point may be given even when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed, when "cheap" is stopped and displayed, or when "high" is stopped and displayed. In this configuration, more predetermined points (expected value) may be given when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed than when "cheap" is stopped and displayed, or the slash may be given. When the effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the predetermined points (expected value) to be given may be larger than when "high" is stopped and displayed.

<< Change example 1 from the third embodiment >>
Next, a change example 1 from the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating stop control for each state at the time of winning the push order slash combination in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the stop control of the slash combination in the two-card bet BB and the stop control of the slash combination in the two-card bet BB are the same, but in the present modification 1, these stop controls are the same. The main differences are that they differ from each other. In addition, also in this modification example 1, the above-mentioned input number method is applied, and it is possible to execute the processing related to AT only in the game of three bets in the two bets BB, and inside the two bets BB. It is a specification that the game with three bets is normal.

Hereinafter, modification 1 from the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144, but the slash combination B1 to B12 are all the same stop control, and the slash combination C1 to C12 are all the same stop control. Therefore, the slash combination B1 to B12 will be described by taking the slash combination B1 as an example, and the slash combination C1 to C12 will be described by using the slash combination C1 as an example, and the description of the other slash combination will be omitted. The same applies to the subsequent changes, and as an example of subsequent changes, only the slash combination B1 may be described, and the description of other slash combinations may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, the slash combination B1 becomes "higher" by 1/1 in the left middle right push order in the three-card bet game inside the two-card bet BB, as in the third embodiment. In the left and right middle push order, 1/1 is "cheap", in the middle 1st push order, 1/1 is "slash B", which is a slash effective symbol combination, and in the right 1st push order, it is "cheap". In other words, in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB, in the game when the slash combination B1 is won, the number-priority control or the number-priority control according to the stop operation is performed by the reel control means. When the stop switch is pressed in the order of left, middle, and right, the number priority control is applied to stop the symbol combination related to "high", and when the stop switch is pressed in the middle 1st pressing order, the number priority control is performed. By applying, the slash effective symbol combination ("Sura B") is stopped, and when the stop switch is pressed in the left middle right push order or the right 1st push order, the number priority control is applied and the slash. Invalid symbol combinations ("cheap") are now stopped.

On the other hand, the slash role B1 is 1/1 in any push order in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB, which is "high". In other words, if the slash role B1 is won in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB, the stop control by the reel control means wins the slash role B1 in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. Unlike the case where the number is pressed, the number priority control is applied regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination related to "high" is always stopped. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even when the same slash combination B1 is won, the three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB and the three-card betting game in the two-card betting BB are used. It is configured so that the stop control is different.

Further, also in the slash C1, the stop control is different between the three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB and the three-card betting game inside the three-card betting BB, as in the slash B1. In the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card bet BB, in the game when the slash role C1 is won, in the left 1st push order, the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped by the number priority control, and in the middle 1st push order. , The slash valid symbol combination (“sla C”) is stopped by the number priority control, and the slash invalid symbol combination (“cheap”) is stopped by the number priority control in the right 1st push order.

In this modification example 1, in the two-card betting game in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, for example, when the slash combination B1 is won, the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270 are used. The 1st push order is notified while the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. When the player operates the stop switch in the order of pressing the 1st in the notified state, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed, one game medal is acquired, and AT-related processing such as AT lottery is executed. ..

On the other hand, in the three-card betting game in the two-card betting BB where AT cannot be executed, for example, when the same slash combination B1 as in the above-mentioned two-card betting BB is won, " Because it is "high", the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270 do not notify (note that the effect display device S40 is used to produce an effect that the player is in BB, or that some small role has been won. Needless to say, it is possible to perform the production of. In this state, for example, when the player operates the stop switch in the same order of pressing the 1st as the slash role B1 inside the two-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed and the AT lottery is performed. Instead of executing processing related to AT such as, 15 game medals, which are more than the slash effective symbol combination, are acquired. Even if the slash role B1 is won in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB, the same navigation as in the case of winning the slash role B1 in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB is pressed. It may be configured to be executed by the forward display device D270 and / or the effect display device S40. With such a configuration, the player can proceed with the game without being confused by the transition of the game state.

That is, in the present modification 1, the same slash combination B1 is used in different gaming states such as inside a two-card bet BB in an advantageous section in which AT can be executed and in a non-AT state, and in a two-card bet BB in which AT cannot be executed. By making the stop control at the time of winning different from each other, even if the stop switch is operated in the same pressing order in each gaming state (in the above example, the pressing order of the middle 1st), it is in an advantageous section and non-AT. Two-card bet in the state In a normal game with a three-card bet inside the BB, where AT execution is desired (a situation in which the transition to the AT state is aimed at), a slash effective symbol combination is displayed. On the other hand, in an irregular situation where the player accidentally wins a two-card bet BB and is in a two-card bet BB where AT-related processing is impossible, instead of performing AT-related processing. In addition, the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed so that more game medals can be obtained. In addition, during the two-card betting BB, only the effect display device S40 is used to notify that the symbol combination related to "high" is won, and in order to liven up the game, it is related to "high" in any push order. Despite the fact that the symbol combination is displayed, for example, only the effect display device S40 (in other words, the push order display device D270 does not display the push order) displays the push order such as middle right and left. You may try to produce.

In this way, even when the same push order slash combination is won and the same push order is executed, by applying an appropriate stop control according to the game state, the AT is desired in the game state. While the slash-enabled symbol combination is displayed and the processing related to AT is executed, in the game state where AT is not executed, it is possible to display the symbol combination related to "higher" that can acquire more game medals. For this reason, a slash that displays a symbol combination related to "high" that does not perform processing related to AT in a game state in which AT is desired, or a slash that pays out less than "high" in a game state in which AT cannot be executed. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as displaying an effective symbol combination, and it is possible to display an appropriate symbol combination according to the gaming state.

In this modification 1, the push order slash combination has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push slash combination described in the second embodiment may be applied. Specifically, when the game is executed with a 3-card bet in the advantageous section and the non-AT state inside the 2-card bet BB, the same stop control as the slash combination A in FIG. 110 (slash effective symbol combination is stopped). Stop control (possible stop control) is applied, and when a game is executed with a 3-card bet in a state of a 2-card bet BB in an advantageous section and a non-AT state, the "high" is always stopped in any push order (stop control). In FIG. 110, the left 1st, the middle 1st, and the right 1st all have a “◯” for which the “high” 15-card combination wins regardless of the stop timing).

Further, in this modification example 1, the description is made on the premise of a specification in which a two-card bet BB is normally bet on three cards (a specification in which an AT or the like is executed without shifting the gaming state) as a spinning-type gaming machine. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as a spinning-type gaming machine, as a specified number, only three bets can be made in all gaming states, and the above-mentioned JACIN lottery type three-card bet BB is applied, and three in the three-card bet BB. While the game of betting is normal, it may be assumed that the AT is executed inside the RB during the betting BB. In this case, when the AT wins inside the 3-card bet BB (it is confirmed that the state shifts to the AT state), the 3-card bet BB that has carried over the winning is won, and the 3-card bet BB is generally used during the 3-card bet BB. It will be transferred and AT is being prepared. After that, when the RB is won during the general bet BB and the RB is moved to the inside of the RB during the 3-bet BB, the state of preparing for AT ends and the state inside the RB during the 3-bet BB ends. AT will be executed at. Assuming such specifications (such specifications may be referred to as AT type during bonus), AT may be executed in general during the 3-card bet BB in the state of preparing for AT. Since it has been confirmed (winning the AT lottery), it is of little significance to display the slash valid symbol combination when the slash role is won. Therefore, on the premise of such specifications, the stop control of the slash combination B1 inside the 3-card bet BB is the same as that inside the 2-card bet BB shown in FIG. 144, while AT is being prepared. Regarding the stop control of the slash combination B1 in general during the 3-card bet BB, for example, the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed in any push order (specifically, 3-card bet). In the general middle of the BB, "1/1 wins 76, 77" etc. can be mentioned in the full push order), so that the slash effective symbol combination is displayed in the general in the 3-card bet BB. You can avoid it. Further, as a modification of the stop control of the slash combination B1 in general during the three-card bet BB during AT preparation, the slash valid symbol combination is displayed in any push order and the processing related to AT is executed (for example, so-called so-called). As in the special zone for adding AT, the lottery for adding AT is executed), and the general bet during the 3-card bet BB in preparation for AT may be in a relatively advantageous state for the player, or the 3-card bet may be made. The stop control is the same as in the inside of the BB, but it may be configured to execute the processing related to the AT when any symbol combination is displayed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the slash-effective symbol combination that triggers the AT-related processing from being displayed in the gaming state where the processing related to the AT is not meaningful, and the slash-effective symbol combination can be displayed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the display.

In addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the stop control when the slash combination is won may be configured to be different depending on the game state, and a game state in which there is no point in displaying the slash effective symbol combination or a slash effective symbol combination may be used. In the gaming state where the display is not meaningful, the stop control may be performed so that the slash effective symbol combination is not displayed. Further, in the present modification 1, the stop control of the slash role in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB is different from the stop control of the slash role in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. As the gaming state for making the stop control different, a gaming state other than these may be appropriately applied, and in short, it is sufficient that the gaming states are different from each other in order to make the stop control different. As a specific example, the stop control at the time of winning the slash combination may be different between the inside of the predetermined type 1 BB and the non-inside. If the slash combination is won inside the predetermined type 1 BB, the operating conditional device becomes "predetermined type 1 BB + slash combination", and if the slash combination is won inside the non-internal type. , The operating condition device becomes a "slash role", and by associating the operating condition device with the stop control, a three-card betting game inside the predetermined type 1 BB and three cards inside the non-internal It is possible to make the stop control at the time of winning the slash combination different from that of the betting game.

<< Change example 2 from the third embodiment >>
Next, a second modification from the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating stop control for each state at the time of winning a slash combination in the spinning machine according to the second embodiment of the change from the third embodiment, and FIG. 146 is a change example from the third embodiment. 2 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to No. 2, and FIG. 147 is a subroutine showing a reel stop control process called and executed in the process of step S4000 of FIG. 146. 148 is a subroutine showing an AT lottery execution process called and executed in step S4200 of FIG. 146.

In change example 1 from the third embodiment, the stop control of the slash role in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB and the stop control of the slash role in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB are different from each other. However, this modification 2 is different in that each stop control is different from the modification 1. Further, also in this modification example 2, the above-mentioned input number method is applied, but the processing related to AT is performed in both the three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB and the three-card betting game in the two-card betting BB. Is a specification that can be executed. Hereinafter, a modification 2 from the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. However, in the present modification 2, the slash combination B1 will be used as an example to explain other slash combinations. Omit.

As shown in FIG. 145, in the three-card betting game inside the two-card bet BB, the slash combination B1 is 1/1 in the left middle right push order and becomes "higher" in the left middle right push order, and is 1 / in the left and right middle push order. 1 is "cheap", 1/1 in the middle 1st push order is "sla B" which is a slash effective symbol combination, and right 1st push order is "cheap" (this stop control is "first stop control". It may also be called).

On the other hand, the slash role B1 is the same as in the two-card bet BB internal in the left middle right push order and the right 1st push order in the three-card bet game in the two-card bet BB, but the middle 1st. In the push order, 1/2 becomes "sla B". That is, in the present modification 2, in the case of the three-card betting game in which the slash combination B1 is won in the situation inside the two-card betting BB, the stop switch (sometimes referred to as the stop button) is pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st. Is always displaying the slash valid symbol combination, but in the 3-card betting game in which the slash role B1 is won in the situation of 2 betting BB, when the stop switch is pressed in the pressing order of the middle 1st, the slash valid symbol is always displayed. Instead of displaying the combination, the slash-effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/2 (this stop control may be referred to as "second stop control"). That is, in this modification 2, the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is different depending on the game state of the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB and the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. ing.

In addition, in FIG. 145, in the three-card betting game in which the slash role B1 is won in the situation inside the two-card betting BB, when the stop switch is pressed in the pressing order of the middle 1st, the slash effective symbol combination is 1/1. In the 3-card betting game in which winnings 17 and 18 are stopped and the slash role B1 is won in the situation of 2-card betting BB, if the stop switch is pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st, the slash is valid at 1/2. The winning combinations 78, 79, 82, and 83 are configured to stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slash-effective symbol combinations that can be stopped may be the same. Specifically, in the 3-card betting game in which the slash role B1 is won in the situation inside the 2-card bet BB, when the stop switch is pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st, the slash effective symbol combination is 1/1. In the 3-card betting game in which winnings 17 and 18 are stopped and the slash role B1 is won in the situation of 2-card betting BB, if the stop switch is pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st, the slash effective symbol combination is 1/2. The winning prizes 17 and 18 may be configured to stop.

In the 3-card betting game in which the slash role B1 was won in the situation of 2-card betting BB, when the stop switch was pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st, the slash effective symbol combination was configured to stop at 1/2. When the stop switch is pressed in the order of pressing the middle 1st, the symbol combination related to "high" may be stopped in the remaining 1/2, or the symbol combination related to "cheap" may be stopped. It may be configured.

A stop control and the like for each state at the time of winning the slash combination in the third modification will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 146 to 148. In the description thereof, FIG. 146 is the same as FIG. 18 described in the first embodiment. Therefore, the same controls as in FIG. 18 are designated by the same reference numerals to omit or simplify the description, and mainly explain only the differences.

As shown in FIG. 146, the reel stop control process is executed in step 4000 after the process of step 1263, and then the game section transition control process is performed in step 4100 through various processes described with reference to FIG. After that, the AT state transition control process is performed in step 4200. Here, in step 4100, generally, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won in the state of the normal section, the control to shift to the advantageous section is executed, or if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is executed. The game section transition control process such as executing the control to shift to the normal section is performed.

Here, in the first embodiment, in the game section transition control process of FIG. 31, the process of determining the game section after the next game as a normal section or an advantageous section is executed in step 3516 or step 3520. In the second modification from the third embodiment, the configuration is as follows.
(1) When the game is executed in the situation of the normal section and the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is turned from off to on in the game section transition control process.
(2) When the game is executed in a situation where the advantageous section is used and the advantageous section ends in the game, the advantageous section flag is turned from on to off in the game section transition control process.
As described above, it has an advantageous section flag, the advantageous section flag is on when it is an advantageous section, and the advantageous section flag is off when it is a normal section.

Next, the reel stop control process according to step 4000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, in step 4001, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery result of the game is a push order slash combination. If No in step 4001, in step 4006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the reel stop control based on the operating condition device, and proceeds to step 4007. In this step 4006, for example, when the replay-A1 condition device or the like, which is a condition device other than the push order slash combination, is operating, the reel stop control based on this replay-A1 condition device is determined. Perform processing.

Further, in the case of Yes in step 4001, in step 4002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the gaming state is inside the two-card betting BB, and the gaming state is inside the two-card betting BB. If it is determined that there is (Yes in step 4002), in step 4003, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the reel stop control to the above-mentioned first stop control (inside the “two bet BB” column of FIG. 145). ), And the process proceeds to step 4007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 4002 that the gaming state is not inside the two-card bet BB (No in step 4002), in step 4004, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is in the two-card betting BB. Determine if it exists.

If it is determined in step 4004 that the gaming state is not in the two-card bet BB (No in step 4004), the process proceeds to step 4006. Further, when it is determined in step 4004 that the gaming state is in the betting BB for two cards (Yes in step 4004), in step 4005, the CPUC100 of the main control board M performs the reel stop control in the above-mentioned second stop. It is determined to control (see the column of "during two bets BB" in FIG. 145), and the process proceeds to step 4007.

In the figure, the stop control is determined in steps 4003, 4005, and 4006, but the stop control is not limited to this, and the stop control is based on the condition device that is operating as a result. Should be executed.

Next, in step 4007, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons has been operated, and if any of the stop buttons has been operated (Yes in step 4007), the step. In 4008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button based on the determined reel stop control, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1266). ..

Next, the AT lottery execution process according to step 4200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 148, in step 4201, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped symbol combination is a slash-effective symbol combination, and if it is determined that the stopped symbol combination is a slash-effective symbol combination (step 4201). Yes), proceed to step 4202. In step 4202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section is an advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game section is an advantageous section (Yes in step 4202), the process proceeds to step 4203. In step 4203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is a non-AT state, and if it is determined to be a non-AT state (Yes in step 4203), the process proceeds to step 4204.

In step 4204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). Specifically, in a three-card betting game inside a two-card betting BB in an advantageous section and in a non-AT state, for example, when the slash combination B1 is won, the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270. The 1st push order is notified while the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. When the player operates the stop switch in the order of pressing the 1st of the notified notifications, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/1, one game medal is paid out, and the AT lottery is executed. On the other hand, even if the slash combination B1 is won in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, the slash effective symbol combination is performed by the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270. Is displayed, the 1st push order is notified. When the player operates the stop switch in the order of pressing the 1st in the notified state, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/2, one game medal is acquired, and the AT lottery is executed.

That is, in the present modification 2, as described above, even if the same push order slash role is used, a gaming state such as a 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB and a 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB ( The reel stop control differs depending on the game state including the specified number), and the 3-card bet game (displayed as 1/1) inside the 2-card bet BB is the 3-card bet in the 2-card bet BB. It is a specification that the slash effective symbol combination is displayed more easily than the game (displayed in 1/2), but even if it is a 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, it is a 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. Even so, if a slash valid symbol combination is displayed, the AT lottery is performed in step 4205 based on this. In this change example 2, the execution of the AT lottery is mentioned as an example of the processing related to AT triggered by the display of the slash valid symbol combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, the points Needless to say, it may be a privilege such as grant. In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

Next, in step 4205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won, and if it is determined that the AT has been won (Yes in step 4205), it relates to the AT in the next game and thereafter. The state is determined to be the AT state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4205 that the AT has not been won (No in step 4205), in step 4207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is in a state related to the AT after the next game based on the game situation. Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3400). In step 4207, it is determined to maintain the non-AT state in the next game, the state related to the AT of the next game is determined by updating the counter for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, or the non-AT state is determined in the advantageous section. In the AT state, if the AT state is executed with a predetermined number of ceiling games, there is a case where the counter of the number of ceiling games is updated to determine the state related to the AT of the next game. Even if No in step 4201, step 4202, or step 4203, the process proceeds to step 4207.

As described above, in the present modification 2, AT if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed regardless of whether it is a 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB or a 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. Since the process related to AT such as lottery is executed, it is disadvantageous to the player that the process related to AT is not executed due to the transition of the gaming state such as shifting from the inside of the 2-card bet BB to the 2-card bet BB. Can be prevented from occurring. In addition, the reel stop control is set so that the slash effective symbol combination is more easily displayed in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB than in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. The display ratio of slash-effective symbol combinations can be changed. As a result, the difficulty level of displaying the slash effective symbol combination can be changed depending on which game state the push order slash combination is won, and the playability of the winning game of the push order slash combination can be improved. .. Furthermore, even if it is a 3-card bet game inside a 2-card bet BB or a 3-card bet game in a 2-card bet BB, if a slash valid symbol combination is displayed, an AT lottery is performed. As for the process related to the AT lottery, only one of step 4204 of FIG. 148 is required, so that the control load can be reduced.

In this change example 2, when the push order slash combination is won, the ratio is 1/1 in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, and 1/2 in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. The slash effective symbol combinations are displayed at the ratio of, but these ratios can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gaming state for changing the reel stop control is not limited to the inside of the two-card betting BB or the two-card betting BB, and an appropriate gaming state can be applied.

Further, in the second modification as well, the push slash combination described in the second embodiment may be applied as in the first modification. Specifically, in the 3-card betting game in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state during the 2-card betting BB, the same reel stop control as the slash combination A in FIG. 110 is applied, and in the state inside the 2-card betting BB. In the low base frame on the left 1st, for example, by applying the reel stop control in which 1 sheet is stopped at 1/4 and 0 sheets are stopped at 3/4, the display ratio of the slash effective symbol combination depending on the pressing timing is changed. For example, the rate of displaying the slash effective symbol combination is higher in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB than in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB.

Further, in this modification example 2, when the slash role B1 is won in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB or the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB, the effect display device S40 and the push order display are both displayed. The device D270 has notified the push order in which the slash-effective symbol combination is displayed. For example, in the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, the push order in which the slash-effective symbol combination is displayed is notified. On the other hand, the presence or absence of push order notification by the effect display device S40 or the push order display device D270 is determined according to the game state, such as not performing such a notification in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. You may switch.

<< Change example 3 from the third embodiment >>
Next, change example 3 from the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing an mode of push order notification by the effect display device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. In the second modification from the third embodiment, the display ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is changed due to the difference in the reel stop control, but in the third modification, in addition to the difference in the reel stop control, the effect display device S40 is used. The difference is that the display ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is changed depending on the mode of push order notification. Hereinafter, a third modification from the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149.

First, in the third modification, the reel stop control when the slash combination B1 is won during the two-card bet BB and the reel stop control when the slash combination B1 is won during the two-card bet BB are the first. 3 It is the same as the change example 2 from the embodiment, and is as shown in FIG. 145. In the third modification, when the slash combination B1 is won in the three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), the effect is produced. The display device S40 displays "1" indicating that the reel to be stopped first is the middle reel, such as {"-", "1", "-"}. Further, although not shown, the push order display device D270 also displays (instructions are executed) that the reel to be stopped first is the middle reel. As a specific example, "= 8" is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the pressing order (full navigation is performed) in which the slash effective symbol combination is surely stopped (stopped at 1/1). Note that notifying the push order by the push order display device D270 may be referred to as executing an AT, executing an instruction, executing a navigation, executing a push order navigation, executing a notification game, or the like. ..

On the other hand, when the slash combination B1 is won in the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the effect display device S40 may be used. For the left reel, such as {"x", "?", "?"}, "X" is displayed to the effect that the slash valid symbol combination does not stop when first pressed, but the middle reel and right reel are displayed. For, a "?" Is displayed to the effect that it is unclear which one should be stopped. Further, although not shown, the push order display device D270 also displays (instructions are executed) that the middle reel or the right reel is to be stopped first. As a specific example, "= C" is displayed. With this configuration, if you press either the middle reel or the right reel first, the slash effective symbol combination will stop, so there is a 1/2 chance that the slash effective symbol combination will be displayed. It is a navigation system. In this example, the display of the push order display device D270 is "= 1" for "left middle right", "= 2" for "left and right middle", "= 3" for "middle left and right", and "middle right left". "= 4", "Right, left, middle" is "= 5", "Right, middle, left" is "= 6", "Left 1st" is "= 7", "Middle 1st" is "= 8", "Right" "1st" is "= 9", "left or middle 1st" is "= A", "middle or right 1st" is "= C", "left or right 1st" is "= E", and so on. (It is just an example and there is no problem if you change it).

The notification mode by the effect display device S40 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 149, and various notification modes can be applied. For example, when the combination of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop is configured to have a slash role in which the slash valid symbol is stopped in any one of the six push orders, the middle left and right pushes. When the slash combination in which the slash valid symbol is stopped in order is won, {"2", "1", "3"} is displayed on the effect display device S40, and "= 3" is displayed on the push order display device D270. Is displayed to notify that the reels are stopped in the order of middle left and right, or {"?", "1", "?"} Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the push order display device D270 is displayed. "= 8" may be displayed on the screen to notify only the reel that stops first, and the selection navigation may be performed so that the other push orders are unknown. Further, as the notification of the push order, the notification may be performed only by the push order display device D270, or the notification may be performed by both the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270.

Here, in the case of a 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, as shown in FIG. 145, if the middle 1st push order is performed, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/1. At the same time, full navigation is also performed as the push order navigation, so the slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/1. On the other hand, in the case of a 3-card betting game in a 2-card bet BB, a slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/2 in the middle 1st push order, as shown in FIG. 145, even if the middle 1st push order is used. In addition to the reel stop control, the effect display device S40 also performs the above-mentioned two-choice navigation, so that the slash effective symbol combination is displayed at 1/4.

That is, in the present modification 3, the slash effective symbol combination is stopped due to the difference in the reel stop control according to the game state of the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB and the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. By making the ratio different and then making the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination different due to the difference in the display mode of the effect display device S40, as a result, the two-card bet game and the two-card bet game inside the BB are played. The stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is changed according to the game state of the three-card betting game in the betting BB. Further, in the third modification, as in the second modification, the slash valid symbol may be a three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB or a three-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB. If the combination is displayed, the AT lottery shown in step 4204 of FIG. 148 is performed. In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

In this modified example 3, the same operation and effect as the modified example 2 from the third embodiment is obtained, and the notification mode is simply changed by the effect display device S40, and the three in the two-card bet BB is inside. The display ratio of the slash effective symbol combination can be changed according to the game state such as the one-card betting game and the three-card betting game in the two-card betting game.

In this modified example 3, as in the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is different depending on the difference in the reel stop control according to the gaming state (difference in the reel stop control). (Change of stop ratio due to difference in push order navigation), by making the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination different depending on the difference in the display mode of the push order display device D270 (change of the stop ratio due to the difference in push order navigation), the slash is effective according to the game state. The stop ratio of the symbol combination was different, but instead of this, for example, the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination did not differ due to the difference in the reel stop control according to the game state, and the display mode of the push order display device D270. It may be configured so that the stop ratio of the slash effective symbol combination is different only by the difference of.

<< Change example 4 from the third embodiment >>
Next, a change example 4 from the third embodiment will be described. This modification 4 is different from the third embodiment in that the handling when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed differs depending on the game state. In the present modification 4, for example, when the slash winning combination B1 is won in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB, as shown in FIG. Even if the reel stop control is performed to display "Sura B") and the slash role B1 is won in the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB, as shown in FIG. The reel stop control is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination (“sla B”) is displayed. That is, in the present modification 4, as in the third embodiment, when the push order slash combination is won in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB, the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB is used. In any case where the push order slash combination is won, the common reel stop control shown in FIG. 143 is performed.

In this change example 4, if the slash combination B1 is won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card bet BB, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed in the push order of the middle 1st. Then, processing related to AT is performed. In addition, when the slash role B1 is won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed in the left middle right push order. In the push order in the left and right, the slash invalid symbol (“cheap”) is displayed, and in this case, the processing related to AT is not performed.

On the other hand, in this change example 4, when the slash combination B1 is won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB, the slash effective symbol combination is performed in the push order of the middle 1st. Even though it is displayed, the processing related to AT is not performed. In addition, when the slash role B1 is won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card betting game in the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed in the left middle right push order. , In the push order in the left and right, the slash invalid symbol (“cheap”) is displayed, and even in this case, the processing related to AT is not performed.

As described above, in the present modification 4, when the slash combination is won in the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card betting BB or the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB, the same reel stop control is executed in both cases. Therefore, the same push order was performed for the 3-card betting game in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 2-card bet BB and the 3-card betting game in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 2-card bet BB. In the case, if it is the middle 1st, the same symbol combination is displayed, such that the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

However, if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, the processing related to AT is performed, and the AT is performed in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and 2 In the 3-card bet game in the 3-card bet BB, when the slash valid symbol combination is displayed, the processing related to AT is not performed. If a slash valid symbol combination is displayed in a 3-card bet game, you can expect to win a game medal by AT, but in a non-AT state in the advantageous section and in a 3-card bet game during a 2-card bet BB, a slash. When a valid symbol combination is displayed, it cannot be expected that the AT will acquire a game medal. For this reason, the 3-card betting game in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and inside the 2-card bet BB has a higher payout rate than the 3-card betting game in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 2-card bet BB. Can be made higher.

Further, even in two game states in which the stop control is the same, when the slash valid symbol combination of the game winning the slash combination is stopped and displayed, the process related to AT is executed and the process related to AT is not executed. It may be configured to have, a three-card betting game in which the state related to AT is in the state A inside the two-card bet BB, and a state B in the state related to AT inside the two-card bet BB. In the three-card betting game of, when the slash valid symbol combination of the game that won the slash role is stopped and displayed, the process related to AT may be executed and the process related to AT may not be executed. .. As an example of the state in which the processing related to AT is not executed, the AT lottery may be configured not to be newly executed in the AT precursor state after winning the AT lottery and before shifting to the AT state. In the ending state that can be transferred when the state continues for a predetermined period or more (for example, 1000 games or more) or when the number of acquired cards in the AT state becomes a predetermined number or more (for example, 1000 or more), a new AT addition lottery is performed. May be configured not to execute.

In this way, when the reel stop control at the time of winning the push order slash combination according to the game state is common, the slash effective symbol combination is displayed in the same push order in each game state, but depending on the game state. , By generating both the situation where the processing related to AT based on the slash valid symbol combination is performed and the situation where it is not performed, even if the same pushing order is performed when the push order slash combination is won, different balls are output depending on the game situation. You can create a rate.

In this change example 4, when the slash valid symbol combination is displayed in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card betting game in the 2-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not performed. However, instead of this, the following may be used. That is, even in the 2-card bet BB, on the premise that the processing related to AT is possible when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the 3-card bet game in the 2-card bet BB. , When the slash combination B1 is won, if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed by performing the middle 1st push order, the processing related to AT is performed, while the left and right middle push order is 1 When the slash invalid symbol combination (“cheap”), which is a card combination, is displayed, and when the symbol combination related to “high”, which is a 15-sheet combination, is displayed, it is the same as when the slash valid symbol combination is displayed. It may be handled in the above and the processing related to AT may be performed. As described above, the game state in which the processing related to AT is executed regardless of which symbol combination is stopped at the time of winning the slash combination is not limited to the two-card bet BB, and is not limited to the other game states. There may be. Further, even in two game states in which the stop control is the same, when a symbol combination other than the slash effective symbol combination of the game that won the slash combination is stopped and displayed, the process related to AT and the process related to AT are executed. It may be configured to have a case where it is not, and a three-card bet game when the state related to AT is inside the two-card bet BB and a state related to AT inside the two-card bet BB. In the three-card betting game in the case of B, when the symbol combination other than the slash valid symbol combination of the game that won the slash role is stopped and displayed, the process related to AT is executed and the process related to AT is not executed. May be configured to have.

<< Change example 5 from the third embodiment >>
Next, the fifth modification from the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a lottery regarding AT for each state in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the third embodiment. In the present modification 5, generally, the state A in the AT state of the advantageous section and inside the two-card bet BB, the state B in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and inside the two-card bet BB, and the non-RT state C In each of the states A to C, the expected value when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed is different. The expected value is the expected value of the number of payouts in the game (sometimes referred to as the expected value regarding the number of payouts), the winning probability of the AT lottery executed in the game, and the expected number of wins at the time of winning the AT lottery. It is the sum of the expected value (sometimes referred to as the expected value related to AT) in consideration of (the average value of the game medals that increase from the start of AT to the end of AT when the AT lottery is won). It should be noted that a high expected value is advantageous for the player. Further, in this example, the case of setting 1 will be described in detail. Hereinafter, the present modification 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. In each of the states A, B, and C, the case where the game is played with a three-card bet is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 150, when the slash combination B1 is won in the above states A to C, the symbol combination (15 sheets paid out) related to "high" is displayed in the left 1st push order, and the middle 1st push. In order, the symbol combination related to "Sura B" (one slash valid symbol combination) and the right 1st push order, the "cheap" symbol combination (one slash invalid symbol combination) are displayed. It is a common stop control (similarly for other slash combinations, it is a common stop control in states A to C). In the figure, the case of setting 1 is illustrated.

In the state A, when the symbol combination related to "high", the slash effective symbol combination, and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed, the lottery related to AT (processing related to AT) is not performed. Since the state A is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the game medals will increase as the game progresses in the state A (in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation). It is configured as.

In state B, the lottery for AT (processing related to AT) when the symbol combination related to "high" and the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed is not performed, but when the slash valid symbol combination is displayed. Will have an AT lottery to win 79/100. Since the state B is a game state that is not advantageous to the player, the game medals decrease as the game progresses in the state B (in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation). It is configured as. Note that the configuration of the figure is just an example, and even if the symbol combination related to "high" or the symbol combination related to "cheap" in the state B is displayed, the process related to AT can be executed. good. Even in this configuration, in the game in which the slash role is won in the state B, the symbol combination related to "high" and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed. May be configured so that the AT-related benefits such as the winning probability of the AT lottery are relatively larger (larger) than when is displayed. Also, regarding the expected value described later, in the game in which the slash role is won in the state B, when the slash effective symbol combination is displayed, the symbol combination related to "high" and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed. May be configured so that the expected value is higher than when is displayed.

In the state C, when the symbol combination related to "high", the slash effective symbol combination, and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed, the lottery related to AT (processing related to AT) is not performed. Since the state C is a gaming state that is not advantageous to the player, the game medals are configured to decrease as the game progresses in the state C.

<Expected value of states A to C>
Next, in each of the states A to C, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed, and the expected value when the push order in which the slash valid symbol combination is displayed is performed. , Expected values when the push order in which the symbol combinations related to "cheap" are displayed will be described.

<Expected value of state A>
In the state A, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "high" with 15 payouts is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is increased. The expected value is 15 sheets. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed is 15 sheets + 0 sheets = 15 sheets.

In the state A, when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed is performed, the slash effective symbol combination with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so the expected value of the number of payouts is one. Will be. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combinations are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 0 sheets = 1 sheet.

In the state A, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "cheap" with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is The expected value is one. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combinations related to "cheap" are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 0 sheets = 1 sheet.

In this way, in the game in which the push order slash combination (slash combination B1) is won in the state A, the expected value (15 sheets) in the case of performing the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is higher. It is higher than the expected value (1 sheet) when the push order is performed in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed, and the expected value (1 sheet) when the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed. It has become.

As a modification, when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the state A, the AT addition lottery may be executed as a process related to the AT. In this configuration, in the game in which the push order slash combination (slash combination B1) is won in the state A, the expected value when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the slash valid symbol combination is displayed is higher. It is higher than the expected value when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed, and the expected value when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed. It may be configured as follows.

<Expected value of state B>
In the state B, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "high" with 15 payouts is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is increased. The expected value is 15 sheets. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed is 15 sheets + 0 sheets = 15 sheets.

In the state B, when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed is performed, the slash effective symbol combination with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so the expected value of the number of payouts is one. Will be. Further, the expected value regarding the AT in this case is 100 sheets × 79/100 = 79 sheets because the expected number of sheets to be acquired when the AT is won is 100 and the AT lottery is won at 79/100. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combinations are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 79 sheets = 80 sheets.

In the state B, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "cheap" with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is The expected value is one. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combinations related to "cheap" are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 0 sheets = 1 sheet.

In this way, in the game in which the push order slash combination (slash combination B1) is won in the state B, the expected value (80 sheets) when the push order in which the slash valid symbol combination is displayed is performed is "higher". It is higher than the expected value (15 sheets) when the push order is performed in which the symbol combination related to is displayed, and the expected value (1 sheet) when the push order is performed in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed. ing.

<Expected value of state C>
In the state C, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "high" with 15 payouts is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is increased. The expected value is 15 sheets. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is performed is 15 sheets + 0 sheets = 15 sheets.

In the state C, when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed is performed, the slash effective symbol combination with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so the expected value of the number of payouts is one. Will be. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the slash effective symbol combinations are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 0 sheets = 1 sheet.

In the state C, when the push order in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed is performed, the symbol combination related to "cheap" with one payout is displayed at 1/1, so that the number of payouts is The expected value is one. Further, the expected value for AT in this case is 0 because the lottery for AT is not performed. Therefore, the expected value when the push order in which the symbol combinations related to "cheap" are displayed is performed is 1 sheet + 0 sheets = 1 sheet.

In this way, in the game in which the push order slash combination (slash combination B1) is won in the state C, the expected value (15 sheets) in the case of performing the push order in which the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed is higher. It is higher than the expected value (1 sheet) when the push order is performed in which the slash effective symbol combination is displayed, and the expected value (1 sheet) when the push order is performed in which the symbol combination related to "cheap" is displayed. It has become.

In this way, even if the same push order slash combination is won, the most advantageous push order differs depending on the game state (states A to C), so that the game can be varied. Further, by making the most advantageous push order different according to the game state, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which push order is the most advantageous, and it is possible to prevent the aggressiveness.

Further, in the present modification 5, when the push order slash combination is won, the winning sound is displayed when the symbol combination related to "high", the slash effective symbol combination, and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed. May be configured to be different from each other. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the difference in the expected value due to the winning sound.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the AT state of the advantageous section. In addition, in the game in which the slash role is won by betting three cards inside the two-card bet BB, the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed may be different.

In addition, in the AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet, the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the AT state of the advantageous section and Even if the winning sound is the same as the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed in the game in which the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards inside the 2-card bet BB. good. With this configuration, you can play the game without any discomfort in the AT state, and even though you won the slash role, the processing related to AT is not executed, so it feels as if the player has lost. It is possible to prevent the situation where it ends up.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the non-AT of the advantageous section. It is different from the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed in the game in which the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards in the state and 2 cards inside the BB. You may let me. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the slash role has been won even when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the non-AT of the advantageous section. Same as the winning sound when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed in the game in which the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards in the state and 2 bets inside the BB. May be.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the game in which the push order bell role was won by betting 3 cards inside the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) was stopped and displayed. In the winning sound of the case and the game in which the winning order bell role is won in the AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) It may be the same as the winning sound when the stop display is displayed. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the push order bell role has been won regardless of the game state.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and in the game in which the push order bell role was won by betting 3 cards inside the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) was stopped and displayed. In the winning sound of the case and the game in which the winning order bell role is won in the AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) It may be different from the winning sound when the stop display is displayed. With this configuration, the player can detect from the winning sound that he / she is in the AT state.

In addition, the symbol combination related to the "high" of the push order bell role and the symbol combination related to the "high" of the slash role may be configured to be the same symbol combination, or may be different symbol combinations. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the present modification 5, when the push order slash combination is won, the back lamps are displayed when the symbol combination related to "high", the slash effective symbol combination, and the symbol combination related to "cheap" are displayed. The effects may be configured to be different from each other. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the difference in the expected value due to the back lamp effect.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the AT of the advantageous section In the game in which the slash role is won by betting three cards in the state and two bets inside the BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed may be different.

In addition, in the AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the AT state of the advantageous section. In addition, in the game in which the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards inside the 2-card bet BB, the same as the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed. May be. With this configuration, you can play the game without any discomfort in the AT state, and even though you won the slash role, the processing related to AT is not executed, so it feels as if the player has lost. It is possible to prevent the situation where it ends up.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the non-advantageous section In the game where the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards in the AT state and 2 bets inside the BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed. May be different. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the slash role has been won even when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" is stopped and displayed, and the non-advantageous section In the game where the push order bell role is won by betting 3 cards in the AT state and 2 bets inside the BB, the back lamp effect when the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) is stopped and displayed. May be the same.

In addition, in the game in which the push order bell role was won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) was stopped and displayed. In the case of back lamp production and in the game where the push order bell role is won in the AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) May be the same as the back lamp effect when is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the push order bell role has been won regardless of the game state.

In addition, in the game in which the push order bell role was won in the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the 2-card bet BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) was stopped and displayed. In the case of back lamp production and in the game where the push order bell role is won in the AT state of the advantageous section and the 3-card bet inside the BB, the symbol combination related to "high" (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts) May be different from the back lamp effect when is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can detect from the back lamp effect that the player is in the AT state.

In addition, the symbol combination related to the "high" of the push order bell role and the symbol combination related to the "high" of the slash role may be configured to be the same symbol combination, or may be different symbol combinations. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the present modification 5, when the push order slash combination is won, the operation sound (sometimes referred to as a stop sound) output from the speaker S20 when the stop button D40 is operated is configured as follows. You may. The stop sound is output at the timing when the operation of the stop button D40 is accepted (the timing from off to on). The stop sound may be configured to be output at the timing when the stop button D40 is turned from on to off.

In the non-AT state of the advantageous section and the game in which the slash role is won by betting 3 cards in the BB, and the push order navigation in which the left 1st stop is the correct answer is executed, as the 1st stop. When the left stop button D41 is operated, a special stop sound (for example, "basun") is output, while when the middle stop button D42 is operated as the first stop or the right stop button D43 is operated as the first stop. In that case, it may be configured not to output a special stop sound. That is, in the game in which the slash role is won and the push order navigation is executed, when the stop button D40 that is the correct answer is operated as the first stop, a special stop sound is output, while the stop button D40 that is the incorrect answer is output. It may be configured not to output a special stop sound when the operation is performed. When the stop button D40, which is an incorrect answer, is operated, the same stop sound as the stop sound in the game in which the slash role is not won (for example, the game in which the re-game is won) may be output. When the stop button D40, which is an incorrect answer in the game in which the slash role is won, is operated, a dedicated stop sound may be output. Further, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed by winning the slash role, when the stop button D40 which is the correct answer as the first stop is operated, and when the stop button D40 which is the second stop after that is operated. A special stop sound may be output even when the stop button D40 as the third stop is operated, or when the stop button D40 as the second stop is operated and the stop button D40 as the third stop is operated. It may be configured not to output a special stop sound in the case of operating. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped in the game in which the slash combination is won at the time of the first stop.

In addition, it is a game in which the AT state of the advantageous section and the slash role is won by betting 3 cards inside the BB, and the push order navigation with the correct answer of the left first stop is executed as the push order navigation corresponding to "high". In the game being played, when the middle stop button D42 that displays the stop of the slash effective symbol combination as the first stop is operated, the special stop sound may be configured not to be output, or the special stop sound may be output. It may be configured to output. The stop operation and the stop button to be operated, which are the correct answers for the push order navigation, are just examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

In addition, it is a game in which the AT state of the advantageous section and the slash role is won by betting 3 cards inside the BB, and the push order navigation with the correct answer of the left first stop is executed as the push order navigation corresponding to "high". In the game being played, when the left stop button D41 at which "high" is stopped and displayed as the first stop is operated, the special stop sound may not be output. The stop operation and the stop button to be operated, which are the correct answers for the push order navigation, are just examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

In addition, in a game in which the slash role is won and the push order navigation is not executed, the special stop sound is not output when the stop button D40, which displays the stop of the slash effective symbol combination as the first stop, is operated. It may be configured to output a special stop sound.

In this modified example 5, when the symbol combination related to "high" is displayed, for example, when the symbol combination related to "pushing order bell A" of the winning-A1 condition device shown in FIG. 130 is displayed. The same 15 cards are paid out, but the number of payouts when the symbol combination related to this "high" is displayed and the number of payouts when the symbol combination related to the above "push order bell A" is displayed are different from each other. In this way, each expected value may be configured to be different.

Although the modified examples 1 to 5 have been described with the example in which the input number method is applied, the single input number method may be applied. Specifically, in FIG. 145, instead of the inside of the 2-card bet BB, the inside of the 3-card bet BB is read, and instead of the 2-card bet BB, it is read as the 3-card bet BB. In the case of winning the slash role B1 in the 3-card bet BB and in the case of winning the slash role B1 in the 3-card bet BB, as described above, even if the same push order is used, 3 cards are used. In the 3-card betting game inside the betting BB, the slash-effective symbol combination may be displayed, and in the 3-card betting game in the 3-card betting BB, the symbol combination related to "high" may be displayed.

Further, in the changes 1 to 5 from the third embodiment, the number of payouts of the slash effective symbol combination and the number of payouts of "cheap" are both the same, but for example, the number of payouts of "cheap" is 1. The number of slash-effective symbol combinations to be paid out is 0, or the number of "cheap" payouts is 2 and the number of slash-effective symbol combinations to be paid out is 1. The number of sheets may be less than the number of "cheap" payouts.

<< Change example 6 from the third embodiment >>
Next, the configuration applicable to the present specification regarding the slash combination will be described as a modification 6 from the third embodiment.

<Lottery inside Type 1 BB-C and in the normal section>
First, FIG. 151 is a table relating to the lottery in the type 1 BB-C inside (inside the two-card betting BB) and in the normal section in the modification 6 from the third embodiment. The figure illustrates the case where the winning-B1 and the re-game-B are won in the game executed in the inside of the first type BB-C and in the normal section. Further, in the figure, the case where the game is executed by betting three cards is illustrated.

First, the winning-B1 is a slash role, and if the winning-B1 is won in the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB-C, the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". Then, the winning 17 or the winning 18 which is a slash effective symbol combination will be stopped and displayed at 1/1. Further, the re-game-B is a re-game combination (sometimes referred to as a replay), and any of the re-games 01 to 03 is stopped and displayed regardless of the pressing order. The type 1 BB-C is a two-card bet BB that can be won by a two-card bet as in the third embodiment.

Further, in the change example 6 from the third embodiment, in the three-card betting game inside the type 1 BB-C which is a normal section, the winning-B1 is won or the re-game-B is won. , It is configured to execute the advantageous section transition lottery, and if the prize-B1 is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is won at 1/1, and if the replay-B is won, the advantage is 3/5. Win the section transition lottery. That is, in the inside of the type 1 BB-C which is a normal section, if the winning-B1 is won, the section always shifts to the advantageous section.

In addition, in FIG. 151, only the winning-B1 is shown as the slash combination, but in the modification 6 from the third embodiment, there are a plurality of types of slash combinations, and one type BB-C is inside. In, regardless of which slash combination is won, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed, or the advantageous section transition lottery may be won at 1/1.

In addition, since FIG. 151 illustrates the case of executing the three-card betting game inside the type 1 BB-C which is the normal section, the navigation is not executed in the game in which the slash combination is won. More specifically, even if the game that wins the slash role wins the advantageous section transition lottery, neither the navigation related to the slash effective symbol combination nor the navigation related to the "high" symbol combination is executed in the game. ..

In addition, in the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB-C, if the slash role is won, the advantage section transition lottery may be won at 4/5, and the advantage section transition lottery may not be won. Even in such a configuration, the condition device other than the slash combination (for example, the re-game-B) is better when the slash combination is won in the three-card betting game inside the type 1 BB-C. ) May be configured so that the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is higher (easier to shift to the advantageous section) than in the case of winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151, in the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB-C, when the winning-B1 is won and the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the state related to the AT of the next game is changed. When the state A is set and the re-game-B is won in the three-card betting game inside the type 1 BB-C and the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the state related to the AT of the next game is changed to the state B. It is configured.

In addition, in the change example 6 from the third embodiment, in the three-card betting game in the type 1 BB-C, the winning-B1 is won, and the winning-B1 is processed when the winning section transition lottery is won. The game section transition control process in step 4100 in FIG. 146 relating to the winning game is configured to shift to an advantageous section. As described above, it has an advantageous section flag, and is configured so that the advantageous section flag is turned on when it is an advantageous section and the advantageous section flag is turned off when it is a normal section. FIG. 146. The advantageous section flag is turned on in the game section transition control process of step 4100. After that, in the AT state transition control process of step 4200 of FIG. 146, since the advantageous section flag is on, it is determined to shift to the state A as the process related to AT. As described above, in the sixth modification from the third embodiment, in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the processing related to AT is executed after the advantageous section flag is turned on.

The timing at which the AT-related state shifts may be a predetermined timing after all reels are stopped in the game won in the advantageous section transition lottery, or the start lever D50 in the next game of the game won in the advantageous section transition lottery. It may be a predetermined timing after the operation is accepted.

In the state A, the number of ceiling games is 500 games, and in the state B, the number of ceiling games is 1000 games, and the state A is more advantageous than the state B. As described above, the number of ceiling games is the number of games that will shift to the AT state if the games for the number of ceiling games are executed in the game state without shifting to the AT state.

As described above, in the change example 6 from the third embodiment, in the three-card betting game in the normal section and the predetermined game state (inside the type 1 BB-C), when the slash combination is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is drawn. Is executed, and it is configured to win 1/1. In addition, in the three-card betting game in the normal section and in the predetermined game state (inside Type 1 BB-C), the state related to the AT that wins the advantageous section transition lottery and shifts when the slash role is won, and the state other than the slash role. It is configured so that the state related to the AT that wins the advantageous section transition lottery and shifts when the winner is won is different. Since the state A is a state related to the AT that is more advantageous to the player than the state B, in the change example 6 from the third embodiment, when the slash combination is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is won. The state related to the AT to be transferred is more advantageous than the state related to the AT to be transferred by winning the advantageous section transition lottery when winning other than the slash combination. In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

With this configuration, when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it always shifts to the advantageous section (or is likely to shift to the advantageous section), and shifts to the state related to AT that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player aware of what to do, and even if the slash role is won not only in the advantageous section but also in the normal section, the player can have a sense of expectation that an advantageous event will occur.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and the state related to the AT that wins and shifts to the advantageous section transition lottery when the slash combination is won, and the state related to the AT that shifts by winning the advantageous section transition lottery when winning other than the slash combination. It may be configured so that the state related to the AT to be played can be the same. The state related to the AT that wins the advantageous section transition lottery and shifts to is the state A at 4/5 and the state B at 1/5, and is an advantageous section when a player other than the slash role (for example, replay-B) is won. The state related to the AT that wins the transition lottery and shifts is the state A at 2/5 and the state B at 3/5, that is, the AT that wins the advantageous section transition lottery and shifts when the slash role is won. The tendency (ratio) of the transition may be different between the state and the state related to the AT that wins and shifts to the advantageous section transition lottery when winning other than the slash combination. Even in such a configuration, the state related to the AT that wins and shifts to the advantageous section transition lottery when winning the slash role wins the advantageous section transition lottery when winning other than the slash role and shifts. It may be configured to be relatively advantageous over the state relating to the AT.

In the change example 6 from the third embodiment, when the slash combination is won in a predetermined gaming state (inside the type 1 BB-C) which is a normal section, the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed. However, even if the slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed and the winning is always made.

In addition, in the change example 6 from the third embodiment, the case where it is inside the type 1 BB-C that can be won by two-card bet is described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the three-card bet is won. It can also be applied to the inside of the obtained type 1 BB-A (inside the 3-card bet BB). Further, the replay-B is exemplified as a conditional device in which the advantageous section transition lottery other than the slash combination is executed, but this is just an example. In other conditional devices, when the normal section is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. Is executed, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery may be lower than that at the time of winning the slash combination.

<Other configurations>
In the change example 6 from the third embodiment, it may be configured as follows. In addition, there is no problem even if a plurality of the following configurations are combined.

<Structure 1>
In the normal section, when the slash combination is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in both cases when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed and when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed. , The effect to be performed is different. As an example, when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the special sound "Juwan" is output from the speaker S20, while when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the special sound is not output. Further, when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect is executed in a special mode, while when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect is executed in the normal mode. Further, when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a predetermined freeze is executed (the freeze effect is also executed in the effect display device S40), while when a stop display other than the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a predetermined freeze is executed. Freeze does not run. One or more of these may be applied.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped and the effect to be executed correspond to each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

<Structure 2>
In the normal section, when the slash combination is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed even when the symbol combination other than the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed (similar to the change example 6 from the third embodiment). Even if a push order bell combination (sometimes referred to as a push order bell) different from the slash combination is won, the symbol combinations other than the slash effective symbol combination included in the slash combination may be stopped and displayed. As a specific example, the winning prize 07 in FIG. 151 may be stopped and displayed. In the normal section, if the winning combination 07 is stopped and displayed, the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed. On the other hand, if the pushing order bell role is won, even if the winning 07 is stopped and displayed, the advantageous section transitions. The lottery is not executed. In addition, even if the winning 07 is stopped and displayed in the game that won the slash role, or if the winning 07 is stopped and displayed in the game that won the push order bell role, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed. In that case, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is higher when the winning 07 is stopped and displayed in the game that won the slash role than when the winning 07 is stopped and displayed in the game that won the push order bell role. It may be configured to be.

With this configuration, when the winning 07 is stopped and displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether he won the slash role or the push order bell role, and he has high expectations for the subsequent development of the game. You can proceed with the game while hugging.

<< Change example 7 from the third embodiment >>
Next, the configuration applicable to the present specification regarding the slash combination will be described as a modification 7 from the third embodiment.

<Number of lottery for the role of slash>
First, FIG. 152 is a table regarding the number of lottery placements in the modification 7 from the third embodiment.

In the upper part of the figure, the game was executed with a 3-card bet inside the 1-class BB-C (inside the 2-card bet BB) in which the condition device of the 1-class BB-C that can be won by a 2-card bet is operating. It is a list of slash roles that can be won in some cases.

In the change example 7 from the third embodiment, 12 types of winning-B1 conditional device-winning-B12 conditional device and 12 types of winning-C1 conditional device-winning-C12 conditional device are used as winning slash combinations. It has a total of 24 types of slash roles. In the present specification, the winning-B1 conditional device may be simply referred to as winning-B1, and the same applies to other conditional devices.

In the change example 7 from the third embodiment, the slash effective symbol combinations are winning 17 to 18 and winning 78 to 85. Further, even when any of the slash effective symbol combinations is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is one.

Further, as for the symbol combinations (components) other than the slash effective symbol combinations included in the slash combination, the number of payouts is 15 or 1 as in the third embodiment.

Next, the lower part of the figure is a list of winning combinations when the game is executed by betting three cards while the first type BB-C is operating. The winning-H condition device is composed of a symbol combination (component) having 15 payouts, and the winning-I condition device is composed of a symbol combination (component) with one payout number.

Here, as shown in the figure, all the slashes that can be stopped inside the type 1 BB-C are included in the symbol combination (component) of the winning-I condition device that can be won during the operation of the type 1 BB-C. Valid symbol combinations (winning 17-18 and winning 78-85) are included.

Also, regarding the symbol combinations (components) other than the slash effective symbol combinations included in the slash combination, all the symbol combinations (components) with 15 payouts (the above-mentioned "high") are prize-H condition device symbols. All of the symbol combinations (components) that are included in the combination (components) and the number of payouts is one (the above-mentioned "cheap") are included in the symbol combinations (components) of the winning-I condition device (components). The number of payouts is the same as in the third embodiment).

Further, as shown in the figure, the total number of lottery placements related to each slash effective symbol combination in Type 1 BB-C is 7660 (845 × 8 + 100 × 9 = 7660) for prizes 17 to 18 and 78 to 85 for prizes. It is 3780 (845 × 4 + 100 × 4 = 3780). The denominator of the lottery number is 65536. On the other hand, the number of lottery positions of the winning-I condition device including the slash effective symbol combination is 28598 during the operation of the first type BB-C. The number of lottery prizes 17 to 18 is larger when the 1st class BB-C is operating than when the 1st class BB-C is inside, and the 1st class BB-C is operating than when the 1st class BB-C is inside. The number of lottery tickets for winning 78 to 85 is larger.

For the prizes 17 to 18 and the prizes 78 to 85, the total number of lottery placements was the same, and the number of prizes inside the Type 1 BB-C and the number of prizes during the operation of the Type 1 BB-C were compared. Even when comparing with one symbol combination, the number of lottery placements is larger when the type 1 BB-C is operating than inside the type 1 BB-C. As a specific example, for the prize 17, the prize-I condition device including the prize 17 that can be won while the type 1 BB-C is operating, rather than the total number of lottery placements inside the type 1 BB-C. The number of lottery is larger. Similarly, for the winning 78, the lottery placement of the winning-I condition device including the winning 78 that can be won while the 1st class BB-C is operating, rather than the total number of lottery placements inside the 1st class BB-C. The number is larger. As described above, for each of the prizes 17 to 18 and the prizes 78 to 85, the number of lottery placements is larger when the type 1 BB-C is in operation than in the inside of the type 1 BB-C.

Although not shown, the total number of lottery placements related to symbol combinations (components) other than the slash effective symbol combination included in the slash combination in Type 1 BB-C is the symbol combination with one payout number. Compared with the winning-I condition device for (components), and compared with the winning-H condition device for the symbol combinations (components) with 15 payouts, in each of all the symbol combinations (components) Winning-I condition device or winning-H while Type 1 BB-C is operating, rather than the number of lottery related to symbol combinations (components) other than the slash effective symbol combination included in the slash combination inside Type 1 BB-C. The number of lottery placements for the condition device is larger. As a specific example, the total number of lottery placements for prize 07, in which the number of payouts in Type 1 BB-C is 15, is 1890 (845 x 2 + 100 x 2 = 1890), and Type 1 BB-C is in operation. The number of lottery placements of the prize-H condition device including the prize 07 is 10747, and the number of lottery placements is larger when the type 1 BB-C is operating than inside the type 1 BB-C. ..

In this example, the operation of the type 1 BB is exemplified as the operation of the type 1 BB-C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the BB that can be won by betting three cards, such as the operation of the type 1 BB-A. May be applied during the operation of.

By configuring in this way, in all the symbol combinations (components) included in the slash combination, the number of lottery placements will be larger when the type 1 BB-C is operating than in the type 1 BB-inside. It can be ensured that it is more advantageous to be in operation of Type 1 BB-C than in Type 1 BB-inside.

Further, although not shown, in the modification 7 from the third embodiment, the push order bell role is provided as in the third embodiment, and the push order bell role in the inside of the first type BB-C is used. Regarding the included symbol combinations (components), the symbol combination (component) with one payout number is used as the winning-I condition device, and the symbol combination (component) with 15 payout sheets is used as the winning-H condition device. It is configured to include everything. Further, for each of the symbol combinations (components) included in the push order bell role in the type 1 BB-C, the type 1 BB is in operation (1) rather than the total number of lottery positions in the type 1 BB-C. The lottery number of the winning-I condition device or the winning-H condition device in (sometimes referred to as when the seed BB is activated) may be larger.

The push order bell combination is a conditional device that does not include a slash effective symbol combination among the conditional devices in which the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and the number of payouts may differ depending on the push order. A1 condition device-winning-A12 condition device.

Further, the slash combination and the push order bell combination may be configured to include the same symbol combination, and even in such a configuration, the symbol combination (configuration) included in all the slash combination and the push order bell combination. For each of the elements), the lottery number of the winning-I condition device or the winning-H condition device during the operation of the type 1 BB is larger than the total number of lottery placements in the type 1 BB-C. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the inside of Type 1 BB-C, the smallest lottery number in the push order bell combination may be larger than the largest lottery number in the slash combination (845 in the figure). ..

In addition, in the change example 7 from the third embodiment, the case where the payout number of the symbol combination included in the slash combination is 1 and 15 is illustrated, but it is not limited to this, and 1 is 0. It may be changed to 2 sheets, 1 sheet may be changed to 2 sheets, or 15 sheets may be changed to 10 sheets. For example, when the number of payouts of the slash effective symbol combination is 1 and the number of payouts other than the slash effective symbol combination is 2 or 15, the number of payouts is 2 during the operation of Type 1 BB-C. A prize-J condition device composed of combinations (components) is provided, and a symbol combination (component) with one payout number is in the prize-I condition device, and a symbol combination (component) with 15 payouts is. The winning-H condition device is configured to include the symbol combination (component) having two payouts, and the winning-J condition device is configured to include the symbol combination (component) having two payouts. The number of lottery placements in the winning-J condition device during the operation of Type 1 BB is larger than the total number of lottery placements in the Type 1 BB-C, and the number of payouts is one symbol combination (component). For each, the number of lottery placements of the winning-I condition device during the operation of Type 1 BB is larger than the total number of lottery placements inside the Type 1 BB-C, and the number of payouts is 15 symbol combinations (components). ) May be configured so that the lottery number of the winning-H condition device during the operation of the type 1 BB is larger than the total number of lottery placements in the type 1 BB-C.

<< Example 8 of change from the third embodiment >>
Next, the configuration applicable to the present specification regarding the slash combination will be described as a modification 8 from the third embodiment.

<Direction when operating the sub input button>
First, FIG. 153 is an image diagram of an effect related to the operation of the sub input button SB in the modification 8 from the third embodiment.

<A: Winning-B1 winning, sub-input button operation before the first stop>
A in FIG. 153 is an image diagram of a game in which a winning-B1 winning combination, which is a slash role, is won in a three-card betting game in a predetermined gaming state, which is an advantageous section. As an example of a predetermined gaming state, there is a non-AT state which is an advantageous section inside the Type 1 BB-C. Further, in a predetermined gaming state, the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed so that the processing related to AT can be executed.

First, a push order navigation image indicating that the slash combination is won in a predetermined game state and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right (213) corresponding to the slash effective symbol combination is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, in the upper left area of the effect display device S40, the above-mentioned points (points accumulated in the non-AT state, which may be referred to as the number of points or the number of points display) are displayed. Further, although not shown, the navigation (instruction) is also displayed on the push order display device D270. The push order navigation image is a display of the push order navigation related to the sub control board S side, and the navigation (instruction) is a display of the push order navigation related to the main control board M side.

After that, the sub-input button SB is operated, and the effect display device S40 displays an explanatory image stating, "If you follow the push order navigation, you have a chance to earn points!". Further, the display of the explanatory image and the display of the point are configured so that the display areas can overlap, and the display of the explanatory image is displayed in front of the display of the point. The display area of the explanation image and the push order navigation image may be configured to overlap, and in such a configuration, the explanation image is configured to be displayed in front of the push order navigation image. Alternatively, the push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed in front of the explanatory image. In addition, displaying in the foreground may be referred to as having a high display priority.

In this way, in the game in which the slash combination is won in the predetermined game state, the sub-input button SB is operated between the time when the operation of the start lever D50 is received and the time when the operation of the stop button D40, which is the first stop, is received. , It is configured to display an explanatory image.

<B: Winning-B1 winning, sub-input button operation after the first stop>
B in FIG. 153 is an image diagram of a game in which a winning-B1 winning combination, which is a slash role, is won in a three-card betting game in a predetermined gaming state, which is an advantageous section, as in the case of A described above.

First, a push order navigation image indicating that the slash combination is won in a predetermined game state and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right (213) corresponding to the slash effective symbol combination is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, points are displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device S40.

After that, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the first stop, and the middle reel M52 is stopped. After that, the sub input button SB is operated, but the explanatory image is not displayed as shown in the figure.

As described above, in the change example 8 from the third embodiment, when the slash combination is won in the predetermined gaming state, the push order navigation image is displayed, and the stop is the first stop after the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted. An explanatory image is displayed if the sub-input button SB is operated before the operation of the button D40 is accepted. On the other hand, an explanatory image is displayed even if the sub-input button SB is operated after the operation of the stop button D40, which is the first stop, is accepted. Is configured not to be displayed. In the figure, the game in which the push order navigation corresponding to the "middle left and right" push order is executed is illustrated, but the push order navigation corresponding to another push order is also executed as the first stop. Even if the sub input button SB is operated after the operation of the stop button D40 is accepted, the explanatory image is not displayed. In addition, in a game in which the push order navigation corresponding to the push order of "middle left and right" is executed, a stop button different from the push order notified by the push order navigation is operated, such as operating the left stop button D41 as the first stop. Even in the case of (a mistake in the pressing order), the explanatory image is not displayed even if the sub input button SB is operated after the operation of the stop button D40, which is the first stop, is accepted.

As described above, the predetermined gaming state is, for example, an advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and is a non-AT state (non-AT gaming state, normal gaming state). In the game in which the slash combination is won in the AT state, the explanatory image may not be displayed no matter when the sub input button SB is operated.

When winning-B1 is won in a predetermined game state, the first stop operation is executed because the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of the middle 1st. Later, even when the sub input button SB is operated, the explanatory image is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the situation where the explanatory image is displayed even though there is no possibility that the slash valid symbol combination is already stopped and displayed in the running game, and it is a user-friendly game machine. Can be.

In addition, in the game in which the slash combination is won in the predetermined game state, when the sub input button SB is operated and the explanatory image is displayed, the stop operation is performed according to the push order notified by the push order navigation. Until the stop button that becomes the third stop (final stop) is operated (until the input is accepted or from on to off), the explanation image continues to be displayed, but the push order is different from the push order notified by the push order navigation. When the stop operation is performed, the explanatory image may be deleted at the time when the stop operation is performed (when the input is accepted or when the input is turned off).

Further, in the change example 8 from the third embodiment, the operation effect may be configured to be executable. The operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub-input button SB and, when the sub-input button SB is operated, notifies the player of the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state and the degree of expectation of winning a bonus.

<C: Winning-B1 winning, sub-input button operation after the 3rd stop>
C in FIG. 153 is an image diagram of a game in which a winning-B1 winning combination, which is a slash role, is won in a three-card betting game in a predetermined gaming state, which is an advantageous section.

First, the slash combination is won in a predetermined game state, the player stops all reels, and the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the above-mentioned points are displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device S40. After all the reels are stopped, the operation effect is executed, and an image (sometimes referred to as a button image A) prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, the sub input button SB is operated, and the effect display device S40 displays "CHANGE" suggesting the possibility of shifting to the AT state.

The operation effect can be executed even when a role other than the slash role is won. For example, the operation effect is configured to be executed even in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won. May be good.

As described above, in the modification 8 from the third embodiment, as the effect that can be executed by operating the sub input button SB, the display of the explanatory image and the operation effect are provided, and the sub input corresponding to the explanatory image is provided. By making the valid period of the button SB different from the valid period of the sub-input button SB corresponding to the operation effect, the player is confused as to what the effect after operating the sub-input button SB suggests. It can be difficult. Further, not only the valid period of the sub-input button SB but also the image (effect) displayed after operating the sub-input button SB is different to prevent the player from being confused.

<Other configurations>
Further, during the valid period of the sub-input button SB, the sub-input button LED (sometimes referred to as the LED of the sub-input button SB) provided on the sub-input button SB may be lit. When configured to, the sub-input button LED lights up in white during the valid period of the sub-input button SB corresponding to the explanatory image, and the sub-input button LED is white during the valid period corresponding to the operation effect. It may be configured so that it can be lit in red or rainbow colors. Further, the lighting color of the sub-input button LED during the valid period corresponding to the operation effect may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state, and the one with the highest degree of expectation of transition to the AT state is "rainbow color → red →". It may be "white". With this configuration, when the sub-input button LED lights up in red or rainbow color, the player has a high expectation that the lighting color corresponds to the operation effect and that the subsequent transition to the AT state is performed. You can recognize that. The lighting color of the sub-input button LED corresponding to the explanatory image (sometimes referred to as the emission color) may not be the same as the lighting color of the sub-input button LED corresponding to the operation effect. By recognizing the lighting color of the sub-input button LED, the player does not confuse the explanatory image with the operation effect.

Further, as the operation effect, an effect suggesting that the explanatory image is displayed by operating the sub input button SB may be executably configured. As an example, when performing an effect suggesting that an explanatory image is displayed by operating the sub input button SB, the effect display device S40 displays the button image B displayed as "PUSH". When the above-mentioned operation effect is executed in C of FIG. 153, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display the button image A displayed as “PUSH”. The display start timing of the button image B may be set between the reception of the operation of the start lever D50 and the reception of the operation of the stop button D40, which is the first stop, or the sub in the operation effect in which the button image B is displayed. The period during which the explanation image is displayed by operating the input button SB may be the period from the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50 to the acceptance of the operation of the stop button D40 which is the first stop.

Further, the button image B may have a smaller display area than the button image A, or may have a different shape. Further, the button image A may be configured so that the push order navigation image and the display area do not overlap, while the button image B may be configured so that the push order navigation image and the display area do not overlap.

In addition, in the change example 8 from the third embodiment, the above-mentioned menu screen may be configured to be displayable, and in such a configuration, the valid period of the sub input button SB corresponding to the menu screen ( The sub-input button LED may be configured to light up in white during the period (the period during which the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB). The sub-input button LED may be configured to blink, and the above-mentioned configuration can be applied as the lighting color to the lighting when the blinking is repeatedly turned on and off.

Further, the above-described configuration regarding the lighting color of the sub-input button LED may be applied to an image prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB displayed on the effect display device S40 when the operation effect is executed. That is, it may be configured to have a plurality of types of image display modes (display colors) for prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB displayed on the effect display device S40.

In addition, it has a touch panel that can be operated by the player touching (or bringing his / her hand close to it), and in a game in which the slash role is won in a predetermined game state, the first stop is performed after receiving the operation of the start lever D50. By operating the touch panel until the operation of the stop button D40 is received, the explanatory image may be displayed on the effect display device S40. When the touch panel is configured to have a sub-display device different from the effect display device S40, the explanatory image may also be configured to be displayed on the sub-display device.

Further, in the game in which the prize-B1 is won, when all the reels M50 are rotated and the explanatory image is displayed on the effect display device S40, the stop button different from the navigation (instruction) is operated (). If the pressing order is erroneous), the display of the effect display device S40 may be darkened (the visibility is low), or the display of the explanatory image may be erased.

In addition, the number of payouts when the slash valid symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the slash role is won is not accompanied by the number of payouts or the number of payouts smaller than the maximum specified number in the game state in which the slash role is won (the number of payouts is 0). It is preferable to configure the sheet). It should be noted that the configuration is applicable to all the embodiments in the present specification.

In addition, when the slash role is won in the non-AT state in the advantageous section and the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, the push order navigation is executed, and the stop operation different from the push order notified by the push order navigation is performed. If this is done, the display of the effect display device S40 will not be dimmed (it may be said that the brightness does not decrease and the visibility does not decrease), but the AT state in the advantageous section and the two bets are three in the BB. If the push order bell role is won in the betting game, the push order navigation is executed, and if the stop operation is different from the push order notified by the push order navigation, the time when the stop operation is performed (input is accepted). The display of the effect display device S40 may be darkened (may be referred to as a decrease in brightness or a decrease in visibility) at a time point or a time point from on to off).

In addition, when the slash role is won in the non-AT state in the advantageous section and the 3-card bet game inside the 2-card bet BB, the push order navigation is executed, and the stop operation different from the push order notified by the push order navigation is performed. If this is done, the display of the effect display device S40 will not be dimmed (it may be said that the brightness does not decrease and the visibility does not decrease), but the AT state in the advantageous section and the two bets are three in the BB. If the push order navigation is executed when the slash role is won in the betting game, and if the stop operation is different from the push order notified by the push order navigation, the stop operation is performed (when the input is accepted, Alternatively, the display of the effect display device S40 may be darkened (may be referred to as a decrease in brightness or a decrease in visibility) when the effect display device S40 is turned from on to off).

In addition, when the slash role is won in the AT state in the advantageous section and the 3-card betting game inside the 2-card bet BB, the push order navigation is executed, and the stop operation different from the push order notified by the push order navigation is performed. In that case, the display of the effect display device S40 does not go dark (it may be said that the brightness does not decrease and the visibility does not decrease), but it is in a non-AT state in the advantageous section and the two bets are three in the BB. If the push order navigation is executed when the slash role is won in the betting game, and if the stop operation is different from the push order notified by the push order navigation, the stop operation is performed (when the input is accepted, Alternatively, the display of the effect display device S40 may be darkened (may be referred to as a decrease in brightness or a decrease in visibility) when the effect display device S40 is turned from on to off).

In addition, if the push order navigation is executed in the game that wins the slash role or the push order bell role and the stop operation is different from the push order notified by the push order navigation, the time when the stop operation is performed (input is input). It may be configured to erase the push order navigation image displayed on the effect display device S40 at the time of acceptance or when it is turned off from on, or the navigation displayed on the push order display device D270. May be configured to continue to display.

<<< Fourth Embodiment >>>
Next, a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values (6 stages of setting 1, setting 2, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, and setting 6) and having a plurality of type 1 BBs (sometimes simply referred to as BB). The configurations applicable to the above are described in detail below. The fourth embodiment may be appropriately combined with other embodiments.

The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is one of six types, one type BB1, one type BB2, one type BB3, one type BB4, one type BB5, and one type BB6, as one type BB that can be won by a combination lottery. It has a BB, and the details will be described later, but most of the games are played inside any one type BB, inside the type 1 BB1, inside the type 1 BB2, inside the type 1 BB3, The ball output rate is different in the inside of the 1st class BB4, the inside of the 1st class BB5, and the inside of the 1st class BB6. In addition, in the inside of the 1st class BB, in the game in which the 1st class BB is won (the game in which the 1st class BB is won and the condition device of the 1st class BB is activated), the winning 1st class BB is operated. The combination is not stopped and displayed on the valid line, and the winning of the first class BB is carried over. In addition, it may be referred to as a prize for the type 1 BB that the symbol combination on which the type 1 BB operates is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Furthermore, the inside of the 1st class BB ends when the 1st class BB that has carried over the winning wins a prize. Further, once the condition device of the type 1 BB is operated, the operation is continued until the type 1 BB wins a prize (the above-mentioned carry-over state).

The ball ejection rate inside the 1st class BB increases in the order of 1st class BB1 inside <1st class BB2 inside <1st class BB3 inside <1st class BB4 inside <1st class BB5 inside <1st class BB6 inside. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that once one of the 1st class BBs is moved to the inside, the 1st class BB who has carried over the winning is not awarded except in a specific situation. The specific situation is, for example, in a game in which a predetermined lottery result (winning a predetermined small role) is obtained in which the number of lottery positions is 4/65536 in the combination lottery after adopting the small combination priority control. This is a case where the stop switch is operated in a predetermined pressing order and a predetermined pressing position (pressing timing) in which the winning combination is missed and the type 1 BB can win a prize. In addition, regarding the number of lottery placements, for 65532/65536 other than 4/65536, the lottery result is configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small winning combination), replay, etc. can be stopped and displayed. , When the stop switch is operated in such a way that small combinations (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small combinations) can be missed (pushing order, pressing position, etc.), the reel arrangement is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Type 1 BB cannot be pulled in. Class 1 BB does not win a prize. Further, the number of lottery slots does not have to be 4/65536, but it is preferable that there are few chances that the first class BB can win a prize. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a playability such that once the player moves into the inside of the type 1 BB, he / she continues to play in the inside of the type 1 BB.

It should be noted that the six types of 1-type BBs (1-type BB1 to 1-type BB6) that can be won in the non-internal manner in the gaming machine according to the 4th embodiment are not individually won, and are always small winning combinations (predetermined above). I try to win the prize in duplicate with the small role) and the replay role (sometimes called replay). For example, type 1 BB may be configured to overlap only with a small combination (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small combination), type 1 BB may be configured to overlap only with a replay combination, or type 1. The BB may be configured to overlap with a small winning combination (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small winning combination) or with a replaying combination. Then, after adopting the small winning combination priority control, when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode (pushing order, pressing position, etc.) in which the small winning combination (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small winning combination) can be missed, it corresponds to the first type BB. By making the reel arrangement so that the symbol combination cannot be drawn in, the type 1 BB is prevented from winning in the game in which the type 1 BB is won even in the non-inside. By doing so, for example, the player keeps aiming at the symbol combination in which the 1st class BB1 operates, and intentionally prevents the player from moving into the 1st class BB1 having a low ball output rate. You can prevent hitting. In the fourth embodiment, the six types of one-type BBs are always won in duplicate with the small winning combination (excluding the above-mentioned predetermined small winning combination), but the six types of ones are selected according to the specifications of the gaming machine. At least one of the seed BBs may be elected alone.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the type 1 BB carrying over the winning can be won in the inside of the type 1 BB, but the winning may not be performed. In this case, the type 1 BB is selected. It suffices if there is a chance to win the first class BB in the winning game. More specifically, in the game in which the 1st class BB is won, the 1st class BB may be won independently (not simultaneously won with other roles), or the bonus priority control may be adopted to form the 1st class BB. Even if a small winning combination is won at the same time, it may be configured to have a case where one type BB wins a prize. In addition, in order to prevent the 1st class BB from winning in the 1st class BB, for example, after adopting the small winning combination priority control, the total number of lottery placements (65536/65536) corresponds to the small winning combination, replay, etc. The symbol combination is configured to be a lottery result that can be stopped and displayed, and when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode (pushing order, pressing position, etc.) that can miss a small winning combination, a symbol combination corresponding to type 1 BB is drawn. It is possible to make a reel arrangement that cannot be inserted. By doing so, once the game is moved to the inside of one of the types BB, the game will be continued inside the type 1 BB except when the setting is changed and the game is moved to the non-inside. It is possible to provide a game with a stable rate.

Further, in any one of the 1st class BBs, the chances that the 1st class BB carrying over the winning may win may be increased (for example, in the winning combination lottery, the number of lottery placements may be the above-mentioned predetermined lottery result (4/65536). ) Is larger than 65/65536, which is a specific lottery result, etc.). By doing so, the chances of shifting to the inside of the non-internal are increased, so that the possibility of shifting to the inside of the type 1 BB having a relatively high ball ejection rate can be increased, and the player's willingness to play can be improved. If the player estimates that the ball is already inside the 1st class BB, which has a relatively high ball output rate, the game is played in the operation mode (pushing order, pressing position, etc.) of the stop switch in which the 1st class BB does not win a prize. By doing so, the game can be continued while still inside the current type 1 BB. In this way, the player can create a new playability such that the player can play while guessing which type 1 BB is staying inside and selecting whether or not to win the type 1 BB.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the types of type 1 BB are set to 6 types, which is the same as the number of set values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of type 1 BB may be provided, and the types of type 1 BB may be provided. May be less than the number of set values, or the type of type 1 BB may be larger than the number of set values.

In addition, it is suggested that the type 1 BB that has carried over the winning is a game that can be won, by the production on the liquid crystal display device (sometimes simply called liquid crystal display), the light emission of the lamp, the output of a specific sound, etc. at the start of the game. You may. By doing so, for example, if it is presumed that the player is inside the 1st class BB1 having a relatively low ball output rate, the 1st class BB1 is won (shifted to the 1st class BB1 operation), and 1 By returning to the non-internal inside after the operation of the seed BB is completed, it can be expected that the type 1 BB6 that can be transferred to the inside of the type 1 BB6 having a relatively high ball ejection rate can be won, and the ball ejection rate is relatively high. When it is presumed that the inside of the 1st class BB6 is inside, it is possible to create a playability such that the inside of the 1st class BB6 is maintained without winning the 1st class BB6.

The RT transition of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the RTs are non-RT (inside non-internal), RT1 (inside type 1 BB1), RT2 (inside type 1 BB2), and RT3 (inside type 1 BB3). Middle), RT4 (inside type 1 BB4), RT5 (inside type 1 BB5), RT6 (inside type 1 BB6), RT7 (inside type 1 BB1), RT8 (inside type 1 BB2), RT9 (inside type 1 BB2) It has 1st class BB3 operating), RT10 (1st class BB4 operating), RT11 (1st class BB5 operating), and RT12 (1st class BB6 operating).

If one of the 1st class BB1 to the 1st class BB6 is won in the non-RT, the condition device of the winning 1st class BB is activated, and depending on the type of the 1st class BB in which the condition device is activated, the RT1 to RT6 are performed at the end of the game. It is possible to shift to either (any of (1) to (6) in FIG. 154), and then, if one type BB that has carried over the winning in any of RT1 to RT6 wins, it wins 1 The seed BB is activated, and depending on the type of the activated type 1 BB, it is possible to shift to any of RT7 to RT12 at the end of the game (any of (7) to (12) in FIG. 154). ). Then, in any of RT7 to RT12, when the end condition of the operating type 1 BB is satisfied and the type 1 BB ends, it is possible to shift to the non-RT at the end of the game ((FIG. 154). 13)). In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as described above, since the type 1 BB is prevented from winning in the game that is not inside and the type 1 BB is won, any one of RT7 to RT12 is directly applied from the non-RT. However, if the winning 1st class BB can win a prize in the game in which the 1st class BB wins, it may be possible to directly shift from the non-RT to the RT7 to RT12.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the information on the condition device of the first-class BB operating by changing the setting and the information on the operating first-class BB are cleared, and the first game after the setting change is non-RT. I try to start from. Furthermore, when a game is executed in a non-RT and one of the types BB is inside, the manager of the game store can confirm which one type BB is inside (details are available). Will be described later). By doing so, the manager of the amusement shop will play until it moves into one of the 1st class BBs after changing the setting, and if it does not move into the desired 1st class BB, the setting will be changed again. By repeating such work, it is possible to move the product into the desired type 1 BB and then start the business.

In addition, after changing the settings, the manager of the game store will not execute the game, and by starting the business non-RT, it will shift to either the inside of the 1st class BB1 or the inside of the 1st class BB6 depending on the game result of the player. Amusement stores can operate in a variety of ways, as it is possible to create possible situations.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a lottery regarding the payout rate (the number of ceiling games (the maximum number of games during the non-AT period)) is selected according to which one of the 1st BB1 to 1st BB6 is inside the BB. (Sometimes referred to as) decision lottery, AT first hit lottery (lottery that can be executed when it is an advantageous section and non-AT, lottery whether to shift to AT), additional lottery during AT (AT during AT) This is a lottery related to the extension of the above, and is sometimes referred to as an AT additional lottery, an AT game number additional lottery), a CZ lottery, a high-probability transition lottery, etc.). By doing so, the ball ejection rate is increased in the order of <1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <... <1 type BB6 inside. This will be described in detail below. The payout rate is a value calculated by dividing the number of OUTs (number of payouts) by the number of INs (number of bets). The payout rate in the fourth embodiment is a design payout rate when playing with a game method that can obtain the maximum payout rate, and is a payout rate from the start to the end of one game state. It may be the ball rate, or the average ball output rate per game in one game state (for example, the total OUT when playing 17,500 times in one game state where the number of INs required for one game is 3). Assuming that the number of cards is 60375, the average number of OUTs per game is 3.45 (60375/17500), and the average payout rate per game is 115 (3.45 / 3 × 100)%. May be.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in order to make a difference in the lottery regarding the payout rate depending on which type BB is inside, depending on the combination of the condition devices operating in one game. A lottery will be held regarding the payout rate. For example, in the game in which the cherry is won in the inside of the 1st class BB1, the winning of the 1st class BB1 is carried over, so that the operating condition devices are described as the 1st class BB1 and the cherry (hereinafter, 1st class BB + cherry). ), And a lottery regarding the payout rate such as the above-mentioned ceiling game number determination lottery is performed according to the combination of the condition devices of 1 type BB1 + cherry. Further, in the game in which the cherry is won in the inside of the type 1 BB6, the operating condition device is the type 1 BB6 + cherry, and the above-mentioned ceiling game number determination lottery etc. is issued according to the combination of the condition devices of the type 1 BB6 + cherry. A lottery will be held regarding the ball rate. In this way, even if the same cherry is won, the combination of operating conditional devices differs depending on which one type BB is inside (which one type BB winning is carried over). Therefore, it is possible to make the lottery regarding the payout rate (such as the winning probability of the first AT) different. If any of the winning combinations (type 1 BB, small winning combination, replaying combination, etc.) is won in the winning combination lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated. The condition device according to the type 1 BB operates from the time when the type 1 BB operates until the type 1 BB wins a prize. On the other hand, the condition device related to the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination ends its operation at the end of the game in which the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination is won, regardless of whether or not there is a prize.

FIG. 155 describes an example of the AT first hit lottery according to the combination of the conditional devices (it can be executed when it is an advantageous section and is not inside and the type 1 BB is not operating). In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB1 + cherry, AT is won at 10/240 and AT is not won at 230/240. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB2 + cherry, the AT is won at 20/240, and the AT is not won at 220/240. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB3 + cherry, AT is won at 30/240 and AT is not won at 210/240. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB4 + cherry, the AT is won at 40/240 and the AT is not won at 200/240. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB5 + cherry, the AT is won at 50/240 and the AT is not won at 190/240. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB6 + cherry, the AT is won at 60/240 and the AT is not won at 180/240. In this way, in the game in which the same cherry is won, the AT first hit lottery is given preferential treatment in the order of 1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <... <1 type BB6 inside.

As a lottery regarding the payout rate that differs depending on the combination of operating condition devices, one of a ceiling game number determination lottery, an AT first hit lottery, an additional lottery during AT, a CZ lottery, and a high probability transition lottery. It may be one, or a plurality may be different.

FIG. 156 shows an example of a lottery for determining the number of ceiling games according to the combination of conditional devices. If the combination of condition devices is 1 type BB1 + replay game and the lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, 256 games on the ceiling are selected on 20/240, 512 games on the ceiling are selected on 30/240, and 190/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. If the combination of condition devices is a type 1 BB2 + replay game and a lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, the ceiling 256 games are selected at 40/240, the ceiling 512 games are selected at 40/240, and the ceiling games are selected at 160/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. If the combination of condition devices is a type 1 BB3 + replay game and a lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, the ceiling 256 games are selected at 60/240, the ceiling 512 games are selected at 50/240, and the ceiling games are selected at 130/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. If the combination of condition devices is a type 1 BB4 + replay game and a lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, the ceiling 256 games are selected at 80/240, the ceiling 512 games are selected at 60/240, and the ceiling games are selected at 100/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. If the combination of condition devices is a type 1 BB5 + replay game and a lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, the ceiling 256 games are selected at 100/240, the ceiling 512 games are selected at 70/240, and the ceiling games are selected at 70/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. If the combination of condition devices is a type 1 BB6 + replay game and a lottery to determine the number of ceiling games is performed, the ceiling 256 games are selected at 140/240, the ceiling 512 games are selected at 80/240, and the ceiling games are selected at 20/240. Ceiling 768 games are selected. In this way, the ratio determined for the ceiling 256 games in the order of <1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <... <1 type BB6 inside (in other words, a relatively low number of ceiling games is determined). The ratio) is high, and the number of ceiling games is given preferential treatment. In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the lottery for determining the number of ceiling games is performed in the first game of the advantageous section. That is, when the ceiling game number determination lottery decides on the ceiling 256 games, AT is started or the sign of AT winning is started when 256 games are exhausted after newly shifting to the advantageous section. It is configured so that an event that is advantageous to the player occurs. Further, the lottery for determining the number of ceiling games may be configured to be executed in addition to the first game of the advantageous section. For example, the lottery may be executed even when the advantageous section continues in the first game after the end of AT. It may be configured.

FIG. 157 describes an example of an additional lottery for the number of AT games during AT (excluding special states such as so-called additional special zones and continuous battles) according to the combination of conditional devices. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is 1 type BB1 + cherry, 120/240 is not added and 120/240 is added. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB2 + cherry, 100/240 is not added and 140/240 is added. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB3 + cherry, 80/240 is not added and 160/240 is added. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB4 + cherry, 60/240 is not added and 180/240 is added. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB5 + cherry, 40/240 is not added and 200/240 is added. In the game where the combination of the condition devices is type 1 BB6 + cherry, there is no addition at 20/240 and addition at 220/240. In this way, the number of AT games is easily added in the order of <1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <... <1 type BB6 inside. Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the expected value of the number of additional games when the number of AT games is determined is also in the order of <1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside << ... <1 type BB6 inside. I try to make it higher. In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of AT games differs depending on the combination of the operating condition devices is exemplified, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the gaming machine operates. The expected value (average value) of the number of additional games may be different depending on the combination of the existing condition devices.

In the non-internal, the ball ejection rate is set to be higher than the six RT states in the inside of the type 1 BB1 to the inside of the type 1 BB6. By doing so, when the player starts the game from inside the non-inside, a lottery regarding the payout rate that is more advantageous than the inside of the 1st class BB1 to the inside of the 1st class BB6 can be received. It is possible to improve the player's willingness to play in. Further, in the lottery regarding the payout rate in the non-internal, the payout rate may be set to be less than or equal to the inside of the first type BB1. In addition to after changing the settings or after the operation of one of the types BB is completed, even if some kind of fraud such as inserting or removing the RAM is performed, it will be transferred to the non-internal, so a lottery regarding the ball output rate in the non-internal will be issued. By configuring the ball rate to be less than or equal to the inside of Type 1 BB1, it is possible to prevent the amusement shop from suffering a significant disadvantage even if fraud is committed.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a difference is provided in the lottery regarding the payout rate by using a combination of condition devices that changes depending on which type BB is inside, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Instead of determining which combination of operating condition devices is and executing a lottery regarding the payout rate, the stop control is changed according to the combination of operating condition devices (same stop order). And even when the stop operation timing is set, the symbol combination that stops at the effective line may differ depending on the combination of the operating condition devices), and a lottery regarding the payout rate is performed based on the symbol combination that stops at the effective line. May be good.

Specifically, for example, if the replay A is won inside the 1st class BB1, the "replay / replay / replay" is stopped at the effective line, and if the replay A is won inside the 1st class BB6, the "cherry" is used.・ Stop "Replay / Replay" at the effective line. Also, if the replay B is won inside the 1st class BB1, the "cherry replay replay" is stopped at the effective line, and if the replay B is won inside the 1st class BB6, the "cherry replay replay" is stopped. Stop at the valid line. And, in the game that won either re-game A or re-game B, it is better when "cherry replay replay" is stopped on the effective line than when "replay replay replay" is stopped on the effective line. Preferential treatment for lottery regarding ball output rate. It should be noted that the winning probabilities in the winning combination lottery of the re-game A and the re-game B do not change according to the RT. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the lottery regarding the payout rate while making the winning probabilities of the re-game A and the re-game B the same in the inside of the type 1 BB1 to the inside of the type 1 BB6.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, there is a difference in the lottery regarding the payout rate depending on which type 1 BB is inside (note that the payout inside each type 1 BB is provided). As a specific example of the rate, as shown in FIG. 158), and by making the winning probabilities of the first-class BB1 to the first-class BB6 in the combination lottery different according to the set value, the transition is made according to the setting. The inside of the easy-to-use type 1 BB is different, and the ball ejection rate is substantially different according to the set value. By doing so, the ball ejection rate is increased in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <... <setting 6 (Note that, as a specific example of the ball ejection rate of each set value, FIG. 159 shows. It is shown.).

FIG. 160 shows the winning probability of one type BB for each set value in the winning combination lottery. Settings 1 to 6 are all 32768/65536 so that one of the 1st class BB1 and the 1st class BB6 can be won. Then, as shown in FIG. 160, the setting 1 is the easiest to win the 1st class BB1, the setting 2 is the easiest to win the 1st class BB2, the setting 3 is the easiest to win the 1st class BB3, and the setting 4 is the 1st class BB4. The setting 5 is the easiest to win the 1st class BB5, and the setting 6 is the easiest to win the 1st class BB6. In addition, even-numbered settings (setting 2, setting 4, setting 6) are easy to win even-numbered type 1 BB (type 1 BB2, type 1 BB4, type 1 BB6), and odd-numbered settings (setting 1, setting 3, setting 5). Makes it easier to win an odd number of 1st class BB (1st class BB1, 1st class BB3, 1st class BB5).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the ball ejection rate in each type 1 BB is the same regardless of the set value. In other words, if they are in the same RT state (one of the inside of Type 1 BB1, the inside of Type 1 BB2, the inside of Type 1 BB3, the inside of Type 1 BB4, the inside of Type 1 BB5, and the inside of Type 1 BB6). , The ball output rate is the same regardless of which set value is set. By doing so, unless you change the setting once you are inside one of the types BB, or you win a prize and move it to the non-inside again and move it to the inside of a different type BB. Since the ball ejection rate is constant, it is possible to create a playability in which the ball ejection rate fluctuates depending on the luck of the player regardless of the set value. In addition, for example, by setting a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination according to the set value (in addition, there is no setting difference in the ball ejection rate related to AT), the setting difference is set in the ball ejection rate inside each type 1 BB. May be provided. By doing so, it is possible for the player to give a ball-out benefit to playing at the so-called high setting (generally, setting 4 to setting 6).

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the ball ejection rate in each type 1 BB is the same regardless of the set value, and as described above, which type 1 BB is inside. Since there is a difference in the lottery regarding the payout rate according to the above, for example, the payout rate in the case of setting 1 and inside the type 1 BB6 is the ball payout rate in the case of setting 6 and inside the type 1 BB1. Will be higher than. Further, the ball ejection rate when the setting 1 is inside the type 1 BB1 is lower than the ball ejection rate when the setting 6 is inside the class 1 BB6. In this way, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, not only which set value is set, but also the ball ejection rate can be changed depending on which one type BB is inside, which is an unprecedented playability. Can be created.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in the setting confirmation state, which one type BB is won (whether it is inside the type 1 BB1 to inside the type 1 BB6 or inside the non-inside). I am trying to confirm it. The setting confirmation state can be transferred by the manager of the game store having the above-mentioned setting key, but cannot be transferred by the player who does not have the setting key.

Specifically, which one type BB has been won (whether it is inside the type 1 BB1 to inside the type 1 BB6 or inside the non-inside) is displayed on the liquid crystal in the setting confirmation state. , Not limited to this, it may be displayed on the acquired number display or the credit number display, or may be displayed by providing a dedicated display next to the set value display. Further, the set value and the type 1 BB may be alternately displayed on the set value display. By making it possible to confirm which type BB has been won in the setting confirmation state, the manager of the game store can easily confirm which type BB has been won, so that the ball is released. If you want to keep the rate low, you can start the business inside the desired type 1 BB by changing the settings until it is inside the type 1 BB1. In addition, even if the ball output rate is too high compared to the inside of the 1st class BB that should have been set, it can be easily confirmed, so it is possible to quickly grasp whether it is due to fraud, failure, etc. or the player's luck. It has the effect of preventing the amusement store from suffering unintended disadvantages due to fraud or breakdown.

In addition, as a game state that can be confirmed by the administrator of the game store in the setting confirmation state, only the inside of the type 1 BB1 to the inside of the type 1 BB6 and the inside of the non-inside can be confirmed, and other game states cannot be confirmed (hidden). ), Or other gaming states such as when Type 1 BB is operating may be configured so that it can be confirmed.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects suggesting which of settings 1 to 6 are set and setting confirmation effects that are executed only with specific set values can be executed. I am doing it. Here, as the setting suggestion effect, for example, a setting suggestion effect in which the execution ratio increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 ... <setting 6 may be executed, or an odd number setting is even. A setting suggestion effect may be executed so that the execution rate is higher than the setting.

Further, as the setting confirmation effect, for example, a setting confirmation effect may be executed such that a setting other than the setting 1 (any of the setting 2 to the setting 6) is confirmed when the setting 1 is not executed. A setting confirmation effect may be executed such that the even number setting is confirmed at the time of execution because the odd number setting is not executed. Furthermore, the difference in the execution ratio depending on the set value may have a magnitude relationship depending on the type of the setting suggestion effect. For example, when comparing the execution rate of the setting 1 of the setting suggestion effect α and the execution rate of the setting 6, the setting 6 is twice as easy to be executed as the setting 1, and the execution rate of the setting 1 of the setting suggestion effect β and the setting 6 Compared with the execution rate of, setting 6 is 5 times more likely to be executed than setting 1.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect and the setting confirmation effect, the type 1 BB suggestion effect that suggests which of the type 1 BB1 to the type 1 BB6 is inside the type 1 BB and the type 1 BB suggestion effect that is performed only inside the specific type 1 BB1 It is possible to execute multiple types of seed BB final effects. Here, as a type 1 BB suggestion effect, for example, one type in which the execution rate increases in the order of 1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <1 type BB3 inside <... <1 type BB6 inside. The BB suggestion effect may be executed, or the type 1 BB suggestion effect may be executed so that the execution ratio is higher in the inside of the odd-numbered type 1 BB than in the inside of the even-numbered type 1 BB. Further, as a type 1 BB confirmation effect, for example, when it is executed by not being executed inside the type 1 BB1, it is confirmed other than inside the type 1 BB1 (any of the inside of the type 1 BB2 to the inside of the type 1 BB6). You may execute the 1st class BB confirmation effect such as May be executed. Furthermore, there may be a magnitude relationship with the difference in the execution ratio depending on which type BB is inside, depending on the type of the type 1 BB suggestion effect. For example, comparing the execution rate inside the 1st class BB1 and the execution rate inside the 1st class BB6 of the 1st class BB suggestion effect α, the inside of the 1st class BB6 is twice as likely to be executed as the inside of the 1st class BB1. Comparing the execution rate inside the 1st class BB1 and the execution rate inside the 1st class BB6 of the 1st class BB suggestion effect β, it is said that the inside of the 1st class BB6 is 5 times more likely to be executed than the inside of the 1st class BB1. It is a big and small relationship.

As an execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, the setting confirmation effect, the type 1 BB suggestion effect, and the type 1 BB final effect, a predetermined single picture (a moving image that looks like a moving single picture) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Alternatively, the character may be displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal display (it may be the edge of the liquid crystal such as the lower left, upper right, upper left, etc.) so as not to reduce the visibility of the effect during execution, or the total acquisition during AT. When the number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 456, 666, etc.), "○○○ sheets OVER!" (○○○ is an arbitrary number and is a predetermined number. For example, if it is 456, setting 4, setting. 5 or setting 6 is confirmed, and if it is 666, setting 6 is confirmed, etc.) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display. Further, a predetermined line or a predetermined sound may be output from the speaker, or the effect lamp may be made to emit light in a specific color.

As the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect, the setting confirmation effect, the 1st type BB suggestion effect, and the 1st type BB confirmation effect, at the end of the game in which the AT winning is notified or the AT end screen (the game in which one AT ends or one AT). It may be executed at the timing when the total number of acquisitions and the total number of games at the AT is displayed as the end screen in the next game after the game in which the game ends. Further, it may be executed at any timing of the game in the normal section. Needless to say, these setting suggestion effect, setting confirmation effect, type 1 BB suggestion effect, and type 1 BB final effect can be applied to other embodiments of the present specification.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the advantageous section lamp is set at the time of AT start (for example, at the time of operating the start switch of the game displaying the AT start screen, at the time of operating the start switch of the game shifted during AT preparation, or one advantage. It is lit at the time of operating the start switch of the game in which the push order navigation is performed first after shifting to the section. If the advantageous section lamp is turned on at the end of the game in which one advantageous section is won, the setting change will be made if the advantageous section lamp is lit when the player starts the game immediately after the opening of the game store. There is a risk that the motivation for playing will be reduced because there is a high possibility that the game has not been played or the game has been played until the game store has turned several games after changing the setting and is inside one of the BBs. In order to prevent this, the advantageous section lamp is turned on at the start of AT. Although details are not described, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous section is determined in about 1 / 1.2 in one game in the normal section, so the manager of the gaming store changes the setting. If you play until you move into one of the BBs later, it is highly possible that you have moved to an advantageous section.

On the other hand, the advantageous section lamp may be turned on at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is won. In this case, the setting is changed and the type 1 BB is not lit when the player starts the game. It is more likely that you are inside, and you can improve your motivation to play.

As described above, the technical contents of the respective embodiments described for explaining the invention may be appropriately combined with each other.

<< Change example 1 from the fourth embodiment >>
In the fourth embodiment, the set value has a plurality of stages (6 stages of setting 1, setting 2, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, and setting 6), and one type BB (sometimes simply referred to as BB) is provided. Although the configuration applicable to the plurality of gaming machines has been described in detail, such a configuration is not limited to the fourth embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment, which has a plurality of set values and is applicable to a gaming machine having a plurality of type 1 BBs, is set as a change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and is different from the fourth embodiment. The points will be described in detail below. The modification 1 from the fourth embodiment may be appropriately combined with other embodiments.

The gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment, as the first-class BB that can be won by the combination lottery, the first-class BB1, the first-class BB2, the first-class BB3, and the first-class BB4. It has 6 types of 1 type BB of 1 type BB5 and 1 type BB6, and most of the games are played inside any 1 type BB. In addition, the ball ejection rates are different in the inside of the 1st class BB1, the inside of the 1st class BB2, the inside of the 1st class BB4, the inside of the 1st class BB5, and the inside of the 1st class BB6.

Further, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, if the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state (sometimes referred to as the non-AT gaming state), the AT state (referred to as the AT gaming state) is subsequently won. It may be configured to move to).

<Comparison of stop control inside Type 1 BB1 and inside Type 1 BB2>
First, FIG. 161 is a diagram relating to control when a slash combination is won. In the figure, only the case where the prize-B1 and the prize-B2 are won is illustrated. Further, in the figure, the stop control when the game is executed by betting three cards is illustrated.

Winning-B1 and winning-B2 are the above-mentioned push order slash combinations, and winning 17 and winning 18 in the constituent elements are slash-effective symbol combinations. As described above, a symbol combination that can execute a process related to AT (for example, AT lottery) when the slash combination is won in the non-AT state is referred to as a slash effective symbol combination.

Regarding the "pushing order" in the figure, as described above, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", "left reel M51 →". It means to stop in the push order of "middle reel M52 → right reel M53".

If you win the prize-B1 inside the Type 1 BB1, you can stop it in the "middle left / right" or "middle right / left" push order (sometimes called the middle 1st push order), and the slash valid symbol will be displayed. The combination of winning 17 or winning 18 will be stopped and displayed at 1/1. Since winning-B1 is a push order slash role, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the slash is valid at 1/1 regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The combination is configured to stop and display. For other push orders, the combination of components that can be stopped and displayed does not differ depending on the stop operation timing.

In addition, in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB1, if the winning-B2 is won, the slash valid symbol combination (winning 17 or winning 18) is not stopped and displayed regardless of the push order. It is configured as. Since it is configured in this way, if a winning-B1 is won in a three-card betting game that is inside the Type 1 BB1, is an advantageous section, and is executed in a non-AT state, a slash valid symbol combination is used. The AT lottery can be executed by displaying the stop display, but when the winning-B2 is won, the AT lottery is not executed because the slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. In addition, in the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, the game is executed by betting three cards in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, and when the slash combination is won, the slash valid symbol combination is stopped. It is configured to navigate (instruct) the displayable push order. In addition, when the game is executed by betting three cards in an advantageous section and in a non-AT state, the expected value considering whether or not the AT lottery is executed, the winning probability of the AT lottery, the number of payouts based on the winning, etc. The profitability of the player) is higher in the slash-effective symbol combination than in the symbol combinations other than the slash-effective symbol combination.

Next, in the three-card betting game inside the first type BB2, when the winning-B1 is won, the slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed regardless of the push order.

In addition, in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2, if the winning-B2 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the winning is a slash effective symbol combination. 17 or winning 18 will be stopped and displayed at 1/1. In addition, since winning-B2 is a push order slash role, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the slash is valid at 1/1 regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The symbol combination is configured to stop and display. For other push orders, the combination of components that can be stopped and displayed does not differ at the stop operation timing.

Since it is configured in this way, in a three-card betting game that is inside the Type 1 BB2, is an advantageous section, and is executed in a non-AT state, if a prize-B2 is won, a slash effective symbol combination is used. The AT lottery can be executed by displaying the stop display, but when the winning-B1 is won, the AT lottery is not executed because the slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

In the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, the AT lottery is executed based on the stopped-displayed symbol (whether or not the AT lottery is executed with reference to the stopped-displayed symbol and the winning probability of the AT lottery are determined. (Determined), and in the predetermined game state, when the winning 17 or the winning 18 is stopped and displayed in the game which won the winning-B1, the winning 17 or the winning 18 is displayed in the game which won the winning-B2. It is configured to execute the same AT lottery (AT lottery with the same winning probability) in the case of the stop display.

In addition, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the stop control is determined based on (combination) of the operating condition devices, and the three-card betting game inside the type 1 BB1 is used. If the prize-B1 is won, the conditional device operating in the game is "Type 1 BB1 + Prize-B1", and the prize-B1 is won in the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB2. In that case, the conditional device operating in the game is "Type 1 BB2 + Winning-B1", and since the operating conditional device is different, even if the same winning-B1 is won. The stop control can be different. In addition, if a winning-B2 is won in a three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB1, the conditional device operating in the game becomes "Type 1 BB1 + Winning-B2", and the inside of the Type 1 BB2. If you win the prize-B2 in the three-card betting game, the condition device operating in the game is "Type 1 BB2 + prize-B2", and the operating condition device is different. , Even if the same prize-B2 is won, the stop control may be different.

In this way, the AT lottery is executed by winning the winning-B1 in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB1, while the winning-B2 is won in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2. By doing so, the AT lottery is executed. Then, as shown in the figure, the lottery number of winning-B1 is 1000 (since the denominator is 65536, the winning probability is 1000/65536), and the lottery number of winning-B2 is 1100 (since the denominator is 65536, the winning is won). Since the probability is 1100/65536), the probability that the AT lottery will be executed is higher inside the Type 1 BB2 than inside the Type 1 BB1, in other words, inside the Type 1 BB2. It can be configured so that the payout rate (or the winning probability of the AT lottery) is higher than that in the type 1 BB1. Although not shown, the winning probability of the AT lottery executed by winning a conditional device other than winning-B1 or winning-B2 may be different between the inside of the type 1 BB1 and the inside of the type 1 BB2. ..

<Comparison of stop control in 6 gaming states>
Further, in FIG. 161, only the case where the two slash combinations of winning-B1 and winning-B2 are won is illustrated, but this is just an example, and in the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, the slashing combination is used. It has 6 types.

As shown in FIG. 162, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, there are six slash combinations of winning-B1 to winning-B6 as slashing combinations, and winning-B1 and winning in FIG. 161. As described in detail for -B2, the winning-B3 to the winning-B6 are also configured so that the stop control can be different depending on the operating condition device. Further, as described above, as the 1st class BB, there are 6 1st class BBs of the 1st class BB1 to the 1st class BB6.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB1, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B1 is won, and when the winning-B2-winning-B6 is won, the slash valid symbol combination can be displayed. Does not stop and display. In addition, the "push order bell" in the figure means that the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and 1 or 15 cards are paid out ("cheap" or "high"). Indicates that the stop display is displayed.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B2 is won, and when the winning-B1 and the winning-B3 to the winning-B6 are won. The slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB3, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B3 is won, and the winning-B1 to winning-B2 and the winning-B4 to winning-B6 are won. If this is done, the slash valid symbol combination will not be stopped and displayed.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB4, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B4 is won, and the winning-B1 to winning-B3 and the winning-B5 to winning-B6 are won. If this is done, the slash valid symbol combination will not be stopped and displayed.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB5, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B5 is won, and when the winning-B1 to the winning-B4 and the winning-B6 are won. The slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

In the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB6, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B6 is won, and when the winning-B1 to winning-B5 is won, the slash valid symbol combination can be displayed. Does not stop and display.

As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the stop control at the time of winning the slash combination may be different depending on which type BB is inside. Further, as described above in FIG. 161, by making the lottery numbers of winning-B1 to winning-B6 different from each other, the payout rate (or the winning probability of the AT lottery) depends on which type of BB is inside. Can be configured to be different.

More specifically, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the lottery numbers are: winning-B1: 1000, winning-B2: 1100, winning-B3: 1200, winning-B4: 1300, winning-B5. It is 1400, prize-B6: 1500, and from the one with the smallest number of lottery, it becomes "Prize-B1 <Prize-B2 <Prize-B3 <Prize-B4 <Prize-B5 <Prize-B6". There is. Then, in the case where the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the three-card betting game (either inside the type 1 BB1 to inside the type 1 BB6) executed in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state. Is configured to execute an AT lottery with the same winning probability, so that the ball output rate (or the winning probability of the AT lottery) is as low as "1 type BB1 inside <1 type BB2 inside <1". Inside the species BB3 <inside the inside of the type 1 BB4 <inside the inside of the type 1 BB5 <inside the inside of the type 1 BB6 ".

In addition, also in the change example 1 from the 4th embodiment, by making the winning probability of the 1st class BB different depending on the set value, the stay in the 1st class BB1 inside to the 1st class BB6 inside, as in the 4th embodiment. The ratio may be configured to differ depending on the set value.

Further, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the number of lottery slots for the slash role is different so that the payout rate can be different for each type BB inside, but this is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured so that the ball ejection rate may differ for each type BB inside by configuring as follows. In the following, as in FIG. 161, only the inside of the 1st class BB1 and the inside of the 1st class BB2 will be described in detail as the winning condition devices, the winning-B1 and the winning-B2, and the inside of the 1st class BB. ..

<Structure 1>
Winning in a 3-card betting game inside Type 1 BB1-The winning probability of the AT lottery executed when winning 17 or winning 18 is stopped and displayed in the game that won B1 and 3 inside Type 1 BB2. Winning in a piece betting game-The winning probability of the AT lottery executed when the winning 17 or the winning 18 is stopped and displayed in the game won in B2 is different.

With this configuration, even if the player visually recognizes the symbol combination of the slash effective symbol combination, it is difficult to guess which type BB is staying inside.

<Structure 2>
Winning in a 3-card betting game inside Type 1 BB1-In a game that wins B1, winnings 17-18 will be stopped and displayed as a slash effective symbol combination, while winning a prize in a 3-card betting game inside Type 1 BB2. -In the game that wins B2, winnings 78 to 85 are stopped and displayed as a slash effective symbol combination, in other words, a 3-card bet game inside the 1st class BB1 and a 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2. The slash effective symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed in the game that won the slash role is different.

With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game while guessing the current set value and which type BB is staying inside by visually recognizing the slash effective symbol combination. The above configuration is just an example, and the same slash effective symbol combination may be stopped and displayed in both the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB1 and the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2, but the prize 17 It may be configured so that the ratio of the stop display between 18 and the winning 78-85 is different.

<Structure 3>
In the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB1, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed regardless of whether the game wins the prize-B1 or the game that wins the prize-B2. In the card betting game, the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in both the winning-B1 winning game and the winning-B2 winning game. Winning in a 3-card betting game inside Type 1 BB1-A game in which a slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a game that wins B1-and a game that wins-B1 in a 3-card betting game inside Type 1 BB2. The winning probability of the AT lottery is different depending on whether the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed (and / or the winning in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB1-the slash valid symbol combination in the game won in B2. The winning probability of the AT lottery differs depending on whether the display is stopped or the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game that won the prize in the 3-card betting game inside the 1st class BB2-B2).

In addition, in the three-card betting game inside the Type 1 BB2, the slash valid symbol combination may be stopped and displayed in both the winning-B1 winning game and the winning-B2 winning game, while the three-card betting inside the Type 1 BB1. In the game, the slash valid symbol combination may be stopped and displayed only in the game in which the winning-B1 is won (or the game in which the winning-B2 is won).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide new playability according to the type of the winning type 1 BB.

When such a configuration is applied to a configuration having six types 1 BB inside, the configuration may be as follows. In the following, only the case of setting 1 will be described in detail.

(1) The number of lottery slots for winning-B1 to winning-B6 is 1000, which is the same.
(2) The winning probability of the AT lottery when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed is the same for winning-B1 to winning-B6.
(3) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside the Type 1 BB1 and is executed in a non-AT state, the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning-B1 is won.
(4) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside Type 1 BB2, and is executed in a non-AT state, the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed when winning-B1 or winning-B2 is won. obtain.
(5) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside Type 1 BB3, and is executed in a non-AT state, a slash valid symbol combination is obtained when winning-B1, winning-B2, or winning-B3 is won. Can be stopped and displayed.
(6) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside the Type 1 BB4, and is executed in a non-AT state, if the prize-B1, the prize-B2, the prize-B3, or the prize-B4 is won. Slash-enabled symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed.
(7) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside the Type 1 BB5, and is executed in a non-AT state, the prize-B1, the prize-B2, the prize-B3, the prize-B4, or the prize-B5 If you win, the slash valid symbol combination may be stopped and displayed.
(8) In a three-card betting game that is an advantageous section, is inside the Type 1 BB6, and is executed in a non-AT state, the prize-B1, the prize-B2, the prize-B3, the prize-B4, the prize-B5 or Winning-If you win B6, the slash valid symbol combination may be stopped and displayed.

By configuring as described above, the ball output rate (or the winning probability of the AT lottery) can be changed from the lowest to the "1st class BB1 inside <1st class BB2 inside <1st class BB3 inside <1st class BB4 inside". Medium <inside type 1 BB5 <inside type 1 BB6 ".

In addition, in the change example 1 from the 4th embodiment, it is configured to have 6 types of slash combinations and 6 types of 1 type BB, but it is only an example, and the number of types of slash combinations and the number of types of 1 type BB are used. May be the same, the number of types of the slash role may be larger than the number of types of the 1st class BB, or the number of types of the 1st class BB may be larger than the number of types of the slash role. good.

It should be noted that also in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the configurations such as the setting suggestion effect, the setting confirmation effect, the type 1 BB suggestion effect, and the type 1 BB final effect described in detail in the fourth embodiment can be applied. I will add that there is.

<<< Fifth Embodiment >>>
Next, the configuration applicable to the present specification regarding the slash combination will be described as the fifth embodiment, and in the description thereof, the same reference numerals and wording are used in the same places as in each of the above-described embodiments. The description shall be omitted or simplified.

<Composition of slash role>
First, FIG. 163 is a table relating to the configuration of the slash combination in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, as the slash combination, there are four types of slash combination of winning-B1 to winning-B4. Further, in the fifth embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, the left reel M51 is divided into a range A in which the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and a range B in which the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed (). It is the above-mentioned push slash, and may be called the push position slash.)). Twenty symbols (20 frames) are arranged on each reel, and in the left reel, 0 to 9 are in the range A and 10 to 19 are in the range B.

In FIG. 163, the “left 1st range A” is the timing corresponding to the range A of the left reel as the first stop operation (for example, the timing when the range A is located on the effective line, and the same applies to the subsequent operations. There is) to operate the left stop button D41. When the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range A", the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in any of the winning-B1 to winning-B4, and one piece is paid out. In this way, the "left 1st range A" plays a role of stopping the slash effective symbol combination.

In FIG. 163, the "left 1st range B" is to operate the left stop button D41 at the timing corresponding to the range B of the left reel as the first stop operation. When the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B", in any of the winning-B1 to winning-B4, the symbol combination that pays out 15 cards at 1/4 is stopped and displayed, and 2 cards at 3/4. The symbol combination to be paid out is displayed as a stop (when the middle reel and the right reel are stopped at random timings, the push order is the same regardless of whether it is "left middle right" or "left middle right"). The details will be described later, but in the fifth embodiment, there is a case where a navigation (instruction) is generated to stop the operation in the "left 1st range B" in the game in which the slash combination is won. In that case, it is configured to navigate (instruct) which of the symbol combinations is 1/4 and 15 cards are paid out. In addition, since the combination of symbols to be stopped may differ depending on the stop timing (requires a push), it plays the role of a technical intervention procedure.

In FIG. 163, in the push order other than the left 1st (middle left / right, middle right / left, right / left middle, right middle left, which plays the role of the push order bell), 15 sheets are used in one push order for each slash role. It is configured so that the symbol combination to be paid out is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination to be paid out is stopped and displayed in the other three push orders. Specifically, in the game that won the prize-B1, if you stop the operation in the "middle left and right" push order, the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 cards will be stopped and displayed, and 2 cards will be paid out in the other 3 push orders. The symbol combination that becomes is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game that won the prize-B2, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "middle right left", the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 sheets will be stopped and displayed, and the symbols that will be paid out 2 cards in the other 3 push orders. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game that won the prize-B3, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, left, middle", the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 sheets will be stopped and displayed, and the symbols that will be paid out 2 cards in the other 3 push orders. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game that won the prize-B4, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left", the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 cards will be stopped and displayed, and 2 cards will be paid out in the other 3 push orders. The symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

The number of payouts shown in FIG. 163 is merely an example, and the number of payouts when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed may be 1 to 0, or a part of the number of payouts shown as 2 pieces. Alternatively, all of them may be one, or some or all of the number of payouts shown as 15 may be less than 15.

<State transition diagram>
FIG. 164 is a state transition diagram relating to AT in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, most of the games are staying in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends and becomes the normal section, the advantage section transition lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 1/3). Since it is a game that shifts to the advantageous section again, the case of the advantageous section is illustrated in the figure. Further, as in the third embodiment, the game is played by a three-card betting game in the inside of the first type BB-C (inside the two-card betting BB). In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

It is configured so that the navigation is not executed in the normal game state. Further, when the slash combination is won in the normal game state and the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the AT lottery is executed. In addition, when the number of medals held by the player is significantly reduced in a predetermined period due to a series of games that do not win a small role (for example, when the payout rate between 400 games is less than 40%). May be configured to execute navigation (navigation that pays out the most 15 cards) in the winning game of the push order bell.

If the AT lottery is won in the normal game state, the AT start condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the AT state 1 at a predetermined timing thereafter (may be the next game or after the number of precursor games has been exhausted). ..

In the AT state 1, the navigation (the navigation that pays out the most 15 cards) is executed in the winning game of the push order bell. In addition, for the winning game of the slash role, a navigation instructing a stop operation in the "left 1st range B" is executed (details will be described later).

In the AT state 1, when the JAC combination is won and the JAC symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the AT state 2. The JAC combination is a winning-H1 to winning-H3, and is a conditional device having a case where the JAC symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the stop display of the JAC symbol combination may be referred to as JACIN.

Further, in the AT state 1, when the AT end condition (for example, the total of the AT state 1 and the AT state 2 is used to digest the specified number of games, the navigation is executed a specified number of times) is satisfied, the normal game state is satisfied. Move to.

When the specified number of games (8 games in this example) is exhausted in the AT state 2, the game shifts to the AT state 1.

Further, in the AT state 2, when the AT end condition (for example, the total of the AT state 1 and the AT state 2 is used to digest the specified number of games, the navigation is executed a specified number of times) is satisfied, the normal game state is satisfied. Move to.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the AT start condition is satisfied and the AT state (AT state 1 and AT state 2 are collectively referred to as the AT state), the AT state is satisfied until the AT end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that 1 and AT state 2 can be transitioned a plurality of times.

<Navigation mode for each game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the navigation mode at the time of winning the slash combination will be described in detail. In the figure, the case where the winning-B1 is won as a slash role, which is an advantageous section, and the case where the game is executed by betting three cards in the inside of the first type BB-C is illustrated.

<A: Winning in normal game state-Winning B1>
A in FIG. 165 illustrates a case where a game is executed with a bet of three cards in a normal game state (non-AT state), which is an advantageous section, and a game in which a prize-B1 is won is executed.

When the start lever D50 is operated in the normal game state, which is an advantageous section, and the game in which the winning-B1 winning slash role is won is started, the effect display device S40 displays an image related to the push order navigation such as the push order navigation image. Is not displayed, and the navigation (instruction) is not displayed on the push order display device D270. Although not shown, the effect display device S40 displays an image other than the image related to the push order navigation, such as an image related to the advance notice effect.

After that, when the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range A" (the push order is "left middle right"), "watermelon, watermelon, bell" will be stopped and displayed on the effective line. "Watermelon / watermelon / bell" is a slash effective symbol combination, and is configured to execute an AT lottery (may be a process related to AT) when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the normal game state which is an advantageous section. ..

In addition, as the processing related to AT when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the normal game state which is an advantageous section, it is configured to execute an AT lottery such as acquiring the right to shift to the AT state at 1/10. Alternatively, the counter value of the AT counter may be increased by a predetermined number (the predetermined number may be a predetermined value or may be determined by lottery), and when the counter value reaches the predetermined value, the AT state is entered. It may be configured to acquire the transition right of, or it may be configured to increase the expected number of game medals that can be acquired in the AT state when the AT state is entered. That is, if the stop operation is executed in the "left 1st range B", two or 15 game medals can be obtained, while if the stop operation is executed in the "left 1st range A", only one game medal can be obtained. Instead, when the slash effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the normal game state which is an advantageous section, the slash role is performed in the normal game state which is an advantageous section by executing the processing related to the AT which is advantageous to the player. In the game that won the prize, it is configured to be most advantageous for the player to execute the stop operation in the "left 1st range A".

Because of this configuration, in the normal game state, which is an advantageous section, the navigation (instruction) is not executed even if the slash role is won, but the player always stops in the "left 1st range A". By executing it, the game can be advanced advantageously.

In addition, in FIG. 165, when the slash combination is won in the normal game state which is an advantageous section, the effect display device S40 is configured not to display the image related to the push order navigation such as the push order navigation image. Is not limited, and if the slash role is won in the normal game state, which is an advantageous section, the push order navigation image is not displayed on the effect display device S40, but it is most advantageous to perform the stop operation in the "left 1st range A". It may be configured to display an image suggesting that. As a specific example, "CHANGE" may be displayed, or black fog may be displayed. Further, as an effect suggesting that the stop operation in the "left 1st range A" is the most advantageous, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a special sound "bashun".

<B: Winning in AT status 1-Winning B1>
Reference numeral B in FIG. 165 illustrates a case where the game in which the winning-B1 is won is executed in the AT state 1 which is an advantageous section.

When the start lever D50 is operated in the AT state 1 which is an advantageous section and the game in which the winning-B1 winning the slash role is won is started, the effect display device S40 is displayed as "→→→→→ Aim for 7!". An image prompting the stop operation at the timing of pressing "left, middle, right" and around the 7 symbols of each reel is displayed. Further, the push order display device D270 displays "= 7" corresponding to the push order of "left middle right" and the stop operation at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel.

In this example, the display of the push order display device D270 is "= 1" for "left middle right", "= 2" for "left and right middle", "= 3" for "middle left and right", and "middle right left". "= 4", "Right, left, middle" is "= 5", "Right, middle, left" is "= 6", "Left, middle, right" is pushed in order, and the stop operation is performed at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel. The push order of "= 7", "right, middle, left" and the stop operation at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel correspond to "= 9" (this is just an example and there is no problem even if it is changed. ).

After that, according to the navigation (instruction), aim at 7 symbols on each reel in the push order of "left middle right" (at the timing around 7 symbols) and stop operation, "Bell 7 Bell" will stop on the effective line It will be displayed. "Bell 7 Bell" is a symbol combination that pays out 15 sheets (the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts may be referred to as high).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the game in which the slash role is won in the AT state 1 which is an advantageous section, when the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B", a higher 15-card payout is made. It is configured to navigate (instruct) the operation mode of the stop button capable of stopping and displaying the symbol combination. In addition, in order to stop and display the symbol combination that is higher when the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B", the stop operation timing between the middle reel and the right reel is navigated (instructed). There is a need. That is, when the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B" in the slash winning game, is the symbol combination of 15 payouts stopped and displayed depending on the timing of the subsequent stop operation (so-called push)? It is configured to determine whether the combination of two symbols to be paid out is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, like the range A and range B of the left reel, the middle reel has a range C of 0 to 9 and a range D of 10 to 19, and the right reel has 0 to 9. It has a range E of numbers and a range F of numbers 10 to 19, and if winning-B1 is won, "left reel: range B, middle reel: range C, right reel: range E" is stopped. When the stop operation is performed at the timing, the symbol combination of 15 payouts is stopped and displayed, and when the stop operation is performed at other stop timings, the symbol combination of 2 payouts is stopped and displayed. When the left reel is stopped in the range B, the combination of the stop timings of the middle reel and the right reel after that is "middle reel: range C, right reel: range E", "middle reel: range C, right reel". : Range F ”,“ Middle reel: Range D, Right reel: Range E ”,“ Middle reel: Range D, Right reel: Range F ” When the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are randomly stopped in the 1st range B, 15 reels are paid out at 1/4 and 2 reels are paid out at 3/4.

In addition, in the game where the slash role other than the prize-B1 is won, the stop timing at which 15 cards are paid out when the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B" is "medium" in the game where the prize-B2 is won. Reel: Range C, Right reel: Range F "," Middle reel: Range D, Right reel: Range E "in the game where winning-B3 is won, and" Middle reel: Medium reel: in the game where winning-B4 is won. Range D, right reel: range F ".

In addition, since the player cannot determine which slash role of winning-B1 to winning-B4 is won, if the navigation is not executed in the game winning the slash role, 15 cards will be paid out. Since the timing is unknown, as mentioned above, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are randomly stopped in the "left 1st range B", 15 sheets are paid out at 1/4, and 2 at 3/4. It will be paid out.

In addition, as described above, when winning-B1 is won in AT state 1, which is an advantageous section, the effect display device S40 says "Aim for 7!", "Left, middle, right." An image prompting the stop operation at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel is displayed, but 7 symbols are arranged in the range B of the left reel and 7 symbols are arranged in the range C of the middle reel. Since 7 symbols are arranged in the range E of the right reel, the player can stop and display 15 symbol combinations to be paid out by performing a stop operation around the 7 symbols of each reel. It is configured as.

In the game in which the winning-B2 to the winning-B4 are won in the AT state 1, which is an advantageous section, the display mode of the display on the effect display device S40 and the navigation display mode on the push order display device D270 is B in FIG. Unlike (winning-when winning B1), it is configured to notify (navigate) the stop timing at which the symbol combination of 15 payouts in the winning slash role can be stopped and displayed.

The configuration of B in FIG. 165 is just an example, and there is no problem even if the display mode in the effect display device S40 in the game in which the slash role is won and the configuration of the symbol combination are changed, and the “left 1st range B” is used. When the stop operation is performed, 15 cards may be paid out at 1/4 and 2 cards may be paid out at 3/4 depending on the subsequent stop timing.

As an example of the display on the effect display device S40, the timing of the stop operation on each reel such as "7, watermelon, 7!" May be suggested, or the combination of 15 symbols to be paid out is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to display the image of the reel M50.

In addition, in the game in which the slash role is won in the AT state 1, which is an advantageous section, when a symbol that does not correspond to the symbol combination of 15 payouts stops on one of the reels (when a mistake is made). , The display of the effect display device S40 may be dimmed (the visibility becomes low) at the time of the stop operation that causes the pressing error, or "→→→→→ Aim at 7!" The display may be erased, or the display may be configured so that the player can recognize that a mistake such as "failure" has been made (the sound may be output from the speaker S20 to notify the player). good.

As for the composition of the symbol combination in which 15 pieces are paid out, there are four ranges (0 to 4, 5 to 9, 10 to 14, 15 to 19) in either the middle reel or the right reel. 4) When the stop operation is performed in the "left 1st range B" by configuring to have, and by configuring to stop and display the symbol combination that will be paid out when the stop operation is performed in the range of 1. Depending on the subsequent stop timing, 15 cards may be paid out at 1/4 and 2 cards may be paid out at 3/4.

<C: Winning at AT status 2-Winning B1>
C in FIG. 165 illustrates a case where the game in which the winning-B1 is won is executed in the AT state 2 which is an advantageous section.

When the start lever D50 is operated in the AT state 2 which is an advantageous section and the game in which the prize-B1 which is the slash role is won is started, the effect display device S40 has "213" and "middle left and right". A push order navigation image prompting a stop operation in the push order is displayed, and "= 3" corresponding to the stop operation in the push order of "middle left and right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

After that, if you perform the stop operation in the order of pressing "middle left and right", "Bell Replay Watermelon" will be stopped and displayed on the effective line (stop displayed regardless of the stop timing). In addition, "Bell Bell Bell" is stopped at the invalid line (a straight line that is not a valid line) at the bottom of each reel, and the player has 15 cards because three bells are aligned. It can be easily recognized that the symbol combination to be paid out has been stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 163, in the game in which the winning-B1 is won, by performing the stop operation in the pressing order of "middle left and right", the symbol combination of 15 payouts is stopped and displayed, and the winning-B2 is displayed. In the winning game, by performing the stop operation in the push order of "middle right left", the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 pieces will be stopped and displayed, and in the game in which the prize-B3 is won, it will stop in the push order of "right left middle". By operating, the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 cards will be stopped and displayed, and in the game where the prize-B4 is won, the symbol combination that will be paid out 15 cards will be paid out by performing the stop operation in the push order of "right middle left". Will be stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, by not executing the navigation in the game in which the slash role is won in the normal game state which is an advantageous section, the player performs a stop operation in the "left 1st range A" and slashes. The valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and one payout and AT lottery are executed. In addition, by executing the navigation corresponding to the stop operation of the "left 1st range B" in the game in which the slash role is won in the AT state 1, which is an advantageous section, the player performs the stop operation in the "left 1st range B". Then, the symbol combination for which 15 cards are to be paid out is stopped and displayed, and 15 cards are paid out. Further, by executing the navigation in which the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43 is the first stop in the game in which the slash combination is won in the AT state 2, which is an advantageous section, the player performs a stop operation according to the navigation. The combination of symbols to be paid out for 15 sheets is stopped and displayed, and the payout of 15 sheets is executed. As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute three types of stop operations according to the game state (state related to AT) when the slash role is won, and proceed with the game. It is possible to improve the sex.

Furthermore, in AT state 1, which is an advantageous section, by performing a stop operation at the stop timing according to the navigation (so-called pressing), the symbol combination of 15 payouts is stopped and displayed. In the AT state 2, which is an advantageous section, the stop operation is performed in the push order according to the navigation (without pressing the eyes), so that the symbol combination of 15 payouts is stopped and displayed. Even in the AT state in which navigation is executed, depending on whether it is in AT state 1 or AT state 2, the situation that does not require a push and the situation that requires a push (technical intervention is required) are switched. , It is possible to create a gaming machine that does not make players bored.

<Composition of JAC role>
Next, the upper part of FIG. 166 is a table relating to the JAC combination in the fifth embodiment. As described above, when the JAC symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the AT state 1, it is configured to shift to the AT state 2, and the JAC symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed in the game in which the JAC combination is won. Has been done.

In the fifth embodiment, there are three types of JAC roles, winning-H1 to winning-H3, as JAC roles. Further, "left 1st" indicates a case where a stop operation is performed with the left reel M51 as the first stop, and "middle 1st" indicates a case where a stop operation is performed with the middle reel M52 as the first stop. "Right 1st" indicates a case where the right reel M53 is set as the first stop.

In the game that won the prize-H1, if the stop operation is performed at "left 1st" or "middle 1st", the combination of the two symbols to be paid out is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop timing. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed on the "right 1st", there are a case where the symbol combination to be paid out is displayed as a stop and a case where the symbol combination to be paid out is displayed as a stop depending on the stop timing. The combination of these two symbols to be paid out is called a JAC symbol combination. That is, in the game in which the prize-H1 is won, there is a possibility that the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed in the AT state 2 by any of the stop operations of "left 1st", "middle 1st" and "right 1st". Therefore, when the stop operation is performed on the "right 1st", there is a possibility that one symbol combination different from the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed.

In the game that won the prize-H2, when the stop operation is performed at "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the symbol combination (JAC symbol combination) that is to be paid out is displayed as a stop regardless of the stop timing. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed on the "left 1st", depending on the stop timing, one pattern combination to be paid out may be stopped and displayed, and two payout symbol combinations (JAC symbol combination) may be stopped and displayed. Have. That is, in the game in which the prize-H2 is won, there is a possibility that the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed in the AT state 2 by any of the stop operations of "left 1st", "middle 1st" and "right 1st". Therefore, when the stop operation is performed on the "left 1st", there is a possibility that one symbol combination different from the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed.

In the game that won the prize-H3, when the stop operation is performed at "left 1st" or "right 1st", the symbol combination (JAC symbol combination) to be paid out is displayed as a stop regardless of the stop timing. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in "Middle 1st", depending on the stop timing, one pattern combination to be paid out may be stopped and displayed, and two payout symbol combinations (JAC symbol combination) may be stopped and displayed. Have. That is, in the game in which the prize-H3 is won, there is a possibility that the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed in the AT state 2 by any of the stop operations of "left 1st", "middle 1st" and "right 1st". Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the "middle 1st", there is a possibility that one symbol combination different from the JAC symbol combination will be stopped and displayed.

<Prize-Right reel at the time of H1 winning>
Next, the case where the JAC symbol combination is stopped and displayed will be described in detail. The lower part of FIG. 166 is a table regarding the right reel at the time of winning-H1 winning. Here, the details will be described only when the prize-H1 is won as the JAC role.

As described above, when the winning prize-H1 which is the JAC combination is won, the JAC symbol combination may not be stopped and displayed when the stop operation is performed in the "right 1st". When the stop operation is performed at the stop timing corresponding to the JACIN range as the stop timing of the right reel M53 when the stop operation is performed on the "right 1st", the JAC symbol combination is displayed as a stop and two payouts are executed. It will shift to AT state 2. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed at the stop timing corresponding to the removal range as the stop timing of the right reel M53 when the stop operation is performed on the "right 1st", a symbol combination different from the JAC symbol combination will be paid out. A stop display is displayed and one payout is executed (does not shift to AT state 2). Here, "JACIN" in the figure is a JACIN range, and "removal" is a removal range. As shown in the figure, in the right reel M53, "1-2: removal range, 3-4: JACIN range, 5-6: removal range, 7-8: JACIN range, 9-10: removal range". , 11-12: JACIN range, 13-14: removal range, 15-16: JACIN range, 17-18: removal range, 19-0: JACIN range ", JACIN range and removal range" And are arranged alternately by two frames.

Since it is configured in this way, in the game in which the winning prize-H1 is won as the JAC role in the AT state 1, when the stop operation is performed at a random stop timing (without pressing) at the "right 1st". Will stop and display the JAC symbol combination at 1/2. Further, when the stop operation is performed at "left 1st" or "middle 1st", the JAC symbol combination is stopped and displayed at 1/1. In the game in which the winning-H2 is won, the JACIN range and the removing range are alternately arranged by two frames in the left reel M51, and in the game in which the winning-H3 is won, the JACIN range and the removing range are arranged in the middle reel M52. And are arranged alternately by two frames.

The playability that can be created from such a configuration will be described in detail below.

The AT end condition in FIG. 164 is set.
Condition 1: 30 games are digested in AT state 1.
Condition 2: Execute 8 game digestion in AT state 2 3 times (satisfy the end condition of AT state 2 3 times)
If either condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied, the AT end condition may be satisfied and the game may be set to the normal gaming state.

In the case of the above-mentioned AT end condition, if the AT start condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the AT state 1, and if the player shifts to the AT state 1 and immediately wins the JAC role in succession, 8 games are exhausted in the AT state 2 ( In a situation where the 8 games are executed twice (sometimes referred to as a JAC game), the number of digested games in AT state 1 is 5 games (the number of remaining games that can be executed in AT state 1 is 25 games). Nevertheless, there are cases where the role of JAC is won. In such a case, it is more profitable for the player if the JAC symbol combination is not stopped and displayed in the game that wins the JAC role (a navigation system that supports payout of 15 cards in the game executed in AT state 1). Because it can be executed and the game medals can be increased).

Therefore, for example, in a game in which a highly visible (conspicuous) symbol is placed in any of the frames (numbers) in the removal range and the prize-H1 is won, "7 is placed in the middle of the right reel" on the effect display device S40. By displaying "Aim and remove!", It is possible to notify (suggest) that the JAC role has been won and the method of stopping operation within the range of removal (the display may be referred to as display A).

In addition, the JAC role was won in a situation where the number of games that can be digested in AT state 1 is small, such as the situation where the number of digested games in AT state 1 is 25 games (the number of remaining games that can be executed in AT state 1 is 5 games). In that case, it is more profitable for the player to stop and display the JAC symbol combination (because 8 games can be digested in AT state 2). In such a case, for example, in the game in which the prize-H1 is won, the effect display device S40 displays "Press from the left!" To notify (suggest) the stop operation in which the JAC symbol combination is surely stopped. ) (The display may be referred to as display B).

The configuration of the display A and the display B may be as follows.
(1) In a situation where the number of times the JAC game is executed is 0 or 1, the display B is displayed when the JAC combination is won. When the number of times the JAC game is executed is 2 and the number of digested games in the AT state 1 is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), the display A is displayed when the JAC combination is won. When the number of times the JAC game is executed is 2 and the number of digested games in the AT state 1 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more, the display B is displayed when the JAC combination is won.
(2) In the situation where the number of times the JAC game is executed is 0 or 1, the display B is displayed when the JAC combination is won. In the situation where the JAC game is executed twice, both the display A and the display B are displayed when the JAC combination is won.
(3) When the JAC combination is won, both display A and display B are always displayed.

The effect of displaying the display A and / or the display B may be referred to as a removal effect, and the removal effect is an effect that can be executed only in the AT state 1, and the JAC role is won in the AT state 2 or the normal game state. However, it is configured so that the removal effect is not executed.

<<< 6th Embodiment >>>
Next, the configuration applicable to the present specification regarding the slash combination will be described as the sixth embodiment, and in the description thereof, the same reference numerals and wording may be used in the same places as in each of the above-described embodiments. The description shall be omitted or simplified.

<Composition of slash role>
First, FIG. 167 is a table relating to the configuration of the slash combination in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are two slash combinations, a winning-B1 and a winning-B2, as the slashing combination. In addition, in FIG. 167, a three-card betting game in the case of being inside the Type 1 BB-C, being an advantageous section, and being in a non-AT state will be described in detail. In this example, in the two-card betting game inside the two-card betting BB, the processing related to AT is not executed even if the slash valid symbol combination is displayed.

Winning-B1 and Winning-B2 are push order slashes, and in the game that won Winning-B1, if you stop in the push order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the slash is valid at 1/1. The symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the non-AT state which is an advantageous section, one payout is executed and the AT lottery to win at 79/100 is executed. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the symbol combination for which 15 sheets are paid out at 1/1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols that will be paid out at 1/1 is displayed as a stop.

In the game that won the prize-B2, if the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed at 1/1. When the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the non-AT state which is an advantageous section, one payout is executed and the AT lottery to win at 1/100 is executed. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the symbol combination for which 15 sheets are paid out at 1/1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols that will be paid out at 1/1 is displayed as a stop.

In this way, the winning-B1 and winning-B2 can be stopped and displayed by performing the same stop operation (for example, the stop operation in the order of pressing "right, middle, left"). It has become.

Further, the production group number corresponding to the prize-B1 is 8, and the production group number corresponding to the prize-B2 is 8, both of which have the same production group number. In the sixth embodiment, in the non-AT state, the effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S (information on the winning condition device is not transmitted). In the game in which the slash combination is won in the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, the sub-control board S is configured to execute the effect based on the received effect group number.

In addition, as a configuration regarding the effect group number, the effect group number may be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S even in the AT state, or the game in which the slash combination is won in the predetermined game state. Then, the effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, but in the game in which the other condition device is won, the effect group number may not be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. ..

<Expected value for the role of slash>
Next, in the game in which the slash combination is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed, and the stop operation in which the slash valid symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the highest expected value is performed. The expected value and the expected value in the case of the above will be described in detail. The expected value is the expected value of the number of payouts in the game (sometimes referred to as the expected value regarding the number of payouts), the winning probability of the AT lottery executed in the game, and the expected number of wins at the time of winning the AT lottery. It is the sum of the expected value (sometimes referred to as the expected value related to AT) in consideration of (the average value of the game medals that increase from the start of AT to the end of AT when the AT lottery is won). It should be noted that a high expected value is advantageous for the player. Further, in this example, the case of setting 1 will be described in detail.

<Prize-Expected value of B1>
First, in the game in which the prize-B1 is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is performed will be described in detail. Here, the case where the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left" in the game in which the prize-B1 is won will be described in detail.

In the game that won the prize-B1, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left", the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed at 1/1, so the expected value regarding the number of payouts is one. There is. Further, the expected value regarding the AT is "100 sheets x 79/100 = 79 sheets" because the expected number of sheets obtained when the AT is won is 100, and the AT lottery is won at 79/100. From this, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is "1 sheet + 79 sheets = 80 sheets".

Next, in the game in which the winning-B1 is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed is performed will be described in detail. Here, the case where the stop operation is performed in the push order of "left, middle, right" in the game in which the prize-B1 is won will be described in detail (because the number of payouts is the largest).

In the game that won the prize-B1, if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing "left, middle, right", the expected value regarding the number of payouts is 15 because the symbol combination that pays out 15 pieces at 1/1 is displayed as a stop. It is a sheet. Further, the expected value regarding AT is 0 because the AT lottery is not executed (because the AT lottery is not won). From this, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination for paying out 15 sheets can be stopped and displayed is 15 sheets.

In this way, in the game that won the prize-B1, the expected value is higher when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed than when the stop operation is performed where the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. It's getting higher.

<Prize-Expected value of B2>
Next, in the game in which the prize-B2 is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is performed will be described in detail. Here, the case where the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left" in the game in which the prize-B2 is won will be described in detail.

In the game that won the prize-B2, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left", the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed at 1/1, so the expected value regarding the number of payouts is one. There is. The expected value of the AT is "100 sheets x 1/100 = 1 sheet" because the expected number of sheets to be acquired when the AT is won is 100, and the AT lottery is won at 1/100. From this, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is "1 sheet + 1 sheet = 2 sheets".

Next, in the game in which the winning-B2 is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed is performed will be described in detail. Here, the case where the stop operation is performed in the push order of "left, middle, right" in the game in which the prize-B2 is won will be described in detail (because the number of payouts is the largest).

In the game that won the prize-B2, if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing "left, middle, right", the expected value regarding the number of payouts is 15 because the symbol combination that pays out 15 pieces in 1/1 is displayed as a stop. It is a sheet. Further, the expected value regarding AT is 0 because the AT lottery is not executed (because the AT lottery is not won). From this, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination for paying out 15 sheets can be stopped and displayed is 15 sheets.

In this way, in the game that won the prize-B2, the expected value is higher when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed than when the stop operation is performed where the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. It's getting low.

Further, as described above, the winning-B1 and the winning-B2 have the same production group number. In other words, the information regarding the winning-B1 and the winning-B2 is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S after performing the mask processing in the non-AT state. For this reason, in the non-AT state, the same effect is executed in both the game in which the prize-B1 is won and the game in which the prize-B2 is won (details will be described later).

<Expected value of winning-B1 and winning-B2 combined>
Here, in the game in which the slash combination (the slash combination in which the mask processing is executed) in which the effect group number is 8 is won, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the slash valid are performed. The expected value when the stop operation in which the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed (the highest expected value) is performed will be described in detail.

As described above, in the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, the expected value when the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the game winning the prize-B1 is 80, and the prize-B2 In the game won in, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is two. In addition, since the number of lottery positions for winning-B1 and winning-B2 is the same at 1000, the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the game in which winning-B1 or winning-B2 is won. The expected value in the case of is "(80 x 1000 + 2 x 1000) / (1000 + 1000) = 41 sheets".

In the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, the expected value in the game that won the prize-B1 is 15 when the symbol combination to be paid out can be stopped and displayed, and the prize-B2. In the winning game, the expected value when the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination of 15 payouts can be stopped and displayed is also the same 15 cards. From this, the expected value in the game in which the winning-B1 or the winning-B2 is won is 15 when the stop operation is performed so that the symbol combination to be paid out of 15 can be stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the game in which the winning-B1 or the winning-B2 is won, the stop operation in which the slash-valid symbol combination can be stopped and displayed is better than the stop operation in which the slash-enabled symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. The expected value is also high. The configuration may be applied not only in the case of setting 1 but also in all settings.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration having two slash combinations, winning-B1 and winning-B2, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the number of types of slashing combinations is increased or decreased. Even in that case, the expected value including the slash combination with the same effect group number is the stop operation in which the slash effective symbol combination is not stopped and displayed when the stop operation is performed so that the slash effective symbol combination can be stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the expected value is higher than that in the case of.

<Direction when the slash role is won>
Next, FIG. 168 is an image diagram relating to the effect executed in the game in which the slash combination is won in the sixth embodiment. The figure illustrates a case where a slash role (winning-B1 or winning-B2) is won in a three-card betting game in a non-AT state, which is inside the type 1 BB-C and is an advantageous section. ..

When the start lever D50 is operated in the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, and the game in which the slash role (winning-B1 or winning-B2) is won is started, "←←←←← 7" is displayed on the effect display device S40. An image urging the stop operation at the timing of pressing "right, middle, left" and around the 7 symbols of each reel is displayed. Further, the push order display device D270 displays "= 9" corresponding to the stop operation in the push order of "right, middle, left". In this example, in the game in which the slash role (winning-B1 or winning-B2) is won, if the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left", the slash effective symbol combination is 1/1 regardless of the stop timing. Since the stop display is displayed, it is not always necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel. Further, in the navigation (instruction) of the push order display device D270, only the push order is navigated (instructed).

In FIG. 168, when the start lever D50 is operated in the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, and the game in which the slash combination (winning-B1 or winning-B2) is won is started, the effect display device S40 is used. An example of a configuration in which "←←←←← 7 is aimed at!" Is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing order for displaying the stop in the pressing order of "right, middle, left" on the effect display device S40. A navigation image (for example, "321" may be displayed) may be displayed.

In this example, the display of the push order display device D270 is "= 1" for "left middle right", "= 2" for "left and right middle", "= 3" for "middle left and right", and "middle right left". "= 4", "Right, left, middle" is "= 5", "Right, middle, left" is "= 6", "Left, middle, right" is pushed in order, and the stop operation is performed at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel. The push order of "= 7", "right, middle, left" and the stop operation at the timing around the 7 symbols of each reel correspond to "= 9" (this is just an example and there is no problem even if it is changed. ).

In the game that won the prize-B1, if you follow the navigation (instruction) and perform a stop operation aiming at 7 symbols on each reel in the push order of "right, middle and left", "Bell 7, re-game" will appear on the effective line. It will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "7, 7, 7" is stopped at the invalid line (a straight line that is not a valid line) in the middle of each reel, and the player has a slash valid symbol because three of the 7 are aligned. It can be easily recognized that the combination is stopped and displayed.

In the game that won the prize-B2, if you follow the navigation (instruction) and perform a stop operation aiming at 7 symbols on each reel in the push order of "right, middle, left", "7.7, re-game" will be on the effective line. It will be stopped and displayed. Seven symbols are stopped in the middle of the right reel M53 and the middle reel M52, and seven symbols are stopped in the lower part of the left reel.

After that, when the slash effective symbol combination related to the prize-B1 is stopped and displayed, "Super CHANGE !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40, and when the slash effective symbol combination related to the prize-B2 is stopped and displayed, the effect is produced. "CHANGE" is displayed on the display device S40.

Here, as described above, in the non-AT state, which is an advantageous section, the slash valid symbol in the game in which the winning-B2 is won is better when the slash valid symbol combination in the game in which the winning-B1 is won is stopped and displayed. Since the combination is more advantageous than the case where the combination is stopped and displayed, the player visually recognizes the image displayed on the effect display device S40 and easily recognizes the expected degree of the game (the expected degree of winning the AT lottery). be able to. In addition, in the slash valid symbol combination related to winning-B1, three 7s are aligned in the middle row of each reel, and the slash valid symbol combination related to winning-B2 is in the middle row of the right reel M53 and the middle reel M52. 7 symbols stop, but 7 symbols do not stop in the middle of the left reel M51, which is the final stop. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the stopped symbol combination and easily recognize the expected degree of the game (the expected degree of winning of the AT lottery).

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment has a plurality of types of slash combinations, and by making the expected values different, the results of the games in which the slash combinations are won can be varied. This allows the player to proceed with the game with a sense of expectation for winning the role of Slash.

The slash-effective symbol combination in the game in which the winning-B1 is won and the slash-effective symbol combination in the game in which the winning-B2 is won may be the same symbol combination. Even in this configuration, in the advantageous section and non-AT state, when the slash valid symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game in which the winning-B1 is won, the slash in the game in which the winning-B2 is won. It may be configured to be more advantageous to the player (the probability of winning the AT lottery is higher) than when the effective symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the push order bell that does not include the slash effective symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination that is 2 payouts and the symbol combination that is 15 payouts can be stopped and displayed). It may be configured, and in such a configuration, the production group numbers of the winning-B1 and the winning-B2 and the push order bell may be the same. In other words, the information regarding the winning-B1, the winning-B2, and the push order bell may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S after performing the mask processing in the non-AT state. Further, the push order bells having the same production group number as the prize-B1 and the prize-B2 may be a part or all.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the AT lottery (processing related to AT) may be executed by a conditional device other than the slash combination, and for example, it has a watermelon role which is a conditional device corresponding to a so-called rare combination. It may be configured as follows. In such a configuration, in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, the game that wins the watermelon role may be more advantageous to the player than the game that wins the prize-B1 and wins the prize-B2. The game that won the watermelon role may be more advantageous to the player than the game that was won, and the game that won the watermelon role may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game that won the prize-B1. -The game that wins the watermelon role may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game that wins the B2, and the game that wins the watermelon role is better than the game that wins the prize-B1 or the prize-B2. The game that wins the watermelon role may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game that wins the prize-B1 or the prize-B2.

<<< Seventh Embodiment >>>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described, but in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those in the above-described embodiment. It should be noted that this seventh embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, for example, a reel arrangement according to another embodiment, a type of winning combination (combination configuration), and a reel arrangement according to the seventh embodiment. It goes without saying that the reels and condition devices can be applied to other embodiments.

<< Stage change production >>
In the seventh embodiment, the stage change effect can be executed by the effect display device S40. In the seventh embodiment, as described above, there are a plurality of types of stay stages, and a transition from a certain stay stage to a different stay stage (a different stay stage is set from a state in which a certain stay stage is set). It is configured so that a stage change effect (sometimes referred to as a switching effect) can be executed when the state is reached. The details will be described later, but by executing the stage change effect, the stay stage can be smoothly switched. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of stage change effects (effect modes), and the selection tendency of the stay stage at the transition destination differs depending on the type of stage change effect to be executed. The stay stage may be referred to as a production stage. Further, the fact that the stay stage is set may be referred to as executing the stay stage in which the stay stage is set. When a predetermined stay stage is set, an effect corresponding to the predetermined stay stage (display of a background image on the effect display device S40, output of BGM from the speaker S20, etc.) is configured to be executed. ..

<Example of stage change production>
FIG. 169 is an example of a case where the stage change effect according to the seventh embodiment is executed. As shown in (a), UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C can be displayed as UI images (sometimes referred to as game progress display, UI display, etc.).

The UI image is an image that can be displayed on the effect display device S40 in the same (or the same system) display mode and the same display area over a plurality of stay stages, and the player can grasp the situation of the game. Useful information etc. are displayed. The UI image may be referred to as a game information image. The UI image A is an image displaying the current stay stage, and is displayed as "coastal stage" in (a). Further, the UI image B is an image displaying the current number of credits, and is displayed as "50" in (a). Further, the UI image C is an image displaying the number of payouts, and displays the number of game medals paid out by the executed game. As an example of the display mode of the UI image C, when 10 is paid out, it is counted up as (1) "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10" (or "0 →"). (Switches to the number of payouts immediately like "10"), "0" is displayed after displaying "10" for 3 seconds, (2) Counts up as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10" (Or, it immediately switches to the number of payouts like "0 → 10"), keeps displaying "10", and when a bet related to the next game is made (or when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted). ) May be displayed as "0". In the game in which the re-game combination is not won, "0" is displayed when a bet related to the next game is made, and in the game in which the re-game combination is won, the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game is performed. May be configured to display "0" when is accepted. In addition, as the UI image, the number of games executed (or the cumulative value of the number of executed games) and the rest in the state where the push order navigation is executed in the push order winning game such as the number of bonus games and the AT state. Number of games, predetermined points used for the game (for example, it is configured so that it can be accumulated for each game execution, and AT lottery is executed when 1000 points are reached), number of normal game state games (for example, during AT when it is reached) The rate of reaching the number of ceiling games for which the transition to the state is determined is displayed to show the player), the mini character display, and the like may be displayed.

An image satisfying one or more of the following may be used as a UI image.
(1) An image that can be displayed in the same display mode in a plurality of stay stages (2) A display mode of the same system in a plurality of stay stages (for example, the shape constituting the outer shell of the UI image is the same, but the color is (3) Normal section, advantageous section, AT state, non-AT state, bonus, chance zone, winning or not of replay (with or without automatic bet), number of credits, Images related to the game situation such as the number of payouts (4) The images are continuously displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, the area where UI images A to C in FIG. 169 (a) are displayed) over a plurality of stay stages. Image (5) In the same display area (for example, the area where UI images A to C in FIG. 169 (a) are displayed) before the start of reel rotation, during reel rotation, and after reel stop related to a certain game. Image displayed

Further, the display unit of the effect display device S40 (in the present specification, it may be simply referred to as “effect display device S40”) is configured to display a background image corresponding to the stay stage. In (a), since the stay stage is the coastal stage, the background image corresponding to the coastal stage is displayed. In the seventh embodiment, the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority than the background image. With this configuration, the UI image can be visually recognized regardless of the type of background image (type of stay stage), so that the player can grasp the situation of the game at any timing. It should be noted that high display priority may be referred to as high visibility, high display priority, display on the front surface, and the like.

Next, the flow in which the stage change effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 169. First, in (a), the stay stage is the coastal stage, the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, and a new game is started to be executed. Then, as in (b) → (c) → (d). From the outside to the inside of the effect display device S40, the background image and UI image are blacked out so as to be covered with black (becomes black), and the entire display area of the effect display device S40 becomes black. The background image becomes invisible (hidden), and the UI image also becomes invisible (hidden).

After that, the background image is displayed from the inside to the outside as in (e) → (f), and the background corresponding to the stay stage after the transition to the entire display area of the effect display device S40 (after the stage change). The image will be displayed. In the UI image A, "town stage" corresponding to the stay stage after the transition is displayed. In this way, when the stage change effect is executed, the background image and the UI image are configured to be invisible (hidden) for at least a part of the period, so that which stage is the stay stage after the transition. In addition to being able to draw the attention of the player, even if the display mode of the UI image differs between before and after the execution of the stage change effect, it is possible to shift the stay stage without discomfort by making it invisible once. can.

In addition, in FIG. 160, after the display area of the effect display device S40 starts to turn black as shown in (b), the background image corresponding to the stay stage after the transition is displayed by the effect display device S40 as shown in (f). The period until it is displayed in the entire area is set as the execution period of the stage change effect. In the seventh embodiment, the background image and / or the UI image cannot be visually recognized at at least any timing of the execution period of the stage change effect. It suffices if it is configured in. Specifically, the background image and / or the UI image may be covered with white (whiteout) instead of the above-mentioned black, or may be covered with another color. Further, when the background image and / or the UI image is covered with black or the like, an image that does not include the background image and / or the UI image may be displayed in the covered area, or the background image or the background image may be displayed. The background image and / or the UI image may be invisible by displaying the image to be covered with black in front of the background image and / or the UI image while leaving the UI image. Various methods can be appropriately applied as a method for making the background image and / or the UI image invisible.

It should be noted that the UI image may be configured so that the display mode may differ depending on the stay stage, and even in such a configuration, the display mode may be the same system such as different colors of the UI image, or the same display area may be used. It is preferable to configure the image so that the player can easily recognize that it is a UI image regardless of the stay stage.

Further, the presence / absence of the display of the UI image may differ depending on the game situation (game state, stay stage, etc.), or the type of the displayed UI image may differ. For example, in the game state A, the UI image A and the UI image B are displayed, but in the game state B, only the UI image A may be displayed, or in the stay stage A, the UI image A may be displayed. And the UI image B are displayed, but the UI image may not be displayed in the stay stage B, or the UI image A and the UI image B are displayed in the game state A, but the game. In the state B, UI image C and UI image D (UI image C and UI image D have different display areas from UI image A and UI image B, different outer shapes, different colors, and displayed contents. It may be different, etc.) and may be configured to be displayed. Further, the display position (display area) of the UI image may be different depending on the game state. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of stay stages that can be set in one gaming state. The following gaming states may be applied to the gaming state A and the gaming state B.
(1) The push order such as the game state A or the normal state is the state in which the push order navigation is executed (or the state in which the push order navigation is executed relatively frequently) in the push order winning game such as the AT state. In the winning game, the state in which the push order navigation is not executed (or the state in which the push order navigation is executed relatively infrequently) is the game state B.
(2) A gaming state with an advantageous section is a gaming state A, and a gaming state with a normal section is a gaming state B.
(3) Game state A while the bonus is being executed, and game state B while the bonus is not being executed.
(4) Game state A while the standby demo screen is displayed, and game state B when the standby demo screen is not displayed.
Even in such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 169, the UI image is configured to have a timing in which the UI image cannot be visually recognized when the stage change effect is executed. You will be able to proceed with the game without any discomfort. The push order combination is a combination in which the number of game medals to be paid out may differ depending on the push order (stop operation order of the stop button) (there are high and low prices), and the winning combination in FIG. 10-A1 to winning- The push order bell of A6 corresponds to the push order role. Further, as described above, the gaming state includes the state related to AT, the RT state, whether the bonus is being executed, whether the standby demo screen is being displayed, whether the section is advantageous, and the like. It is possible to apply various states.

Note that FIG. 169 illustrates a configuration in which three types of UI images, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C, are displayed as UI images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the UI image to be displayed is not limited to this. There is no problem even if you change the number of types and the type of UI image to be displayed. As an example, the above-mentioned UI image D is newly added, or two types of UI images, UI image B and UI image C, are displayed, and the stage change effect is performed before and the stage change effect is performed. The displayed UI image may be the same after the execution of. Further, the image displaying the current stay stage of the UI image A may not be displayed as a UI image, but may be configured to be displayed for 3 seconds after the stage change effect is executed and then hidden.

Further, the figure illustrates a configuration in which the UI image cannot be visually recognized at least for a part of the period when the stage change effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the UI image cannot be visually recognized for at least a part of the period when the stage change effect is executed. , Any UI image (either UI image A, UI image B, or UI image C) may be configured so that it cannot be visually recognized, or at least for a part of the period when the stage change effect is executed. It may be configured so that a part of the UI image of is not visible.

<UI image display period>
Next, an example of the display period of the UI image will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170. In the figure, the time elapses from the left side to the right side. First, at the timing (1) in the figure, the rotation of the reel based on the operation of the start lever D50 related to a certain game (hereinafter, may be referred to as the Nth game) starts. From the timing of (1), the measurement of the minimum game time (sometimes referred to as the minimum time, 4.1 seconds in this example) is started. As described above, the minimum game time is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation related to one game to the start of reel rotation of the next game, which is 4.1 seconds in this example, and is shown in FIG. 25. It is measured by the game interval minimum time timer (decrement timer) shown in FIG. 25 (the timing of step 1554 in FIG. 25 corresponds to the timing in FIG. 25).

Here, in the figure, the Nth game is a game in which a loss is determined, the stop operation is performed in the shortest time after the stop button is activated, and all reels related to the Nth game are stopped. The case where the bet and the operation of the N + 1th start lever D50 are received in the shortest time after that is illustrated.

After that, the rotation speed of the reels becomes a constant speed, the stop button is activated, and the stop operation is performed by the player, so that all the reels are stopped. During the execution of the Nth game (from the start of reel rotation to the stop of all reels), the UI image remains displayed. The UI image in the figure is a general term for the UI image A, the UI image B, and the UI image C described above.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the start lever D50 related to the N + 1th game is operated (the start lever D50 is turned on), but the minimum game time from the start of reel rotation related to the Nth game. Does not start the rotation of the reel (the period from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of rotation of the reel M50 may be referred to as being weighted or weighted). Further, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stage change effect is started to be executed based on the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50. It should be noted that the effect mode of the stage change effect in the figure is the same as the effect mode shown in FIG. 169.

After that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the UI image cannot be visually recognized due to the stage change effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), the UI image cannot be visually recognized due to the black display of the stage change effect. Until the timing (3) in the figure, the UI image is continuously displayed from the Nth game.

Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, when the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of reel rotation of the Nth game, the rotation of the reel related to the N + 1th game starts. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the UI image becomes visible due to the stage change effect, and the UI image continues to be visible thereafter. That is, as shown in FIGS. 169 (e) and 169, the black display area of the stage change effect is reduced and the UI image can be visually recognized (the timing of (5) in the figure is The timing is between (e) and (f) in FIG. 169). After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the execution of the stage change effect ends. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the stop button related to the N + 1th game becomes effective (in other words, the operation of the stop button related to the N + 1th game is effective for executing the stage change effect. Finish before becoming). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the stage change effect is configured to start execution based on the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50 and end when time elapses.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the operation of the start lever D50 related to the N + 1th game is accepted in the shortest time from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game (the start lever is in a state where the weight is applied). (Accepting the operation of D50) and when the stage change effect is executed as the effect related to the N + 1th game, the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is displayed before the stop button related to the N + 1th game is activated. It is configured to be visible. With this configuration, the UI image is visible when the stop button is enabled, so that the situation of the game can be grasped, and the player can proceed with the game without confusion. can.

If the timing for accepting the operation of the start lever D50 related to the N + 1th game is the timing after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game, the timing is related to the N + 1th game. Before the stop button becomes effective, the execution of the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visible. With this configuration, the situation of the game can be grasped, and the player can proceed with the game without confusion.

Further, when the timing for accepting the operation of the start lever D50 related to the N + 1th game is the timing after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game, the timing is related to the N + 1th game. It may be configured so that the execution of the stage change effect is not completed when the stop button is enabled. With this configuration, in a situation where weight is applied, the player is rushing to proceed with the game, so the stage change effect can be executed before the stop button related to the N + 1th game becomes effective. By making the UI image visible after finishing, the situation of the game can be grasped, and the player can proceed with the game without confusion, while in the situation where no weight is applied, the player hurries up. Since the game is not in progress, the player pays more attention to the stage change effect by configuring so that the execution of the stage change effect is not completed when the stop button related to the N + 1th game is enabled. be able to.

<Execution mode of stage change production>
The stage change effect may be executed as follows.
(1) Execution is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50 and ends when the time elapses. (2) Execution is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50, and a predetermined stop operation is performed. It ends based on (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop). (3) The predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) is performed. Execution is started based on what has been done, and ends with the passage of time. It should be noted that even if it is configured so that a plurality of execution modes (1) to (3) above can be adopted as the execution mode of the stage change effect of 1. Alternatively, the first stage change effect may be executed in the execution mode (1) above, but the second stage change effect may be executed in the execution mode (2) above.

Further, the configuration related to the stage change effect may be configured as follows.
(1) It is easier to shift to a stay stage that is relatively advantageous for the player when it is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode. (2) First It is more likely that the AT lottery, the AT game number addition lottery, or the bonus has been won when the second production mode is executed than when the production mode is executed. (3) Predetermined stage change When the effect is executed, the predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) is performed as compared with the case where the execution is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the start lever D50. When the execution is started based on what has been done, it is easier to shift to the stay stage which is relatively advantageous for the player. (4) When the predetermined stage change effect is executed, the start lever D50 Based on the fact that the predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) is performed, rather than the case where the predetermined stage change effect is started to be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. It is more likely that the AT lottery, the lottery for adding the number of AT games, or the bonus will be won when the predetermined stage change effect is started. (5) In the first stay stage, the first effect mode, the first In the case of a specification in which there is a rule between the stay stage and the stage change production mode, such as the second effect mode in the second stay stage and the third effect mode in the third stay stage, the first stay If the rules are different (so-called breaking of the rules), such as when the second production mode is executed on the stage, the AT lottery, the number of AT games added, or the bonus will be won than if the rules are not different. Is likely to be

<UI image displayed on the demo screen>
The configuration related to the UI image while the demo screen is being displayed may be configured as follows. As in the seventh embodiment, a case where a plurality of types of UI images can be displayed is illustrated.
(1) All UI images are visible while the demo screen is displayed (higher after display priority than the background image of the demo screen) (2) All UI images are displayed while the demo screen is displayed. The image is invisible (lower than the background image of the demo screen after display priority) (3) While the demo screen is being displayed, the first UI image is visible (than the background image of the demo screen). (High after display priority), but the second UI image is invisible (lower after display priority than the background image of the demo screen) (4) During the predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed , All UI images are visible (higher after display priority than the background image of the demo screen) (5) All UI images are invisible during a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed (5) (6) The first UI image is visible (display priority over the background image of the demo screen) during a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed. The back is high), but the second UI image is invisible.

Further, the predetermined UI image (for example, the UI image relating to the predetermined point used for the game) has a period in which it cannot be visually recognized during the execution of the stage change effect, but it is always visible while the demo screen is displayed. It may be configured to be invisible while the demo screen is being displayed, but it may be configured to be visible at all times during the execution of the stage change effect.

<UI image displaying error>
The configuration regarding the UI image during the display of the error display (sometimes referred to as error notification) relating to a predetermined error may be configured as follows. As in the seventh embodiment, a case where a plurality of types of UI images can be displayed is illustrated.
(1) All UI images are invisible while the error display is displayed (the error display is higher after the display priority) (2) The first UI is displayed while the error display is displayed. The image is visible (error display is lower after display priority), but the second UI image is invisible (error display is higher after display priority).

Further, the predetermined UI image (UI image relating to the predetermined point used for the game) has a period in which it cannot be visually recognized during the execution of the stage change effect, but is always visually recognized while the error display regarding the predetermined error is displayed. It may be configured to be possible, or it may be configured to be visible at all times during the execution of the stage change effect, although it has a period in which it cannot be visually recognized while the error display related to a predetermined error is being displayed. good.

<Aspects that do not perform stage change effects>
In addition, the Nth game is executed under the condition that the coastal stage is set as the stay stage, and the Nth game is executed. When the advance notice effect A is executed as the effect related to the game, after the end of the Nth game (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when the bet related to the N + 1th game is made, and the N + 1th game). At the timing when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, etc.), the background image corresponding to the coastal stage may be displayed again without executing the stage change effect. In such a configuration, when the background image corresponding to the coastal stage is displayed again, the name of the stay stage may be displayed on the effect display device S40 (continuously displayed as a UI image). Alternatively, it may be displayed for a predetermined time instead of as a UI image and then hidden), and the name of the stay stage may be output by voice from the speaker. Further, even when the game is executed over a plurality of games and is configured to have a continuous effect A (a background image dedicated to the continuous effect A is displayed) in which the background image corresponding to the stay stage cannot be visually recognized, the above-mentioned advance notice effect is also provided. Similar to A, after the end of the continuous effect A, the background image corresponding to the stay stage may be displayed again without executing the stage change effect. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly recognize that the stay stage after the end of the continuous production has not shifted from the stay stage before the execution of the continuous production.

<Stage change production after the end of continuous production>
Further, in the situation where the coastal stage is set as the stay stage, when the continuous effect A is executed, after the execution of the continuous effect A is completed (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the bet related to the next game is made). At the timing, the timing at which the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game is accepted, etc.), the stage change effect may be executed and the stage may be changed to the town stage (the town stage is set). Further, in the situation where the coastal stage is set as the stay stage, when the continuous effect A is executed, after the execution of the continuous effect A is completed (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the bet related to the next game is made). At the timing, the timing at which the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game is accepted, etc.), the stage change effect may be executed and the stage may be configured to be the coast stage (the coast stage is set). In this way, even if the stage change effect is executed by the configuration, it is not determined whether or not the stay stage after the end of the continuous effect A is different from that before the start of the continuous effect A, and the player stays after the transition. We will pay attention to the stage. Since the background image during the execution of the continuous effect A (the background image dedicated to the continuous effect A described above) and the background image during the setting of the coastal stage are different, the stay stages before and after the execution of the continuous effect A are the same. Even if there is, the background image during the execution of the continuous effect A and the background image after the execution of the continuous effect A are different, which makes it easy to determine whether or not the continuous effect A is being executed.

It should be noted that the stage change effect that can be executed in a situation not after the end of the continuous effect A described in FIG. 169 and the stage change effect that is executed after the execution of the continuous effect are different types of stage change effects. It may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly determine whether or not it is after the end of the continuous effect A, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the situation of the game cannot be grasped.

<Structure related to the image displaying the stay stage>
Further, as described above, when the image displaying the current stay stage is configured to be displayed for 3 seconds after the stage change effect is executed without being used as a UI image, it is configured as follows. You may.
(1) When the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted while the image displaying the current stay stage is displayed, and the notice effect A, which is a notice effect in which the background image corresponding to the stay stage cannot be visually recognized, is started. The image displaying the current stay stage is not displayed. (2) The operation of the start lever D50 is accepted at the timing before the stage change effect is completed and the image displaying the current stay stage is displayed. , When the advance notice effect A, which is a notice effect that makes the background image corresponding to the stay stage invisible, is started, the image displaying the current stay stage is not displayed. (3) The stage change effect is the start lever D50. When the operation ends (may be the case where the symbol combination of the re-game is stopped and displayed), the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the advance notice that the background image corresponding to the stay stage cannot be visually recognized. When the execution of the effect A is started, the image displaying the current stay stage is not displayed.

<Stage change production in the final game of the advantageous section>
In addition, after the end of the final game in the advantageous section (timing when the final stop operation is completed, timing when a bet related to the next game is made, timing when the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game is accepted, etc.), It may be configured so that the stage change effect is executed. The final game of the advantageous section is a game in which the next game is a normal section, and the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section has reached 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section. The end condition of the advantageous section such that the number of game medals (difference number) acquired in the above exceeds the upper limit of 2400 and the arbitrary end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of remaining AT games is 0) is set. It is a satisfying game. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the advantageous section continues.

<Stage change production in the final game of the normal section>
Further, the final game of the normal section, in other words, the next game is a game in which the next game becomes an advantageous section. The stage change effect may be executed at the timing when the operation is performed, the timing when the operation of the start lever D50 related to the next game is accepted, and the like). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game even though the section is advantageous. can.

<Comparison between normal section and advantageous section>
In addition, the stage change effect executed in the game started in the normal section and the stage change effect executed in the game started in the advantageous section are different types of stage change effect (different effects). It may be configured to be a stage change effect). With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the section is a normal section or an advantageous section by visually recognizing the stage change effect.

<Direction performed in one game>
Further, as an effect in a certain game, when a stage change effect is executed, the advance notice effect other than the stage change effect may not be executed in the certain game. In addition, when a stage change effect is executed as an effect in a certain game, the advance notice effect executed based on the operation of the stop button is not executed as a advance notice effect other than the stage change effect in the certain game (other notices). The effect may be configured). With this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stage change effect.

<Relationship with internal lottery results>
When the stage change effect A and the stage change effect B, which are different types of effects (different effect modes), are configured, whether or not the stage change effect A can be executed is determined without being based on the internal lottery result, but the stage. Whether or not the change effect B can be executed may be determined based on the result of the internal lottery (the selection ratio of whether or not the change effect B can be executed differs depending on the result of the internal lottery). As an example, the stage change effect B is configured to be easier to execute when the internal lottery result is a rare role such as cherry than when the internal lottery result is a push order bell or a loss. Also, when configured in this way, the stage change effect B is more advantageous to the player when it is executed than the stage change effect A (there is a high possibility that the AT lottery has been won, and the bonus is won. It may be configured so that there is a high possibility that it is. The stage change effect A and the stage change effect B may be configured so that the effect modes are different, or the stage change effect A and the stage change effect B may be configured so that the effect modes are the same but the execution start timing (execution start trigger) is different. good.

<Volume of stage change production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the volume in each game situation will be described in detail. The item of "state" indicates the state of the game, and "non-AT in progress" in the figure is a state in which push order navigation is not executed in a push order winning game such as a low probability state, and "AT". "Medium" is a state in which push order navigation is executed in a push order winning game such as an AT in progress state. Further, the "medal empty error" is a state in which a medal empty error has occurred and error notification related to the medal empty error is being executed.

In addition, the item of "stay stage" indicates the set stay stage, and for "stage common", it is an effect (or error notification) that is executed regardless of the set stay stage. There is. The item of "effect name" indicates the name of the effect, and the item of "volume" indicates the maximum volume and the average volume during the execution period of the effect. The unit of volume is "db (decibel)".

In the seventh embodiment, the volume level is adjustable, and when the volume level is high, the volume output from the speaker S20 is relatively high, and when the volume level is low, the volume is output from the speaker S20. The volume is relatively low. The volume level may be changed as follows.
(1) Operate the sub input button SB in a predetermined situation to display the menu screen, select the volume adjustment item on the menu screen, and then operate the upper button of the cross key SB2 to raise the volume level by one step. , The volume level is lowered by one step by operating the lower button of the cross key SB2. (2) The volume level is raised by one step by operating the upper button of the cross key SB2 in the predetermined situation where the reel is stopped. Operation of the lower button lowers the volume level by one step (3) In the situation where the demo screen is displayed, operation of the upper button of the cross key SB2 raises the volume level by one step, and operation of the lower button of the cross key SB2. Volume level goes down by one level

It should be noted that the volume output from the speaker S20 may be configured to have a sound that depends on the volume level, and the volume output from the speaker S20 may have a sound that does not depend on the volume level. In this specification, BGM, voice, sound effect, SE, notification sound and the like may be collectively referred to as sound (or sound). In addition, as an error notification sound, an error notification sound related to the first error (for example, a recoverable error that can be canceled by eliminating the cause of the error and operating the setting / reset button, such as a medal empty error). The volume output from the speaker S20 depends on the volume level, but the error notification sound related to the second error (for example, an unrecoverable error that cannot be recovered unless RAM clear or the like is executed) is transmitted from the speaker S20. The output volume may be configured so as not to depend on the volume level. The classification of the first error and the second error is not limited to the above-mentioned recoverable error and non-recoverable error, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications.

Further, a volume switch that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by the manager of the game hall (for example, provided inside the housing) may be provided. It may be configured so that it can be set in stages. In this configuration, the volume output from the speaker S20 may be determined based on the volume level and the mode (setting) of the volume switch described above. As for the error notification sound related to the second error in which the volume output from the speaker S20 described above does not depend on the volume level, the volume output from the speaker S20 changes based on the mode (setting) of the volume switch. It may be configured.

The volume shown in FIG. 171 is illustrated when the volume level is set to 5, which is the maximum value. First, in the upper part of the figure, "non-AT", "AT", and "medal empty error" are being notified in detail. Note that the volume level in the figure is just an example, and even when compared at a volume level other than 5, the relationship may be the same as in the figure. Also, when comparing with the default volume level after changing the setting or after returning from the power off (the volume level is set to a predetermined level after changing the setting and after returning from the power off). May be configured to have the same relationship as in the figure.

<Volume during non-AT>
First, in "non-AT", the coastal stage and the city stage can be set as the stay stage. In the coastal stage, the BGM in the coastal stage is output from the speaker S20 as the BGM related to the stay stage. The BGM related to the stay stage is a sound that is continuously (repeatedly) output during a period in which a sound such as a predetermined advance notice effect or a predetermined error notification sound is not output. The maximum volume of BGM during the coastal stage is 65db, and the average volume is 50db. The BGM related to the stay stage may be configured to end the output when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the game or when the demo screen is displayed. Further, the BGM shown in the figure, such as the BGM during the coastal stage, may include voice, sound effects, and the like. Further, all the BGMs in the figure can be replaced with sounds without any problem.

Next, in the city stage, the BGM in the city stage is output from the speaker S20 as the BGM related to the stay stage. The maximum volume of BGM during the city stage is 70db, and the average volume is 55db.

Further, the stage change effect A or the stage change effect B can be executed in either the coastal stage or the city stage, and the maximum volume of the sound in the stage change effect A is 90db, which is an average. The volume of is 80db. Further, the maximum volume of the sound in the stage change effect B is 100db, and the average volume is 85db. The volume of the stage change effect is configured so as not to depend on the stay stage before the stage change effect is executed.

<Volume during AT>
Next, in "AT", only the space stage can be set as the stay stage. In the space stage, the BGM in the space stage is output from the speaker S20 as the BGM related to the stay stage. The maximum volume of the BGM (which may be the sound output during "AT") during the space stage is 120db, and the average volume is 100db.

Further, as shown in FIG. 171, the maximum volume of the BGM in "AT" is higher than the maximum volume during notification of the "medal empty error", and the average volume of the BGM in "AT" is higher. The volume is louder than the average volume during notification of the "medal empty error". Further, the maximum volume of the BGM in the "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM in the "non-AT", and the average volume of the BGM in the "AT" is the average volume of the BGM in the "non-AT". It is louder than the average volume of BGM. Further, the maximum volume of the BGM in "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the stage change effect in "non-AT", and the average volume of BGM in "AT" is "non-AT". It is louder than the average volume of the stage change production in.

The loudest sound in "AT" (the loudest sound in the situation where BGM is output during the space stage) is the navigation voice output from the speaker S20 when the push order navigation is executed. For example, it may be configured to be a voice such as "Left!", Which may be referred to as a navigation voice) or a conversation voice (sometimes referred to as a conversation voice) in which the appearing character speaks.

<Volume during error notification>
Next, the notification of "medal empty error" is executed when a medal empty error occurs (when the gaming machine determines that a medal empty error has occurred) regardless of the stay stage or the game state. Become. During the notification of the medal empty error, the maximum volume is 110db and the average volume is 90db.

The type of stay stage and the type of "state" shown in the figure are just examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

<Comparison of maximum volume during non-AT>
Because of this configuration, in "non-AT", the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) is the BGM related to the stay stage (BGM during the coastal stage). Or it is configured to be louder than the maximum volume of BGM) during the city stage. By configuring in this way, the player can be focused on the stage change effect, and when the stage change effect B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than the stage change effect A, the player may be able to pay attention to the stage change effect. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not the stage change effect B has been executed. The display mode of the stage change effect A and the stage change effect B may be the same and the sounds may be different. Even in such a configuration, the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage) may be used. Was stage change effect B executed by configuring the maximum volume of the sound of change effect B) to be higher than the maximum volume of the BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the city stage) related to the stay stage? It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not. Note that "during non-AT" in FIG. 171 exemplifies a configuration relating to a predetermined gaming state that is "during non-AT", and all the gaming states that are "during non-AT" satisfy the above-mentioned configuration. It is not necessary to be satisfied, and it is sufficient that the game state of 1 is satisfied.

<Comparison of average volume during non-AT>
In "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) is the average of the BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the city stage) related to the stay stage. It is configured to be louder than the volume of. By configuring in this way, the player can be focused on the stage change effect, and when the stage change effect B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than the stage change effect A, the player may be able to pay attention to the stage change effect. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not the stage change effect B has been executed. In the above description, the maximum volume and the average volume are compared, but in addition to these, the same volume level (for example, any of 6 levels from 0 to 5) and the same volume switch mode (for example, one of 6 levels from 0 to 5) For example, in the comparison in any of 5 stages from 0 to 4 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "same volume"), the same thing can be said, and the same volume level (for example, the volume level is 3). Etc.), the volume of the sound of the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) is configured to be louder than the volume of the BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the city stage) related to the stay stage. , The volume of the sound of the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) between the same volume switch modes (for example, set to the third stage) is the BGM related to the stay stage (BGM during the coastal stage). Or even if it is configured to be louder than the volume of BGM during the city stage), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not the stage change effect B has been executed, as described above. Needless to say.

In the seventh embodiment, the stage change effect can be executed only during "non-AT", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stage change effect can be executed even during "AT". You may. When configured in this way, the same stage change effect as "during non-AT" may be executed even in "during AT", or "during non-AT" and "during AT". Then, the stage change effect that can be executed may be different. Further, the configuration relating to the maximum volume and the average volume of the stage change effect described above can be similarly applied to "during AT" (such as the volume relationship), and all the configurations relating to the stage change effect of the present specification. The configuration is applicable. Even in such a case, "during AT" exemplifies the configuration relating to the predetermined gaming state of "during AT", and the above-mentioned configuration is satisfied in all the gaming states of "during AT". It should be added that it is not necessary to do so, and it is sufficient that the game state of 1 is satisfied.

<Details of medal empty error notification>
Next, the notification of the medal empty error in the lower part of FIG. 171 will be described in detail. The "type" item is the type of sound output from the speaker S20 during notification of a medal empty error, the "content" item is the specific content of the sound, and the "volume" item is the type. It shows the maximum volume and the average volume during the execution period of the production. The unit of volume is "db (decibel)".

In the seventh embodiment, the error sound effect and the error voice are output as the sound during the notification of the medal empty error, and the "error sound effect is output for 2 seconds" during the notification of the medal empty error. → Error voice for 3 seconds → Error sound effect for 2 seconds → Error voice for 3 seconds → ... ”is configured to output error sound effects and error voices alternately. When a medal empty error is notified, the error sound effect is output before the error voice. With such a configuration, it is possible to call attention by an error sound effect, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent error voice. Further, 2 seconds related to "error sound effect 2 seconds" is referred to as one output time of error sound effect, and 3 seconds related to "error voice 3 seconds" is referred to as one output time of error voice. It is called.

The error sound effect is a sound that outputs a mechanical sound of "BBB", and the error voice is a sound that outputs a voice of "Call a clerk!", And is a mechanical sound or a voice. It is different in that it is. In the seventh embodiment, the one output time of the error voice is longer than the one output time of the error sound effect, and an error is generated by such a configuration. The error voice that explains the content of the error takes a longer time to output than the error sound to notify that, and the player recognizes the content of the error by listening to the sound of the error notification. Can be made easier.

Further, the error sound effect and the error voice are configured so that the output periods do not overlap.

<Comparison of maximum volume in medal empty error>
Regarding the medal empty error, the maximum volume of the error sound effect is 100db, and the maximum volume of the error voice is 110db, which is the maximum volume of the error voice rather than the maximum volume of the error sound effect. Is larger. With this configuration, the error voice explaining the content of the error can be made more prominent than the error sound effect for notifying that an error has occurred, and the error can be heard by listening to the sound of the error notification. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the contents of.

<Comparison of average volume in medal empty error>
Regarding the medal empty error, the average volume of the error sound effect is 85db, and the average volume of the error voice is 95db, which is the average volume of the error voice rather than the average volume of the error sound effect. Is larger. With this configuration, the error voice explaining the content of the error can be made more prominent than the error sound effect for notifying that an error has occurred, and the error can be heard by listening to the sound of the error notification. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the contents of. It goes without saying that the same thing can be said for the same volume as well as the comparison between the maximum volume in the medal empty error and the average volume as in the case of the above-mentioned comparison of the volume during non-AT. ..

In the figure, the sound of the medal empty error is described in detail as an example of error notification, but it is only an example and can be applied to other errors such as the inserted medal retention error and the inserted medal backflow error.

Further, as the sound during error notification, in addition to the error sound effect and the error voice, the error BGM, which is a BGM dedicated to the error, may be configured to be output. When configured in this way, it may be configured as follows.
(1) The output period of the error sound effect and the error BGM may overlap (2) The output period of the error voice and the error BGM may overlap (3) The output period of the error sound effect and the error BGM may overlap. However, the output period of the error voice and the error BGM does not overlap. (4) The output period of the error voice and the error BGM may overlap, but the output period of the error sound effect and the error BGM do not overlap. (5) The output period of the error BGM does not overlap. The maximum volume of the error voice is louder than the maximum volume of (6) The average volume of the error voice is louder than the average volume of the error BGM (7) The error effect is larger than the maximum volume of the error BGM The maximum volume of the sound is louder (8) The average volume of the error sound effect is larger than the average volume of the error BGM. As mentioned above, the output period of the error sound effect and the error voice overlap. It is configured not to.
Further, as the first error notification sound, an error voice and an error sound effect may be output, while as the second error notification sound, an error voice, an error sound effect, and an error BGM may be output. It may be configured as follows. Further, in (5) to (8), the same volume may be used instead of the maximum volume or the average volume.

<Comparison between error sound effects and AT sounds>
Further, as shown in FIG. 171 in the seventh embodiment, it is configured as follows.
(1) The maximum volume of the BGM during the space stage in "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the sound during the medal empty error notification. (2) The average volume of the sound during the medal empty error notification is higher. , The average volume of the BGM during the space stage in "AT" is higher (3) The maximum volume of the BGM in the space stage during "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the error BGM in the medal empty error. Larger (4) The average volume of the BGM during the space stage during "AT" is higher than the average volume of the error BGM in the empty medal error. (5) The maximum volume of the error voice in the empty medal error is higher. The maximum volume of the BGM during the space stage in "AT" is higher (6) The average volume of the BGM during the space stage in "AT" is louder than the average volume of the error voice in the medal empty error. In addition, in (1) to (6), the same volume may be used instead of the maximum volume and the average volume.
With this configuration, even if a medal empty error occurs during AT (for example, in the AT state), after the medal empty error is cleared, the AT is at a louder volume than the sound during the medal empty error notification. The BGM will be output, and even if a medal empty error occurs, the game can proceed without impairing the exhilaration during AT after the medal empty error is cleared.

Further, regarding (1) to (6) above, there may be a case where the volume level is satisfied and a case where the volume level is not satisfied, but even in such a case, more than half of the plurality of volume levels are satisfied. It is preferable to configure the volume level so as to satisfy the above (1) to (6). For example, when the volume level is 6 levels from 0 to 5, the above (1) to (6) may be satisfied by the volume level of 3 or more levels. The same applies to the volume switch.

Further, both the above-mentioned "maximum volume" and "average volume" may be replaced with "minimum volume" or replaced with "difference between maximum volume and minimum volume". It may be configured, and even when configured in this way, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned "maximum volume" and "average volume" will be obtained.

<Structure with upper speaker S21>
Further, in the seventh embodiment, the speaker S20 is configured to have two lower speakers S20 at the lower portion of the front door DU, but the configuration relating to the speaker is not limited to this, and the two lower speakers S20 (second lower speaker S20) are provided at the lower portion of the front door DU. The speaker S20 in the 7th embodiment is referred to as a lower speaker S20), and two upper speakers S21 may be provided above the front door DU. In such a configuration, when outputting a predetermined sound, the maximum volume output from the lower speaker S20 may be louder than the maximum volume output from the upper speaker S21. good. The stage change effect A, the stage change effect B, the coastal stage BGM, the city stage BGM, the space stage BGM, the medal sky error notification sound, and the like, which are exemplified in FIG. 171, are applied to the predetermined sound. It is possible. The sound output from the upper speaker S21 and the sound output from the lower speaker S20 may be the same type of sound or different types of sound. By configuring the volume output from the lower speaker S20 to be louder than the volume output from the upper speaker S21, when the lower speaker S20 is blocked by storing the game medal in the lower plate. However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the sound output from the lower speaker S20 becomes difficult to hear.

<Structure related to sound tempo>
Further, the tempo of the output sound may be configured as follows.
(1) The average tempo of BGM for a specific stay stage during AT is faster than the average tempo of BGM for a given stay stage during non-AT (2) All that can be set during non-AT The average tempo of the BGM related to the stay stage in all the stay stages that can be set during AT is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the stay stage in the stay stage (3) Sound during a predetermined error notification. The average tempo of the BGM related to the predetermined stay stage during non-AT is faster than the average tempo of (4) The predetermined stay stage during AT than the average tempo of the sound during the predetermined error notification. BGM average tempo related to (5) BGM average tempo related to stay stage in all stay stages that can be set during non-AT than the average tempo of sound during a given error notification Faster (6) The average tempo of the BGM related to the stay stage in all the stay stages that can be set during AT is faster than the average tempo of the sound during the predetermined error notification (7) The predetermined stage The average tempo of BGM related to a specific stay stage during AT is faster than the average tempo of change effect (8) The average tempo of a specific stay stage during non-AT than the average tempo of a predetermined stage change effect The average tempo of the BGM related to is slower (9) The average tempo of the BGM related to the stay stage in all the stay stages that can be set during AT is faster than the average tempo of all stage change effects. (10) The average tempo of the BGM related to the stay stage in all the stay stages that can be set during non-AT is slower than the average tempo in all the stage change effects. (11) Sound during a predetermined error notification The average tempo of a predetermined stage change effect is faster than the average tempo of (12) The average tempo of all stage change effects is faster than the average tempo of the sound during a predetermined error notification. With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the stage change effect as in the configuration related to the volume, and the game can proceed without impairing the exhilaration during AT.

<Configuration related to data capacity>
Further, the data capacity may be configured as follows.
(1) The data capacity of the background image data used for displaying the background image of the predetermined stay stage during non-AT is smaller than the data capacity of the stage change effect data used for displaying the stage change effect during non-AT (2). The data capacity of the UI image data used for displaying the UI image during non-AT is smaller than the data capacity of the stage change effect data used for displaying the stage change effect during non-AT. (3) A predetermined stay stage during non-AT. The data capacity of the background image data used for displaying the background image is larger than the data capacity of the UI image data used for displaying the UI image during non-AT. (4) Displaying the background image of a predetermined stay stage during non-AT. The data capacity of the background image data used for is larger than the data capacity of the stage change effect data used for displaying the stage change effect during non-AT. (5) The data capacity of the UI image data used for displaying the UI image during non-AT. Is larger than the data capacity of the stage change effect data used for displaying the stage change effect during non-AT. (6) The data capacity of the background image data used for displaying the background image of the predetermined stay stage during non-AT is not. It is smaller than the data capacity of the UI image data used to display the UI image during AT.

The stage change effect may be executed in a three-card betting game, but may not be executed in a two-card betting game.

<<< Eighth Embodiment >>>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described, and in the description thereof, the description will be omitted or simplified by using the same reference numerals and wording in the same places as those in the above-described embodiment. It should be noted that this eighth embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, for example, a reel arrangement according to another embodiment, a type of winning combination (combination configuration), and a reel arrangement according to the eighth embodiment. It goes without saying that the reels and condition devices can be applied to other embodiments.

<< Navigation image >>
In the eighth embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side in a situation where it is an advantageous section. In a game in which the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270 (sometimes referred to as executing the push order navigation), the navigation image can be displayed on the effect display device S40. In the eighth embodiment, when the push order bell is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a push order navigation image) relating to a six-choice push order of three reels of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Is configured to be displayable on the effect display device S40. As a specific example, "1" suggests a stop button (reel to stop) to stop as the first stop, and "2" suggests a stop button (reel to stop) to stop as the second stop. "3" suggests a stop button (reel to stop) to stop as the third stop. Further, the navigation image displayed on the left side in the display area of the effect display device S40 corresponds to the left reel M51, and the navigation image displayed near the center in the display area of the effect display device S40 corresponds to the middle reel M52. The navigation image displayed on the right side in the display area of the effect display device S40 corresponds to the right reel M53. For example, as shown in FIG. 173, when "123" is displayed on the effect display device S40, the left reel M51 is used as the first stop, the middle reel M52 is used as the second stop, and the right reel M53 is used as the third stop. It suggests a stop operation. In other words, it suggests that the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop, and the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop. In this specification, one navigation image such as an image displayed as "1" may be referred to as a "navigation image", and all navigation images such as an image displayed as "123" are collectively referred to. It may be called "navigation image". In addition, the navigation image may be referred to as stop operation information.

<List of navigation images>
First, FIG. 172 is a list of navigation images displayed on the effect display device S40 in the eighth embodiment. In the figure, as an example, the navigation image relating to the first stop will be described in detail, but the same applies to the second stop and the third stop. As described above, the navigation image is a general term for the images of the numbers "1", "2", and "3" and the surrounding icon images (circular images in the figure), and is referred to as a navigation image. In the eighth embodiment, the image of the numbers "1", "2", and "3" is referred to as a navigation numerical image, and the surrounding icon image is referred to as a navigation background image. That is, the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image are collectively referred to as a navigation image. The display mode of the navigation image in the eighth embodiment has at least four display modes of a normal mode, an emphasis mode, a success mode, and a failure mode, and the four display modes will be described in detail below. Further, the navigation numerical image may be referred to as a numerical image, and may be referred to as a navigation background image and a background image. Needless to say, the navigation image and the display mode of the navigation image in the eighth embodiment can be similarly applied to other embodiments shown in FIGS. 67, 149, 153, 167 and the like.

<A: Normal aspect>
As shown in the upper left of FIG. 172, the normal mode is a navigation image in which the navigation number image is a normal navigation number image and the navigation background image is a normal navigation background image. The navigation image displayed as "2" or "3" in (a) of FIG. 173 is a normal mode. The navigation image corresponding to the stop button that should not be operated at present (navigation image corresponding to the stop button to be operated later) can be displayed in the normal mode, and the navigation image is started to be displayed in the normal mode. If this is the case, the voice corresponding to the navigation image is not output (the voice corresponding to the other navigation image is output from the speaker S20).

<B: Emphasis mode>
As shown in the upper right of FIG. 172, the emphasis mode is a navigation image in which the navigation number image is the emphasis navigation number image and the navigation background image is the emphasis navigation background image. The navigation image displayed as "1" in (a) of FIG. 173 is the emphasized mode. The navigation image corresponding to the stop button to be operated at present can be displayed in the emphasized mode, and when the navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, the voice corresponding to the navigation image is output (). For example, when the emphasized image corresponding to the left stop button D41 is displayed, the voice "left" is output from the speaker S20).

Further, regarding the navigation number image, the emphasized navigation number image is larger than the normal navigation number image. As for the navigation background image, the emphasized navigation background image is larger than the normal navigation background image. With this configuration, the player can be made to visually recognize the stop button to be operated. As for the emphasized navigation numerical image and the enhanced navigation background image, as described above, the image is larger than the normal navigation numerical image and the normal navigation background image (hereinafter, may be referred to as "another navigation image"). , It may be configured to be displayed in a color different from other navigation images, or to be displayed in a font or background different from other navigation images. In short, the enhanced navigation numerical image and the enhanced navigation background image need only be able to attract the attention of the player in a manner different from other navigation images, and an appropriate mode can be selected according to the specifications and the like. The same applies to the success mode described later.

<C: Success mode>
As shown in the lower left of FIG. 172, the success mode is a navigation image in which the navigation number image is the success navigation number image and the navigation background image is the success navigation background image. The navigation image displayed as "1" in (b) of FIG. 174 is a successful mode. When the stop button corresponding to the correct pressing order (the stop button corresponding to the navigation image of the emphasized mode) is operated, the success mode can be displayed based on the operation of the stop button corresponding to the correct pressing order. When the navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, the voice corresponding to the next pressing order is output (for example, when the stop button corresponding to the next pressing order is the middle stop button D42, "middle". The voice "is" is output from the speaker S20). The navigation image of the success mode is configured to be hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time. For example, after being displayed in the success mode for 0.5 seconds, it fades out and is hidden. Further, displaying the navigation image in the success mode may be referred to as an effect occurring, or the success mode may be referred to as a navigation image at the time of pressing the correct answer.

Regarding the navigation number image, the success navigation number image is larger than the normal navigation number image. As for the navigation background image, the successful navigation background image is larger than the normal navigation background image. With this configuration, the player can be made to visually recognize the stop button to be operated.

<D: Failure mode>
As shown in the lower right of FIG. 172, the failure mode is a navigation image in which the navigation number image is the failure navigation number image and the navigation background image is the failure navigation background image. The navigation image displayed as "1" in (b) of FIG. 175 is the failure mode. When the stop button that does not correspond to the correct answer pressing order (the stop button corresponding to the navigation image in the normal mode and the stop button corresponding to the incorrect answer pressing order) is operated, the stop button corresponding to the incorrect answer pressing order is operated. It is configured so that the failure mode can be displayed based on the operation of, and when the navigation image is displayed in the failure mode, the failure voice is output ("What are you doing?" A voice that makes it easy to recognize that the player has operated the stop button corresponding to the incorrect pressing order is output). Not limited to this, when the stop button corresponding to the wrong answer pressing order) is operated, the failure mode may be displayed based on the operation of the stop button corresponding to the incorrect answer pressing order, while the failure voice is It may be configured so that it is not output. The failure mode has two types of display modes, failure mode A and failure mode B. Specifically, the navigation image displayed as "1" in FIG. 175 (b) is displayed. The failure mode A is the failure mode B, and the navigation images displayed as "2" and "3" are the failure mode B. The failure mode A is a failure mode corresponding to the navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode, and the failure mode B is a failure mode corresponding to the navigation image displayed in the normal mode. In the failure mode A, the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image are larger than those in the failure mode B. The navigation image of the failure mode is configured to be hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time. For example, after being displayed in the failure mode for 0.3 seconds, it fades out and is hidden. In addition, the failure mode may be referred to as a navigation image when the push order is incorrect, as described above. Further, as for the success mode and the failure mode, the configuration of the navigation image when the push order is correct and the navigation image when the push order is incorrect can be applied. For example, the success mode is accompanied by an effect and the failure mode. Is configured so that the erasure time, which is the time from the start of display of the success mode to the disappearance, is longer than the erasure time, which is the time from the start of display of the failure mode to the disappearance, without any effect. You may.

Further, although not shown, when the display is started in the normal mode or the emphasized mode, the display may be configured to be accompanied by a display start action. As a specific example of the display start action, a small circle gradually becomes larger and becomes a shape of a normal mode or an emphasized mode. That is, when it is displayed in the normal mode, it is displayed as "display start action-> normal mode", and when it is displayed in the emphasized mode, it is displayed as "display start action-> emphasized mode". Will be done. In addition, it may be configured to be displayed in a normal mode or an emphasized mode without a display start action.

Further, although not shown, even if the navigation image is started to be displayed based on the reception of the operation of the start lever D50 and then the display mode of the navigation image can be changed at the timing when the stop button is activated. good. As an example, the navigation image of "123" is displayed on the effect display device S40 based on the operation of the start lever D50, the display of "1" is the emphasis mode A, and the display of "2" is the normal mode A. The display of "3" is displayed in the normal mode A, and when the operation of the stop button is enabled, the display of "1" is the emphasis mode B, and the display of "2" is the normal mode B, "3". The display may be configured to be displayed in the normal aspect B. With this configuration, the player can perform the stop operation while visually recognizing the effect display device S40 without visually recognizing the LED built in the stop button, and reduces the possibility of making a mistake in the pressing order. be able to. The sizes of the emphasized mode A and the emphasized mode B are substantially the same, and the sizes of the normal mode A and the normal mode B are substantially the same.

<Structure related to display of navigation image>
Here, the configuration relating to the display of the navigation image applicable to the eighth embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration described in detail below does not matter in any combination and can be applied even when the mode of push order navigation and the timing of power off are different.

<Navigation image display image 1>
Next, FIG. 173 is a navigation image display image FIG. 1. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20. Even if the minimum game time has not elapsed at the timing when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted (when the weight is applied), the navigation image is displayed based on the operation of the start lever D50. ing.

After that, in the situation where the stop operation is not performed from the figure (a), the power supply is cut off in the figure (b), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (c), the navigation image corresponding to the "left middle right" is displayed again on the effect display device S40 at a predetermined timing after the power is restored. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice of "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41, which was output in the figure (a), is not output after the power is restored.

As described above, in FIG. 173, when the power is cut off and the power is restored after the navigation image is displayed after the operation of the start lever D50 is received, the navigation image is redisplayed on the effect display device S40. However, the sound from the speaker S20 (the sound of "left" in the figure) is not output. The voice related to the push order navigation, such as the voice of "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41, may be referred to as a navigation voice.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the navigation image is being displayed, the navigation image is displayed again on the effect display device S40 after the power is restored, so that the player can press the correct answer. It can be recognized immediately. Further, by configuring so that the sound from the speaker S20 is not restored after the power is restored, the navigation image can be quickly displayed again on the effect display device S40 while reducing the processing load of the CPU of the sub-control board S. You will be able to do it.

When the navigation image is displayed in the normal mode or the emphasized mode, if the navigation image is started to be displayed in a situation where the power is not turned off, the display start action is accompanied by the normal mode or the emphasized mode. On the other hand, if the power is turned off and then the power is restored and the navigation image is displayed, the normal mode or the emphasized mode is displayed without the display start action (navigation image after the power is restored). Is displayed in the normal mode or the emphasized mode when it becomes visible), or even when the power is turned off and then the power is restored and the navigation image is started to be displayed. , The normal mode or the emphasized mode may be displayed with the display start action. It should be noted that this configuration may be applied to all configurations in the present specification.

<Navigation image display image Figure 2>
Next, FIG. 174 is a navigation image display image FIG. 2. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the left stop button D41 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop remains in the normal mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the first stop, the voice "middle" corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, only the first stop is performed, the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is hidden, and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the emphasized mode. In the situation where the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the 3 stop is displayed in the normal mode, the power supply is cut off in the figure (c), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (d), at a predetermined timing after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the normal mode. Will be done. Further, the navigation voice from the speaker S20 is configured not to be output. In this way, after the power is restored, the navigation image is newly started to be displayed. For example, when the power is cut off at the timing in the middle of the period displayed in the successful mode. However, after the power is restored, the display will start from the beginning of the period displayed in the successful mode. Similarly, in the case of displaying in the emphasized mode or the normal mode, the display starts from the beginning of the displayed period after the power is turned on. Even in the other configurations exemplified in this specification, when the navigation image is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be newly started from the beginning of the displayed period.

As described above, in FIG. 174, when the power is cut off after operating the correct stop button as the first stop and then the power is restored, the first stop is performed at a predetermined timing after the power is restored. The navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the success mode, and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, corresponding to the third stop. The navigation image displayed as "3" is displayed in a normal manner, and the navigation voice (voice of "middle") from the speaker S20 is not output. In addition, after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is displayed as "2" corresponding to the timing when the display is newly started in the successful mode and the second stop. It may or may not be at the same time as the timing at which the displayed navigation image is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. As an example of the case where the navigation images are not simultaneously displayed, the navigation image may be newly started to be displayed according to the order of the operated stop buttons. For example, in the case of FIG. 174, after the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, it is displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop. The navigation image may be configured to be newly displayed in the enhanced mode. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, the player can visually recognize the display order of the navigation images after the power is restored. It becomes possible to grasp the operation order of the stop buttons more accurately. The configuration relating to the display start timing of the navigation display after the power is restored can be applied to all the configurations in the present specification.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the navigation image is being displayed and then the power is turned off, the player can understand what kind of stop operation was performed before the power was turned off. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a push order error occurs in the subsequent stop operation.

Further, as described above, since the emphasis mode and the success mode are configured so that the navigation numerical image is larger and the navigation background image is larger than the normal mode, the operation of the start lever D50 is performed in FIG. 174. When the navigation image of "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40, the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop are the first. Than the navigation number image and navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to 2 stops and the navigation number image and navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop. It's getting bigger. In addition, when the correct left stop button D51 is operated as the first stop, the navigation number image and the navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop and the second stop are displayed. The navigation number image and navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the third stop are larger than the navigation number image and navigation background image of the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop. It has become. In addition, when the power is turned off after the correct left stop button D51 is operated as the first stop and then the power is restored, the navigation number of the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop. The navigation image and the navigation background image of the navigation image corresponding to the second stop and the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image of the navigation image corresponding to the second stop are displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop. It is larger than the navigation number image and navigation background image of.

With this configuration, even if the power is turned off during the push order navigation, the navigation image corresponding to the stop button that should be stopped and the stop button that was last stopped before the power was turned off. By displaying the navigation image corresponding to the above in a larger size than the other navigation images, the player can perform the stop operation without confusion.

In addition, in the figure, the case where both the navigation number image and the navigation background image are larger than the normal mode is illustrated as the emphasis mode and the success mode, but the case is not limited to this, and the navigation number image is not limited to this. And one of the navigation background image may be configured to be larger.

<Navigation image display image 3>
Next, FIG. 175 is a navigation image display image FIG. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the middle stop button D42 which does not correspond to the pressing order of the correct answer is operated, all the navigation images are displayed in the failure mode, and then all the navigation images are hidden. Further, since the stop button of the incorrect answer is operated as the first stop, the failure voice "what are you doing" is output from the speaker S20. In the figure, when the navigation image is displayed in the failure mode, the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image in the failure mode related to the navigation image displayed in the emphasis mode are relatively large (for example, the normal mode). The navigation number image and the navigation background image of the failure mode related to the navigation image displayed in the normal mode are configured to be relatively small, while the navigation number image and the navigation background image are configured to be larger than the navigation number image and the navigation background image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigation numerical image and the navigation background image of the failure mode related to the navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode, the navigation numerical image of the failure mode related to the navigation image displayed in the normal mode, and the navigation numerical image of the failure mode are displayed. The size may be the same as that of the navigation background image (the same can be applied to configurations related to other failure modes).

After that, under the situation that all the navigation images are hidden, the power supply is cut off in the figure (c), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (d), the power is restored, but the navigation image is not displayed. It should be noted that the failure sound from the speaker S20 is not output after the power is restored. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the failure voice is not output when the navigation image according to the figure (b) is displayed in the failure mode, while the failure is made from the speaker S20 after the power is restored according to the figure (d). It may be configured so that audio can be output.

With this configuration, if a power failure occurs in a situation where the pressing order is incorrect (a situation in which the stop operation for the stop button corresponding to the incorrect pressing order has already been performed) occurs, after the power is restored. By not displaying the navigation image, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a false expectation and misunderstanding that the profit differs depending on the pressing order after the power is restored.

Further, as described above in FIG. 174, when the power is cut off after the push order navigation is executed and the stop button corresponding to the correct push order is operated as the first stop, the first stop is performed after the power is restored. While the navigation image corresponding to the stop is displayed in the successful mode and the navigation image corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, the push order navigation is executed and the incorrect answer is given as the first stop. If the power is turned off after the stop button corresponding to the pressing order is operated, the navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the push order navigation, the display mode (display presence / absence) of the navigation image after the power is restored is appropriate according to the game situation before the power is turned off. Can be displayed in.

In the figure, the speaker S20 is configured not to output the failed sound after the power is restored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the speaker S20 can output the failed sound after the power is restored. It may be configured (it can be applied to other configurations as well).

<Navigation image display image Figure 4>
Next, FIG. 176 is a navigation image display image FIG. 4. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the middle stop button D42 which does not correspond to the pressing order of the correct answer is operated, all the navigation images are displayed in the failure mode, and then all the navigation images are hidden. Further, since the stop button of the incorrect answer is operated as the first stop, the failure voice "what are you doing" is output from the speaker S20.

After that, under the situation that all the navigation images are hidden, the power supply is cut off in the figure (c), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, at a predetermined timing after the power is restored in the figure (d), all the navigation images are newly started to be displayed in the failure mode. It should be noted that the failure sound from the speaker S20 is not output after the power is restored. In this way, after the power is restored, the navigation image is newly started to be displayed. For example, when the power is cut off at the timing in the middle of the period displayed in the failure mode. However, after the power is turned on, the display starts from the beginning of the period displayed in the failure mode. Even in the other configurations exemplified in this specification, when the navigation image is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be newly started from the beginning of the display period.

With this configuration, if a power failure occurs in a situation where the pressing order is incorrect (a situation in which the stop operation for the stop button corresponding to the incorrect pressing order has already been performed) occurs, after the power is restored. By displaying the navigation image again in the failure mode, it is possible to make the player recognize that the navigation image is not displayed due to a mistake in the pressing order, and the player cannot display the navigation image after the power is restored. However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the subsequent stop operation is confused.

Further, as described above in FIG. 174, when the power is cut off after the push order navigation is executed and the stop button corresponding to the correct push order is operated as the first stop, the first stop is performed after the power is restored. While the navigation image corresponding to the stop is displayed in the successful mode and the navigation image corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, the push order navigation is executed and the incorrect answer is given as the first stop. If the power is turned off after the stop button corresponding to the pressing order is operated, all the navigation images are displayed in the failure mode after the power is restored.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the push order navigation, the player can visually check the display mode of the navigation image after the power is restored, and the state of the game before the power is turned off. Can be grasped.

<Navigation image display image Figure 5>
Next, FIG. 177 is a navigation image display image FIG. 5. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the left stop button D41 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop remains in the normal mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the first stop, the voice "middle" corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (c), the middle stop button D42 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the third The navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the second stop, the voice "right" corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, the stop operation is performed until the second stop, the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is hidden, the navigation image corresponding to the second stop is hidden, and "3" corresponding to the third stop. In the situation where the navigation image displayed as is displayed in the emphasized mode, the power supply is cut off in the figure (d), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (e), at a predetermined timing after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the third The navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. The navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not displayed. Further, the navigation voice from the speaker S20 is configured not to be output.

As described above, in FIG. 177, when the power is cut off after operating the correct stop button as the second stop and then the power is restored, the second stop is performed at a predetermined timing after the power is restored. The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the above is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. , The navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not displayed, and the navigation voice (voice of "right") from the speaker S20 is not output.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the navigation image is being displayed and the power is restored, the situation of the navigation image immediately before the power off is reproduced, and the redisplayed navigation image is visually recognized. By doing so, the stop button to be stopped next can be recognized, and the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not redisplayed, so that the player is less likely to misidentify the stop button to be stopped next. It becomes easier to concentrate on stopping.

<Navigation image display image Figure 6>
Next, FIG. 178 is a navigation image display image FIG. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the left stop button D41 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop remains in the normal mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the first stop, the voice "middle" corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (c), the middle stop button D42 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the third The navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the second stop, the voice "right" corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, the stop operation is performed until the second stop, the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is hidden, the navigation image corresponding to the second stop is hidden, and "3" corresponding to the third stop. In the situation where the navigation image displayed as is displayed in the emphasized mode, the power supply is cut off in the figure (d), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (e), at a predetermined timing after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. Will be done. Further, the navigation voice from the speaker S20 is configured not to be output.

As described above, in FIG. 178, when the power is cut off after operating the correct stop button as the second stop and then the power is restored, the first stop is performed at a predetermined timing after the power is restored. The navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the above is newly started to be displayed in the success mode, and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is newly started to be displayed in the success mode. , The navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation voice (voice of "right") from the speaker S20 is not output. ing.

The navigation image after the power is restored may be configured as follows.
(1) The timing at which the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started in the successful mode and the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop are successful. The timing at which the display is newly started in the mode is substantially the same. (2) A predetermined time after the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode. Later, the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode.

With this configuration, even when the power is cut off and the power is restored after performing the stop operation until the second stop according to the correct pressing order while the navigation image is being displayed, the first stop and the first stop are performed. By displaying the navigation image corresponding to the two stops in the successful mode, the player can recognize that the stop operation was performed in the order of pressing the correct answer until the second stop before the power was turned off, and the player can then recognize that the stop operation was performed. It is difficult to misidentify the stop button that should be stopped, and it becomes easier to concentrate on the third stop.

<Navigation image display image 7>
Next, FIG. 179 is a navigation image display image FIG. 7. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (b), the left stop button D41 corresponding to the order of pressing the correct answer is operated, and the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop remains in the normal mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the first stop, the voice "middle" corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in the figure (c), the right stop button D43, which does not correspond to the correct pressing order, is operated, and all the displayed navigation images (navigation images displayed as "2" and "3" are displayed. The navigation image) is displayed in the failure mode, and then all the navigation images are hidden. Further, since the stop button of the incorrect answer is operated as the second stop, the failure voice "what are you doing" is output from the speaker S20.

After that, under the situation that all the navigation images are hidden, the power supply is cut off in the figure (d), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (e), at a predetermined timing after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the first stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the second The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is newly started to be displayed in the failure mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the failure mode. Will be done. Further, the navigation voice from the speaker S20 is configured not to be output.

As described above, in FIG. 179, when the power is cut off after operating the stop button which does not correspond to the correct pressing order as the second stop, and then the power is restored, the predetermined timing after the power is restored. In, the navigation image corresponding to the stop button that was stopped in the correct push order before the power cut occurred is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the stop operation is made in the incorrect push order before the power cut occurs. The navigation image corresponding to the stopped button and the navigation image corresponding to the stop button that has not been stopped will be newly started to be displayed in the failure mode.

With this configuration, while the navigation image is being displayed, the power is cut off after the stop operation is performed in the wrong push order in the second stop, and even if the power is restored, the correct push order is obtained. The navigation image corresponding to the stop button operated by stop operation is displayed in the successful mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the stop button operated to stop in the wrong pressing order and the navigation image corresponding to the stop button not operated to stop are displayed. By configuring to be displayed in the failure mode, it is possible to display the navigation image corresponding to all the stop buttons, and the player can grasp at what timing the push order was missed, and the game. Can understand the situation in more detail.

<Navigation image display image Figure 8>
Next, FIG. 180 is a navigation image display image FIG. The figure illustrates a case where a push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is executed in a game in which a push order bell (for example, winning-A1 shown in FIG. 10) is won. Although not shown, the push order navigation corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the push order display device D270.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and the navigation image corresponding to "left middle right" is displayed on the effect display device S40. To. The navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41, which is the first stop, is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42, which is the second stop, and the navigation corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the voice "left" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is output from the speaker S20.

After that, in FIG. 3B, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated as the first stop, and then the middle stop button D42 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated as the second stop, and the second stop is performed. The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the stop is displayed in the success mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is displayed in the emphasized mode. Further, since the correct stop button is operated as the second stop, the voice "right" corresponding to the right stop button D43, which is the third stop, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, the stop operation is performed until the second stop, the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is hidden, the navigation image corresponding to the second stop is hidden, and "3" corresponding to the third stop. In the situation where the navigation image displayed as is displayed in the emphasized mode, the power supply is cut off in the figure (c), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (d), at a predetermined timing after the power is restored, the navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the second stop is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the third The navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. The navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not displayed. Further, the navigation voice from the speaker S20 is configured not to be output.

As described above, in FIG. 180, when the power is cut off after operating the correct stop button as the second stop and then the power is restored, the second stop is performed at a predetermined timing after the power is restored. The navigation image displayed as "2" corresponding to the above is newly started to be displayed in the successful mode, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is newly started to be displayed in the emphasized mode. , The navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not displayed, and the navigation voice (voice of "right") from the speaker S20 is not output.

After that, in the figure (e), the navigation image of the successful mode corresponding to the second stop is hidden with the passage of time, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is displayed in the emphasized mode. Under the above circumstances, the right stop button D43 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated as the third stop, and the navigation image displayed as "3" corresponding to the third stop is displayed in the successful mode. In addition, a voice saying "success", which is a success voice, is output from the speaker S20.

After that, the stop operation is performed until the third stop, and in the situation where the navigation image is not displayed on the effect display device S40, the power is cut off again in the figure (f), and the effect display device S40 is hidden. Become. After that, in the figure (g), the power is restored, but the navigation image related to the game is not displayed after the power is restored. It should be noted that the success voice is not output from the speaker S20 after the power is restored.

With this configuration, while the navigation image is being displayed, even if the power is turned off after performing the stop operation until the second stop due to the correct pressing order, and the power is restored, the navigation immediately before the power is turned off. The situation of the image will be reproduced, and by visually recognizing the redisplayed navigation image, the stop button to be stopped next can be recognized, and the navigation image corresponding to the first stop is not redisplayed, so that the player Is less likely to misidentify the stop button to be stopped next, and is more likely to concentrate on the third stop. Furthermore, if the power is turned off after performing the stop operation until the third stop according to the correct push order and the power is restored, the navigation image is not displayed, so that the subsequent stop operation in the game is not necessary. It can be suggested to the player, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the case where the stop operation is required after the power is restored.

<Applicable configuration for push order navigation>
In the eighth embodiment, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed and the navigation image is displayed, the navigation voice is not output after the power is restored when the power is turned off, but this is limited to this. However, it may be configured so that the navigation voice can be output after the power is restored. For example, when the navigation image corresponding to the left stop button is displayed in the successful mode and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button is displayed in the emphasized mode after the power is restored, the speaker S20 says "middle". The navigation voice output from the speaker S20 immediately before the occurrence of the power failure, such as outputting the navigation voice, may be configured to be output again after the power is restored. This configuration can be applied to all configurations for displaying navigation images.

In addition, at the timing when the navigation voice is being output (for example, the timing when the navigation voice is outputting to the "left" with "left"), the power is cut off and the power off processing is executed. In this case, the navigation sound may not be output from the speaker S20 after the power is restored (it may not be output from the continuation before the power is turned off). It should be noted that this configuration may be applied to all configurations of the present specification.

Further, as the configuration related to (f), which is the timing at which the second power failure occurs in FIG. 180, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) When the timing of (f) in FIG. 180 is after the third stop operation and before the payout of the game medal related to the push order bell (for example, winning-A1) is started. The navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored. (2) The timing of (f) in FIG. 180 is after the third stop operation, and the game medal related to the push order bell (for example, winning-A1) is paid out. The navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored. (3) The timing of (f) in FIG. 180 is after the third stop operation, and the push order bell (for example, winning-A1). ), The navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored. (4) The timing of (f) in FIG. 180 is after the third stop operation, and the push order is reached. If the payout of the game medal related to the bell (for example, winning-A1) has not started, the navigation image may be displayed after the power is restored. There is no problem.

<Navigation image display image 9>
Next, FIG. 181 is a navigation image display image FIG. 9. In the figure, the case where the cherry, which is a rare role, is won is illustrated. Since the cherry in the eighth embodiment corresponds to, for example, winning-C in FIG. 10 and is not a pushing order combination such as a pushing order bell, the pushing order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270. Not done.

First, in the figure (a), the space stage is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the start lever D50 is operated, and "!!!" is emphasized as a navigation image corresponding to the rare role. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 (three "!" In the emphasized mode are displayed). The navigation image of "!!!" may be referred to as a chance navigation image.

In addition, the push order navigation is not executed in the game, and the chance navigation image is a display suggesting that the rare role has been won. Further, the navigation background image (background image of the enhanced mode) of the chance navigation image is the same as the enhanced mode (see FIG. 172) of the navigation image related to the above-mentioned push order combination (same size, same shape, same). Color). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the navigation background image in the enhancement mode of the chance navigation image and the navigation background image in the enhancement mode of the navigation image related to the push order may have the same shape but different sizes. , The colors may be different. Further, the navigation background image in the enhanced mode of the chance navigation image and the navigation background image in the normal mode of the navigation image related to the push order may be configured to be the same. The navigation image detailed in FIG. 172 may be referred to as a navigation image related to the push order.

After that, in FIG. 3B, the left stop button D41 is operated, the navigation image corresponding to the left stop button D41 is displayed in the successful mode, and the other navigation images remain in the emphasized mode. The navigation image displayed in the successful mode is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed. After that, under the situation where the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42 and the navigation image corresponding to the right stop button D43 are displayed in the emphasized mode, the power is cut off and the effect display device S40 is hidden. After that, in the figure (d), the power is restored, the navigation image corresponding to the left stop button is newly started to be displayed in a successful manner, and the navigation image corresponding to the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are supported. The navigation image is newly displayed in the enhanced mode.

In this way, in the game in which the rare role is won, the push order navigation is not executed, the chance navigation image is displayed, and the navigation background image is displayed in the same display mode as the navigation image when the push order navigation is executed. (The same display mode as the highlighting in FIG. 172) allows the game to proceed without discomfort during the AT, and the expectation can be maintained. In addition, even when the chance navigation image is displayed, if the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the situation of the navigation image immediately before the power is turned off is reproduced in the same way as the navigation when the push order navigation is executed described above. Therefore, the game can proceed without any discomfort.

In addition, when the cherry is used as a winning combination and the game medal is paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed (for example, 8 cards), the chance navigation image is displayed in the game in which the cherry is won, and the first 3 When the power is cut off after the stop operation for stopping is executed, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) If the power is cut off and the power off processing is executed after the third stop operation and before the payout of the game medal related to the cherry role is started, the power is turned off after the power is restored. The chance navigation image is not displayed (2) When the power is cut off and the power off processing is executed while the game medal related to the cherry role is being paid out after the third stop operation. Is not displayed in the chance navigation image after the power is restored. In that case, the chance navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored. (4) The power is cut off after the third stop operation and before the payout of the game medal related to the cherry role is started. When the power cutoff process is executed, the chance navigation image can be displayed as in FIG. 181 after the power is restored. It should be noted that there is no problem even if a plurality of the above (1) to (4) are applied.

In addition, in FIG. 181, the chance navigation image is configured to be hidden one by one for each stop operation (“success mode → non-display”), but the first stop is not limited to this. It may be configured so that all three are hidden at the time of operation (“success mode → hidden”), or not hidden at the first stop and the second stop, and 3 at the time of the third stop operation. All of them may be hidden (“success mode → hidden”). Further, in these configurations, the success mode may be hidden without being displayed.

Further, the chance navigation image may be configured as follows.
(1) All three of the chance navigation images are hidden during the first stop operation (“success mode → non-display”), the power is cut off at a predetermined timing after the first stop operation, and then the power is turned on. When it returns, all three chance navigation images are newly started to be displayed in the successful mode.
(2) All three of the chance navigation images are hidden during the first stop operation (“success mode → non-display”), the power is cut off at a predetermined timing after the first stop operation, and then the power is turned on. When it returns, the chance navigation image is not displayed.
(3) The chance navigation image is not hidden in the first stop and the second stop, but all three are hidden during the third stop operation (“success mode → non-display”), and the predetermined position after the third stop operation. If the power is cut off at the timing of, and then the power is restored, all three chance navigation images are newly started to be displayed in the successful mode.
(4) The chance navigation image is not hidden in the first stop and the second stop, but all three are hidden during the third stop operation (“success mode → non-display”), and the predetermined position after the third stop operation. If the power is cut off at the timing of, and then the power is restored, the chance navigation image is not displayed.
(5) As for the chance navigation image, the chance navigation image corresponding to the first stop is hidden (“success mode → non-display”) at the time of the first stop operation, and the chance navigation image corresponding to the second stop and the third stop are supported. The chance navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and when the power is cut off at a predetermined timing after the first stop operation and then the power is restored, the chance navigation image is not displayed.

While the chance navigation image is being displayed, the navigation voice based on the stop operation is not output from the speaker S20. Further, the success voice and the failure voice that can be output when the push order navigation is executed are not output from the speaker S20 while the chance navigation image is being displayed.

Further, in FIG. 181, the case where the cherry is won as the rare role is illustrated, but there is no problem even if the type of the rare role is changed, and when the rare role is the winning role, the rare role is won. You may change the number of game medals paid out.

Further, FIG. 181 illustrates a configuration in which the chance navigation image can be displayed again after the power is restored when the power is cut off while the chance navigation image is being displayed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the chance navigation image is not limited to this. If the power is cut off during the display of, the chance navigation image may not be displayed after the power is restored. In this configuration, the game in which the chance navigation is executed is not the game in which the push order navigation is executed, so that the player does not lose money due to the push order, so that the chance navigation image is being displayed. If the power is turned off, the chance navigation image is not displayed after the power is restored. On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the navigation image is displayed in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, the navigation image is displayed after the power is restored. By configuring it so that it can be displayed again, the navigation image will be displayed again after the power is restored only when there is a possibility that the player will lose, so the player will be more careful and the power will be turned off. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player loses due to the occurrence.

Moreover, the chance navigation image does not have a failure mode. Further, as described above, the winning combination cherry may be dropped (the case where the maximum number of payouts is not reached may be referred to as dropping), and as an example, the stop mode of the stop button may be used. Depending on the (pushing order and operation timing), there are cases where 8 cards are paid out (sometimes called high) and 0 cards are paid out (sometimes called cheap or missed). You may. The number of payouts is only an example, and the number of payouts of 8 may be 10 or the number of missed payouts may be 1. In this configuration, even if the cherry is won and the stop button is stopped in the stop timing or push order in which eight cards are not paid out in the game in which the chance navigation image is displayed on the effect display device S40. , Based on the stop operation, the success mode is displayed instead of the failure mode.

On the other hand, in a game in which a push order combination (for example, a push order bell) is won, push order navigation is executed, and a navigation image is displayed on the effect display device S40, a stop button that is an incorrect push order is operated. The navigation image will be displayed in the failure mode.

In this way, when the chance navigation image, which is a display suggesting that the role of rare has been won, is displayed, the failure mode is not displayed, but the push order display device D270 plays a role of supporting the push order navigation. When the navigation image related to the push order combination is displayed, the navigation image can be displayed in the display mode according to the content suggested by the effect display device S40 by configuring so that the failure mode can be displayed. The display frequency of the failure mode can be made appropriate.

In addition, the rare role may be used as a replaying role. For example, the cherry, which is a rare role, may be used as a replaying role, and even in such a configuration, the chance navigation image may be displayed on the effect display device S40 in the game in which the cherry is won. However, the above-mentioned configuration regarding the rare role may be applied.

Moreover, the chance navigation image does not have a normal aspect. In other words, the chance navigation images corresponding to the stop buttons that have not been stopped are all configured to be displayed in the same size (displayed in an emphasized mode).

<Other applicable configurations>
In the eighth embodiment, the configuration in which the 6-choice push-order navigation is executed when the push-order combination is won is illustrated, but the configuration in which the 3-choice push-order navigation is executed is also exemplified. The configuration detailed in the eighth embodiment may be applied. For example, when displaying the push order navigation image in which the left stop button D41 is the correct answer as the first stop, only the navigation image displayed as "1" corresponding to the left stop button D41 is displayed and the first stop is displayed. When the left stop button D41 is operated, the navigation image becomes a success mode, and when a stop button other than the left stop button is operated as the first stop, the navigation image becomes a failure mode.

Further, it may be configured so that the stop timing can be navigated instead of the push order navigation. For example, when the stop operation is performed at the stop timing in which the left reel M51 Nos. 0 to 6 are located at the lower stage (the first range). (Sometimes referred to as), and when the stop operation is performed at the stop timing when the 7th to 13th of the left reel M51 is located at the lower stage (sometimes referred to as the second range), the 14th to 19th of the left reel M51 When the stop operation is performed at the stop timing located in the lower stage (sometimes referred to as the third range), after the stop operation is performed in any of the ranges, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are set at arbitrary timings. It may be configured so that a higher stop can be displayed by performing a stop operation with. Further, white 7 is placed near the center of the first range, red 7 is placed near the center of the second range, a bar is placed near the center of the third range, and the effect display device S40 displays "white 7". It may be configured to display a navigation image such as "-", "red 7 ---", and "bar ---". Even in this configuration, the same configuration as the navigation image related to push order navigation can be applied, and as an example, the navigation images of "white 7", "red 7", and "bar" are also emphasized. It may be configured to have an aspect, a success mode, or a failure mode.

Further, the above-mentioned concept of push order and the concept of stop timing may be combined. For example, two stop ranges (for example, 0 to 9 and 10 to 10) are provided for each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. No. 19) is provided, and the correct answer is given in the order of pressing 6 choices, and in the first stop, the higher symbol combination is stopped and displayed by performing the stop operation within the stop range of the correct answer, so that 12 choice navigation can be executed. (Navigation images such as "white 7 2 3" and "2 red 7 3" are displayed). Even in this configuration, the same configuration as the navigation image related to the push order navigation described above can be applied, and the navigation image is configured to have a normal mode, an emphasis mode, a success mode, and a failure mode as the display mode. You may.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the configuration having three reels of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 has been described in detail, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration is configured to have four reels. May be good. Even in this configuration, the same configuration regarding the navigation image as in the eighth embodiment can be applied, and the navigation image is displayed so as to have a normal mode, an emphasis mode, a success mode, and a failure mode. May be good. As an example, it has a push order combination of 24 choices, which is the push order of the four reels, and may be displayed as a navigation image as "1234" on the effect display device S40.

Although the configurations related to various navigation images have been described in detail in the eighth embodiment, the configuration related to the navigation images in the eighth embodiment can be combined with the configurations of all the navigation images in the present specification. I will supplement it.

<Configuration related to RAM initialization processing>
The configuration of the RAM initialization process applicable to all the embodiments in the present specification will be described in detail below.

In the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present specification, the main control board M has a command transmission buffer for transmitting commands to the sub control board S side, and commands to be transmitted to the sub control board S side are transmitted. After being temporarily stored in the command transmission buffer, the command temporarily stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted to the sub-control board S side at the transmission timing.

<When the power is turned on>
If the power is cut off when the setting key switch is off (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off) and then the power is restored while the setting key switch is off, the RAM is initialized at the first timing. The process may be executed and the command transmission buffer may be initialized. Further, the contents of the RAM may be checked at the time of executing the RAM initialization process, and if there is an abnormality, a RAM error state may occur and the progress of the game may be stopped. If a RAM error occurs, the RAM error may be cleared by changing the setting.

<When changing settings>
When the power is cut off when the setting key switch is off (power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), and then the power is restored with the setting key switch on (not limited to this). If the setting change mode is set after the input), the configuration may be as follows.
(Structure 1) It is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, and if it is turned on, the setting change mode is set without executing the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power. (Executes the setting change device control process). After that, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode (one of the set values is confirmed), the RAM initialization process is executed, but the command transmission buffer is initialized in the RAM initialization process. The command is retained without. After that, even after the setting key switch is turned off and the setting change mode is completed, the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power is not executed. It is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, and if it is turned off, the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power described above is executed thereafter.
(Structure 2) It is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, and if it is turned on, the setting change mode is set without executing the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power. (Executes the setting change device control process). After that, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode (one of the set values is confirmed), the RAM initialization process is executed, but the command transmission buffer is initialized in the RAM initialization process. The command is retained without. After that, after the setting key switch is turned off and the setting change mode is completed, the RAM initialization process at power-on described above is executed, and the command transmission buffer is initialized. It is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, and even if the setting key switch is turned off, the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power is executed thereafter.
(Structure 3) After the power is turned on, the RAM initialization process after the power is turned on is executed, and the command transmission buffer is initialized. After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on, and if it is turned on, the setting change mode is set (execute the setting change device control process). After that, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode (one of the set values is confirmed), the RAM initialization process is executed, but the command transmission buffer is not initialized in the RAM initialization process. ..
(Structure 4) It is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on after the power is turned on, and if it is turned on, the RAM initialization process after the power is turned on is executed, and the command transmission buffer is set. It is initialized. After that, the setting change mode is set (the setting change device control process is executed). After that, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode (one of the set values is confirmed), the RAM initialization process is executed, but the command transmission buffer is not initialized in the RAM initialization process. ..

In the case of the configurations 1 and 2, when the setting change mode is set after the power is turned on, the command transmission buffer is not initialized from before the power failure occurs until the end of the setting change mode. Therefore, commands related to the setting change mode can be sent to the sub-control board S side without being initialized, so that the display related to the setting change mode can be executed without any problem on the sub-control board S side. can.

In the case of the configurations 3 and 4, when the setting change mode is set after the power is turned on, the RAM when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode (one of the setting values is confirmed). In the initialization process, the command transmission buffer is configured so that it is not initialized, and there are two command transmission buffers in the RAM initialization process when the power is turned on and the RAM initialization process when the settings are changed. It is possible to prevent it from being heavily initialized, and it is possible to design a game machine without providing unnecessary processing.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
Production control means and
Equipped with a production display device,
The effect control means can display at least the effect display on the effect display device.
It has at least a predetermined area as a display area in the effect display device.
In a situation where predetermined information is displayed in a predetermined area, specific information can be displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the specific information is displayed in the situation where the predetermined information is displayed in the predetermined area, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information in the predetermined area is not blocked by the display of the specific information.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
The operating member has a lamp,
In the predetermined effect, the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display unit in the operation promotion display mode that suggests that the player can operate the operation member, and it is suggested that the player can operate the operation member. It is configured to make the lamp of the operation member emit light in the operation promotion light emission mode.
The operation promotion image is an image that imitates an operation member, and is an image.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation-promoting display mode and the operation-promoting light emitting mode are different from each other.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
In a predetermined effect, the operation promotion image is configured to be displayed on the effect display unit in an operation promotion display mode that suggests that the player can operate the operation member.
The operation promotion image is an image that imitates an operation member, and is an image.
The operation promotion display mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it imitates an operation in which an operation member is operated in an operation promotion image.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
In a predetermined effect, the effect display unit is configured to display an operation promotion image suggesting that the player can operate the operation member.
The operation promotion image is an image that imitates an operation member, and is an image.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the visibility of a predetermined effect is reduced while the operation promotion image is being displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
In a predetermined effect, the effect display unit is configured to display an operation promotion image suggesting that the player can operate the operation member.
The operation promotion image is an image that imitates an operation member, and is an image.
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the operation member is operated, the operation promotion image displayed on the effect display unit is erased.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
An image display displayed on the effect display unit due to the operation of the operation member while the operation promotion image suggesting that the player can operate the operation member is displayed on the effect display unit, and the player It is configured so that the image display displayed on the effect display unit is different from the image display displayed on the effect display unit due to the operation of the operation member when the operation promotion image suggesting that the operation member can be operated is not displayed on the effect display unit. ,
The operation promotion image is a gaming machine characterized by being an image imitating an operation member.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with an operation member that can be operated by the player
The operating member has a lamp,
In a predetermined effect, the operation promotion image is configured to be displayed on the effect display unit in an operation promotion display mode that suggests that the player can operate the operation member.
The operation promotion image is an image that imitates an operation member, and is an image.
When the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display unit, the lamp of the operation member is configured to emit light in an operation promotion light emission mode that suggests that the player can operate the operation member.
Even when the operation promotion image is not displayed on the effect display unit, the lamp of the operation member is configured to emit light in an operation promotion light emission mode that suggests that the player can operate the operation member.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the operation promotion light emitting mode is different between the case where the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display unit and the case where the operation promotion image is not displayed on the effect display unit. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
Equipped with a production display unit that can display the production
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
A continuous image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a speaker that outputs sound
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
During the execution of the continuous effect, the output of the continuous effect BGM is performed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the output of the continuous effect BGM is continued while the continuous image is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a speaker that outputs sound
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
During the execution of the continuous effect, the output of the continuous effect BGM is performed.
While the continuous image is being displayed, the output of the continuous production BGM is continued,
When the continuous effect result display indicating the result of the continuous effect is displayed on the effect display unit, the gaming machine is characterized in that the output of the continuous effect BGM is stopped.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
It is possible to display the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, which are the effects executed over a plurality of games.
During the execution of the first continuous effect, it is possible to display the first continuous image suggesting that the first continuous effect can also be executed in the next game.
During the execution of the second continuous effect, it is possible to display a second continuous image suggesting that the second continuous effect can also be executed in the next game.
While the first continuation image and the second continuation image are the same,
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the first continuous effect result display showing the result of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect result display showing the result of the second continuous effect are different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
It is possible to display the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, which are the effects executed over a plurality of games.
During the execution of the first continuous effect, it is possible to display the first continuous image suggesting that the first continuous effect can also be executed in the next game.
During the execution of the second continuous effect, it is possible to display a second continuous image suggesting that the second continuous effect can also be executed in the next game.
The maximum number of times that the first continuous image is displayed in the first continuous effect is larger than the maximum number of times that the second continuous image is displayed in the second continuous effect.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that when the first continuous effect is executed, the result display is more advantageous to the player than when the second continuous effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
The game progress display that displays the progress of the game and the game progress display
Continuous production, which is a production that is executed over multiple games,
It is possible to display an image displayed during the execution of the continuous effect, which is a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game.
This is a gaming machine characterized in that when the game progress status display and the continuation image are displayed at the same timing on the effect display unit, the game progress status display is displayed with priority over the continuation image.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game and a telop display to be displayed along with the progress of the continuous effect.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the continuous image and the telop display are configured so as not to overlap when the continuous image and the telop display are displayed on the effect display unit at the same timing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game and a telop display to be displayed along with the progress of the continuous effect.
When the continuous image and the telop display are displayed at the same timing on the effect display unit, the continuous image changes or the effect displayed together with the continuous image changes, but the telop display does not change. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with
In the production display section
It is possible to display a continuous effect that is an effect that is executed over multiple games.
During the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to display a continuous image suggesting that the continuous effect can be executed in the next game and a telop display to be displayed along with the progress of the continuous effect.
After the telop display is displayed, the continuation image is displayed,
The telop display remains displayed when the continuation image is displayed,
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the continuous image and the telop display are configured so as not to be invisible even after a specific period elapses from a predetermined timing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
It has a normal section and an advantageous section,
The advantageous section has a first state and a second state in which the ball output rate is lower than that of the first state.
In the second state, it is possible to give a predetermined point,
In the second state, when the given predetermined points are equal to or more than the predetermined value, it is configured to be able to shift to the first state.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the second state can be continued even if the given predetermined points reach a predetermined value in the second state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
Equipped with a notification means to execute notification regarding the game,
It is possible to execute a point award lottery to award points,
The notification means is configured to be able to notify the point grant information regarding the point grant in a predetermined game.
The point award information is configured to be determinable at a predetermined timing in a game prior to the predetermined game.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that the point giving information determined at a predetermined timing can be notified at a specific timing prior to the predetermined game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The reel control means can shift to a special game state based on the acceptance of a stop operation by the player's first operation mode for a plurality of stop switches in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. It is configured so that special symbol combinations can be stopped.
The reel control means stops the special symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. It is configured so that it is possible to stop a predetermined combination of symbols with less than the specified number of payouts.
The notifying means is configured to be able to notify the second operation mode in a game in which a specific result is determined.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to give a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player based on the player performing the second operation mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
As a gaming state, it has an advantageous state in which it is possible to execute an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
In a specific game in which a specific result is determined by an internal lottery, the reel control means first receives an operation on the stop switch in the first operation mode among a plurality of operation modes on the plurality of stop switches. The symbol combination is configured to stop, and when the operation for the stop switch is accepted in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes for the plurality of stop switches, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop.
The notification means is configured to be able to notify the first operation mode in a specific game.
It is configured so that it is possible to determine a candidate for the content regarding the transition to an advantageous state corresponding to each of a plurality of operation modes at a predetermined timing prior to a specific game.
Candidates for the transition to an advantageous state corresponding to a plurality of operation modes at any specific timing from after a predetermined timing to before the first operation to the stop switch in a specific game is accepted. It is configured to be notified and can be notified.
In a specific game, among the candidates for the content related to the transition to the advantageous state corresponding to the plurality of operation modes, when the operation for the stop switch is accepted in the first operation mode notified by the notification means, the first operation mode is used. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to determine the candidate of the content regarding the transition to the advantageous state according to the content as the content regarding the transition to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
It has a normal section and an advantageous section,
In the game of the normal section, it is impossible to execute the instructional game in which the operation mode can be instructed.
In the game of the advantageous section, it is possible to execute an instruction game in which the operation mode can be instructed.
It is configured to be able to store predetermined information about the game at a specific timing after the transition to the advantageous section is decided.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the content regarding an advantageous state including an instruction game can be determined based on a predetermined information regarding a stored game at a predetermined timing after storing a predetermined information. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
A notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Equipped with
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The notifying means is characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, an operation mode in which the first symbol combination can be stopped and an operation mode in which the second symbol combination can be stopped can be notified. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the second symbol combination may not be stopped even when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the second symbol combination may not be stopped even when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
A notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
With an advantageous section,
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The notifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that, under a predetermined situation in an advantageous section, even in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch is not executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
Equipped with a production display device,
The game section has an advantageous section for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section for not notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means is configured so that when a plurality of reels are stopped in a predetermined operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
It is possible to display the operation mode of the stop switch on the effect display device.
It is configured so that the privilege related to the notification state can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped in a situation where it is an advantageous section and is not in the notification state. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B6) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Benefit granting means to grant benefits and
A notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Equipped with
The game section has an advantageous section that may notify the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section that does not notify the notification mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, the first value is given when the first symbol combination is stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, when the second set symbol matching is stopped, a second value larger than the first value is given. Has been
The privilege giving means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to give a privilege related to a notification state on condition that the given value reaches a predetermined value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B7) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means can stop the first symbol combination based on the fact that the stop operation by the player's first operation mode for the plurality of stop switches is accepted in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
The reel control means can stop the second symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is a predetermined set value and is not in a notification state, a game is played by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the first operation mode, and in other games, a game is played by a predetermined game method. The payout rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the game method 1 is the predetermined set value, and in the game in which the specific combination is determined in a situation where the notification state is not present, the stop operation according to the second operation mode is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the payout rate is smaller than the ball ejection rate when the game is played by the game method in which the game is played and the game is played by the predetermined game method in the second game method. Is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B8) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means to control the reel and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has multiple set values that affect the profit margin given to the player,
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The reel control means can stop the first symbol combination based on the fact that the stop operation by the player's first operation mode for the plurality of stop switches is accepted in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
The reel control means can stop the second symbol combination based on the acceptance of the stop operation by the player's second operation mode for the plurality of stop switches in the game in which the specific combination is determined. It is composed and
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is the first set value among a plurality of set values and is not in the notification state, the game is played by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the first operation mode, and in other games, a predetermined game is performed. Playing a game by the game method The first is the ball output rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the first game method, and the second set value among a plurality of set values, which is not a notification state. The difference from the ball output rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the game method is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a situation where it is the first set value among a plurality of set values and is not in the notification state, the game is played by a game method in which a stop operation is performed according to the second operation mode, and in other games, the above-mentioned predetermined combination is performed. Playing a game by the game method The second setting value is the second set value among a plurality of set values and the ball ejection rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the second game method. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is smaller than the difference from the payout rate when the game is played a predetermined number of times by the gaming method.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B9) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, it is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a lottery related to a notification state and a production command related to the lottery result after the symbol determination process and before the payout process. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B10) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The game section has an advantageous section that may notify the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section that does not notify the notification mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
It has multiple set values that affect the profit margin given to the player,
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, the notification mode is related to the case where the first symbol combination is stopped rather than the case where the second symbol combination is stopped. It is configured to be able to grant benefits,
The winning probability of a specific combination is a gaming machine characterized in that the second set value is higher than the first set value among a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B11) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with
As the internal lottery means, either the first symbol combination, the second symbol combination with payout of more game media than the first symbol combination, or the third symbol combination without payout of the game medium can be stopped. It is structured so that the role can be determined,
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be configured to give a player an advantageous privilege based on the fact that the third symbol combination is stopped.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B12) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a first specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a second specific combination in which either the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the third symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Is configured in
In the game in which the second specific combination is determined, the second privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the third symbol combination is stopped than when the fourth symbol combination is stopped. Is configured in
It is configured so that the decision probability of the second specific combination is higher than the decision probability of the first specific combination.
The second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit,
It is configured so that the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the second specific role is determined is larger than the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the first specific role is determined. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B13) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a first specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a second specific combination in which either the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the third symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player can be attached when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Is configured in
In the game in which the second specific combination is determined, the second privilege that is advantageous to the player can be given when the third symbol combination is stopped than when the fourth symbol combination is stopped. Is configured in
It is configured so that the decision probability of the second specific combination is higher than the decision probability of the first specific combination.
The second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit,
It is configured so that the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the second specific role is determined is larger than the expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the game in which the first specific role is determined.
In a game in which the first specific combination is determined under a specific situation, the operation mode of the stop switch in which the second symbol combination can be stopped can be notified.
In a game in which a second specific combination is determined under a specific situation, the gaming machine is characterized in that the third symbol combination is configured to be able to notify the operation mode of a stop switch capable of stopping. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B14) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control board to control the production
The internal lottery means is configured so that the first specific combination and the second specific combination can be determined.
The first specific combination has a plurality of symbol combinations in which the payout expectation of the game medium and the expectation of the privilege grant are different from each other according to the operation mode for the stop switch.
The second specific combination has a plurality of symbol combinations in which the payout expectation of the game medium and the expectation of the privilege grant are different from each other according to the operation mode for the stop switch.
The main control board is configured to be able to transmit effect group information to the sub control board.
The effect group information corresponding to the first specific combination has a predetermined value, and the effect group information corresponding to the second specific combination has the predetermined value.
In the game in which the result corresponding to the predetermined value is determined as the effect group information by the internal lottery means, there are cases where the game is played in a predetermined operation mode for the stop switch and cases where the game is played in a specific operation mode for the stop switch. , It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the advantages of the players are the same.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B15) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
It is equipped with a notification means that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The game section has an advantageous section for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch and a normal section for not notifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the advantageous section, it has a notification state that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch.
The internal lottery means is configured to be able to determine a specific combination in which either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and not in a notification state, an operation mode of a stop switch capable of stopping the first symbol combination and an operation mode of a stop switch capable of stopping the second symbol combination. Is configured to be able to notify
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in an advantageous section and in a notification state, the game is characterized in that the operation mode of the stop switch capable of stopping the second symbol combination can be notified. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that it is possible to determine a specific combination in which any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can be stopped and a predetermined combination in which any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the second symbol combination can be stopped. Ori,
The reel control means is
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined combination in the second game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode, the second symbol combination is configured to stop.
In the game in which the predetermined combination in the first game state is determined, the second symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the specific operation mode.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in the first game state, it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege when the second symbol combination is stopped in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is
With multiple reels
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in a predetermined gaming state, it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege.
In a game in which a specific combination in a predetermined game state is determined, it is possible to execute a specific effect at a predetermined timing from the reception of the operation of the start switch related to the game to the reception of the operation of the first stop switch. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Benefit granting means to grant predetermined benefits and
It is equipped with a notification means for notifying the operation mode of a plurality of stop switches.
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in the first game state, it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege.
When the notification of the operation mode is executed by the notification means in the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the operation mode in which the first symbol combination does not stop is notified.
When the notification of the operation mode is executed by the notification means in the game in which the specific combination in the third game state is determined, the operation mode in which the first symbol combination does not stop is notified.
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the notification of the operation mode by the notification means is executed, and in the game in which the specific combination in the third game state is determined, the operation mode by the notification means is executed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the mode of notification of the operation mode by the notification means is different from the case where the notification is executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode.
The means of granting benefits is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege when the first symbol combination is stopped in the first gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Benefit granting means to grant predetermined benefits and
It is equipped with a notification means for notifying the operation mode of a plurality of stop switches.
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in the first game state, it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege.
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, the notification of the operation mode by the notification means is executed, and in the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the operation mode by the notification means is executed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the mode of notification of the operation mode by the notification means is different from the case where the notification is executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C6) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a game with a first specified number, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a game with a second specified number, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop. The granting means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege when the first symbol combination is stopped in the first predetermined number of games.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C7) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in the first game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is stopped and a predetermined privilege can be given. Ori,
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode.
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is stopped and the predetermined privilege is not given. Ori,
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the specific operation mode.
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, if the first symbol combination is stopped, a predetermined privilege can be given.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a specific combination in the first gaming state is determined, if the first symbol combination is not stopped, a predetermined privilege is not given.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C8) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Equipped with reel control means,
The gaming state has a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that it is possible to determine a specific combination that can stop either the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination that involves paying out more game media than the first symbol combination.
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode, the second symbol combination can be stopped.
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, the expected value regarding the granting of the game value is higher when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Ori,
In the game in which the specific combination in the second game state is determined, the expected value regarding the granting of the game value is lower when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. Ori,
In the game in which the specific combination in the third game state is determined, the expected value regarding the granting of the game value is lower when the first symbol combination is stopped than when the second symbol combination is stopped. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C9) is
With multiple reels
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
It has a normal section and an advantageous section as the section where the game is performed.
The internal lottery means
It is configured so that it is possible to determine a specific combination in which any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can be stopped and a predetermined combination in which the first symbol combination does not stop.
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode.
The means of granting benefits is
It is configured so that a predetermined privilege can be given when the first symbol combination is stopped in an advantageous section and in a predetermined gaming state.
It is configured to be an advantageous section after a game that is a normal section and in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state is executed.
When a game in which a specific combination is determined in a normal section and a predetermined gaming state is executed and becomes an advantageous section, a game in which a predetermined combination is determined in a normal section and a predetermined gaming state is executed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is relatively advantageous as compared with the case where it becomes an advantageous section.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C10) is
With multiple reels
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant a predetermined privilege,
As a gaming state, it has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The internal lottery means
In the first game state, any of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination can be configured to determine a specific combination that can be stopped.
In the second game state, it is configured so that a predetermined combination can be determined.
The reel control means is
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In the game in which the specific combination in the first game state is determined, the first symbol combination is configured not to stop when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a specific operation mode.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in the first game state, it is configured to be able to grant a predetermined privilege.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the symbol combination constituting the predetermined combination includes the first symbol combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C11) is
With multiple reels
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means and
Reel control means and
Benefit granting means to grant benefits and
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-control board that controls the production
The internal lottery means
One of the specific combination in which any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination and the third symbol combination can be stopped, and one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations including the second symbol combination and the third symbol combination can be stopped. It is configured so that it can be decided as a predetermined role,
The reel control means is
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination is configured to stop.
In a game in which a specific combination is determined in a predetermined game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the second operation mode, the third symbol combination is configured to stop.
In a game in which a predetermined combination is determined in a predetermined game state, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in the first operation mode, the second symbol combination is configured to stop.
The means of granting benefits is
When the first symbol combination is stopped in a predetermined gaming state, the first privilege can be granted.
If the second symbol combination is stopped in a predetermined gaming state, the second privilege can be granted.
If the third symbol combination is stopped in a predetermined gaming state, the third privilege can be granted.
The first benefit has a higher advantage than the third benefit,
The second privilege is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage is lower than that of the third privilege.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is
With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
With a speaker that can output sound,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound regarding the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be output from the speaker. ,
It is a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed from the speaker. In the game in which is output, when the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the information display means may display information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, while the speaker relates to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a predetermined sound is not output.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode, an emphasized mode, and a successful mode.
The emphasis mode is a display mode larger than the normal mode, and is a display mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the power is cut off after the stop switch is operated, and then the power is restored, the first stop operation information is displayed in the successful mode, and the second stop operation information is displayed in the highlighted mode. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
The stop operation information has at least a numerical image and a background image, and has at least a numerical image and a background image.
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the numerical image of the first stop operation information is the third stop operation. It is displayed larger than the numerical image of the information, and then, at a predetermined timing after the stop switch corresponding to the first operation mode is operated as the first stop operation, the numerical image of the first stop operation information is displayed. It is displayed larger than the numerical image of the third stop operation information, the numerical image of the second stop operation information is displayed larger than the numerical image of the third stop operation information, and then the power is cut off and the power is restored. At a specific timing after this, the numerical image of the first stop operation information is displayed larger than the numerical image of the third stop operation information, and the numerical image of the second stop operation information is the numerical image of the third stop operation information. It is a game machine characterized by being displayed larger than.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode, an emphasized mode, and a successful mode.
The emphasis mode is a display mode larger than the normal mode, and is a display mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the power is cut off after the stop switch is operated, and then the power is restored, the first stop operation information is displayed in the successful mode, and the second stop operation information is displayed in the highlighted mode. Ori,
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that the power is cut off after the stop switch is operated, and after the power is restored, the information display means is configured so that the plurality of stop operation information is not displayed. be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode, an emphasis mode, a success mode, and a failure mode.
The emphasis mode is a display mode larger than the normal mode, and is a display mode.
The success mode and the failure mode are display modes that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the power is cut off after the stop switch is operated, and then the power is restored, the first stop operation information is displayed in the successful mode, and the second stop operation information is displayed in the highlighted mode. Ori,
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the power is turned off after the stop switch that has not been operated is operated, and then the power is restored, the first stop operation information, the second stop operation information, and the third stop operation information are displayed in a failure mode. It is a gaming machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode and a successful mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the stop switch is operated and the stop switch corresponding to the first operation mode is operated as the second stop operation, the power is cut off, and then the power is restored, the second stop operation information is the success mode. However, it is a gaming machine characterized in that the first stop operation information is configured not to be displayed in a successful manner.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode and a successful mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the stop switch is operated and the stop switch corresponding to the first operation mode is operated as the second stop operation, the power is cut off, and then the power is restored, the first stop operation information is the success mode. It is a gaming machine characterized by being displayed in and configured so that the second stop operation information is displayed in a successful manner.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode, a success mode, and a failure mode.
The success mode and the failure mode are display modes that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the stop switch is operated and the stop switch that does not correspond to the first operation mode is operated as the second stop operation, the power is cut off, and after the power is restored, the first stop operation information is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displayed in a success mode, the second stop operation information is displayed in a failure mode, and the third stop operation information is displayed in a failure mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode.
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of stop operation information can be displayed on the information display means as information regarding the first operation mode.
As the stop operation information, the first stop operation information which is the information about the first stop operation, the second stop operation information which is the information about the second stop operation, and the third stop operation information which is the information about the third stop operation can be displayed. And
As the display mode of the stop operation information, it has at least a normal mode, an emphasized mode, and a successful mode.
The emphasis mode is a display mode larger than the normal mode, and is a display mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, and the plurality of stop operation information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop operation corresponds to the first operation mode. After the stop switch is operated and the stop switch corresponding to the first operation mode is operated as the second stop operation, the power is cut off, and then the power is restored, the second stop operation information is the success mode. Is displayed, the third stop operation information is displayed in the highlighted mode, and then the stop switch corresponding to the first operation mode is operated as the third stop operation, then the power is cut off, and then the power is restored. After that, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first stop operation information is not displayed in the success mode, the second stop operation information is not displayed in the success mode, and the third stop operation information is not displayed in the success mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D10) is
With the start switch,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a plurality of specific information can be displayed on the information display means.
As specific information, specific information corresponding to the first stop switch, specific information corresponding to the second stop switch, and specific information corresponding to the third stop switch can be displayed.
As the display mode of the specific information, it has at least a normal mode and a successful mode.
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch.
In a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, and the plurality of specific information is displayed on the information display means, the first stop switch is operated as the first stop operation. After that, after the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the gaming machine is configured so that the specific information corresponding to the first stop switch is displayed in a successful manner.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D11) is
Equipped with a production display unit that can display the production
It is possible to execute one of the production stages from multiple production stages,
It is possible to switch the running production stage to a different production stage,
When switching the production stage, it is possible to execute the switching effect,
A game information image, which is an image related to a game, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The game information image can be displayed on multiple production stages,
When the switching effect is executed in the game started to be executed in the situation where the game information image is displayed on the effect display unit, the period during which the game information image becomes invisible during the execution period of the switching effect. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured to have.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D12) is
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches,
With the start switch,
Equipped with a production display unit that can display the production
It is possible to execute one of the production stages from multiple production stages,
It is possible to switch the running production stage to a different production stage,
When switching the production stage, it is possible to execute the switching effect,
A game information image, which is an image related to a game, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The game information image can be displayed on multiple production stages,
When the switching effect is executed in the game started to be executed in the situation where the game information image is displayed on the effect display unit, the period during which the game information image becomes invisible during the execution period of the switching effect. Is configured to have
When the switching effect is executed in the game in which the game information image is displayed on the effect display unit and the start switch operation is accepted and executed under a predetermined situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the switching effect is configured to end before the operation of a plurality of stop switches becomes effective.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D13) is
Equipped with a speaker that can output sound
It is possible to execute one of the production stages from multiple production stages,
It is possible to switch the running production stage to a different production stage,
When switching the production stage, it is possible to execute the switching effect,
During the execution of the production stage, the sound corresponding to the running production stage can be output from the speaker.
During the execution of the switching effect, the sound corresponding to the switching effect can be output from the speaker.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the average volume of the sound corresponding to the switching effect is configured to be higher than the average volume of the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect stage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D14) is
Equipped with a speaker that can output sound
In a predetermined error state, a predetermined error sound can be output from the speaker.
A given error sound includes at least a first sound and a second sound.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the average volume of the first sound is configured to be higher than the average volume of the second sound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D15) is
Equipped with a speaker that can output sound
By satisfying certain conditions, it is possible to control the notification state,
In the notification state, the sound corresponding to the notification state can be output from the speaker.
In a predetermined error state, a predetermined error sound can be output from the speaker.
A given error sound includes at least a first sound and a second sound.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the average volume of sounds corresponding to the notification state is configured to be higher than the average volume of the first sound.

P-turning machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s 1st input sensor, D30s 2nd input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Medium stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch (Open / close detection device)
D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit count display device, D210 insert count indicator lamp D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member (prescribed communication passage)
D341 Medal inlet D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game Minimum interval timer S Sub control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 turn cylinder backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device (game medium payout device), H10s first payout Sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a disk rotation axis H60 game medal exit, H70 emission urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K cylinder board, K10 cylinder motor K20 cylinder sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high securing failure counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining game counter HS medal auxiliary tank MW reel frame, MO reel band M main control board CPUMC microprocessor, SH performance display device SH10 identification segment, SH20 ratio seg M90 setting display LED
SR1 1st predetermined area, SR2 2nd predetermined area, SR3 3rd predetermined area CT character display (effect display), SF dialogue display (effect display)

Claims (1)

With the start switch,
With multiple stop switches,
Information display means that can display information,
With a speaker that can output sound,
Equipped with internal lottery means,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound regarding the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be output from the speaker. ,
It is a game in which the start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the information display means, and a predetermined sound on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed from the speaker. In the game in which is output, when the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the information display means may display information on the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, while the speaker relates to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a predetermined sound is not output.

Images